Instruction of The Hypno Dom
A Master/slave Lifestyle Development Training on
Erotic and Authoritarian Hypnosis
COPYRIGHT 2019, Joseph W Crown
Publisher: Mind Control Publishing, in conjunction with Crown Publications
Holding this book in your hands, I invite you to move your fingers across its
cover. It’s hard not to feel that there’s energy here. This container represents a
stepping stone in life and a choice point to move forward. In reading this book
you can move across time and distance towards an opportunity that allows us to
understand each other's lives. Engaging with this work connects us through each
pause, in each breathe that read these words aloud, and you will hear my voice
clearly, but silently inside your mind. Within these pages binds together
communication for people who have never met, and yet within these attachments
is the message needed to be heard to change minds and the world. Perfection is
simply unattainable in life. The essence of being human is that one does not
thrive within perfection. Celebrate all that makes you, you.
http://MindControPublishing.com
http://www.taoofthecrown.com/
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form without express
written permission from Joseph W Crown, or Crown Publications. Exceptions granted for
academic reports, reviews, and small quotations.
ISBN 9781097967216
1
Disclaimer
All interviews used in this book have been approved by the speaker(s) and all the
identifiable characteristics have been changed to protect the identity of the interviewee.
This anonymization is to protect sources and all guilty parties that partook in this book.
The events in this book are actual events; personal stories, teaching, interview data, and
research. This work is a detailed account of an individual’s life work and interests. The
material presented here is for adults acting within a consensual community culture, and it
allows the reader to get a comprehensive understanding of the circumstances of the
individual(s) presented their world view, and the experiences shared within this
subculture. The author and the publisher release this information for the purpose of
personal education and entertainment only. We encourage you not to try this at home.
Not even with an Ouija board, some elves, and plenty of lube on a Saturday night. This
material is released as influence driven enlightenment and satirical self-help.
The author and publisher accept no liability for the content of this book, or for the
consequences of any actions you’ve taken on the basis of the information provided. You
are notified that disclosing, copying, distributing or taking any action in reliance on the
contents of this information is strictly prohibited. What you are about to read is the real
life accounts of individuals operating and expressing themselves beyond the cusp of what
some people consider status quo or plain ole vanilla. The accounts portrayed here are as
true to life as possible. Keep in mind that details may be changed, jokes updates, names
removed, and geographic locations blurred, but beyond these anonymized details what
you have here is everyday life and our areas of interest for one of us. You will discover
that the work here stands on its own.
By proceeding further than this statement, you agree not to hold the author, publisher, or
anyone else responsible for anything you do, read, write, or think from reading this book.
The publisher believes you should be of legal age to read this book. In the USA that age
is 18 years old. The information contained within this book is an extremely influential
system designed to manipulate human behavior so you do not need to rely on psychic
powers or supernatural forces alone to design your life and reality. It is not dumbed down
or censored to appeal to the censors. The information presented is often satirical, biased,
and can be frequently misogynistic for some. This is the trigger warning for those that
need it. If you read this book you may never look at the world in the same way again. For
instance, you may have noticed I left a clear opening to include bestowal of powers and
obligations granted out of wisdom by the Enshrouded. Half kidding jests about taking
over the world will be expounded on in this work, and invitations to respectful submit
oneself for service entertained.
2
This an educational manual and sexual resource for kink friendly adults only.
Furthermore, if you are offended by informative experiences concerning yearned after
fantasies, rough sex between loving and consenting adults, consensual nonconsent, and
can’t get motivated to get out of the rat race this is not the book for you. Just PUT THIS
BOOK DOWN, and don’t come back. There’s nothing for you here. The opinions
expressed in this work do not necessarily reflect the beliefs, thoughts, or views of society
as a whole, a familiar community you are part of, and the author or the publisher. This
book is encouraging the reader to think for themselves and be good to each other. Not
everyone has access to materials of this quality, nor the privilege to learn that influence
attempts and thought directing propaganda is going on around them in many forms.
Learning this material will begin to have you identifying those influential
communications and engaging with it as such.
Deliberation and consideration have been used in deciding what to edit and what to leave
in place as the expressed representation of an individual’s voice. This book is the product
of love, documentation, and systematic satire that not everyone will laugh at. It should
not be used by anyone, under any circumstances. This is privileged information meant for
Hypno Doms, and advanced Mind Controllers only. Anyone else may be laughed at as
fingers are pointed and drama ensues. This book informs the masses that we walk among
you, and we laugh because most people are so apathetic, they do not care.
You should not attempt anything described or suggested in this book unless you are
willing to take complete responsibility; legally, morally, ethically, sexually, for yourself
and with regard to the safety of others. Think before you act. Most people have no idea
what it means to be the center of someone’s world. Suddenly they have multiple
individuals needing attention and direction. Trance and kink responsibly. Practicing this
art, you will often come to represent renewed meaning, purpose, challenge, and
adventure. When a person doesn't have a deep sense of purpose and meaning in their life
they are easily drawn to the distraction of chaos and drama. Finding good people that fit
with you is not as easy as you think. This is a journey and way of life that quickly
compounds mistakes and successes. You have been warned.
The author wants you to know that he wouldn’t live any other way.
This book demonstrates the skills and techniques that students seek to learn by working
them into the presentation of this work. This work is layered so the reader would move
through metanarratives and contrast routine and expected interpretation of events as they
move through and study the book. Some people may simply refer to this as mind control,
but you may describe them differently after finishing this book. Proceeding further is a
statement of acknowledgment, agreement, and consent to this statement. If you do not
agree, PUT THIS BOOK DOWN, and don’t come back. There’s nothing for you here.
3
Contents
Disclaimer ............................................................................................................................... 2
Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 9
Consent Philosophies ......................................................................................................... 25
Role Models & Inspiration ................................................................................................. 29
Making Relational Hypnosis Yours ............................................................................... 34
Beginning the work – Calibration and Collaboration ................................................. 45
Actively Engage in Rapport ............................................................................................. 48
Body-Matching ................................................................................................................... 50
Breathing Matching ............................................................................................................. 54
Vocal Matching ................................................................................................................... 55
Speaking rate ................................................................................................................... 56
Energy and Inflection .................................................................................................... 56
Vocal Tempo ................................................................................................................... 56
Linguistic Harvesting......................................................................................................... 57
Language Patterns............................................................................................................... 59
Embedded Commands ....................................................................................................... 64
Using Ambiguity................................................................................................................. 66
Using Truisms in Hypnotic Work ..................................................................................... 69
Natural and Inclusion Trance ........................................................................................... 73
Benefits of Trance and Hypnosis ................................................................................. 81
Designing an Inclusion Trance ..................................................................................... 82
How Deeply Hypnotized Are They? ................................................................................ 85
Pattern Interrupts................................................................................................................. 86
4
Spotting and Redirecting Trance Exercise .................................................................. 88
Value Elicitation ................................................................................................................... 89
Anchoring - Simple, Stacked, Chained, & Collapsing ............................................... 93
Stacking Anchors Hand Exercise ............................................................................... 97
Collapsing Anchors ....................................................................................................... 99
Subconscious, Conscious Overlap ................................................................................ 101
Conversationally introducing people to trance ...................................................... 104
Hypnotic Assessment and Experiential Convincers ................................................. 109
Magnetic Hands ............................................................................................................ 112
The Balloon and The Bucket ..................................................................................... 116
The Finger Clamp ........................................................................................................ 118
Elkins Hypnotizability Scale ............................................................................................. 121
Progressive Muscle Relaxation Induction .............................................................. 124
More on Inductions. ......................................................................................................... 132
Deepeners ........................................................................................................................... 138
Fractionation ................................................................................................................. 141
Symbol Morphology.................................................................................................... 150
Constructing hypnotic perspectives and instructions. ................................................. 196
Beginning to work with Hypnosis ................................................................................ 200
The Elman Induction ................................................................................................... 201
Ten to One Induction ....................................................................................................... 206
Point Fixation Induction .................................................................................................. 233
Encircling Hands Induction ............................................................................................ 237
Establishing Ideosensory Responses ....................................................................... 241
Hypnosis Is NOT Meditation ......................................................................................... 243
Compliance Training vs Induction Scaffolding ......................................................... 250
Entrainment ................................................................................................................... 254
5
Ego Depletion................................................................................................................ 263
State Proofing ................................................................................................................ 264
Hypnotic Regression, Progression, and Association ................................................ 268
Outlining a Past Life Regression .............................................................................. 272
Working Terms of the BDSM Lifestyle ...................................................................... 281
Coming together................................................................................................................ 298
Creating A Personalized Hypnotic Experience ............................................................. 303
The Importance of Being Clear ..................................................................................... 306
Challenge: Using Resistance to Take Someone Deeper .......................................... 308
How to train a subject and transfer control to another ............................................. 317
Exploring the Hypnotic Seal ....................................................................................... 324
General Instructions and Commands You May Use................................................. 328
Hypnotic Adventure Lead Ins ........................................................................................ 337
The Phases of Erotic Hypnosis ....................................................................................... 338
Merging Together as One ........................................................................................... 340
Expert Level Commands: Caution ................................................................................ 346
Establishing an Alternative Personality ....................................................................... 354
Hypnotic Intensity of Pain and Pleasure...................................................................... 361
Inducing Hypnotic Pain ............................................................................................... 363
Planning Hypnotic Sessions ........................................................................................... 369
A Basic Hypnotic Session Outline for a Stage Hypnotist ....................................... 372
Hypnotic orgasm ............................................................................................................... 375
There’s more than one Female Orgasm ......................................................................... 394
Q&A for Exploring BDSM and Kink .......................................................................... 397
Toys Galore ........................................................................................................................ 407
So, you want to do impact play... ............................................................................. 421
Can you share toys? ..................................................................................................... 423
6
Cleaning Toys.................................................................................................................... 423
Roles of Hypno Kink ....................................................................................................... 425
Talking with people about Hypno Kink ...................................................................... 434
Establish your Criteria for Mastery ................................................................................. 458
Beginning State Proofing ............................................................................................. 467
A Spontaneous Hypnotic Adventure.............................................................................. 470
Using These Skills to Stand Out ...................................................................................... 498
Conclusion .......................................................................................................................... 500
7
Dedication
The influencer knows that social context is a complex game that not everyone
realizes they are playing as they interact together. While some take most
perceived social rules seriously the influencer in any context has the most
freedom when they are having fun. In fun, we tease. We play and share our joy,
and open up to each other about who we might be. It is your ability to inspire
others and engage their hearts and minds that’ll encourage them to wonder if you
are magic. Making others feel like you may be magic is the mindset that makes
this work come alive. Take on the attributes of attentive impishness as it
highlights the spirit of engagement with life, and communicates perseverance to
intelligently apply action. This work can represent a quest for those who once
considered themselves as merely kinky dreamers.
This book happened because one reader’s questions created a more powerful
vision in my mind than the book I was working on at the time. This book is
dedicated to a friend, a loyal reader, an MC, and prospective Hypno Dom, Adrian
Byrne. I hope you will always smile at this dedication and the two significant yet
simple questions that I now pass on to you.
1. What are the most important things that you can share with those you
love today?
2. Are you taking enough time to take care of yourself, your future, and
those that matter to you?
May you live each moment as if discovering and defining the character you are in
your own story. Thank you for all you share.
Thank you to Damien Atropa who has become a fellow MC, Trainer at a few
Enshrouded events, the impetus of many funny and terrible wagers, and the
reason I woke up this morning almost having to coyote my body out from under
a bodybuilder and glitter painted little person. Glitter is a festive mark that a
person is more than they appear. For this, you are my morning Muse that got me
writing and appreciating all things big and small after our nights in TAO at the
Venetian. I will never go back to Los Vegas without you!
A special mention and thank you to Guzalia S. Davis, Devin Feher, Roland Berg,
Michael Martin, and Dantalion Jones. You make the world more fun by sharing
how you live!
8
Lastly, this book is dedicated to everyone else who thinks I may be writing about
them. I am. A word or two of advice. Not everybody deserves to see your
personality. Let them think you're boring.
Introduction
Often people use the term mind control loosely, and they use influencing
techniques while manipulating people to take on their perspective frame of a
situation or perspective. Mind control today, in its most basic application is an
active, and biased examination of influence that we have on others, as well as the
influence that external agencies have on us. It's as neutral as a hammer is in
comparison to every other tool. Still, for some people, everything becomes a nail
as soon as they learn about the hammer. By not talking about the many ways we
influence each other naturally every day we become less informed about the
world, each other, and about ourselves. This censorship often serves the censor
more than it ever helps the people who are being directly affected by these
influences. This behavior makes it harder to talk about concepts by establishing
or reinforcing taboos, or social stigma, and does nothing but consolidate power
and authority for the few.
Censorship and stigma increase the chance people are being hurt by these very
forces even while censors are saying they are protecting us. When someone
believes they have more to lose by you becoming informed and taking action to
support your opinions, a person may act no different than an animal protecting
their view as if it were their territory. If you expect these censors to be fair to you
as you are with them, you should expect to get bitten. Cognitive campaigns are
prolific and embedded within everything almost everything we do in society
today. When confronting those who intentionally or mindless pass on these
cognitive campaigns without thought it’s no different than expecting a bear not to
eat you because you are not eating them. Not everyone is alright with you
educating yourself and making your life, and piece of this world a little bit better.
Welcome to the resistance that pushes back on censorship and encourages each
person to decide for themselves what to think, do with life, do with your body,
and share with each other.
Let the information defend itself and come prepared. Your openness and
willingness to learn should include taking care of each other whenever possible.
Nothing is a perfect fit for everyone so use what makes sense for you. After you
9
do support one another to get access to ideas and information that are
transformational. This fundamental belief pushes back on censorship, stigma, and
harm in the world. Engaging with this material makes you above average in the
knowledge of influence, sexuality, and designing meaningful experiences that we
all thirst for.
Right now, your mind and routines are filled with old thoughts. Many of these
old thoughts did not originate with you, but you have been carrying them forward
because they made sense at that moment. It’s now time to change your mind
about some things and consider how you are living, interacting, and
communicating with not just the world around you, but with yourself. This work
is about engagement and evolution with how we recognize and live our life.
What you’ll discover here is a lot about relationships and less about the right
relationship or right way to be in your relationship. There is no such thing as one
right way.
A healthy relationship (BDSM or vanilla) is not something that pops up out of
social expectations readymade and personalized just for you. It will take time,
trust, caring about one another, trial and error, and celebration of victories and
failures. Relationships are the air that we breathe and the focus in every area of
our lives. Do not fall victim to cultural hypnosis that causes people not to think
and invest in the relationships that matter in their lives. This author believes that
we can change the relational hypnosis that makes some people apathetic,
unquestioning, and demotivated as they feel they are not fitting into their society,
community, or traditionally approved identity and gender roles.
This book is about reimagining your life and exploring training/conditioning
experiences with hypnosis and basic BDSM concepts to engage you more fully
within your life. This information is enough to get you started so you can get an
idea if this life is something you want more of. The life you live should affirm
and communicate the love, intimacy, and experiences that light you up and want
more of. All those elements do need to light up the life of a stranger, only you
and your partner(s). I don’t make it a practice to invite strangers or their
judgment into my bedroom, holidays, or life. You shouldn’t either, but you
should vote whenever possible to ensure that we keep these freedoms.
Let’s take a moment together to bring the emphasis of this work into our lives.
Right now, I’d like you to look at your hands. Really look… Allow your eyes a
moment to trace along those personal lines as they move this way and that. Do
this until you find yourself taking a good look at your fingernails. Are those
10
fingernails painted, jagged, clean and well-manicured? Are they trimmed back
from sharp points into a slight symmetrical curve? Could you imagine these
hands might be the focus of a commercial on TV with you starring as the hand
model? No, this is not a George Costanza flashback. These hands of yours touch
everything around you and they have preferences. If you're unsure about those
tactile preferences are think back to the last time you touched anything withered,
dirty, sick, or in pain. How'd it make you feel to think about touching something
with these qualities? Were the answers you’d give to that question something like
grateful, balanced, and loving? Why do you think you answered as you did?
On the topic of TV close-ups and focusing in close, when was the last time you
really looked at the bottoms of your feet? There are so many lines moving across
the soles of your feet that in places they could mirror your palms. Every day
these feet are what connects you with the world that we are part of. Your feet
know what goes into navigating your surrounding more than any other part of
you. No matter the environment, it is our hands that our minds most closely
associate with connecting to beauty. We persist. Even if many other things will
make contact with us as we reach out for what we want. Things like sickness,
disaster, chaos, longing, and human soil created from the very progression of
being alive.
If the unclean ideas above have moved you into a space of guilt, shame,
embarrassment, or being uncomfortable then you would be in the right state for
purification. A purification is an act performed in order to let all of that go. Over
the course of our lifetimes, all of us, will have important aspects of our lives
stripped away. Each of us has a need for acceptance, forgiveness, and healing to
be integrated into how we live life and move on from painful experiences. Our
practice and art must acknowledge that everyone needs to heal, be loved,
forgiven, and at times to cleanse ourselves through punishment or amends so we
can move on. That these things are a process that must be engaged with, and
cannot be forced upon anyone to make them for their own betterment. Your
experiences are not what gives you or your life definition. It is your interpretation
of those experiences that shapes the meaning and values carried on with the story
of you and the best guesses towards the future.
At the heart of Taoism is the principal of bringing order and harmony through the
many layers of reality that intersect within us and around us. One major Taoist
ritual that embodies this principal of balance is Chiao (Jiao). The Chiao rite
symbolizes infinite renewal and cleansing of body, mind, and spirit in order to
11
return to harmony and balance with all things. When participating in the ritual of
Chiao, we step into a universal relationship with the infinite or Tao, and move
through the ritual in relational layers. We are encouraged to see ourselves within
this universal perspective and assimilate multiple points of relational connection
in continuous evolution. This process is a metacognitive invitation to recognize
oneself as part of the infinite as we examine the relationships and meaning we
carry with us. Metacognition is the process of thinking about thinking, knowing
about knowing, being aware of one’s own awareness, and observing the energy
that becomes action. Where our attention and awareness concentrates on our
energy follows to produce the experience of the moment.
In another successive relational layer, we become aware of the self as an
assemblage point that is both connected and relating information and energy
within us and around us. It’s a bit like exploring how the sea moves around and
within a fish even as the fish moves around and within the sea. We are only
aware of so much and we leave considerable amounts of information for our
subconscious to interpret and distinguish when our awareness is left to on
autopilot, and unexamined. Our personal relational communication (self-talk)
changes the information and energy within us and around us each time we
interact with it. As long as we exist, we are interacting with all that is around us
(Tao) and it is interacting with all that we believe is us. Spirituality and
connectedness to all things (Tao) is never disconnected or censored from topics,
people, behavior, and even the unknown. Sexuality and sexual behavior often
falls into those unspoken or muted topics and because of that, some people take
with them guilt, shame, incorrect information, and judgment that only
proliferates harm.
Purification of body and mind can release imagined impediments to an
individual’s relationship with themselves and their world. This experience allows
the person to explore and make sense of experiences that are often contradictory
to them and others from a grander perspective. Individuals are not the sole
beneficiary of purification and the acceptance it brings. Purification has the goal
of bringing the individual into harmony with themselves and the constellations of
community with which they live. A renewal of energy allows for the dirt to be
wiped away from body, mind, and spirit to encourage harmony in the living
present moment. This ancient rite shares an important message about human
nature being incapable of permanently enduring as poisoned or filthy from past
events. This experience reframes the typical preoccupation for purity, cleanliness,
and distance from others that some censors preach. Taoism's rituals frequently
12
involve confession and expiation to answer the needs of development and
cleansing the clinging doubts and energy of the past. Purification is not a new
concept but in today’s modern world it is often harder than it was in times past to
let go and wipe the karmic or digital slate clean. The Hypno Dom in many
respects fulfills the role of a modern shaman.
As we teach who we are, we must also impart the value of our mistakes and
failure. Everyone fails. It is our mistakes and our success that allows us to learn
how to best maneuver within the circumstantial currents that we find ourselves
in. This brings my thoughts back to what I am imparting to all of you. What
you’ve come here to learn is not just a few skills in narrow contexts where
absolute control can be secured. Many of you have come here seeking a new
code or way of life. As you take in and practice this material, I want you to
discover how these bits of knowledge, skills, and abilities can become naturally
enmeshed into the deliberate culture, contexts, and knowledge sharing we do
with each other every day. Only by actively engaging with this material can you
understand how all this knowledge fits together in the contexts that you might
encourage, interrupt, or redirect in the moment. So, don’t wait. Decide now to
study and engage with everything that is here.
This work is about teaching influence as an exercise of engagement. To
accomplish this, I have included elements in this work to encourage you to
transcend the written word by modeling the blending of transcripts, commentary,
and breaking down how you might think about taking action. You know, just
some simple mind control techniques encouraging you and inviting you to
discover how effective they are. By informing you of this I am seeking to prepare
you for the many joys and challenges you will face alone and with others by your
side. All of us will bump up against invalidating aspects of relational hypnosis in
our lives that doesn’t do anybody any good.
As a trained influencer and Hypno Dom, you will be dealing with the full range
of thought and emotion of the people you work with. The truth is there is nothing
inherently bad with any emotion a person may express. Emotions are signals
from our subconscious about judgments we have acquired or made across our
lifetime. Sometimes our subconscious meaning making process maybe
disconnected, outdated, and irrelevant to what is actually happening at the
moment. The technical term for this is a bad thing, and subconscious confusion
leads to conflict and frustration with ourselves and others. We often think that
our deeply held beliefs, opinions, and emotions are the result of long periods
13
spent contemplating to arrive at a conclusion. After all, we are inside our own
head, pondering about details and motives, making plans, and settling on
decisions every day, but that’s not everything that leads up to making a choice.
For example, people aren’t usually coming to ah-ha moments after undertaking
well researched deductions on most of the decisions they encounter every day. If
they did that no one would need extra help quitting smoking, losing weight, and
getting to bed on time. People more often become aware of how they feel about a
choice, opportunity, person, or flavor of ice cream around the moment of the
decision making itself. Most, if not all of the details for decisions are handled in
the subconscious mind as we go about negotiating the immediate details that
we’re encountering around decision points consciously. The cognitive disconnect
between our two minds (subconscious and conscious) can appear seemingly
unexpected at times and the results from some of our choices can delight and
shock the best of us. For example, coming home from grocery shopping and
putting the car keys where your eggs should go in the fridge and leaving the eggs
on the counter. Later you just have to look everywhere for those keys because
your keys are supposed to be left on the hook by the door.
As you explore influence and control as a Hypno Dom you will discover that
your subject’s content of consciousness can be completely unrelated to their
activity at the moment. If that sounds like a waking dream it sort of is. It’s a
natural trance. A person could be in a meeting and reliving last night’s
conversation at the bar, or having sex, or imagining something they should have
said when their coworker made that quip at their expense a few hours ago.
During ANY activity a person may appear as if they are fully present as they nod
at the appropriate place in responding to you, moan, and take on appropriate
body language as you interact. Their conscious mind is not fully aware of you
and their subconscious is directing the show at that moment.
So, I ask you to think about where is the defining line for absolute objective
reality for us? Is objective reality inescapable for a person even if they’re
dreaming in the moment? Is it one where the subconscious is tracking and
responding in autopilot while a person daydreams, or something in-between the
two? Can you say for sure that there is just one objective reality for all of us?
Sure, there are aspects of reality we all come to agree on, but that’s not
representative of the whole experience of reality throughout life. Usually, at this
point, somebody mentions the movie and the concept of living in the Matrix.
14
Through this art, you construct, reinforce, and breakdown elements of reality
every time you express yourself through it.
Through your work, you’ll come to recognize and live a familiar debate among
the Masters of this art. Everything is hypnosis or there is no such thing as
hypnosis. Like a popcorn fart in Hell, expect to get questions that aren’t easily
answered like this. Work out how you might answer some of these questions
before you get asked. You are about to learn skills that can fully encourage the
actualization of a person’s emotional range and support them in stepping out of
their known universe. The skills and influence attempts you are about to learn are
referred to by many names. For me, mind control is the deliberate effort to affect
thoughts, ideas, and opinions, to create measurable or observable changes. The
work always begins with yourself. Those people who are not entirely into
BDSM, or kink, but still have a fetish for the control that these techniques bring
them will often self-identify as mind controllers or MCs.
Mind control is not such a strange concept, but it does have a bad rap in many
circles. I would say every parent engages in mind control daily. I have purposely
chosen this word, "mind control" to reclaim it from those who have used it to
manipulate others with stories of sensationalism, hubris, and unapologetic apathy
for the hurt they’ve caused. Each one of us begins our journey with this
knowledge learning how to represent ourselves in a world that we are also
attempting to understand and gain a measure of control in. Don’t let the labels
hold you back. There is so much around us to inspire and drive the best of who
we are in our world today. In the words of Lao Tzu, “To hold, you must first
open your hand. Then, let it all go.”
To influence as an Artisan of the Tao of The Crown you must not be reliant on
the scripted word. An attunement separates what is printed on these pages and
that which can be experienced authentically in the moment. An Artisan of
Influence follows the nature and flow of all things (Tao), to discover what is
sought, and yet already present. I encourage people to live in harmony with their
nature and empower their strengths to design their lives in meaningful ways. To
further explore this, I offer the story of a Cook from the Tao Te Ching.
A Cook was cutting up an ox for the ruler Wan-hui. Whenever he applied his
hand, leaned forward with his shoulder, planted his foot, and employed a gliding
movement shifting his weight onto his other knee. You could witness the ox’s
hide being portioned out into perfectly shaped pieces. The slicing of the Cook’s
knife glided in a regular cadence as he hummed. All the movements and sounds
15
progressed in the rhythmic melody of "The Mulberry Forest" as the Cook danced
as he sang the music aloud. The Cook was so engrossed in his task that he never
seemed to notice he was being observed by a King.
"Wonderful! Admirable! It is an art that your cut would have become so perfect!"
The King said.
Having finished carving up the meat the Cook laid down his knife and bowed
quickly.
"What your servant loves is the way of the Tao. The Tao guides my movement
and my cut. When I first began butchering oxen, I saw nothing but the entire
beast as one large carcass. It took three years before I ceased to see the ox as a
whole and solid. Now I deal with it in a spirit-like manner and do not perceive
the beast with my eyes alone. The use of my senses is discarded, and my spirit
acts as a ghost moving through layers of what appeared to be one. Observing the
natural lines, my knife slips through the smallest of crevices, just as it pops into
the larger cavities. I’m taking advantage of the natural layers presented and
attending to their flow. My art avoids the ropey ligatures and the broadest of
bones. I thank you for your praise.” The Cook says picking up the meat and
dropping some in a bubbling pot.
“Still… You move like no other Cook I have seen.” The King said observing this
man from across the room.
“A good Cook changes his knife every year. An ordinary Cook changes his knife
every month. My knife has been in use for nineteen years and it has butchered
several thousand oxen. Yet its edge is as sharp as if it had newly come from the
whetstone. My blade glides as a ghost through interstices of the joints, and yet
the blade of this knife has no appreciable thickness any longer. When that which
is so thin enters where the interstice are the blade is guided along the layers of
flesh as if it were an onion. How easily we move along together! The blade has
more than enough room.
Whenever I come to a complicated joint and I sense there will be some difficulty,
I proceed with caution. I’m not allowing my eyes to wander from the space. My
attention flows with my spirit and slowly I trace my hand along the form. Then in
just a very slight movement of the knife, each part flesh is quickly separated and
drops like a clod of earth to the ground. As I finish, I look at my work with
appreciation and satisfaction for what has been done. I begin to clean my knife
and lay it to rest in its sheath. This is how I know what it is to be a Cook."
16
"Excellent! I have heard the words of my Cook and learned what it means to
connect with the spirit of our life." The King said bowing slightly.
I believe that each of us is an embodiment of the Tao, and each of us is
rediscovering an interpretation of this world, and ourselves through our lives.
The Tao of the Crown is my journey to use influence to make changes within and
outside myself. This is a way of life and art. I will continue to train and attune
those ready for more. These highly trained individuals seeking further knowledge
and training are known as Enshrouded. The Tao is synonymous with virtue.
Taoism holds true that followers should develop and cultivate virtue in
themselves and the world. Taoism is a teaching that delights in living well,
appreciates sensuality, and discovering the joy in all things. You can find these
teachings within my art and I hope they become part of yours. In life, you’ll have
two choices as seek understanding and harmony. You can get clear by seeking
clarity or you can live out the confusions until they become clear. The mountain
on high is where we learn our art, but the Master can only be perceived by living
in the here and now. This is some of the spiritual and philosophical aspects of
some of my interests and focus.
My background is grounded in Ownership & Possession (O&P) lifestyle which is
built from the culture of modern Dominance and submission (D/s) and
Master/slave (M/s) relationships. While I do use the identity expression of slave,
submissive, and subject throughout the book, I want to introduce the terms here
so the reader understands that they are encouraged to use the identity or label that
bests fit you and your relationship. The labels of expression you choose should
seek to create or enhance your desired relationships while working from this text.
I encourage you to learn all aspects of these bodies of knowledge and recognize
this study as self-discovery. After all, a Master is just a word until you find
someone to give it definition.
I have designed this book to be a training tool that encompasses knowledge,
skills, and practical application for training both the novice and advanced
practitioners of hypnosis who are attracted to M/s and power exchange. Whether
you choose to use these skills or not is up to you. However, you may find what
you learned here is being applied to you or someone you know. The techniques
presented skills here are honed aspects of how we naturally interact with the
world and each other. Presenting them only as hypnosis is as deceptive as
presenting them as meditation, visualization, or trance. All of us engage in
17
influence attempts and are targeted by influence attempts every day that we may
not even be aware of. In practicing these skills, I hope you question what you see
in the world around you, and examine the motivations of the censors that try to
keep you from any information.
We live in an information age and gatekeepers of knowledge fear they may lose
power, control, prestige, or say about issues and perspectives they may not like or
agree with. Resist them, because they’re choosing for you without your consent
and that is an abuse of power; and the consequences of compliance with them are
more than missed opportunities. Real harm and stigma ends up being attached to
people, issues, and opinions simply for being in favor or out of favor with the
censors. It’s embarrassing that there are still people who actually believe they
have the privilege and right to approve how other consenting adults choose to
make love, come together, and live life together. Training with me is an
exploration of freedom and often a discussion about the ways that people can fit
together. You’re just one decision away from a totally different life.
All of us are sensual and sexual creatures. It’s always fun to take someone who is
awkward with the idea and act of sex out to do some people watching. We are
born from sex and created to have it. All of us can point to everyone that you see
and make that statement. That familiar smiling old lady at the checkout lane has
probably gagged on a dick and we should be happy for her. It could have been
before she left the house today or thirty years ago. That passion and love was
meaningful and may be what started the extended family. Smile. The desire to
connect with others, share intimacy, and please someone fully and completely
without holding back is part of us all. It’s also natural to want to be pleased and
want someone to understand what your needs are. Being a Hypno Dom is not as
socially scripted with expectations from outside forces as vanilla relationships
and dating.
We are already starting out with at least one common factor though. You either
have an interest in hypnosis, power exchange, or both. That can make leading
into these personal motivational drives towards intimacy and connection easier
by sharing your interests with each other. This book will give you examples of
how to use your skills and take the lead in interactions that could lead to more.
Much of the planning and perspectives for those next steps must come from you
if you want to be a Master. On this journey you will discover commonly relatable
themes and epic adventures, challenges, traps, heroes, villains, pain, pleasure,
and lessons to perceive and transform the world around you. You’ll do this
18
transformation by laying the groundwork to recognize what’s important for you
both and preparing your partner(s) for the experience to be shared. That’s it! The
rest is just descriptions of backstory. That backstory is presented through the
contact zones you establish are ahead of them so the rules make sense and one
experience has the potential of leading into the next.
As an agent of influence, you must become aware that shaping and training
behavior happens whether or not we intend it to or not. Shaping and training
behavior is a product of interaction with others and our environment. The more
work you do with these behavioral tools the greater your competency will be in
recognizing intentional influence attempts and witnessing your effect on others.
However, it is much more difficult to access the affect others have on ourselves.
Walking this path, you will notice that people connect with you more quickly,
they try to take care of you, they listen to you, and they’ll more readily share
their problems with you. All this is a consequence of this work. It changes you
and attunes you. Your intentions, likes, and preferences are more readily
communicated to those around you, and they will have an impact on them. This
happens naturally as you hone your communication with these skills, and this
improvement benefits communication with yourself and the world. Everything is
connected.
Keep in mind these fundamental expectations for learning and practicing this
knowledge. As you work with others you should have consent, they should be
informed about your intention and goals, and the person should know they may
rescind their consent at any time. You might be smoother than a hairy back on
wax day, but once you hear “no” stop immediately. Working together should be
fun, easy, and desirable, because we connect emotions, experiences, and possible
futures with the experiences we offer. Interacting with us is an experience meant
to light someone up, and encourage their freedom to explore, imagine, and
redefine their life apart from the limitations of the norm. All by itself, that is very
appealing.
My name is Joseph Crown. I'm a Guru, lifestyle trainer, and Master Mind
Controller or MC. I've studied hypnosis and mind control for over two decades.
I'm teaching material based on those twenty plus years of experience to those
seeking to create a way of life that feels more right than anything else. I want this
work to dispel myths and increase the practical knowledge of those individuals
engaged in hypno fetishism and kink relationships. People active in the BDSM
scene tend to report higher levels of well-being than those people in vanilla
19
relationships, and OFTEN Kinksters report more secure feelings of attachment
in their relationships than those not engaged in kinky relationships. You do not
have to trust me on my claims, and I encourage you to seek out information that
supplements what you read here. I’ve spent a considerable amount of time
assembling resources for this purpose, and I’ve included them within the text and
reference section.
Even though I’ve provided a reference list I request of you to seek out nonbiased
sources, and those with firsthand experience to advance your knowledge from
what you read here. You will quickly find that each author has their own style,
their particular focus, and mastery within those areas of interest. That’s why I’d
like you to seek out primary source information by people actively engaged in
this lifestyle because our experiences are different and so are how we approach
the same circumstances. Learning this way increases your behavioral flexibility
and you develop a circle of trusted sources. No two people or relationships are
exactly the same. Even if two individuals are married, we cannot expect to be
able to compare their relationships together and have everything be the same. It
can be those small differences between us that make people good fits. Our
relationships will never be as easily comparable as two plus two to get the answer
four. There will be differences in relationships even when the same terms are
used. Discovering the differences and the unifying factors will encourage you to
discover what you want, what keeps these connections strong and meaningful,
and what may not be for you. At times we don’t have the words for what we want
and this exploration of experience and expression through this work will help
you.
You will learn from this work that BDSM is a range of practices, but not every
practitioner will be interested in using everything here. But each element is a
relevant piece of the kink umbrella, which just goes to show you how diverse this
life and culture can be. The practice of kink is consensual, safe, and responsible.
It cares for all partners’ physical well-being and creates clear boundaries or
transitions between the everyday world and focused service. That consistent
focus on each other comes through these practices and encourages individuals to
consistently grow together. Having a person as the center of your attention is also
one of the sexiest ways’ lovers can come together and embrace each other’s
bodies, minds, and lives. In our daily lives, there is always something dinging,
beeping, and alerting us to fragment our focus. What you create together is a
sanctuary from stress and pains of life, but it’s so much more. One of the main
themes throughout these kink related activities is securing a place where we can
20
express ourselves, come together without judgment, and establish a life that is not
utterly dependent on how others decide how we must live. This book is written
for the Hypno Dominant who is learning their place within the community and
wanting to enhance their skills and art.
Being a Hypno Dom is fun, geeky, and exciting. It’s practical self-improvement
and performance art based on research and fine-tuning of techniques designed to
be applicable to your circumstances and overall objectives to achieve goaldirected pleasure. Whether it’s tying that perfect knot, spanking a sub at just the
right speed and position, training slavish obedient hypnotic bimbos, figuring out
your favorite position to be dominated by another, or improving your skills as a
top, bottom or switch. This work is all about learning and working to hone your
skills through engaging with the knowledge and desired experiences in new and
familiar ways. In this work, I put considerably more emphasis on the hypnotic
application of the experience of being a Hypno Dom instead of offering a
glossary experience as many books do. As you move through each the concepts,
exercises, and transcripts I’d like you to think of them as contact zones. In these
contact zones, you are learning more than just the skills needed to practice the
material. You are learning how to relate and engage people with this material in
context with your own skill and style. The contact zone is the canvas where you
will paint and develop your art. No one else will do it exactly like you will, so be
the youest you that you can be today!
While the lessons here will often be presented as a structured experience, I
recommend you utilize a journal and notebook with this book. The humor is one
of the tools I utilize to paint an experience that draws you back to the material
and evoke emotional and subconscious responses. I recognize that this book is
going out globally and some cultural and humor references like the Doctor Seuss
tribute above will be missed completely. This book will affect how you see the
world, yourself and others. Anything less would be a waste of time. Take notes in
your notebook about things here that you have strong feelings about. Write down
the parts of this work that make you pause, process, and want to investigate
further. Journal about the journey and the process it as you go through this work.
Treat this manual like a sacred text that you interact with and use to change a
little bit of this world one piece at a time. By recording all these elements of your
thoughts, impressions, and journey you will be able to see the changes for
yourself. By the end of this book, my expectation is that you will be able to talk
about and teach elements presented here with the addition of something personal
21
added from you. That is how I run my training and this is how you achieve
mastery.
When learning this material people often feel a bit of disassociation as they work
through experiences, concepts, and interactions that they believed were
untouched by various influences. Sometimes people have said they’ve
experienced a loss of dependable connection with how they have thought about
the world and their relationships in it. That's the point. Assimilating innovative
approaches of behavior, discovering the interplay of elements that affect us, and
learning how the subconscious and conscious mind work often feels a bit
awkward and uncertain at first. I’ve had people even begin to question their own
free will as they’ve begun learning how language patterns deconstruct and reveal
the assumptions, we all have about life and reality. This is all part of this work.
It can be very disturbing for some to learn that everyday life interactions are not
as random as they once believed. Suddenly, these people are shaken as they think
about people encountered in their life not being as pure as they once believed.
Not everyone is fit for this lifestyle or capable of questioning reality. People do
take on a lot of unhelpful and hurtful ideas from society that don’t fit with their
lives. This instruction reveals those aspects to us, and sometimes we aren’t ready
to change. When we run our thoughts and assumptions through a deconstructive
filter, we’ll all learn fairly quickly that we can get quite unhappy if we are not reassociating this information back into our lives in ways that are meaningful to us.
Many people simply wait on others to give them examples that reconnect
activities and ideas meaningfully for them or they rely on their subconscious to
take care of this cognitive ego function. If you want to inspire and influence
others take this to heart. This is another reason why journaling can help you
balance out learnings as you apply them to your life. Journaling is a descriptive
meaning making task that can be examined and shared.
Learning hypnosis and influence is an exercise in recognizing and reorganizing
our thinking about own life, responsive interactions that we have every day, and
inevitably about our relationship to a seemingly infinite adaptive reality. Taking
on deconstructive mindset and applying to every part of our life spreads an
emotional blandness that we can make most people very unhappy. This loss of
meaning happens when we undertake challenging topics without any thought of
reestablishing what is meaningful about the concepts learned as the implications
generalize into many layers of life and identity. The subconscious is doing its job
22
and processing how a deconstructed concept can be applied to our life,
relationships, and daily encounters.
It’s like learning about verbal abuse and suddenly your mind brings up the many
times you’ve raised your voice in anger or frustration to another. This is why you
should think of what is being taught here as a cultural contact zone. You are
learning more than just the language, definitions, and application of concepts.
You are being encouraged to discover how what you are learning fits into the
lives and experiences of the people you are working with. So, asking yourself,
and others, if verbal abuse happens every time you or someone else raises their
voice fits the speaker’s definition. You would then begin to create connections
back to what is known and compare with other sources. This may take you into
the rabbit hole of objective reality. Objective reality means that reality exists
independent of our minds. The description "objective" doesn't make a lot of sense
on its own, but it does when grounded in the theoretical relationship between
consciousness and existence.
This basic metaphysical question lies at the root of our first questions in life, and
“Why?” emphasizes a question about particulars of reality itself. To approach
questions about reality there are two theories that hypothesize how it all works
and that people may live their lives by. The primacy of existence versus the
primacy of consciousness is what we will be contrasting here. The primacy of
consciousness is the view that reality is a product of consciousness. In this
worldview, everything is a product of our minds, or the mind of some other
being, such as the gods. In this theory, nothing exists in itself or by itself. It exists
as a figment of your shared imagination, or in the same way a learned concept or
a memory might exist for you. In the primacy of consciousness theory reality is
an imagined construct manifested by consciousness. That means that you can
change reality by changing your mind, you gain knowledge of reality by
understanding yourself, and by engaging in introspection. All knowledge is
within you.
The primacy of existence theory states that reality exists independent of our
conscious awareness. If we want something to happen in our lives, we have to
take action to make it happen. We can't just wish for it to happen or manifest it
within our life. If we want to gain knowledge about the world we have to go out
and engage with the world in some way. Then we need to make rational choices
about our experiences and make our best guess. We would be unable to know
practically anything with the absolute certainty of 1+1=2. In our lives, we’d have
23
to look to the reality surrounding us to understand the limited interactions we
have in that reality to be as successful as possible. If we're mistaken about the
workings of reality, then we won't be successful. This theory posits that reality
exists in a particular way, and if we don't understand those workings than we lose
out. Then we die, sleep, or daydream, and reality around us remains unchanged
and separate from us. Which one of these theories do you think Krampus would
visit you to impart?
Whichever one of these theories you resonate with more will have implications
of your experience of life and how you practice your art. Getting to decide on
"objective reality" may not be as simple as you thought a moment ago, and yet
you still function in it relatively successfully. This rabbit hole is not one that will
be resolved in this work, but your work here will lead your investigation into
exploring possibilities you’ve never imagined before. Sometimes you’ll read a
book so incredible that you want to carry it around just to be near it. Bring
together those meaningful bits of information and look for where they might pop
into your life; making it even more uniquely you. To do that, you will have to
embrace your responsibility to do the work, and bring the right mindset with you.
The information presented here is designed to make you think about connecting
to the world differently and it to get the most of this you’ll need to engage with it.
Not everyone has the ability to lead well. Not everyone is cut out to be an MC,
Hypno Dom, or a socializing agent in this rapidly changing world. These tools
will only strengthen what you are pointing your energy, attention, and practice
onto. Choose wisely. As MC's and Doms, this specialized knowledge opens up a
wide range of opportunities and strategies that aren’t provided in most training.
The methods and information you are receiving here are usually only imparted in
apprenticeships and your focus set on conditioning for mastery. This knowledge
also helps us correct some of the bad that we encounter in the world. Sex and
other trance states are common, everyday occurrences, and these states are
natural and plentiful in their occurrences without any other substances needed.
For example, when waiting for planes and taxicabs, reading or listening to music,
or even being involved in strenuous physical exercise. These are all normal
moments that tend to slip into natural states of trance.
It’s quite normal to become immersed in a desired activity at the moment. We all
enjoy these moments of drifting into trance states, removed from any irrelevant,
or demanding stimuli, all to focus in on what’s here in front of you. These trance
states are so familiar that most people do not recognize them as hypnotic
24
phenomena. This book will get readers not only thinking about influence, but it
will also direct them through techniques to create their own plans of action and
style. Getting you to the point where everything comes together as easily as air
guitars are “technically” recognized as wind instruments. You don’t have to learn
the hard way. What is taught here is developed from the mistakes and success of
many. Your life is your personalized message sent out to change the world. Use
your voice to make sure that communication is clear where it matters most, and
your art to emphasize the value and energy your message holds.
It’s not uncommon for a skilled influencer to slip suggestions and commands into
all kinds of situations, including books, blogs, roundtables, and workshops. If
you study this book you will discover how many suggestions and commands that
are here and all around you. Writing this book, I wanted to create a tool that I
would have wished for when I had started out my career. By continuing to read
this work, you are giving your applied consent, you’ve agreed to accept the
responsibility for bringing the right mindset to study the material, and allow your
authentic self to shine through your practice. It makes it easier for the other
Kinksters to find you and you’ll discover new eyes to see the world anew. This is
only the first step on the journey to becoming Enshrouded. Remember always,
we walk amongst you. Mastery of this work is just another challenge in accepting
your invitation to walk with us on this journey.
What you do with the knowledge and techniques presented here can connect you
further to the joy and intimacy of living well. If it doesn’t, you’re doing wrong!
Don’t forget to check out the Hypno Dom certificate at the back of the book. You
can print it out and share it on your profile. Use it as a conversational piece, and
even follow the instructions to advance that certificate to one not offered to a
level one Hypno Dom.
Joseph W. Crown
Consent Philosophies
“Curiosity is the longing of the mind compelling you to reach beyond the
known.”
Joseph Crown
25
As you engage others with hypnosis, and related kink activities, you should be
aware of the chief philosophies around consent represented in the lifestyle
communities. The mantra of being Safe, Sane, and Consensual (SSC) has
caught on with those who want to communicate a standard expectation of
behavior and personal responsibility within the lifestyle communities. In order to
be safe, you must know the risks of the activities you wish to undertake. You
must be reasonably certain that what you are doing together isn’t causing
permanent or lasting harm to the emotional, mental, or physical health of anyone
involved in the experience. There is an expectation of personal responsibility and
self-directed learning that goes along with these philosophies. Being sane is
generally considered to be displaying a “healthy” mindset, whereas behaving
responsibly, and exercising good situational judgment is completely dependent
on personal factors. Being consensual refers to all individuals involved in an
activity having given their informed consent to participate in it. SSC is the
consent philosophy that most people come across as they enter into this lifestyle.
Risk Aware Consensual Kink (RACK) is a consent philosophy that
acknowledges that every activity has a degree of danger to it and "safe" is best
determined by the individual(s). What one person considers safe, another may
not. To be risk aware is to understand that the activity or activities you are
engaging in carries a degree of danger, has a potential for unexpected harm, and a
recognition that some of those elements may be out of your control. What we
must do is plan and prepare. Some Kinksters draw comparisons between
engaging in kink activities with mountain climbing or skydiving, but even riding
a bicycle through city streets could be used as an example here. Heck, I live in
New Orleans and could use the experience of walking down the street on a
familiar road. A lot can happen that deviates from our best laid plans even if we
plan a quiet and lazy day, and RACK informs us that there is only so much we
control no matter how good we are. Yes, this philosophy acknowledges there is
an awareness of possible good and bad outcomes, but even if we’re using sound
judgment, no one can promise anyone else that they will always be absolutely
safe.
The difference between these two perspectives comes down to more than just
how the individuals are partaking in their respective activities, but how they are
viewing those activities as well. What happens when a community of Kinksters is
also judging those activities? It can stigmatize them but it also signals silos of
skills and experience within a community. Unfortunately, infighting in lifestyle
communities happens just as much as any other group. Both consent philosophies
26
are used in relationships every day and are demonstrated as valid and accepted
through public and private exercises of power exchange. Consent philosophies
can get charged with local community politics and ingroup biases can then
entrench those politics into their group’s discussion of consent. I’ve seen it
happen and good people will always end up leaving because of this. Educate
yourself before thinking anyone else has the same understanding as you about
consent. Even if someone agrees with you, they may not have your best interests
at heart.
The terms "sane" and "safe" will not be universally agreed on generally either.
For example, asking a switch who just got flogged to spank you is going to yield
a very different experience than asking Daddy’s baby girl. The switch may break
out her heavy wooden paddle while the switch may bend you over her knee and
swat at your ass a few times. Their mindsets, experience, and interests will all
determine what is safe, sane, and consensual. That line will be in different places.
SSC defines these terms separately and leaves them vague and open to
interpretation for the individual and the community. It can be implied that what is
considered "safe" and "sane" is based on common views or standards of the
community and the group consensus holding an event. Almost every event will
also have guidelines or rules to follow besides being SSC.
In contrast, RACK acknowledges the differences between individuals’ point of
view to determine what is "safe" and encourages the individual participants to
decide for themselves what level of risk they are comfortable with. RACK allows
more flexibility for those who wish to engage in activities related to power
exchange that may have a higher level of risk. Most masters who are excellent at
their art subscribe to RACK with those they own. Most people I have seen make
mistakes and breach trust tend to subscribe to SSC. Any philosophy can be
misapplied but most people who aren’t interested in learning more about BDSM
and consent can’t tell you what RACK is. Being SSC sounds like a sure thing,
especially when talking with someone new. Remember, no one can promise you
that you will be absolutely safe. It doesn’t matter if you are walking down a
familiar street or in your home walking to the kitchen to make tea. It just so
happens that the most dangerous place for a woman is her home.
Neither one of these philosophies is universally correct or better than the other.
As a person who enjoys long distance hiking, most of my trips were not
considered to be safe by many of my friends and family, sane according to most
of my friends and family, and at times nonconsensual by hiking partners who just
27
wanted off a mountain after a few miles of walking. Real-life challenges are not
as predictable and forgiving as theoretical and training scenarios. That is why
Mastery comes with planning for everything probable. Both these philosophies
put forth the fundamental ideas of agreement and communication to explore
intense experiences that affect mind, body, and spirit.
Both these philosophies state that kink activities should only be engaged in by
consenting parties who are knowledgeable and taking all precautions they deem
necessary for the respective activity. Following either of these philosophies will
not stop someone arguing with you because their standards are different. It will
not stop every disagreement from someone who feels like they are the safety
police, or they feel like it’s out of control unless they are doing it. Most people
about to engage in a scene do not tend to request being informed about the many
moving of a scene. Just like every other area of human life, you should expect to
encounter assholes, armchair philosophers, and decent human beings scattered
amongst the riffraff out there. In my opinion, it is much more difficult to fake or
gloss over your own knowledge involving a respective activity as a RACK.
Again, this is my opinion and I have explained many scenes using SSC language
because the subs themselves were not informed on any other philosophy of
consent.
Both of these philosophies have semantics which can be debated at length in any
exploration through a discussion. When choosing what philosophy works for you
it’s important to understand the underlying concepts of responsibility, freedom of
choice, and intentional communication between you and your partner(s), because
you will constantly be engaging each other with it. Each person will choose one
or both of these philosophies depending on if they play privately, publicly, or
simply by the ease of communication. People will choose which of these consent
philosophies are better for them at the moment based on their experience and
comfort level within groups also. In my twenty plus years of being in this
lifestyle almost every long-term relationship I have seen, and those I have been
in, ends up primarily defaulting towards the RACK. I advise you to talk with
those in your community and get assistance if you need additional training on
how to dialogue with your current or prospective partners about consent. The
conversations that establish consent will be the foundation for everything you
want to do.
In your discussion around consent keep in mind that no one has come up with a
way of universal system of banning/exclusion that works to keep communities
28
safe from predators, stops ignorant mishaps, or preventing innocent people (or
“minor offenders” and people willing to change) from being accused wrongly,
stigmatized, or from being vulnerable to unfair targeting within groups long term.
Any attempts to set up such processes is going to require someone somewhere to
arbitrate and at great cost to themselves often. The only thing that does work is
creating a culture within a community where the whole community accepts
responsibility for each talking with each other, and it contributes to the safety,
education, and management of unwanted behavior.
There's another side of this that many people have NO idea how to address. The
concept of redemption is one that affects everyone. As a member of society, this
is a topic that you should get informed on and ask yourself what you believe. At
some point, someone may tell you they have been hurt by someone else, or
someone may say you have violated their consent. So, what are you going to do?
Do you believe in second chances or supervised visits at parties for a limited
time?
Role Models & Inspiration
People who are constantly striving to improve themselves all have at least one
thing in common. They all believe having positive role models in their lives is
important. People seldom improve as rapidly or as effectively when they have no
other example but themselves to emulate. Our role models are individuals that
motivate us, instruct us to step out of our comfort zones, discover our true
potentials, and challenge us to overcome any perceived barriers. Roles models
leave us with opportunities to master skills and techniques while emphasizing our
personality to develop our own style. This chapter will explore this topic and get
you seeking out behaviors you want to make your own.
When our role models are Masters in their fields or disciplines, we get to witness
traits that directly contribute to success, and this observation model’s behavior
that gets results. As I work with new Master’s it is important to observe complete
interactions at first, so they can see beyond the faults of the moment and observe
behavioral flexibility in action. Good modeling of behavior allows you to achieve
results more rapidly because you don’t have figure out everything yourself.
Thereby understanding why an influence attempt worked and why didn’t. Look
for the behaviors you want to thrive in your life by engaging with the world. By
comparing ourselves with our role model’s strategies, working with other
29
Masters to move beyond mediocre, and getting practical feedback through
intentional practice will develop your art through these moments of conditioning
greatness. I’d like to share with you a few individuals that you may choose to
follow as Masters and role models. These individuals have proven themselves to
be artisans and have at least a decade’s worth of experience in their respective
fields.
The individuals I have selected are not necessarily part of the kink community.
This is a list of people who have inspired me and had qualities I felt worked with
my style and character. They are people that I can attest to their skill and have
some quality that I have felt made me a better MC, Hypno Dom, and human
being through what they teach. This list is an excellent start for someone just
getting into this lifestyle. I’ll be starting with who I am as my best self inspires
me onward. I recommend you write your own bio that describes the skills,
abilities, and experiences that you want to cultivate when you’re done reading
this book.
Joseph W Crown - I'm a Guru, lifestyle trainer, and Master Mind Controller or
MC. I've studied hypnosis and mind control for over two decades. This is my
book. Influence is art. This art is based upon my experience in the ownership and
possession culture, a passionate educator in identity development and change,
and an awakening in the Tao. My passion is connecting students who desire to
advance their skills and come together under the banner of the Crown. We walk
amongst you and my work is designed to change your idea of bliss and
entertainment. I periodically offer apprenticeships and take on new
applicants/slaves.
I enjoy training subjects with a variety of behavioral modification methods to
achieve automatic obedience and hyper-responsive potential on command. I
condition subjects for hypnotic adventures and long-term service in a power
exchange dynamic. These days I do more training the trainers than I do meeting
prospective applicants/slaves due to time. Those I seek want to improve their
lives, design their lifestyle, have a desire to be owned or be an Owner within an
M/s relationship, and are seeking to enhance their skills, perspectives, harmony
in life. You may find out more about me and my work through my website.
www.taoofthecrown.com
Mr. Dream - Mr. Dream has been organizing and presenting erotic hypnosis,
hypnokink, and general BDSM events and classes since 2010 throughout the
United States. He is a founding member of the Hypnosis New York/TES
30
Hypnokink Group as well as a former board member and active volunteer for
TES in NYC. He is the co-founder of Deepmind Darkwood, an intimate erotic
hypnosis retreat in western Massachusetts. Mr. Dream is one of the most creative
and imaginative Hypno Doms I have met and a popular speaker at erotic
hypnosis and BDSM events across the US. His advice on boundaries and
choosing subjects was valuable to me. His attitude and integration of BDSM
themes into his practice have been inspiring to see. He can be found on Twitter.
@mrdaviddream
Mark Wiseman – Also known as Wiseguy. He has been writing about,
practicing, and teaching others how to enjoy erotic hypnosis for 15 years. He is a
professional hypnotist and a popular speaker at erotic hypnosis and BDSM
events across the US. Mark has had some of the best advice I have encountered
over the years to practice power exchange and hypnosis together and separately.
His advice is straightforward and helps to dispel myths around these topics. He is
also a great guy. You can meet him in hypnosis lounges during Fetish Cons or
Fleas and he is smart and fun. At least that is where I first met him. Check out
Mark’s books and his blog. http://mindplayblog.blogspot.com
Brian David Phillips - Brian David Phillips is head pastor of the Church of
Universal Loving Tranceformation and is an internationally respected hypnosis
practitioner, educator, author, and entertainer. Dr. Phillips is particularly well
known within the hypnosis community for his innovative work in eroticatrance
(erotic hypnosis), speed hypnosis, and creative hypnosis techniques. He has
taught numerous seminars on hypnosis, focused trance, and experiential hypnosis
throughout the world. This is a man who imparts to his students the desire to
make others feel great through his teachings of hypnosis and energy work. He
has built a way of life around his art. He has inspired me to be more playful, silly,
and orgasmic during scenes. People really do remember the way you make them
feel long after they have forgotten what was said. You can find Brian at
http://trancesociety.net
Damien Atropa - Damien Atropa is a Master Hypnotist with a passion for
making a person's kink vividly interactive. He is an active community based
erotic hypnotist that is starting to branch out nationally with his hypnotic erotic
storytelling that incorporates cheesy horror movie plots. These cheesy movie
ideas make us laugh, and best of all, some of them really work well. Damien is a
Master of designing experiences that progress through stacked realities and
31
multiple timelines to solve riddles, overcome challenges, and training subjects to
seek out the solutions to answer the needs within a story or oneself.
He also has a thing for transformational adventures that may finish with a
lollipop to make everything alright again. Damien is a collaborative powerhouse
for potential twists in his hypnotic adventures that incredibly seem saner than
reality at times. Damien storyboards these adventures with potential hypnotic
effects so that personal choice somehow becomes fated, clues appear
everywhere, and anything can lead to the next jump into another reality. He is
one of the few MCs that I’ve met, capable of making erotic hypnotic adventures
as easier to engage with than a fantasy card game. If you would like to find out
more about Damien you can begin with his email. damien.atropa@gmail.com
BBC’s Doctor Who – Not every bit of inspiration and modeling comes from
daily living for me. The Doctor explores the universe in a time-traveling space
ship called the TARDIS. Its exterior appears as a blue British police box, which
was a common sight in Britain in 1963 when the series first aired. At the moment
of writing, there are fourteen different versions of The Doctor. The transition
from one actor to another is a plot point of the show that seeks to transition the
viewer, as much as it is to change the Doctor into a new incarnation. The concept
of Time Lord body updates allows the character to express different personality
traits and recover from anything that would otherwise kill a normal person. Each
actor's portrayal represents stages in the life of the same character and form a
single narrative. Meeting oneself as a Time Lord is not completely uncharted
territory, but it does take the expression, “keeping a secret from yourself” to
another level.
The series was once filmed on just one studio set that appeared to be the
equivalent of seeing a play unfold in front of you. This show inspired me at a
very young age to use the world as it is to reshape reality. As the series
relaunched in 2005, I discovered the responsive joy of the actor, Christopher
Eccleston, and his exuberant excitement was exactly what I wished to share with
others. The perspective of The Doctor is one of challenge. His challenge is to live
everyone to live with adventure, challenges the viewer and characters to care
about themselves and others, and his challenge is to experience joy and wonder
all around you.
Even in time travel the present moment is still where adventure and the
advantage is. This perspective demonstrates over and over that other people
aren’t aware of the resources around them, inside, and ready to connect those
32
elements, because people are usually wrapped up in their own thoughts to
overcome their limitations. Through familiar and new scene changes, this
optimistic adventurous attitude is tested against the worst odds. These plot points
and attitudes are perfect elements to introduce to any subject in your hypnotic
adventures. I found a lot of perspective overlap with The Doctor and Etrigan the
Demon. Etrigan is a fictional superhero and antihero appearing in comic books
published by DC Comics and I love him. His rhythms and rhymes are great tools
to play with. Here is a YouTube of an introduction to Etrigan.
https://youtu.be/anfj5dGgJlg
If you are seeking to learn hypnotic storytelling these series offer formulaic
storytelling strategies that are worth studying. They will also impart to you their
setup strategies and ground rules that viewers can depend on within the backdrop
of their story. To learn more Doctor Who check out the BBC and IMDB’s listing
of this show. http://www.imdb.com/title/tt0436992
Robert Heinlein - Robert Heinlein was a science fiction author that blended
taboo topics, adventure, alternate history, and generally relatable characters that
often had a distrust for authority. The man wrote an astounding amount of
material and purposefully bridged cultural and individual bias on a variety of
topics designed to question and challenge the status quo. His life and work are
worth celebrating. His stories were inspirational for me as I began creating
hypnotic adventures. Heinlein’s work is rich with detail of the story environment,
rules of engagement, developing progressive thoughts, and character traits
through worst case scenarios; these are some of the most difficult elements to
master as you bring hypnotic adventure to life. The wonderful thing about
Heinlein’s style is the rules he establishes to set the story are then used to get out
of the predicaments and plan for the next problem. The reader is taken along with
the story to discover the rules with the character.
Each Heinlein story gets the reader thinking about solutions as the stories
progress and it is easy to get lost in the details. What I have learned from
Heinlein’s stories has saved me incredible amounts of time as I got into
conversational hypnosis and trance hijacking. All of our experience ties together
with a story! To learn more about Robert Heinlein go here.
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Robert_A._Heinlein
Derren Brown - Derren Brown is a magician, mentalist, hypnotist, and allaround iconoclast. What I love about his materials is he is often explaining his
techniques while he is doing them for the audience. He has inspired me to branch
33
out with my methods and develop techniques based on my style and passions. He
is inspiring to watch work. Brown has done so much and is Master of
psychology, showmanship, and mind control that he has gone from street
performances to Netflix specials. You can find out more about him here.
http://derrenbrown.co.uk You should also look for his work on Netflix and
YouTube. I feel like there is nothing this man has not tried to surprise and delight
his audience.
Is there someone you think should have been included on this list? Let me know
and be sure to explain why they belong here.
Making Relational Hypnosis Yours
Making the hypnotic arts part of your routine influence attempts and adventures
comes down to a few simple preparations. You’ll find these prepping guidelines
work for anything you desire to integrate as part of your life and mindset. Being
challenging and playful with activities offered frames these tasks as something
desirable to engage with. While having some basic topics to engage anyone with,
it’s also important to link the subject’s values, interests, and related details from
of the shared experience relating to both of you whenever possible. It is a
judgment call to decide if you want to begin from something they mentioned and
build on it, or simply point in a direction and invite the subject to move with you
towards something interesting. This chapter should get you thinking about
influence attempts and beginning to use your language specifically to influence.
At each transition point in a conversation, there’s a natural influence attempt
communicated in the transition that our subconscious anticipates, think about
how you might utilize those moments, and have a step out/step in cue ready to
intensify or escape a connection back to you. The following are a few tips to
begin and advance your conversations trance work going.
Keep a confident upbeat perspective.
These techniques have been used countless times by myself and others. Being
positive and looking towards the bright side is a quality many people need more
of in their lives. Know your material, practice, and approach others as if you are
going to go out and play. People tend to confide in those that make them feel
34
safe, comfortable, and interested in them. Expressing these qualities with
optimism makes a person think you can handle listening to their ideas, dreams,
and problems. Not everyone wishes to be fixed so allow them to do that on their
own. A negative mind will never give you a positive life. Ensure you are
validating their experience even as your guiding them to something different and
new. One of the appealing things you can share with someone is your full
attention that makes them feel valued.
Keep your eyes and ears open for material that gets results.
Inspiration is found everywhere. Each day we move through multiple contexts
and geography, where people focus on specific environmental cues while
engaging in complex processes. Most of their conscious thought shifts into
neutral and goes back and forth between process and themselves. Every once in a
while, they take in something important from other people and what they are
focused on. I have seen people glaze over during meetings as soon a chart is put
in front of the room or a statistics problem introduced. It is as if their mind shifts
into park and suddenly, they are seated in the relaxing silence inside them, and
soon they begin to discover their thoughts wander away. Pay special attention to
the things that carry you and others away. Those are the resources you want to
collect, catalog, and improve upon. Developing a repertoire of stories, metaphors,
and examples to shift people’s focus and lead their attention is influencer gold
and often referred to as wisdom. Context-specific stories focus us, recharge us,
encourage us to learn more, and make us feel like someone understands us. When
hearing a story, we often care more about how we feel about what happens in the
story then what actually happens.
You create the energy and attitudes that make your frames work.
If you want the subject to be playful, open, and fascinated, then you have to
establish a space where that is possible. For example, if you live in the city,
you’re probably within a couple of hundred yards of a banana at any given
moment. Smile. Create the space that moves their focus and opens up
communication. Continually move their focus onto answers, details within a
story, what if scenarios, thought experiments, and demonstrating a genuine desire
to listen to what another person has to say encourages people to open up further
with us. For example, if the dinosaurs were killed by a giant meteor then we’re
35
living in a post apocalypse world. What are the top three things we need to do in
order to thrive under these conditions? T-Rex Smiling.
Remember, even if you’ve had the same conversation several hundred times, you
need to convey authenticity in it. When you’re having fun and interested in
others, it makes people want to reciprocate that attention and energy. It’s not the
attention I’m seeking, it’s the connection.
Don’t be afraid to ask.
Don’t be afraid to ask someone about their goal or intended outcome from an
experience. Questions are useful to gather information, involve someone in a
conversation, reflecting aloud your processing of an idea or experience, and even
to emphasize a point. For example, have you ever thought about how rhetorical
questions are used to persuade and subtly influence an audience? It's a question
asked not for the answer, but for the effect. Oftentimes, a rhetorical question is
used to emphasize a point and get the audience thinking about specific topics or
perspectives. How exactly do we use questions to relate to each other, ourselves,
and the contexts we share in the environment? Questions are at the heart of
communication, influence, and relational hypnosis. Take a moment and write
down all the repetitive questions you use on a daily basis. When you’re ready
come on back and continue reading.
Compare your answers with mine here. I’ll share explanations and examples of
how questions can be used to influence below.
As I mentioned above, we use questions to acquire knowledge.
“Where should I focus my efforts to learn quickly?”
We can use questions to eliminate confusion or uncertainty.
“What’s the difference between having doubts and being skeptical?”
We can ask questions to encourage someone to feel special or important paired
with love bombing.
“You know, Greg told me what to do next, but I’d really like to run those options
past you too. If that’s okay?”
36
We can ask questions to steer a conversation in the direction we want it to go.
“Have you read any books on this topic that you’d recommend? When I first
began writing this book, I wanted to demonstrate how questions were a social
construct within conversations. After all, simply dialoguing with each other
serves as building blocks in the maintenance of relationships, don’t you think?”
We can ask questions to demonstrate appreciative humility to another.
“I think people who are humble are more inclined to personal development and
growth with a partner. What are your thoughts about this?”
We can ask questions that may increase empathy and cooperation.
“I want this to succeed because I’ve seen the difference it makes in people’s
lives. I’ve offered considerable amounts of time and energy to help people, and
invest in this material. I’ve done this so they might have better lives without the
struggle I had to go through. What makes this work so important to you?”
We can ask questions to influence someone’s opinion or view.
“I was preparing some supporting documentation for an upcoming meeting when
I had an idea. I figured it would be a lot more effective to turn my supporting
materials into a brief presentation for the team. I knew there was still some
resistance to the ideas I was presenting. I wanted to make sure I could persuade
the last doubters of the soundness of my argument. I wanted to begin the
presentation by asking what each individual needed to know to make their
answer a strong yes on this plan decision today?”
We can ask questions to begin relationships.
“Is that a Moscow Mule? Cause every time I see one of those, I’m expecting
somebody to share something funny. Do you have any associations like that?”
We can ask questions to strengthen relationships.
“I’m not making a decision on anything until both of us are sure it’s right for us.”
We can ask questions to demonstrate we have knowledge or authority on a topic.
“What about the answer he just gave seems weak to you? I think the guy is
rehashing some rehearsed pattern and hasn’t established any exit strategy here
that doesn’t leave him losing face and credibility.”
We can ask questions to stimulate creativity and idea generation within a group.
“What if brainstorms were designed to generate questions, not ideas? Looking at
37
problems through perspective driven roles allows us to understand it from
multiple perspectives. For example, can any action really be blamed on just one
person?”
We can ask questions to quickly shift a person’s focus and attention.
“If I told you that you couldn’t keep all of these emotions and memories, what
are you willing to lose?”
We can ask questions to get engagement on problems.
“This would be so much easier if there was two of us working together. Can I
count on you?”
This list of influence attempt reason here was generated by listening to a few
families with children visiting a Dairy Queen. The examples of how to use these
influence attempts were simply extrapolated from the intent behind the
questioning. The ice-cream sundae I had to eat while collecting this information
weighs heavily on my thighs. Smile. Observing people, especially groups can
help you develop behavioral flexibility during times that there is no easy answer
for where to go next. For example, check out 3-year-old Mateo Makes His Case
for Cupcakes: "Linda, honey, just listen." https://youtu.be/TP8RB7UZHKI This
kid surely got his cupcake!
What do you want to talk about? What do you really want to do? If you want to
hypnotize someone ask them if they have ever been hypnotized before. Ask
about their thoughts. What worked well and if anything didn’t go as expected.
What the subject is communicating to you is a clear outcome that you may follow
exactly, or seek to improve. Asking gives us an answer that can speed up or slow
down the action we may take next.
Prepare to answer frequent questions.
The role you are stepping into is one of a highly specialized communicator. If we
are talking about hypnosis, love, kink, or friends with benefits, there are going to
be questions that we can anticipate getting. Have answers ready and be able to
communicate those answers in the best way possible. Unpacking concepts is not
always easy. There may be some misconceptions that the subject has that should
38
be talked through. Be friendly and respectful. Keep in mind the goal is not to get
into argument. We do not need to pressure anyone. Use softeners as needed.
This is either for them or it’s not. There is no need to apologize for sharing what
you think and believe. Just be respectful and don’t push anything on those who
don’t want it. The goal of our communication is not to overwhelm others into
agreeing with us either. Information does not need us to defend it. We can share
info, we can compare info, and we should make up our own mind with what
makes the most sense for us. How you deal with differences in opinion and belief
becomes part of your reputation. Being intense about anything is something that
others will remember about you also.
Develop your elevator pitch that is contextually appropriate with your goals,
interests, and ways to get involved. Hypnotist’s that see clients in their office call
this a pre-talk. This is what describes the experiences, defines the terms you will
be using, shares a bit of history, tackles misconceptions, and allows the subject to
ask questions. There are many of these pretalks online that you may discover and
tailor to your needs should you wish.
Practice working with hypnotic communication, instructions, and
commands.
Hypnosis is a natural state that individuals regularly move through every day.
Opportunities for communication are everywhere as many people never unplug
from their socially connected devices. All of us are giving and receiving
instructions and commands to each other on a daily basis. Here you will be asked
to think about those every day social interactions as you learn to create hypnotic
suggestions, instructions, and commands that fit seamlessly into those passing
interactions. What we say to others and ourselves can stick with us for a while,
and even a lifetime. Begin to state feedback, instructions, and commands in the
present tense. Think of everything you say as having the potential to be hypnotic.
Let’s put this into practice.
A subject tells you that they are still getting over a headache. You respond by
stating, “Your head is clearing, and feeling just right… noticing your curious
about what is about to happen next.”
39
Conversationally, our communication can be utilized to create cognitive tensions
between expectations and experiences. Consistently shaping your communication
to encourage expectations and the subject’s focus is enough to create a light
trance conversationally. Attention is akin to social currency in today’s world.
Many people have negative associations to being told to pay attention,
concentrate, and focus. It takes us back like an age regression into a classroom
where the Teacher says these things over an over. The thing is, focusing in feels
good. Unifying focus into a manageable stream of cognitive activity is something
that people crave. That attentive awareness between quiet and activity allows us
to be still. In those moments of inner quiet, we come to realize how exhausting
our everyday mindset can be.
Repeatedly inspiring that focus and inner quiet in others, often leads to them
being very affectionate towards us. They begin to associate us with the
fulfillment of their hopes, dreams, motivation, and presence within these
experiences. Soon just being around us encourages those qualities being
manifested within their life more intensely. These qualities will be further
explored in this work. A lot of what we communicate to others is based on
feedback that we communicate in the moment about ourselves. Sometimes that
communication may be as simple as “I’m just like you”. Discover for yourself the
emotions that make you glow with confidence, and exude playfulness, just when
you need it. Whatever you do or say, your body depends on your soul.
Isn’t it strange that we talk least about the things we think about most? We can
ask questions to encourage a person to move along a particular direction. The
following is a transcript of a conversation with a new sub who has some
knowledge of this lifestyle. She didn’t have a lot of experience. While there is
chemistry and a fit here, we’re both exploring if this connection is something we
want. One of the most common questions I get on talking to others about kink
and erotic hypnosis stems from the Tist being shy about bringing it up. That
questions usually goes something like this. “How do I talk about erotic hypnosis
and kinky things without coming off like a creepy authoritarian dick?” To do that
I’ll share with you a transcript. Notice what works and what you can quickly
make your own here.
40
“Me: That's pleasing me to hear. The sex is just part of the connection formed. I
think you will understand that more in time. Good girl.
Sub: I thought you would be pleased. I feel better about myself and wanting
these things. I feel happier and more free to be myself talking with you.
Sub: I can really see how Master slave is a partnership. There is as much giving
as there is receiving. I get pleased with myself when I have thirsty thoughts.
Me: You tell me. How different are your thoughts now compared to how you
were thinking about being just a slave earlier? How different would it be if you
learned this is with every orgasm, hug, and communication? It then becomes
what you are thinking and who you are. So, get thirsty! Be proud that you are
learning and earning this.
Sub: It will really help me that much? I did not realize that, but I’m beginning to
think this is true.
Me: We learn a lot of conflicting and bad things from the world. Many are not
helpful in our heart, mind, or life. You’re engaging in a process that allows you
to rewrite and lose much of that.
Sub: Explaining my fear in that way makes sense. Thank you for being so patient
and answering my questions today.
Me: That fear is just signaling to you that I am important to you. And you want
to be your best. This is what you’re learning to do in your own way.
Me: My role is working with you like this. Your role is to bring what you need to
in order to be in the right mindset to learn. Be a good girl, and learn about the
pleasure of making mistakes and getting things perfect. Mistakes are only wrong
if not corrected. We get to have fun and develop ourselves because of
them. Understand?
Me: Communicating and telling you what I want is not something that stops.
Hugs. Sharing your thoughts with me is also expected that should also not stop.
Sub: I know it won't stop, but I'm just so afraid I'm not good enough for you and
I don't want to make you unhappy, sir.
41
Sub: If we do get to that point please, please, please be gentle with me. Please
tell me the things you expect. I want to please you, sir, but I've really gotten hurt
by someone before. He’d always be saying things about the way I dressed, my
weight, my thoughts, how I reacted to sexual intimacy, just anything you can
think of pretty much. I was just criticized a lot. You're nothing like that but it's
just something I'm very, very afraid of happening again.
Sub: I am, but I just… rejection is scary, and very upsetting for me. I don't know,
I'm upsetting myself by thinking of things in the past.
Me: You are not that person anymore. What if you don't like me? I can think like
that too, but we don’t have too. Smile. If this is what you want, say so. With that
glow and desire, how could I not want you? The nice thing is if I don't like
something, I will tell you what I expect. Just like here You are doing well.
Sub: What if I commit myself and you don't like me as a person?
Me: just keep talking and doing what you're doing. You will either get to the
point where you know you don't want to love without this or we move on.
Sub: First I need to commit to you. In doing that I am committing to bettering
myself with you. Is that right?
Sub: When I commit myself to you will we plan on meeting regularly or is that
something we’ll talk about another time? I'm just curious, sir.
Me: That is right. You're talking to me and this is a process to make sure this is
right for us both. Yes, we can figure out meeting times as we go.
Me: You’re not committing to some general lifestyle arrangement; this is about
the choice to commit to me. As we talk, we are learning more about the life
possible together. Sex, submission, and taking care of one another are just a few
aspects of it. You should be sure enough to commit to me. That's the next step.
I'm not pushing you. You have to really want it because we are developing what
that looks like together.
Sub: When I decide that this lifestyle is what I want to commit to what would be
the next step sir?
42
Sub: I know, and I'm happy I have that choice. I crave so much more but as you
said, it would be new and different, and I am often nervous and hesitant about.
It’s just something I have to work through I suppose.
Me: Anything new is different. As I said this is your choice and it will be
honored. You can always go back to what you had before. It's what you know,
and many people settle for that. Once you make it I expect you to be committed
to what you decide.
Sub: I want, desire and feel as if I belong to this, but there's just a part of me that
struggles to give in completely to what I long for. I'm not sure if it's fear, anxiety,
stubbornness, etc., but I am working on it. I don't want to do it halfway, I want to
surrender to it completely.
Me: That's my girl. You're wanting this desire and feeling how much it makes
you thirsty to engage in life. You have to admit you belong, and that this is part
of you. Every day you want more of it. We don't do halfway with this.
Sub: Yes, sir. Okay. I'll keep working on it to make sure I'm 100% certain with
my decision.
Me: Keep at it until you know with every atom of your body, you want it. This is
my desire, and what’s important for you to feel.
Sub: I think I would enjoy that, sir.
Sub: Question, I feel like I tell you quite a bit, just with thoughts going through
my head, random ramblings and just anything, is that okay? I just want to make
sure that's not bothersome or anything
Me: That makes me pleased. It makes me want to tell you to strip and begin
really exploring and developing you
Sub: I really do enjoy being thirsty for you sir. It makes me feel so good and
proud. Thank you! I'll do my best!
Sub: Are you sure you have that much of an effect on me?
Sub: Just ignore that
43
Sub: Can I touch myself, sir? Please.
Me: Yes, and today you learn about one to three. You must get yourself to the
edge of orgasm and then back away three times before you may cum once. You
should do two orgasms this way. If you lose count you have to start over on the
one to three task. Now, go be my thirsty girl.
Sub Sorry, sorry, sorry I'm in a teasing mood
Sub: I asked you to ignore my comment not make me pouty because I can't taste
you
Me: I chose not to. I get to make that choice. That's something that will have to
happen.
Me: That mouth will taste and lick every inch of me… thinking about that…
Your mouth, will salivate… You will smile… You will want, and you will have
to earn that.
Me: You will soak through many, many, things thinking about what I will do
with you. Knowing that, makes me very pleased.
Sub: I'm going to have to figure out something because at work I'm stuck at a
desk the majority of the time
Sub: I'm going to get so super cute for you, you're not even going to know what
to do with me
Me: I often am too sitting behind a desk too. When I walk, I often take the scenic
routes in stores and just walking around. Thinking about moving forward, you’ll
see my challenges and rewards make you a better girl. Glow with that.
Sub: Yes, sir, I agree!! I'll do something along those lines.
Me: You feeling good and looking good is pleasing. Let's not jump into running
marathons unless you are ready for that. Sustainable commitment is the goal. So,
let’s see the level of activity you are at.
Me: Step one install Samsung Fit or Google fit on your phone. Track your steps
for a baseline. 6k at least is a healthy step goal
44
Sub: Yay! I'll read and watch some porn later! Thank you, sir!
Sub: I'm not the marathon runner fit, but not fat either. Still, I really do need to
exercise. It's just always been hard to make time. I'll probably start getting up
earlier in the morning for it though. If that would please you, sir.
Sub: I look forward to it.
Me: That's a girl. Keeping you healthy is part of your service to me. It makes you
more responsive and better able to take on the world.
Me: Being owned by me is more than just orgasms. Service to me will get you
plenty of those but it will also develop you as a person.
Sub: I'll work on it, sir. And while I do love orgasms, I'm glad to hear that.
Me: As long as you are exercising that mindful desire, I'll accept that today.
Enjoy.”
Reading over text messages tests the flexibility of our thoughts and
understanding. It can be very easy to misinterpret something as messages come
in out of order, in several long chunks, and it can be very easy to get overloaded
by them. Many people love communicating through text messaging but text
messaging cannot accurately convey tone, emotion, facial expressions, gestures,
body language, eye contact, oral speech, or face-to-face conversation, it is likely
messages will be misinterpreted or misunderstood. The real meaning of your
message gets lost through the medium. Calling someone is thought to be more
personal and needing another layer of permission before calling them; even if
you have been texting them.
Beginning the work – Calibration and Collaboration
Hypnosis and trance is not foreign to us. We move through altered states every
day as we interact with the world. As we interact with the world, we are also
interacting with our thoughts as if they’re directly connected to the world. What
happens around us has an impact on our responses and perspectives. Every day
we are maintaining our world view and history through the stories we tell
45
ourselves and others. All our past and future (real or imagined), is used as
internal resources to engage with the world. What all these details have in
common is that they fade into the background and just barely push into conscious
awareness as we go about our day. This in-between conscious and subconscious
awareness is where our habits reside and the point of engagement to transition
into trance and hypnosis.
Altered states are not always profoundly marked as awake and aware vs a
hibernating slumber where everyone is amazed you snored like a grizzly bear.
Everything we do has a root cause that leads into trance, because everything we
do must be processed by our subconscious mind. Our minds are constantly
communicating about the state of our health, our feelings, and what is we are
observing. Doctors directly observe this unconscious/conscious communication
when there is an injury or disease that affects the brain. Conditions like blindsight
challenge the common belief that perceptions must enter consciousness to affect
our behavior. Blindsight is the ability of people who are cortically blind due to
lesions in their striate cortex, also known as primary visual cortex or V1, to
respond to visual stimuli that they do not consciously see. The condition
effectively demonstrates that our behavior can be guided by sensory information
for which we have no conscious awareness of, and this sensory awareness is
happening outside of consciousness. Individuals with this condition don’t
consciously see obstacles in their path, and yet are surprisingly capable of
moving around these obstacles due to subconscious awareness.
In this manual, I will stay away from much of the myth and dogma attached to
the concepts of the mind, hypnosis and alternative lifestyles. In this book, I
define trance as an unguided and natural state of awareness. Trance is a state of
focused, heightened awareness, where communication more easily happens
between the conscious and subconscious mind. When we focus and flow, we feel
ourselves transition into internal harmony. One of the greatest things that a
Hypno Dom can do is move a sub into a hyper-focused state of inner quiet.
Submission’s gift is responding to dominance by encouraging its freedom to
simply be. A sub learns to let go of restraints even as they hold tight and be
completely present.
46
In my work, I’d define hypnosis, (and erotic hypnosis), as focused goal-directed,
altered state of consciousness, that is often induced by another person, as well as
self-induced, and this state allows us greater access to communicate with our
own subconscious. The hypnotic state is a hyper-aware state that can enhance
sexual experiences by removing inhibitions, amplifying the senses, and
intensifying sexual responses. We can create realistic fantasy experiences from
simple tactile sensations, or elaborate role-play scenes like Master/slave, pet
play, becoming someone else, and much more. Many people use hypnosis to
amplify feelings of sexual arousal, submission, and to develop increased sexual
responsiveness to training cues. When exploring the experience of erotic
hypnosis, you will find it often comes paired with elements of power exchange,
but it does not have to. What is erotic to one person may be a turn off to another,
so feedback and consistent communication are needed to achieve unrestrained
goal-directed pleasure. Think about how you will answer the question, “What is
hypnosis and erotic hypnosis?” for yourself. You will get asked this question
over and over as you practice this art.
You will get asked to define hypnosis even for people you have been training for
a while. They will ask you this because you’re able to link the hypnotic
experience with anything they are doing. Their experience with you will expand
the boundaries of what they thought possible and what hypnosis can do. Let me
ask you to write out what erotic hypnosis means to you and ensure you explore
how hypnosis or trance connects to experiences they are familiar with. Below
you will find my friend Damien Atropa’s answer to someone he was training that
asked this question. His response demonstrates the knowledge and control that a
Hypno Dom learns to embody.
“If you wanted, I could snap my fingers and make you orgasm. But how would
that matter? If I merely wanted you to cum for me, I could do that in any number
of ways. What I want, is your submission. With it, I can shift your perceptions,
alter your senses, and reshape your reality. With it, I can create magic, sending
your mind on experiences and explorations it never dreamt possible. Erotic
Hypnosis begins with Dominance and Submission, and from it, we create a
personalized transcendental erotic experience, that is all your own.”
47
Anyone who can reach a significant level of suspended reality (being absorbed in
a book or movie, and daydreaming) or hold a consistent internal focus (reading
this book) could be considered to be practicing a self-hypnosis skill set.
Everything is processed through our subconscious minds even if we don’t
register it within our conscious attention. When working with another person this
is called hetro-hypnosis, and when attempting self-hypnosis this is called homohypnosis in the academic literature of this disciple.
If you’re new to this, all of it may seem overwhelming at first, but do not
compare your beginnings here with the middle of someone else’s journey.
Remember, it is with your awareness and thoughts that you create a world to
walk through. This life, you know the one that you really want, is a onetime
offer. So, give it your all and live it awesomely.
Actively Engage in Rapport
Rapport is the process of establishing an unconscious connection of affinity with
others. This affinity is accomplished by communicating verbally and nonverbally
with them. Rapport is one of the principal elements of unconscious
communication and it can help minimize resistance to your influence attempts.
The techniques of getting rapport work even when we recognize that they are
being used with us. Rapport techniques are designed to synchronize ourselves
with another person in order to create and convey a level of trust, understanding,
and comfortable affinity with us. The rapport process represents several
generalizable, isomorphic, and empathic patterns of behavioral feedback; which
our subconscious recognizes through observed behavioral displays. Those
behavioral displays can signal goodness, sameness, or difference, aggression, and
so much more being communicated back to us.
When engaging in rapport exercises our interactions with someone should be
positive, nonjudgmental, and conveying comfortable confidence. We can say we
have gained rapport with someone when we have established these two qualities.
1. There is a mutual sense of comfortable approachability between you.
2. There is a mutual sense of trusting respect.
48
One of the techniques for building rapport is called pacing. The first step in
pacing is observing the behavior of the person you want to get into rapport with
and begin to take on some of the aspects of that person’s behavior yourself. After
pacing the individual’s behavior, the goal becomes successfully leading the
person to change their behavior in order to stay in rapport with you. Think about
a time this may have happened to you now. I often see people do this naturally
when expressing joy, love, fear, and anger. Break rapport, and how stunning it is
to stay silent when someone expects you to be enraged.
Pacing and leading is just what it sounds like. You are interacting as your
matching some behavior (a head tilt) and mirroring other behaviors (like a smile)
throughout the span of your conversation. You might change your behavior by
changing your posture, moving your body in some small way, and then holding
steady to take the step out of rhythm with your partner. That’s all it takes to test
rapport and lead. As the conversation continues observe to see if the subject
moves their body to mirror or closely match yours. If so, and they do, you have
just successfully paced and led behavior by getting rapport. All of us are
mirroring and matching others all the time. Our behavioral displays are not the
only thing we match and mirror in our day to day lives.
Most of us have accepted a standard of dressing ourselves in different
environments and contexts under the label of fashion, etiquette, or style. When I
say dress business casual you have a pretty good idea what I mean according to
your culture. When a person feels underdressed this relational comparison kicks
in with a sense of disrupted rapport. We are matching and mirroring throughout
contexts and environments, often without thinking about it as we go about our
business. All of us also have some awareness of when to talk more formally and
when to relax into a more personal conversation. If you can imagine what it’s
like to have men talking as if they are in a locker room when they are at a parent
teacher conference, you’ll instantly understand how bizarre this mismatch of
behavioral contexts would be.
All of us display more courtesies or manners when we are dining at an expensive
restaurant compared to eating pizza with our mates at the pub over beers. I am
describing all this so that you can understand that the exercises you are about to
undertake should not be thought of as pulling something over on someone else.
49
We are not fooling them or tricking them. We are deliberately honing an art to
engage in impression management. Rapport exercises teach you to better adapt
the signals you are sending out so you can more effectively communicate and
guide individuals into and through experiences. You don’t have to go very fast to
improve these influence skills. You just have to go forward.
The Gods rediscover themselves by creating adventure and inspiration through
these works. Just think about how many stories are connected to you. I’ve
divided up the rapport exercises in the sections below. As you progress through
these exercises you will realize that getting better at just a few of them will offer
you tremendous benefits in influencing and communicating with others.
Practicing with all of them will allow you to more skillfully move people with a
greater rapport into desirable states, and be more effective with a larger diversity
of people. Arriving at one goal is the start point for moving towards another.
Body-Matching
Body matching is divided up into whole body matching and cross-matching. We
will begin by discussing whole body matching. The aim of body matching is not
to replicate and pace each behavior that the other person does 100%. You should
seek to demonstrate an approximation of the gesture for the person you are
seeking to get rapport with is displaying. For example, if the person you are
observing is leaning onto the side of a couch and chewing on their tongue. You
can lean into the side of your chair and every once and a while make a chewing
motion. The chewing motion might not be as important as the posture, but I
would include it for only a moment or two before we started talking together. If I
seem distant and detached with my behavior in that description it’s because I am.
At least to everyone but the person I’m matching. Pacing isn’t about my comfort
level or closeness; it’s about communicating to the subconscious awareness of
another person that we are alike.
Posture and relative use of space are important considerations when doing body
matching. If you are standing and the person you are observing has their arms
crossed in a self-hugging fashion, you can cross your arms below your chest
while holding your biceps in your palms. If the person you are observing is
50
sitting with legs crossed over the knee, you can cross your legs at the ankles. If
you mimic someone so closely that they notice you copying their movements
exactly, you’ll discover that any rapport you may have had is gone. Now they are
probably pissed off and will often say something about it. Getting caught like this
often happens with newbies as they mirror too closely and change their posture
exactly as the other person does. It is best to wait a few seconds at least before
changing posture and observe if the person is uncomfortable and quickly
changing postures. You want to avoid making rushed, exact displays, that appear
unnatural and irregular. Life is a behavioral display of countless small signals in
every moment. Notice them. Take a moment and try this out now.
While doing cross matching your pacing the other person’s posture and gestures
with the opposite part of your body. If the person you are observing is tapping
their foot to music you can bob your head. If a person crosses their arms you
could cross your legs. Interchanging cross body matching with whole body
matching is just one element that you will need to become an expert into
nonverbally gain rapport with others. It’s really a tragic thing to get a reputation
of making others feel good just by being around you. The time is now. Try this
exercise before moving on.
When matching specific gestures that might be habitual for another person, you
should take the time to get to know how best to utilize these gestures in your
behavioral repertoire. The key is to display these behaviors naturally and
recognize the nonverbal signals the other person is sending as your body
becomes a feedback mechanism for them. Once you start experiencing the results
of this practice it becomes an addiction. It feels good to do it and your presence
becomes associated with this feel good connection. I have had people tell me that
they just noticed I made the same gesture as them and it made them so happy. I
get to be surprised. It only took about a week of practicing these techniques for
that to happen, but the connection was building, and it is real! Real is such a fun
expression to use. How did they know it was real? They could feel it, engage
with it, and began to experience that comfortable affinity as we talked together.
We all recognize that most of the time people lean in when interested in us or the
content of our conversation. All of us have tells, like when a person bluffs or lies
outright, or if a person really wants something. If you’re paying attention you can
51
see the energy and emotion being communicated by their voice and body
language (leaning in closer, pupils dilated, and rubbing their palms). When I
notice that behavior happening, I might rub my hands together right before them
and quickly turn away. Then I might use this gesture later as I talk about really
wanting my product or service. I may also use this as I talk about looking into my
eyes and feeling “MMMmmmm”. I’d rub my hands together and smile.
Perfecting how you pace and lead someone will come down to practicing
delivering verbal and nonverbal feedback so that your displays of behaviors are
understood in context. You will need to learn how to reduce behavioral
expressions down to the most important characteristics so that these displays can
be paired with similar intent and applied to more desirable contexts. This practice
will allow you to become proficient at subconscious feedback with others and
your efforts will over time become automatically more skillful at leading others
to the next opportunity and state.
I’ve found that simply matching the angle of how a person holds their head and
shoulders, as they are comfortably chatting, to be one of the most effective ways
to quickly gain rapport. When observing shoulder posture, we get a sense of a
person’s energy level, such as when they are slumped forward. We can observe
they are feeling sad, tired, and likely there’s something on their mind. When a
person is sitting up straight, they appear and act more aware and confident. I
recommend you check out this short video to see some of the most
misunderstood Indian head nod signals that you may ever encounter.
https://youtu.be/Uj56IPJOqWE The video is comical, but there are
commonalities of head nods shared by American, and European people depicted
with this video as well. The head floats are overly emphasized in the video but
this behavior is a unique signature of many in India. I hesitate to compare
additional cultures nonverbal behavior as I am not familiar with them to do so.
Another element that individuals cannot usually observe from themselves is their
own facial expressions. A smile is something that is contagious when it is
genuine. I enjoy making people smile and facial expressions can shift quickly.
You can lead someone to a new state by displaying expressions that the person
will often display when in that state. Before matching and mirroring a person you
should consider your relationship to that person. Let’s say you walk into your
52
manager's office and he is rubbing the back of his neck. He tells you to come in
and he sits back in a chair with his hands behind his head. So, you sit down and
smile putting your hands behind your head. This posture you assumed is one of
relaxed dominance. If you are making a request of this manager, they may
interrupt you believing you are being pushy, arrogant, or mocking. If you don’t
normally behave this way around your manager start out with smaller gestures.
Accountants, lawyers, law enforcement, and sometimes company managers use
their body language to communicate their status and perceived superiority. By
matching a person’s body language that they use to communicate superiority, you
may leave them feeling unsettled and they will change tactics. As a beginner, you
may not want to match and mirror anyone who is displaying aggressive body
language if they have authority over you. We naturally mirror those people we
like and those that we perceive as being of equal status. Keep in mind you should
not mirror someone’s negative behavior unless you want to amplify it. It is
worthy to mention that if you intentionally assume a certain body position that is
characteristic to a certain emotional state, you will start to experience the feelings
connected with this state.
A good example of this is feeling happy after responding to someone’s
affectionate smile. When you repeatedly assume body postures that display
confidence, you will start feeling confident, even if you didn’t feel so initially.
One example of confident body language is the steeple hand gesture. A steeple
gesture is commonly used by a seated person during a conversation, where
fingertips of both hands are pressed against each other.
When people see you mirroring them, they receive a message that you feel what
they feel. When you look at another’s behavior, you may doubt their motives or
intentions after doing this awhile. We all engage in this behavior without training
to do so. The patterns you’ll observe from others should remove any doubts you
have about their intentions. When working to influence authority, when you
don’t have authority, takes time and multiple strategies. The most effective way
to get good at these communication skills is to do them. Stay patient as you
practice and trust the journey.
53
Breathing Matching
You can genuinely switch someone’s breathing from automatic to manual just by
mentioning it. How a person feels is immediately reflected with their breathing.
The breath is needed to fuel our body in response to our feelings of arousal,
comfort, and pain. Pacing someone’s breathing is something that takes practice
but quickly yields results. I constantly pace and lead breathing to get an
immediate sense of comfort and relaxation with the people I meet. Learning to
pace and lead behaviors that are outside of conscious awareness allows us to
covertly practice these skills as a master would. That means beginning to use
these techniques with people you don’t know yet and those you know well. It
takes just a little practice to detect breathing rates as you start out.
The more you practice these skills the better your subconscious gets at doing it
automatically for you. As you begin looking for another person’s breathing don’t
stare at their person’s chest. I know. I know. It’s the reason I’ve given to a
woman after being caught noticing a woman doesn’t have her bra on too. “Sorry.
Just trying to get rapport!” Imagine what doing that would look like to the other
person. Although, what I like best about myself is the fact that I'm so
understanding when I make a remarkable mistake. When I first started out I did
exactly this. Learn from those long past hypnotic nipples that the opinion of the
woman wasn’t one of interest or understanding.
Endeavor to breathe in unison with the person your observing. Trust yourself to
do this. Noticing this is something you do automatically anyway. You can
observe the person in front of you through your peripheral vision and take in as
much detail of them as you can. Depending on their posture you might notice
their shoulders rising with their breath, or may be able to see each breath as their
stomach moves in and out. You will always be able to recognize a person’s
breathing as a person talks, because most of the time people do not speak during
an inhale.
Breathing Exercise
Walk up to someone and take two or three breathes in unison with them. Then
take a deep breath out of synch with theirs. Notice if the person breaks their
54
breathing rhythm after you. If so then you get to dictate the breathing rate and
begin the process to pace and lead with your breathing. Repeat this breathing
exercise if you need to try again. A deep breath is one of the easiest observable
changes in breathing patterns that can be immediately seen.
By controlling your respiration, even merely focusing on one’s own breathing,
yields stimulation and synchronized feedback between brain areas. This
synchronized feedback may lead to greater control, focus, calmness, and
emotional control while utilizing your breath with your practice. During times of
stress, or when heightened concentration is needed, focusing on one’s breathing
or doing breathing exercises can indeed improve focus and emotional balance.
Athletes, for example, utilize focused breathing to improve their performance and
calm their jitters. Don’t be surprised when you read about taking a deep breath
throughout this book.
Vocal Matching
There are a few elements that go into matching and leading someone through a
conversation. Once you think through these verbal elements of communicating
you will likely discover for yourself that many people do not think about these
vocal elements often. That is unless there is an interaction that draws a person
back to a memory, and they think about what was said, and how it was spoken
repeatedly. Then the words were spoken, the intensity, the intonation of syllables,
and many other qualities are replayed again and again. Let’s begin to review
those elements of vocal qualities now.
Volume
Talking to another person just shy of yelling usually isn’t relaxing or comforting
for anyone. Unless they’re hearing impaired. When matching volume start out
where the person is and keep leading them to the state, and volume you wish to
interact with them at. If they are talking too softly begin as a whisper and bring
your volume up. If they’re talking really loud start there and begin getting softer
and softer.
55
Speaking rate
There is no race to get all your words into a single breath, nor do we wish to
speak too slowly. Meeting a speaker at the current rate of speaking and then
slowing down or speeding up, will get them to change their speed when you have
rapport. Slowing down may be more comfortable for you to get the person
speaking easily with you. Remember the goal of rapport is not to keep you in
your comfort zone. Rapid speed is often emotionally charged speech, just think
about every comedian delivering their punch line, and ever motorist with road
rage raising their fist and screaming at you. Well, those motorists are usually just
proclaiming a long-exasperated appeal to the Emergency Roadside Service
Deities to curse every driver that gets in their way. That appeal usually goes only
a few ways, but mostly it’s heard like this. “AAAAAAaaaaaaaaaaa!” Getting back
to speaking rate, the goal is friendly comfort so whatever that means for you and
your conversation partner is the aim here.
Energy and Inflection
As your pacing a person’s inflection you will want to adjust your voice so it takes
on a similar quality. You may have to take your voice slightly higher or lower
than you naturally speak to accomplish this. Don’t try to do an impersonation of
them. Doing that will get people thinking you are making fun of them and bring
you farther out of rapport. Imagine a three-hundred-pound linebacker talking like
a ninety-four-pound ballerina. It doesn’t quite fit, and it will be a sure-fire way of
pissing someone off if you do this in front of them. When emphasizing aspects of
energy in your voice such as urgency, comfort, or teasing, first bring the emotion
and energy into yourself and speak with it. I recommend you develop a list that
has state specific words that you can say with emotion to practice enhancing your
hypnotic communication. Words like sincerity, honesty, comfort, soften,
amazement, wonder, lust, playful, stop, go on, YOU can Do it, and so many
more.
Vocal Tempo
Some people naturally have a more pronounced rhythm and pace to their speech
than others. I invite you to listen to Christopher Walken speak, and pay attention
to his tempo. https://youtu.be/cfHAiIq-Yeo Tempo generally is measured as the
number of beats per minute, where the beat is the basic measure of time in music
56
or in speech. I’m using music to explain this here because tempo is most
associated with emotive movement of our lives. Rhythm can be thought of as the
pattern of music/speech in time. To illustrate the difference, consider the human
heartbeat. The heartbeat is a division of time, and it can be fast or slow. That’s its
tempo. Using tempo, and appropriate pauses, can cause people to focus in more
intensely on what we are saying. It can also lull them with the calming emotion
conveyed in our communication. Speaking tempo is something that we all have,
but most people aren’t consciously aware of how they are using it while
communicating with others.
Linguistic Harvesting
What are the words that a person emphasizes as they speak about someone or
something important to them? These specific words can be their personal trance
words that describe what that state means to them, and how they know they are in
it. People tend to repeat these trance words and phrases in many different
contexts as these words signify personal preferences. As a person is talking about
things that matter to them, they are communicating many different values about
their thoughts, motivations, and life. How much we can learn from paying
attention to someone as they talk to us is often surprising. You should focus not
just on what they discuss with you, but on the emotional descriptions associated
with the words spoken. Pay attention to the moments that a person’s behavior
shifts to more-animated gestures and expressions, or even where a word takes on
a more resonate emphasis. This is where you will need to make in the moment
analysis of what is being received, question, and test conclusions as appropriate.
Putting all this information together may seem challenging at first, but as you
actively practice listening, recognizing meaningful expressions and gestures, and
offer feedback to improve clarity through these conversations, you’ll begin to
really understand the motivations and intentions of your conversation partner. It
really does get easier the more you do this, but when you begin it's going to feel
like a lot to keep track of. Be prepared to explore interesting topics and ask
questions that allow you to step into the other person’s point of view by
validating their answers to increase rapport. Have a way to record these details so
that they will not be lost. Pro tip: Asking the same question over and over very
quickly detracts from rapport.
57
Differences – Body Language Distinction Exercise
This exercise is designed for you to quickly distinguish between when a person
really likes someone and when they don’t like them at all. Doing this exercise
allows you to get a read of both ends of a person’s emotional spectrum. This
exercise brings together body language and starts you on the path of observing
sub-modalities, eye accessing cues, micro-expressions, general observational
awareness, and active listening skills. Observing these behavioral and emotional
changes can help you become more sensitive and responsive to other people’s
experiences. Being able to read the subtle changes between attraction and disgust
encourages you to improve communication and empathy with others. These are
two polar opposites of emotion so they will be easier to distinguish between
them.
Begin by having your partner pick two people that they will use for this exercise.
They should choose one person that they have a strong attraction to and the other
person, a strong dislike and disgust for. In this exercise, the same people should
be used until the exercise is finished. If they can’t think of a person for the strong
attraction or disgust its okay to imagine the person. If they do imagine a person
or people, they should not hold back as they allow themselves to emote in
response to this person. When your partner is ready simply invite them to sit
down with you.
Begin by positioning your partner in a chair directly across from you so you can
observe them completely. Tell them to think about or imagine that person they
really like and are attracted to. Hold onto the experience of that attractive person,
allowing yourself to focus on all the wonderful qualities about the person, and
accompanying emotions for 10 to 15 seconds. Observe what happens with their
posture, movements with their hands or feet, their head position, eye
movements/eye accessing cues, whether their mouth changes e.g., widens or
turns up, if their eyes are focusing in the distance or close-up and the direction in
which they are looking. Ask them to tell you a little bit about the person after
those 10 to 15 seconds of silent observation. Watch them as they speak and listen
to the qualities that are important to them.
Ask your conversation partner to get up and shake their hands around. Have them
imagine a blank canvas in their mind. After thirty seconds or so of imagining
58
something interesting on that canvas, you’re ready to move on. Fun fact, polar
bears in snow storms looking for items are easy to imagine on this canvas, and
something people remember long after you do this exercise with them.
Now, ask your conversation partner to think about that person they really dislike
and are disgusted by. Hold onto the experience of that terrible person, allowing
yourself to focus on all the disgusting qualities about the person, and
accompanying emotions for 10 to 15 seconds. Observe what happens with their
posture, movements with their hands or feet, their head position, eye
movements/eye accessing cues, whether their mouth changes e.g., widens or
turns up, if their eyes are focusing in the distance or close-up and the direction in
which they are looking. Ask them to tell you a little bit about the person after
those 10 to 15 seconds of silent observation. Watch them as they speak and listen
to the qualities that are important to them.
When finished choose a quick story or conversation you can engage in with your
partner. You only need a minute or so. Once that time is over repeat this process
two more times. You want to go through theses neutral states so you begin to get
a sense of how their nonverbal behavior and features change. A neutral state is
important because we also do not want to have the emotions from one state soak
into the other as we get our initial read of our conversation partner.
Once you have done this three times, ask your conversation partner to think of
one of these people, but do not tell you which they choose. Your conversation
partner should hold that person n their mind and allow themselves to completely
respond to that person. Now see if you can guess which of the two people they
are thinking of. Getting this right will make you appear to be a mind reader with
some people. This is an exercise you can do anywhere.
Language Patterns
There are several different styles of hypnotic language patterns, phrasings, and
meta and tag questions that a person can use. It would take numerous courses to
introduce them all and do these topics justice. Milton Erickson, Richard Bandler,
Dantalion Jones aka David Barron, Robert Dilts, all have training programs on
learning these skills. Hypnotic language patterns allow a person to deliver
instructions and suggestive descriptions, without having to give a commanding
59
order, that a person may or may not accept during conversational hypnosis.
Learning about authoritarian style or direct commands, and indirect or covert
command instructions, can be picked up as you practice and learn this material. I
tend to use a mix of direct and covert command sets, but my emphasis leans
towards direct authoritarian style with some conversational softeners. Practice
working hypnotic instructions, commands, and descriptions into sentences that
you use every day. When you find sentences here that inspire you, write them
down. Plan out where you might be able to use them as you practice.
Using language that comes naturally allows us to lessen any potential resistance
with confident command statements even if they may seem foreign to you. Those
of us that speak English daily may use different words and phrases to describe
the things we encounter. What I call a footlong you might call a sub, hoagie,
grinder, or edibles that bitches make us. Whatever it is, remember that part of the
work you’ll do here is making sure you can apply this information to your life.
Your practice fits this work within the contexts that you operate. Part of this
work is studying up on communication and engaging with life. It doesn’t take
much to make an inviting command, and remind someone, that at any given
moment, they have the power to say this is not how the story is going to end.
This work will provide you opportunities to embrace living and connecting as an
extension of you and your art. How do you define a meaningful connection? We
all talk about finding one, maintaining one, and missing some of them. Today, as
I was writing this, I talked with a friend who was not doing so well. Together we
set out to define it. I define connection as the energy that exists between people
when they feel seen, heard, and valued. Where there is a strong connection a
person can give and receive without judgment, and everyone derives sustenance
and strength from the relationship. What about you? What are your thoughts?
When you find someone, who can make you laugh. Smile. Grow. Lust. Need.
Crave. Thirst. Feel. Make you mad but happy. Hold tight to that. That’s euphoria.
“Let’s go outside and enjoy the green spaces as we talk.” This art is about
engaging others with opportunities to innovate the experience and qualities of
life. This is the thing about honing your hypnotic arts. Our art enables us to find
60
ourselves and lose ourselves at the same time. The people we share this with can
travel without ever moving their feet. Their adventure might begin with a simple
explanation, like if you replace the “W” in “Where”, “What” and “When” with a
“T”, you get the answer to each of them. Then we’ll make apocalypse jokes like
there is no tomorrow and be thankful that there is no jump scares in porn. Smile.
Trust the journey, even if you don't yet understand it. Don’t avoid real feelings in
an attempt to feel happy or positive. Let yourself feel everything, from anger to
sadness to bliss. Perhaps time didn’t heal all wounds exactly, but it gave you an
experience, and a new perspective. All of this happened so we might remember
with a smile instead of a sob. While you’re thinking about all this, ask yourself,
who is the “I” that is really observing and narrating the backstory for it all?
The mind is beautiful because of the paradox it contains and represents. It uses
itself to understand itself through the perceived reality. The world doesn’t make a
lot of sense if we don’t acknowledge how active and prominent our subconscious
is in maintaining our relational context within life. Take sleep for example. Sleep
is weird and highly sought after. On a fundamental level, we consciously know
that we have to fall unconscious in order to ensure a healthy consciousness for
another day of conscious awareness. To get into that desired state of slumber
each one of us has to let go of control, and relax, as our subconscious takes the
reins and transitions us into sleep. All the conscious mind can do is prepare for,
and sometimes wish for their subconscious to move us into a deeper sleep. All
the warm milk, cold showers, and pleading for sleep won’t connect to the
associational process within the subconscious mind for sleep if a person is
conflicted within themselves.
Our personal interaction with ourselves and the world is akin to a hypnotic
communication process. People who do best relating with indirect suggestive
descriptions, instructions, and commands, are those who are skeptical of
hypnosis, or unwilling, or unable to respond to direct suggestions. Just like the
descriptions above, it’s all hypnotic. Some people and phenomena are just better
at focusing a person’s attention and connecting pieces together to stimulate the
subconscious mind. Let’s go over indirect and direct command phrasing briefly
below. Then go back over the last couple paragraphs above. Do you see the
influence attempts and hypnotic communication woven into the descriptive
narratives?
61
Indirect
“Many people want to get at these notes.”
“Learning like this affects motivation and that will change a person’s life.”
“It is possible to commit no errors and still lose. That is not weakness. That is
just life. Success is making remarkable mistakes and growing from them.”
“I hate when people only reply to me in a text message with a "K". Well here's to
wishing potassium on those bastards!”
“She’s ready to learn how to be his.”
“With a single touch, she forgets the words on her lips, the thoughts in her head,
the memories in her heart. Her eyes grow wide as her mind unfolds, open and
accepting, and ready to obey. Nothing is left to hold her back. There is only
potential to be…”
Direct
“Won't you be happy, when you can try this out for yourself?”
“Just allow yourself the flexibility to do this.”
“If you ever feel lost you can find me here. Take a deep breath with me now, and
we’ll breathe the same breath.”
“Never be ashamed! There will always be someone who will hold anything they
don't agree with against you. Be who you are, and the negativity will start to fall
out of your life.”
“Have you ever really craved someone? Not just in a sexual way, but you just
wanted to hear their voice, or feel the warmth of their body… That's what I want
for you.”
“You should know that self-care also covers not arguing with people committed
to misunderstanding and misleading you.”
“I 100% promise, that if you practice and study the techniques here, your
hypnotic ability will increase, and you will want to engage more in life.”
62
An indirect statement allows us to open up potential topics for exploration and
get a read on how the subject feels about the topics, and us at that moment. When
we use indirect statements, a person will relate that information to themselves,
and think about how it makes general sense to them. Using indirect descriptions
offers you a chance to invite suggestions for potential paths in our
communication with others. Using indirect descriptions as suggestions are softer
than telling someone to directly do something, it’s a less obvious form of request,
and often easier for people to accept. Saying something like: “And you might
find that your hands feel heavy or light,” is an indirect suggestion. You may
become acutely aware of how you are subconsciously responding to indirect
statements when you hear and read things like: “And as you go deeper now…” or
“I wonder if you can already feel that relaxation spreading through your whole
body…” When using indirect statements there is no need to tell the listener to do
anything at all. It’s as if we are simply wondering to ourselves and describing
aloud details of interest that have come into mind and focus. You’ll quickly
discover the disruptive power of a seemingly mild generalization. REALLY!
A direct statement or instruction is a simple goal-directed command. "Close your
eyes," is a direct instruction. "Buy my books to change the future." is a direct
instruction or command phrasing. With direct instruction or command phrasing,
we are telling someone what to do and sometimes how to do it. Some people
respond better to direct instruction and commands than they do with indirect
instruction. Let me define instruction and command phrasing for you. “In a
moment you are going to close your eyes.” That last statement is a command
phrase. “I’d like you to keep your head still and perfectly aligned with your neck
and body. I just want you to move your eyes, and follow my finger up… Notice
the swirls of my finger…” This successive command phrasing would be
instructions on how to proceed towards the goal. The only difference between the
instruction command phrasing and general command phrasing is specificity
within the process. Specificity allows you to take a larger goal and divide it up
into chunks that make it easier to comply with, offer more opportunity for
subconscious and conscious feedback, and rapport to be established.
63
The best way to hypnotically communicate with a subject is not always context
specific, but it is audience specific. As a Hypno Dom, you will be instructing
people specifically through expectations, experiences, and in doing the work,
they will recognize this structure as the means to attain their goals by. There will
be questions about process, questions about impact, and you will be asked what
these concepts mean to you. Prepare well, because Dionysus, the god of
winemaking, and his thirsty aficionados, the Maenads, will have questions after
you get them talking about what really matters.
Embedded Commands
Embedded commands are used to deliver instructions to the subconscious mind
by placing emphasis on an element, or an encapsulated command within a larger
statement. Embedded commands are easy to learn, effective, and can be difficult
to detect. This chapter will focus on their use and will offer a simple exercise so
that you can better detect them, and use them. Simply learning to effectively
deliver them will increase your ability to hear them being used around you every
day.
Embedded commands are also referred to as tonal and analog marking, because
in delivering them you’ll have to shift your voice lower or higher in tone on the
command message. Tonal shifts are often delivered slower, and louder than
anything else communicated in a sentence that contains them. The selected tonal
marking a person uses to “embedded a command” in the sentences spoken can’t
be used in any other way. So, you would not use the same vocal inflection you’d
use to ask a question for example. The command must be distinct and separate
from any other variation of vocal emphasis so that it is subconsciously accepted.
In the English language, a rising tone at the end of a sentence is understood as a
question. For this reason, many people go lower with their tone when delivering
a command. Make sure you deliver the command within the sentence as a
command. A statement has no inflection at the end, and your command should be
delivered with congruity. When you say “comfort” the word should be spoken
conveying the emotion of being in comfort with a second or two of pause after
speaking it.
64
Embedded commands can be layered and do not have to be next to each other in
one sentence. they can be spread out in a paragraph, or across a few paragraphs. I
might even propose an author could do this throughout a book. Just a thought…
The embedded commands do not have to be perfect sentences, but the commands
themselves should be kept short and succinct. You will come to more fully
understand embedded commands as you use them more. For example, pay
attention to the bold italics in the next sentence as this is the command to mark
out when speaking it aloud.
“Today, I was thinking about the things we do to treat ourselves and others. As
times, go buy, it’s a thoughtful present that becomes a gift all its own.”
This example is very transparent in text form as it is marked out by italics and
bold, but really listen to yourself saying it. Practice saying this sentence until
these statements are delivered naturally, with proper rhythm, volume, and energy.
Can you understand now how these embedded commands would slip into the
background as you went on speaking?
Once you feel like you got the technique down move on to practice with the
sentences below. Remember, italics and/or bold is what hypnotist’s use to mark
these tonal transitions out for themselves. I’m bolding the tonal shifts here to
make them more visible for you, as you set out to achieve your exercise goal of
getting a listener to close their eyes.
“I wonder, if you'll be able to close your eyes”.
“Those who get the best results with hypnosis usually close their eyes, within a
few moments of sitting down together.”
“Sometimes, it's enjoyable to just close your eyes for a little while.”
“It will be interesting to notice when your eyes will decide to shut.”
“You may decide to allow yourself to close your eyes.”
“You might give yourself permission to figure out, how to best, enjoy closing
your eyes now.”
“I don't know if your eyes will close now, or in 30 seconds, or in two minutes.”
65
“I wonder, if you know that when you close your eyes, you'll have a more
centered experience.”
“When the time is right, you'll probably want to close your eyes.”
Exercise – Practice with a Partner
Find someone you can read these sentences aloud to. Read each sentence aloud,
embedding the commands, and notice if it takes one, two, or more of these
sentences to have them close their eyes for you.
When working with new commands, begin by moving through the process just
like you did above. One sentence alone is probably not going to be enough to
inspire change in daily life. You will want to design many different ways to
deliver your instructions and commands and practice them. When doing this on
your own you’ll choose a context where these embedded messages could be
delivered. Decide on one or two goals you want your commands to accomplish.
Next, write out the commands you will use. Write them out with as much variety
as possible. Then practice and adjust where it’s necessary. Don’t be afraid to
share these with your hypnotic peers as they may have suggestions for you.
Practice your delivery as you did here so that each message is a well-spoken
influence attempt. Practice this with the same excitement you’d bring to go out
and play. If you ever doubt yourself remember these words. We all define our
lives in the same way we define our love. It all comes back to the way we
experience it. Let’s figure out how we really want to describe it together. Smile.
Using Ambiguity
Using ambiguity well can make your hypnotic skill appear to be magic.
Ambiguity is one way to strengthen the relationship between the reader/listener
and the author/speaker because it allows for more than one interpretation of
descriptions and events. It also lets the listener or reader fill in the ambiguity with
what makes sense to them, and that can work in our favor sometimes. At times,
ambiguous messages are used in order to deliver a suggestion or instruction. A
66
good example of an ambiguous word is the word right. Right can refer to a
position of an object, a judgment of something, or an agreement. Ambiguity
becomes relationally understood and when that happens, we should test to ensure
a listener has it right. Still, it is an ambiguous word that is used every day.
Whether we are putting on our right shoe, or whether I was right to butter the top
of my muffin is all dependent on my standards. This chapter is about using
hypnotic ambiguity for your inductions and beginning to question if being
specific is best.
When you hear a statement with an ambiguous word or concept in it your
subconscious mind will analyze all the different connotations possible and apply
a potential meaning into one or more contexts. Some people have real trouble
with uncertainty and multiple contexts when dealing with ambiguity. The extra
cognitive load of ambiguity can keep the conscious mind busy while another
message is being taken in by the subconscious. Is learning about ambiguity
helping you to consider eustress or beneficial stress from engagement within an
experience, or does this topic just make your muscles bunch up? Learning how to
manage stress and keep your cool will improve your professional and personal
life immensely. Practicing stress management will encourage you to endure
while others are battling burnout along with the experiential stress. Taking into
account mental activity and energy level is just as important as muscle power and
stamina. The consideration for this begins with language processing and
communication. I’ve seen people not have the energy to get upset with something
justified after a major loss. Think about it. It all takes energy.
When you are using ambiguity have fun with it. The relaxation of a book can
infuse itself through your attentive concentration, and you don’t need to know
exactly how it happens. Don’t worry so much about getting it wrong or getting
caught. If I tell you to move “into” new patterns of thought, I could easily be
saying to move in two new ways of doing things. One potential path may lead to
your future, and one might lead to the past. If an ambiguous statement overloads
the conscious mind, the result is a deepening trance and the conscious mind tend
to go blank as the subconscious becomes more dominant. When walking through
the in trance (entrance) of ambiguity you will discover that there are many
different types of people; just as there are different types of ambiguity. If learning
the language of the mind excites you dive into language patterns to learn more
67
about them. I am only sharing the basics here. Keep in mind that some people
will tense up and get confused when you use ambiguity. You may have to change
up your communication style if this begins to happen.
Let’s go over some ambiguity language patterns that you will encounter in life
and throughout this book. Nominalizations are abstract nouns. A noun is a
person, place or thing but a nominalization is a thing you often can’t touch, see,
smell, or hear. Nominalizations are concepts or an idea. Since a nominalization is
treated as a noun it is treated as an artifact of our mind. Independence, respect,
relationship, love, freedom, dominance, submission, experience, service, etc.,
when used as a noun are conversational nominalizations we can hear spoken
anywhere. Can you be sure we have the same defining characteristics of love,
lust, relationship, and respect without asking me? Being specific, and some
people are overly specific, does not make your communication better in and of
itself.
Phonological ambiguity occurs when words sound the same but have different
meanings such as; weight and wait, knows and nose, hear and here, by and buy,
to and two and too. Phonological ambiguity is often used in embedded
commands. When you use them as embedded commands, they are tonally
marked out in the same way you practiced above so that the subconscious mind
will recognize them. Two common phonological ambiguity embedded
commands that you will find everywhere are “by now” and “like me”.
Phonological ambiguity can be very fun to use and discover. You’ll find this
category of ambiguity is used often and there are lists of phonological ambiguity
online that will save you some time.
Punctuation ambiguity is used in sentences that share the same overlapping
word. This is a type of ambiguity that annoys the shit out of a lot of people and
not just editors. A wonderful example of this technique is as follows. “That’s
right on POINT to the place that is causing you pain.” If you are doing overload
techniques or confusion inductions you would utilize these more.
Syntactic ambiguity reveals confusion in the meaning of a sentence and the
meanings can be taken in two or more different ways. “Toilet Out of Order.
Please Use Floor Below” – Hmm. Are you sure?
68
You will find a lot of ambiguity in the classic fairy tales, fiction that we grew up
with, and the literary classics that many of us were forced to read at times. For
example, you’ll find syntactic ambiguity in the first line of Keats’ Ode to a
Grecian Urn. “Thou still unravish’d bride of quietness…” The use of the word
“still” may have been penned to represent divergent meanings. In that first line,
the word “still” might mean a motionless object, or it may be interpreted as yet
unchanged potential. Ambiguity in literature and our hypnotic arts, serves the
purpose of lending a generalizable personal interpretation to a literary or artistic
work. By introducing ambiguity in our work, we give liberty to others to use their
imagination to explore meanings contained and associated with our art. This
active participation involves a person, or an audience to engage with the
experience. Sometimes what they bring back will surprise you. Whether you are
reading this book, or something fun and easy; have a notebook ready for those
moments that light you up. Write them down. Make them yours and recognize
fiction as the lie through which people tell the truth.
If you study this book and utilize what you find here, you’ll develop a working
knowledge of hypnotic language before learning the categorical names of each. I
recommend these books to learn more about hypnotic language patterns:
Mastering Hypnotic Language - Further Confessions of a Rogue Hypnotist,
Hypnotic Language: Its Structure and Use, Mind Control Language Patterns, and
The Ellipsis Manual: analysis and engineering of human behavior. The Zebu card
game, and Cult Following, the card game, is a fantastic way to begin using
language patterns by practicing them and enjoying time with friends.
Using Truisms in Hypnotic Work
A truism is a statement that is obviously true and encapsulates a lesson: “You get
what you pay for." We use truisms to smooth transitions in hypnotic
communication and impart lessons that can ring true like wisdom as we share
them. The truisms we use must be applicable to large populations of people and
the topics we learn about span across disciplines. This work is a perfect example
of this. Getting familiar with a variety of topics is helpful to us as hypnotic
communicators because truisms are perfect formats for embedded commands and
69
establishing "yes sets". Love is a condition where the happiness of another person
is essential to your own.
Anything that the subject cannot deny as being true can become a truism for you
to pace, lead, and focus attention on. While truisms I share are indeed "real
world" wisdom, they are perceived through a subjective filter - my life - which,
for better or worse, includes all kinds of exotic and diverse influences. As you
engage with those around you, changing ideas and perspectives, have a lot in
common with walking around with different hats on. Be ready to interrupt
anxiety with optimism and gratitude. My truisms often reflect elements of
Taoism, psychology, M/s ideals, literature, and What They Don't Teach You at
Harvard Business School. This is because its where my interests, my background,
and my art has pointed me. I approached these topics actively so I could talk
about them, teach what inspired me, and encourage others to respond to them as I
have. What are your interests and strengths? It is those areas of interest you
should begin seeking what inspires you and the topics that appeal to those you’re
interested in.
Below you will find some of the truisms I use with the people I work with. As
you read the statements below think about what truisms that you would use, and
look for those that highlight the essential elements of your life and experiences.
Give credit and share shamelessly. May these truisms inspire you and resonate
with how you want to live your life. If not, procrastinate now. Don’t put it off.
My Crowning Truisms
“I think some of the hardest work anyone will do in life is to appear normal.”
“In every moment we’re determining who we are through where we put our
attention and energy.”
“Confidence comes from success, knowledge comes from failure, and excellence
comes out of making remarkable mistakes.”
“The reason you feel the way you do is the story. Every feeling comes with a
story. Want to tell me about yours?”
70
“Some people think they can know someone by looking at their face. Yet what
will a face tell you about the ten thousand thoughts behind one’s eyes?”
“I’m not telling you it’s going to be easy; I’m telling you it’s going to be worth
it.”
“Anxiety tries to convince you that intrusive thoughts have a special meaning.
Part of moving out of anxious thinking is letting go of these misleading
messages.”
“A name means a lot by itself.”
“Your body can withstand and overcome almost anything it’s challenged with.
It’s the conscious mind that’s ready with excuses and will need to be swayed.”
“Don’t wait until you’ve achieved your goal to be proud of yourself. Be proud of
yourself every step of the way. Living is incremental change.”
“Say and do something constructive or encouraging that will help the situation. It
doesn’t take any brains to complain about it.”
“Never confuse what you’re offered with what you are worth.”
“Any event can have infinite interpretations.”
“If you absolutely can’t stay positive, don’t go negative, just cruise into neutral
for a while. Then shift back into gear and pick up speed.”
“Absolute submission is a form of freedom for those who choose it.”
“It’s not the load that breaks you down, it’s the way you carry it.”
“Action causes more trouble than thought.”
“All things are subtly interconnected.”
“Ambition is just as dangerous as apathy.”
“Every emotion can be a motivational force for you.”
“Submission comes with yearnings that only trust in a Master may fully reveal.”
71
“Outliers are often the first to be sacrificed in the name of group solidarity.”
“This is what you are meant for.”
“When you have to hold tight to who you are in so much of your life, finally
letting go is overwhelmingly cherished.”
“More than once in our lives, we’ll find the foundations of our life stripped
away.”
“Project out onto the world what you would like to receive back. Even though it
may remain unseen, we all have an influence on what we attract into our life.”
“Your nature, be it submission, dominance, or somewhere in between, can teach
you that you are like the sky. Everything else – is just the weather.”
Language patterns are a major interest for many interested in influence,
persuasion, therapy, and communication, but not everyone has a passion for
them. They are worthwhile to learn and many of them you’ll pick up simply by
practicing hypnotic communication skills. Consider learning them to better hone
your communication to achieve a goal. They are ultimately a small piece of your
success, but collecting all this information and not having a use for it does little
good. Start where you are and build on your strengths with success. The recipe to
improve is repetition over time, bringing the right energy every time, be aware of
outcomes and feedback from others, and allow time for it all to simmer in your
awareness. Mental rehearsal is almost as good as putting yourself out there. Now
its time for an exercise.
Exercise – Rules You Live By
Our best hypnotic adventures and kinky discipline come from our experiences,
passions, and insights. This activity begins you on a reflective process to get you
outlining experiences you could share with someone to take them deeply into
themselves. We all walk through the world with expectations about how it should
operate, how we should treat others, and how we should be treated. This is a
72
journaling exercise with the goal of getting down on paper the rules you live by
in order to explore your story and world. Take some time now to put down on a
page the rules you live by. Explore the world by exploring your story.
Next, I’d like you to journal on three questions taking them one at a time.
What guides your actions here?
If your closest friends, family, and intimate partners were asked what you lived
for, what do you believe they would say?
What makes you so resilient? What have you relied on to overcome setbacks and
challenges?
When finished look over your story and look for opportunities that you may
engage others within it. If you started running, for example, you can talk about
street running compared to running through a forest. Share about the places
you’ve gone and ask if they are interested in camping, hiking, or cross country
running. Your story can also be about them and you can connect your passions,
ideas, and interests to theirs. Looking over your story is this the one you’d want
to present to someone that demonstrates your passions, interests, and ideals?
Natural and Inclusion Trance
A natural trance is an unguided or dreamy altered state that happens in response
to an internal focus or external stimulus that captures and holds the conscious
attention. From here, it’s just a small hop skip and a jump from recognizing an
undirected trance in someone and stepping in to redirect, or hijacking that trance
into an attentive flow state or hypnotic state. Learning to spot trance
opportunities will allow you to identify key moments within your own behavior
and in those around you to deepen trances or interrupt them. I warn you that once
you start seeing these moments you will not be able to stop. Getting into an
attentional flow feels good as we’re able to tune out the world and work with
complete focus on the activity itself. It also is a state of consciousness that will
improve as you work with hypnosis and trance states.
73
Over the years witnessing people grasp how present and active our subconscious
is in our daily life has disturbed more than a few of them. The idea of our
subconscious doing things that we can’t remember is enough for a person to
question their own free will, and they might question if life has designed
obedience built in. No one is consciously aware 100% of the time, and our
subconscious is constantly taking over as the conscious mind is distracted by the
seemingly infinite details daily. As we learn more about hypnosis and develop
our art, we are in fact learning to communicate with both subconscious and
conscious parts of a person.
I’ve already mentioned that trance hijacking is spotting a trance state and
transitioning that state into another state like a deeper state of awareness where
one is passive or deeper state of awareness where one is active. Those active
states of awareness where a person may engage in working on a project, being
physically active, and working to achieve the goals that you want to achieve is an
inclusion trance. Inclusion trances are process oriented states where participating
in the experience is an intrinsically rewarding activity, you experience
timelessness as your working, and a person is fully present in the moment.
Inclusion trances or up-time trances, as I sometimes call them, are states of
consciousness where the subconscious becomes more dominant in the activity
undertaken. Inclusion trances are the states we engage our subjects in as we
undertake our hypnotic adventures.
I enjoy trance hijacking and utilizing inclusion trances to create hypnotic stories
that overlap into everyday reality. I’ve established inclusion trances to condition
attentional focus and flow with my work and others. When I’m in this state my
work energizes me instead of draining me. While natural trances happen in
response to our own thoughts and external stimulus, inclusion trances are more
dependent on subconsciously competent learned knowledge and behavior. For
example, you are likely reading without sounding out each letter of each word.
You have achieved both subconscious and conscious competence to do this work.
If you were still attempting to figure out how to sound out the syllables, say the
word, and make sense of the word you’d be developing subconscious and
conscious competence to do this work. You would however not be at the needed
proficiency to work with the language with subconscious competence yet. The
74
focus states you achieved would be shorter in duration and extending longer as
your mastery of the material improved.
Inclusion trances are designed with a combination of hypnotic goal-directed
interactions that can incorporate set rules, develop competencies with tasks, and
utilize how we relate to others. Just like when it is time for sleep, the conscious
mind can prepare, but cannot force the subconscious to enter or maintain the
state. Inclusion trances are naturally occurring from the cultural hypnosis that is
inescapably part of our thoughts, behaviors, and imaginings that work with what
we know. Cultural guidelines and rules work just like guidelines and rules that
we adhere to when completing tasks. Even knowing when its advisable to break
rules will have value-based criteria associated with a decision. We have rules
about when its best to follow the rules and rules to consider breaking the rules.
What does that say about how we live our lives? This would still be the case if
you lived in solitary confinement since you were born.
Breaking norms and rejecting cultural values can lead to social sanctions such as
earning an undesirable label such as bad boy, or trashy. Depending on the
severity of the action taken it may lead to legal sanctions, such as loss of
freedoms and privileges such as driving a car, fines, imprisonment, and removing
an individual’s right to vote. Values are not static. They vary across time and
between groups as people evaluate, debate, and change collective societal beliefs
every hour of the day. Most values also vary from culture to culture. The norms
define how to behave in accordance with what society has defined as good, right,
and important, and most members of society adhere to them publicly. What you
will do as a Hypno Dom is establishing formal and informal norms as you
become an authority figure representing a way of life. Formal norms are
established, written rules that become the guidelines of behavior. Ownership
contracts are formal norms, so are employee manuals, behavioral contracts to
play in the public dungeon, and “no running” signs at swimming pools all fall
into this category. Formal norms are the most specific and clearly stated of the
different types of norms. Also, they are the most socially enforced behavioral
rules both publicly and privately.
While the agreed upon list of formal norms everyone lives by may be long, the
list of informal norms is much longer. Informal norms are the casual behaviors
75
that we all exude as we interact together and these are generally conformed to.
People learn informal norms through observation, imitation, and general
socialization. Some informal norms are taught directly, “Hug your Nana.” or “Put
the brim of your cap straight and forward.” We also learn by observation the
consequences of violating an informal norm when someone else does it. Did they
get a funny look, or did they get punished? Children learn quickly that picking
your nose in public is grounds for embarrassment when they see someone
shamed for it. They also learn that the consequences of getting caught may not be
as severe as enduring a stuffy nose. Although informal norms define personal
interactions by dictating appropriate behaviors, they tend not to be a written set
of rules. Reality is a culturally determined global perspective and any
interpretation of reality is based on a society’s language and collective values.
The Sapir-Whorf hypothesis is based on the idea that people experience their
world through their language, and therefore understand their reality through the
culture embedded in their language. The hypothesis, which has also been called
linguistic relativity, states that language shapes our thoughts. For example, unless
people have access to the word “ambivalent,” they often cannot recognize an
experience of uncertainty due to conflicting positive and negative feelings. You
may remember a time when any issues you thought of could be described as right
or wrong, black or white, and all of it a binary choice without a middle ground.
Essentially, the Sapir-Whorf hypothesis states, if a person cannot describe an
experience then the person cannot have the experience. When we are designing
and optimizing states, having your subject explore and describe what they want is
more than engaging them. At a certain level, it is reality creation and
maintenance.
Think of the Sapir-Whorf hypothesis as a baseline in linguistic determinism and
hence our internalized associations. The structure of our language can strongly
influence our world view and experience in our daily life. When our view of the
world changes so does our language. This is one of the reasons I often tell people
to use their words, tell me about this, and have them vocalize to themselves. Use
this principle as you prepare concepts, hypnotic adventures, and examples that
are clear and enticing as you describe them. The emotion and descriptions you
offered may fade into the background of their life, but their subconscious will
76
still draw upon them as a resource. The example often paired with the SapirWhorf hypothesis is the Inuit vocabulary for snow.
It’s thought that the Inuit can think more intelligently about snow because their
language contains more sophisticated words distinguishing various forms of it.
Those different forms of snow describe experiences of snow under different
circumstances along with their accompanying qualities. If your curious about
some of these words for snow here is a few. You could use the word
“matsaaruti,” for wet snow that can be used to ice a sleigh’s runners, “pukak,” for
the crystalline powder snow that looks like salt, “aqilokoq” for “softly falling
snow”, and “piegnartoq” for the snow that is good for driving sled.
Now, I want you to think about this example and imagine you learned many
unfamiliar words for sex, commitment, power exchange, ownership, and
submission. Does it sound like your experience growing up? Do you think that
you might have different ideas of things to try out and share with others after
discovering that you’re excited by what you are learning? Do you think that you
might be able to describe a few sexy scenarios like the best thing that ever
happened to consenting adults? If you are inspired to explore these ideas, I think
you’ll also agree with me that sometimes the differences between cultures are not
nearly as large as the differences inside a culture. As a socializing agent, these
details are important to think about. Especially if what you value and encourage
in others is intended to offer another path than what is presented as normal or
expected of a person.
A subculture is a smaller cultural group within a larger culture group. The people
in a subculture are part of the larger culture but also share a distinct identity
within a smaller group. Countless subcultures exist in the US alone. Ethnic
groups share a distinct language, food, and customs of their heritage. All these
qualities provide us with just a bit of exposure to other cultures. Don’t believe
me? I promise you George Washington was not as excited about Taco Tuesday
as we are today. Subcultures can also be united by shared experiences and
interests. Biker culture revolves around a dedication to motorcycles and you
might instantly think of leather jackets and Harley Davidsons as I do. Some
subcultures are formed by people who possess trait preferences that differ from
the majority of a society’s population. A perfect example of this is Silicon Valley
77
where many of the techies have grouped together with certain geographical areas.
Sometimes those areas are parking lots because the price points are too
expensive. Knowing a few people that live and work there it's strange to hear that
an income of around four million doesn’t make them well off financially either.
It’s a different way of life and therefore a different culture.
Subcultures differ from countercultures. Countercultures are a type of subculture
that rejects some or the majority of the larger culture’s norms and values.
Countercultures do not cooperate or function easily within the larger society, but
in contrast, subcultures tend to function relatively smoothly within the larger
society. Countercultures might actively seek to defy the larger societal norms by
developing their own set of rules and norms to live by, and they may actively
seek to produce changes in the society around them. Cults, a word derived from
culture, are also considered counterculture groups, but that isn’t always the case.
Depending on your world view and culture, Harry Potter, Doctor Who,
Transformers, Rick and Morty, and My Little Pony, might range from awesome
to mildly entertaining, or a sinful agenda that teaches values and perspectives that
lead to a deeper life of depravity and wickedness. Individuals and society need
more than agreement and conformity to be healthy.
Let’s get into some of the terms that allow us to evaluate and unpack cultures and
different interpretations of ideas that we encounter. These terms you will read
below are some of the memorable ones that were tossed my way more than once.
As you read them over notice the similarities and differences that could impact
your message being received by others.
Ethnocentrism, or evaluating and judging another culture based on how it
compares to one’s own cultural norms.
Cultural imperialism comprises the cultural aspects of imperialism. Imperialism
here refers to the creation and maintenance of unequal relationships between
civilizations and people, which often favors the more powerful civilization or
people. Thus, cultural imperialism is the practice of promoting and imposing a
culture, usually that of a political nation or religion, over a less powerful society
and people.
78
Culture shock is the experience a person may have when they move into a
cultural environment which is different from their own. Culture shock is also the
personal disorientation a person may feel when experiencing an unfamiliar way
of life due to visiting a new country, a move between social environments, or
simply transition to another type of life. Culture shock happens because people
aren’t always able to understand or anticipate the affect cultural differences have
on them.
Cultural relativism is the practice of assessing a culture by its own standards
rather than viewing it through the lens of one’s own culture. Cultural relativism
requires an open mind and a willingness to consider, and even adapt to, new
values and norms. Pride in one’s own culture doesn’t have to lead to imposing its
values on others.
Cultural norms are guidelines on how to act in different situations and they are
taught to us by socializing agents within a culture. Social norms help to create
order in society by allowing humans to understand typical behaviors and set
boundaries in their culture. Norms include routine daily activities, such as
answering the phone with "hello," using a medium-pitched tone of voice during
conversations, wearing appropriate clothing, and driving or walking on the right
side of the road, how to flirt with someone, and how to politely disagree. I would
also like to add that pineapple belongs on pizza here.
Social control is the mechanism of social solidarity and conformity. It attempts
to regulate the behavior, attitudes, and actions of individuals to maintain social
order. For example, how many things can you think of that isn’t taxed, regulated,
or illegal to partake in as you enjoy them? Any person living in society must
adopt some rules and regulation of their behavior. Social control can be a form of
legal control; thus, any law is a form of social control. The control exerted from
socializing agents is intended to be normatively corrective and civilly reinforcing
for our actions. The people encouraged to enforce norms are our family, friends
and even strangers we pass in the street. I think everyone has heard the phrase,
“See something, say something.” This is an example of concertive control.
Socialization is the process of internalizing the norms and beliefs of culture to
function in society. Socialization encompasses both learning and teaching. Thus,
socialization is how cultural continuity is maintained. Humans need social
79
experiences to learn their culture and to thrive within it. Socialization essentially
represents the complete process of learning throughout our lives and is one of the
chief influences on behavior, beliefs, and actions.
Factors that affect social development in adulthood are careers, family, and
marriage. A person’s career choice is an important part of their identity. Once a
person establishes a career, and then marry, they spend less time socializing with
friends.
The principal agents of socialization are our families, the education system,
peer groups, institutions of vocation, religion, politics, and the media. Each
person learns values, beliefs and social norms through this process of
socialization. Socialization is a process that starts at birth and continues
throughout the lifespan to influence a person's identity and their role within
society.
Culture refers to a way of life, symbols, language, values, beliefs, and norms for
a particular society or group.
What you have read in this chapter is what makes the stories we tell ourselves
and others work. Yes, it is happening inside our head, but don’t make the mistake
of thinking that the experience leads to anything less than real. This topic of
cultural creation allows us to connect experiences, identities, descriptions of our
interactions, and our emotions with a myriad of events that we represent as our
world view. Inclusion trances are a combination of hypnotic goal-directed
interactions that can play off, or utilize cultural criteria, such as how we relate to
others through a shared set of cultural norms and perspectives. Inclusion trances
are co-created experiences that we can develop through conditioned associations.
Working with this knowledge makes us recognize ourselves as socializing agents
as we share experiences, design our interactions, and put together innovative
ways to meaningfully walk through the world. There is nothing artificial about
this process. Our knowledge of it allows us to better shape the reality we live by
and what we walk away with.
Now that I have explained how cultural criteria can be utilized in the same way
that task-based criteria are for inclusion trances, let’s go over the benefits of
trance and hypnosis.
80
Benefits of Trance and Hypnosis
Trance is a meditative state that can be intensified into hypnosis. For this reason,
the benefits of meditation, trance, and hypnosis can be looked at as a whole, but
the activities you include in your practice will get you more or less of the
following qualities.
Reduces Stress: Many styles of meditation, trance, and hypnosis help reduce
stress. Daily practice with meditation, trance, and hypnosis can also reduce
symptoms in people with stress-triggered conditions.
Controls Anxiety: A daily practice with meditation, trance, and hypnosis helps
reduce anxiety and anxiety-related mental health issues like social anxiety,
phobia, and obsessive-compulsive behaviors.
Promotes A Positive Outlook or Disposition: Research shows that maintaining an
ongoing habit of meditation, trance, and hypnosis may help you maintain these
benefits long term.
Greater Self-Awareness: Self-inquiry and developing increased mind-body
awareness can help you to increase your sensory acuity for situations and
recognizing social cues. This can be a starting point for making other positive
changes and making better choices.
Promotes Concentration and Attention span: Several types of meditation, trance,
and hypnosis can develop your ability to focus on a task and maintain attention.
The tasks involved in meditation, trance, and hypnosis can overlap in techniques
and goals. There will be more on this later in the book.
Can Promote Learning and Reduce Age-Related Memory Loss: The improved
focus you may develop through regular meditation, trance, and hypnosis may
increase memory and mental clarity. These benefits can help fight age-related
memory loss, dementia, and train your memory to better learn, track, and
organize details. A perfect example of training memory like this is the memory
palace.
Can Increase Kindness and Empathy: When you are not consumed with your
own feelings, you can use your powers of empathy to focus on others. Notice
81
how they look, listen to what they say, and imagine what they are feeling.
Noticing how another person is feeling and adding a little kindness and
compassion when they need it most can go a long way toward making things
better for both of you, and for the world. Many styles of meditation and hypnosis
have a focus on kindness, compassion, and empathy because it makes a
difference in us and the world around us.
Can Promote Mental Discipline to Make Changes: Meditation and hypnosis can
develop discipline and reinforce mental and physical responses that can
encourage you to avoid triggers for unwanted impulses. This can encourage you
to make better choice, practice and engage in preferred behaviors, and redirect
other unwanted habits. The same joy and intensity you can direct to a hypnotic
orgasm you can condition onto your experience of living your work.
Can Promote Better Sleep: A variety of meditation, trance, and hypnosis
techniques can help you relax and manage the "runaway" thoughts that can
interfere with sleep. Your regular practice can shorten the time it takes to fall
asleep and increase sleep quality. Counting imaginary sheep is one of the oldest
trance exercises I still talk about today with people.
Can Help Manage Pain: Meditation, trance, and hypnosis can help diminish the
perception of pain. Any pain should be referred to a Medical Doctor for their
advice and treatment.
You Can Practice Anywhere: If you're interested in incorporating meditation,
trance, and hypnosis into your daily routine seek to try out and learn a few
different styles and guided exercises. It doesn’t matter if you only have a few
minutes or an hour. We all start where we are and as we exercise our mental
capacity, we develop it.
Designing an Inclusion Trance
Inspiring a natural trance is easy. You could put someone in front of the fire and
have them watch the flames with you. You can watch a sunset or read poetry.
This section is about designing an inclusion Trance and there are two types of
82
Inclusion Trance to consider. The first is an impromptu trance where there is a
specific goal and the subject knows a plan of action to complete this task. We can
simply have them focus on the pieces and we can increase satisfaction,
enjoyment, and comfort by instructing them how good it can feel as everything
comes together for example. As you get farther into this book, you’ll come across
more command phrasing and examples on how to intensify motivation and
feelings throughout any process.
An advanced Inclusion Trance will involve you having the subject taking you
through a task and their plan of action. Move through the process with them and
then streamline the process to increase, motivation, enjoyment, and intensify or
diminish elements to associate their best to achieve the goal. Not sure how to
begin? Start where you are and then learn about your subject’s experience. Once
you have the details of their experience you can develop it with them. So, let’s
begin with a teaching example of a very simple inclusion trance.
Enjoyment is a trainable sensation and enjoyment and concentration have a direct
relationship. The more we enjoy a sensation, the more concentrated we can
become, which in turn increases the enjoyment even further. Do you need to be
in a deep hypnotic trance for command phrasing to have an effect? Let’s find out.
Notice the sensation of air on the back of your hands right now. Can you find
something very wonderfully pleasant about that? One of those hands feels better
than the other. Notice something really pleasant and wonderful about that too.
And when you do, you just might smile. It’s simple, and I want you to hold onto
that feeling. How would you describe this experience? This is how we could
begin developing this experience into something more.
I realize I’ve set the bar pretty low by encouraging you to seek the amazing
pleasantry of oxygen, but this short lead in is really all that it takes to bring this
sensation into focus. The vehicle for my instructions is conveyed within a lesson
that lead may lead to a bigger story. All we need is something just shy of neutral
to demonstrate how we can intensify this sensation up through the gradient of
awesomely pleasant heights. How the plot points of your life are arranged into a
narrative can shape who you are - and who we are is a fundamental part of the
statements we communicate daily. Inclusion trances use that because they use the
details of our life.
83
To have someone understand your heart and mind is a special kind of intimacy.
Perhaps the facts of someone’s life, presented end to end, wouldn't exactly
resemble a narrative to the outside observer, but the way people choose to tell the
stories of their lives, to others and to themselves, almost always has a narrative
arc. That narrative arc becomes a feedback loop in itself. In telling the story of
how you became who you are, and of who you're on your way to becoming, the
story itself becomes a part of who you are. One might say that an effectively
written story could stimulate a desire to more fully engage in such a trance. A
person’s life story is not a Wikipedia account of the facts and events of a life
lived. Any story, can come to represent the path you are on, but let’s make this
one a great one.
A personal narrative becomes a form of identity statement in which the elements
included in the story, and the way it’s told, can both reflect and shape the identity
of the speaker. Once in trance, a person can be shifted into a deeper hypnotic
state and then be fractionated in and out to take part in hypnotic quests,
challenges, and adventures. As Hypno Dom’s we’ll use this same process of
personal narrative and culture to fashion an experienceable reality that allows us
to test, explore, and hone who it is we want to be. We chose this life. We do not
settle for it. Pay attention to the things you are naturally drawn to in life. They are
connected to our path, passion, and purpose. Have the courage to follow them
and build a life that is meaningful to you. After all, it is your boldness that will be
inspiring others to reach past their comfort zone.
A life story doesn’t just say what happened, it says why it was important, what it
means for the person, who that person may become next, and never entirely
points to what the future holds. There's an old adage that everyone has a book
inside of them. Ultimately, the only material we’ve ever had to make stories out
of is our own imagination, and life itself is simply what’s happening around us.
Life is complex, but that is not the only way to experience life. There are lots of
things going on in our environment and in our lives always. To hold onto the
details of our experience, we need to make meaning out of it. The way we do that
is by structuring our lives into chronological stories with different versions of us.
Each version is just another hat we could wear.
84
When we are working with BDSM or hypnosis we are constantly engaging others
with a shared agenda. While you may not get someone to immediately commit to
short - or long-term goals with you, starting with a shared agenda that describes
what you will do together, the responsibilities, and the potential outcomes will
begin guiding the process towards your goals. If the process of laying out a
shared agenda sounded a lot like getting consent for you, well then you have
discovered an opportunity there. Promoting a shared agenda encourages
participation and trust that can point the way to future adventure.
How Deeply Hypnotized Are They?
While you begin trancing people, you may not know what to expect. This section
will describe what you can expect in regards to characteristic hypnotic behavior.
If you are working with a moderately responsive person, and you do mostly
everything well, these are some of the things you can expect to hear in the debrief
of the hypnotic experience with you. In the initial stages of hypnotic trance, a
person can appear slightly zoned out and agreeable. After being lightly
hypnotized a subject might carry out every command they’re given, but come
away from the experience saying "I was just playing along. I don’t think I was
really hypnotized." This is why social proof and convincer exercises are often
paired with people who are lightly in trance and hypnosis. Sometimes they may
forget what they did or said.
In a medium state of hypnosis, people are intensely focused and engaged with the
experience. They may report after that while the hypnotic experience was
happening, they knew they weren’t really Captain Kirk, but it felt good. So,
they’d play along whenever they heard the hypnotic trigger. It felt so real that at
times they were absorbed in the experience. This last statement is not a
contradiction of the experience. It is the conscious mind processing a
subconscious process and it’s only just recognizing that the experience felt like
being on autopilot. Sometimes a person might have a defensive reaction to
recognizing that they were acting in a way that was out of their conscious
control. You may have to spend time explaining that this is natural and normal.
85
In deep states of hypnosis, people can make real practically anything within their
imaginative limits and interact with it as reality. After their hypnotic experience,
they’re likely to report that they somehow believed for a while that they were
Captain Kirk. That they believed the audience was completely naked, that
somehow their ass fell off, and that the Hypno Dom was the most incredible guy
they’d ever met. Well, still is, because there is no reason all those qualities need
to completely fade away. After hypnosis, the subject will still be suggestible and
responsive to returning back into hypnosis or trance. The qualities you want to
keep can be reinforced by instruction, command, or revivification with emphasis
on them. That’s all it takes to encourage those hypnotic qualities to just hang out
like a hair in a biscuit. Once these qualities are experienced in the way they’re
meant to, it's not easy to go back and simply have your meal in the same way you
used too.
Pattern Interrupts
When our train of thought is broken, there is a moment where we need to collect
ourselves. That brief moment of interruption stopped you from completing your
thoughts and may have left you feeling some confusion. It is in that blanked
moment that communication can directly be applied to the subconscious and
hijacking your trance state can occur. Once I see an altered state happening it can
be interrupted by doing the unexpected which can confuse focus and flow, and
anything can be put into your mind. Whatever is spoken with command phrasing
in that blanked moment is often quickly forgotten or never fully registers
consciously with the person. Let’s look at a pattern that many of us have adopted
in the age of robo-calls to every phone we own.
The pattern should be familiar. Someone calls and either asks for us directly
identifying themselves as a salesperson, or they ask for someone else then inform
us that we will do. Sometimes we get a tone or odd noise that tells us it’s an
automated cold call, and we tend to hang up. When the cold call actually gets me
answering the phone it tends to go like this.
Sales Call Pattern: “Hi Joe, this is Juan Power with Coffee R US. I’m reaching
out to people in the area who could benefit from my coffee program. Does that
sound like something you’d be interested in?”
86
Me: “Nope.” I disconnect.
Knowing that this is a routine pattern that has the caller quickly disconnecting
they might attempt to interrupt that response in a few different ways.
Sales Caller: “Hey Joe, Juan Power with Coffee R US. Does that name sound
familiar to you?
Me: Um… (Thinking about it.) Did we meet over coffee?
This pattern interrupt may not get Juan a sale, but it does get him more
information he can use to potentially get the sale. One goal of interrupting a
person is gaining control of subconscious focus and behavior, but information
revealed in this process can make the influence attempt more effective. The
above technique attempts to quickly redirect conscious attention so that
unconscious resources can be accessed. This is a very simple example that
changes the outcome from the immediate hang-up of the phone. This technique is
used increasingly in sales but also in circumstances where people seek to
influence without authority. Let’s look at how this could be done in another
environment and I’ll change up the goal a little bit too.
It’s best to try this exercise when there is not a line of people behind you. Next
time you get some coffee at your favorite café ask the counter person to tell you
about their tea flavors. After they rattle off one or two tilt your head to the right
just a bit, snap your fingers, and ask them a simple personal question. Something
like this. “Are you a person that mostly prefers movies or TV series?” Watch to
see if their mind blanks for a moment. The expected pattern of customer behavior
is thrown off. If you can watch them trying to figure out how to get back into that
routine server interaction there is your opportunity. Once you recognize this
blanked point is happening, at that moment you can anchor it. Anchoring will be
talked about more in the next section, but for now, I want you to know that you
can fire off that anchor with your server to trance them more quickly next time.
Get this state anchored a few times, and test it while the server is about to make a
new drink for you, or when they are ringing you up for example.
Pattern interrupts can be a great tool for changing your state and the emotional
state of others. The shock value of not giving a “typical” response is what ignites
87
the opportunity for change to happen in the moment. Whenever its possible
adding humor to your interrupts establishes these attempts as moments of fun.
For example, let’s say you and a friend agreed to go walking after work every
day, but your buddy is unloading his stress from the day. It’s slowing you both
down and not helping him destress as you exercise. Get an agreement from him
that every time one of you slips into negativity the other one will assume a power
pose while walking. At that point, the power poser says nothing until the other
person realizes what is going on and they must sustain the pose for 30 seconds. I
guarantee one of you will laugh and this may continue well past the hour of
planned exercise together.
Recognizing the Physiological Changes of Trance
It’s not as easy to recognize the signs of trance in oneself as it is in others. Not
everyone will display the same characteristic signs of trance and an active trance
will look different than a passive hypnotic trance. Here are some of the
physiological changes you may identify.
Eyes
A subject’s eyes may tear up, they may be locked in a fixed gaze, they may have
slowed blink rate, their eyes may be closed and move back and forth as if in
REM sleep, or they may be slightly watery or glazed over. The pupils of the
subject will begin to dilate and get larger.
Face
Involuntary twitching of the face or the lips, softened or frozen expression,
swallowing a few times, changes in skin complexion such as paleness or
flushing, and their head may slump or be leaned forward.
Full Body Changes
You would look for changes in breathing, slowing gestures, and
motionlessness, and much hard to notice is pulse rate changes.
This is not an exhaustive list but it more than enough to get you started.
Spotting and Redirecting Trance Exercise
Put on some relaxing music and having some quality time. This exercise is about
observing your partner and decide between you if you will go about normal
88
activities, or do conversational, or formal hypnosis. Ideally, you will do this in all
three practice situations just mentioned.
Your goal in these practice situations is to pay close attention to your partner no
matter what else is happening around you. When you observe indications of
trance, I want you to nod your head and with your most hypnotic voice say the
word, “perfect.” Then use command phrasing to move them into being “really
comfortable, feeling great,” or something of your choosing. You can do this
exercise for as long as you would like, but in training, I’d give an hour for each
person to observe and direct the trance.
Value Elicitation
Our values are role specific, state, and context dependent. What an individual
value’s steers their awareness towards good and not so good choices and most
people are completely unaware of what values are the most active in their life.
Ask someone how they came to hold a particular value as important and when is
the last time they actively participated in action from this value. You’ll quickly
get a sense of how important it really is to them. Values like beliefs can create
patterns of behavior that are not always helpful to you. While talking about what
matters to you can create opportunities that integrate subconscious and conscious
desires and wants that isn’t always the case. Being open and honest with yourself
allows you to work with those details but sometimes we don’t do that. This
section will go examine values and how to talk about them with others.
This section is filled with exercises to begin working with your own values so we
can explore how you communicate them through behavior and language. Being
able to talk with others about their values also tells us how to work with and
focus these results onto ideas and action. Self-talk urgently spoken right before a
report is due is going to be focused on different things than when that deadline
wasn’t so close for example. At times we also take on the values of others that
we respect, are in authority, that are prevalent in our environment, are deemed as
successful, or because we want to please someone else. It gets really interesting
when the values deemed as important to please and encourage ourselves come in
last. Values are trance words that describe what’s most important in our
awareness and how you recognize that value in context depends on many factors
89
that affect you. Let’s look at some general values that may be important for you
in life.
Creativity - Dependability – Freedom – Fairness – Sexual Conquest – Loyalty –
Being Authentic – Being Compassionate
When I wrote this list, I started putting down the values on the first line and on
the second I put the word “being” in front of two. Did those two values seem
more approachable or grounded to you as you think about them? Why do you
think that is? This is far from an exhaustive list so be sure to explore working
with values that matter to you on a daily basis. Not sure how you can get begin
talking with someone about their values? What about starting with yours?
Value Submodalities Exercise
Get a pen and paper and write down three or four things that you find really
boring. Be sure to label this your boring activity set. When you have got those
activities down on the page, describe what makes those activities so boring to
you. Next, write down three or four activities you love doing. When you have got
those activities down on the page, describe what makes those activities so boring
to wonderful for you.
Next pick one of the boring activities and one of the activities you love. I want
you to explore the experience of the boring activity, but begin to describe as an
activity you love. Then take the activity you love and begin to describe it as an
activity you find boring.
Next journal on this experience and how it felt to explore these activities this
way. What did you discover about the ease of transitioning this experience?
Try this experience with someone else. As you share these experiences with
others you are engaging in a natural trance exploring these topics. Trance, like
hypnosis, is a pleasurable state and makes it very easy to bond over the content of
what your exploring and the excitement of the activity. The more we explore
together the easier it gets to access and describe these personal preferences. To be
clear this exercise does not engage the value directly. It engages the
submodalities (characteristics that establish that state) and being in a state allows
us to express qualities that communicate that state. There will be more on
submodalities later in the book.
90
The biggest barriers to our personal growth often remain below our conscious
awareness radar. The barriers that elude you are defense mechanisms that operate
so quickly they appear to be natural, intelligent choices, but in reality, they are
nothing more than protection mechanisms keeping you from changing, and
creating true personal growth and development. This next exercise is designed to
uncover the subconscious mechanisms that we have carried with us in their many
disguises. The first step to overcoming personal barriers is to identify what keeps
you from reaching your goals, and then take steps to remove those impediments.
While the process may sound simple, overcoming personal barriers can be one of
the hardest things you have every accomplished. This exercise will allow you to
think about who you want to be, what you want to bring into this world, and how
there can be many ways to bring what we want into our lives today.
Removing Barriers Journaling Exercise
Take out your journal and one sentence at a time move through this exercise.
Only stop to move on to the next sentence when you feel you have fully
expressed yourself and responded with an answer.
If you had no financial limitations or worries how would you spend your time?
What would be the most important elements of life and why? The phrase “what’s
important to you” is one you will use often. What are you trying to communicate
with it and what do you want to discover from it? What do you have experienced
by having that (value) important thing in your life?
Values can be anything, any word that comes to mind, there are no right or
wrong answers so don’t over think it. Even a piece of technology can represent a
value that a person can experience by utilizing it. How is what you value
important and meaningful to you and the world? Daily values are your core
values. What are the values you focus on daily?
Rank those core values by frequency of engagement in your thoughts and life.
Rank those core values by frequency of motivation to drive your thoughts and
action in life. Each level of development in life will call mature different
characteristics and qualities of you. Are those ranked core values the ones you
need to be the person you wish to be? Are those core values in the right order?
Rearrange them and describe how that makes you think about experiencing life
differently. When you are satisfied with that ranking and arrangement ask
91
yourself, “How are you living to express these values in your thoughts and
experiences daily?”
Values are dependent on your overall situation and goals, and as the situation
changes different values rise and fall in importance. At times, entirely different
values will come into play to replace what you thought you needed. Pay attention
to those circumstances that you recognize this behavioral flexibility. You may
have just discovered a better way to live and a value you need more than realized.
You can see this value flip immediately when a person is excited by stress, pain,
or passion. Who a person is when no one thinks they are being observed is very
revealing. Our choices are very much state dependent, and our value hierarchies
are likely to leave us frustrated when they are not authentically expressed.
If you aren’t sure something is really important to you then simply don’t focus on
it for a while. If it’s important to you it will reemerge into your focus all by itself.
Do you have anything like that? Sometimes it’s easier to see the gaps and
routines in the expressions of others life because its easier to look out than look
in on our own experience. Hearing someone read you their answers to these
questions will change how you interact with that person. Imagine hearing a friend
say, “I never realized that we need to talk with other people just to know that we
exist. That we matter.” What do you infer from this statement? Where do you go
from here?
End of exercise.
Doing this exercise with others and sharing your expression encourages a
connection between you. It doesn’t matter if you have never seen each other
before. Greater awareness of your values allows you to more quickly adapt to
change, access your goals, and refine your focus and behavior. Learning to work
with your values and behaviors drives action that expresses and develops our
sense of self. These questions are not very difficult to understand and use. I
encourage you to do this at least once on your own and return to it at a later time
to do it again with a group. Diversity of thinking is valuable, but so is reading
your previous answers to witness how you are developing.
In sharing that information, we are also sharing a lot about ourselves and why
these things matter to us. This information helps us to decide where we go next in
the conversation and if there is enough in common to pursue more together. As
you talk with people you will learn that some of their strongly held values come
92
from the desire to fill a void or lacking in their life. Those values are a response
to move away from pain and serves to focus on the attainment of something to
alleviate and replace that condition. For example, those individuals with a
disability that affects their mobility tend to more highly value independence and
freedom. What do you think those who are drawn to a life of a Hypno Dom
values?
Once you explore that question for yourself you can look back up through this
section to see some of my values. You also have this work that represents access
to more than just those states to demonstrate a bigger picture with me. One can
read the words, read in between the words, skip over the words, get beyond the
words, or even hold tightly to the words, because of what they represent to you.
There are many different ways you can learn about what is important to you and
others. I think the best way is talking with them. As you do this, you may
discover that some things you’re working towards in your life may not be the
things that you truly want. You also might discover what you are meant for.
Discovery of our self in others and others in ourselves can be transformative all
by itself. Don’t be afraid of asking yourself, and others, questions that explore
how you live your life within the seemingly infinite global interactions that
connects us together and to the world.
Anchoring - Simple, Stacked, Chained, & Collapsing
Anchoring refers to the process of associating an internal response with a trigger,
so the resulting response may be quickly, and sometimes covertly, reaccessed.
This chapter is about teaching you how to do this precisely and simply. Setting
quality anchors is a significant part of practicing the hypnotic arts as an MC or
Hypno Dom. This book has already mentioned anchoring, but we haven’t gone in
depth on how to establish and work with anchors. This chapter will cover what
anchors are and how to intentionally establish them.
So, what can you do with anchors anyway? Imagine going out with friends and
you are having the best night of your lives. You can anchor that. Imagine being
playful with your partner and things turn hot and heavy fast. You could anchor
that too. What if you were at a party and the host came up to you smiling with an
extended hand. I’d anchor that. Touching their shoulder or elbow to set the
anchor on them will allow you access to fire it off in casual and formal company.
93
Anchoring is a subconscious process that we do naturally, but anchors can also
intentionally be established with experiences that matter to you. Anchoring and
post-hypnotic commands both functionally link one thing to another, and have a
lot in common with each other.
We learn this skill consciously so we can become more aware of the influence we
have on others and the influence that others have on ourselves. The skills you
will learn here will be drawn upon heavily as you advance in your art. Anchoring
is a tool that will allow you to attach a state to almost anything in your subject’s
world. You can create anchors in yourself and others. To do this, you need to
understand some basic concepts about anchors. Anchors are created naturally and
intentionally in two ways:
•
In an intense emotional (positive or negative) event.
•
In a repetitive pairing.
The continual association between a stimulus and a response happens randomly
in everyday life, as well as being intentionally developed. Greater repetition is
needed if an emotion is not intense, or there is no emotional involvement at all.
Remember Pavlov did this with a bell and then paired food. Think about how a
person might strengthen that natural response to food while developing or
intensifying this anchor. For me, when I work all day and must skip lunch, I can
feel my mouth watering, and the happy endorphin's start moving when I get close
to even ordering that burger. When I finally get it; wow! It tastes like the best
burger ever!! Let’s start looking at how to design a great anchor.
Your anchor needs to be unique. Unique, distinct, and easy to repeat. If you're
touching yourself or someone else in this same way all the time, then that is not a
good trigger for the anchor. Saying a word internally, or out loud to yourself, and
in a particular tone of voice could be a good auditory anchor. Selecting a trigger
that you inadvertently fire quite often has the potential of dissipating the anchor
and rendering it useless. Unique triggers make better and longer lasting anchors.
Anchors can be visual, auditory or kinesthetic. Link to a state that is not
complicated by many emotions and can be entirely re-experienced. Here is why.
If your subject wishes to create an anchor for confidence in certain situations, and
94
she recalls a past event where she felt confident, but she was also confused as to
your instructions about wholly getting in the memory of the state experience,
then setting the anchor with this state will generate a response that is a mixture of
confidence and confusion. My advice is to ensure that you explain what to do
first and bit by bit if necessary. Remember to get a clear pairing between the
emotion/state and your anchor as possible.
Timing the trigger to happen just as the state is reaching its peak is ideal. As your
subject recalls a time that she had a certain attribute (confidence in a group
setting will be used here), the feeling of confidence will begin to get stronger
until it reaches a peak as she steps into the experience. Generally, the anchor
should be applied when the response is about 75% to 90% of its peak and held
until emotional state peaks. Depending on how fast your subject accesses their
feelings, the anchor could be applied anywhere from a couple of seconds up to 10
seconds.
Applying the anchor long past the peak can associate the weakening of the state,
or another state entirely. Do not worry about being absolutely perfect as
numerous repetitions will take care of slight variations.
For those of you who have my last book, The Tao of Relationship Maintenance
for Mind Controllers, think back to when I wrote about using a Behaviorist
conditioning process to develop a conditioned emotional response (CER). The
exact timing of CER does not matter as much as it does when developing
complex motor responses to stimulus. To train CERs, the ideal interval is 2-10
seconds. That is the same interval for anchoring and the repetitive pairing of the
emotion to the trigger will strengthen the conditioning of the anchor or CER.
The basic steps for anchoring are as follows:
1. Have your client recall a past vivid experience for the state you are anchoring.
2. Apply a specific trigger as the state is reaching its peak.
3. Break state. Talk about something neutral and different.
4. Test the anchor after three to five pairings. When you fire the trigger, does
your subject begin to associate into the state?
95
5. Repeating steps 1 - 3 several times will intensify the anchor and you will see
the body language of the subject change as they associate into the state. This is
called stacking an anchor.
If an anchor does not take, then it is usually one of two things. The subject didn’t
fully access and experience the state or you set the anchor too early.
The easiest states to anchor are the naturally occurring states. The best state, to
begin with, is vividly intense states because they are easily recognized.
If you wish to create an anchor for a specific state that you have never
experienced, do you know someone that has the experience and demonstrates
attributes of it? Imagine stepping into that other person's shoes and taking on
their physiology and feelings (this person can be real or imaginary). This
highlights the potential use of inclusion trances paired with themed stories to do
some of this work. If you get into a session where a hypnotist has you swap
heads with someone else to experience their mindset and attributes this is what
they are doing. Later you can use it to think like someone else, explore a
technique for influence, or trying out a new experience like conditioning
Cthulhu’s women to be your fuck toys. Everyone is going to buy the Old One his
next round of spirits and gruel after this.
To begin anchoring simply follow the criteria from above and choose a past
memory for your anchoring purposes. Follow the script below to create an anchor
for yourself or with your subject. Let’s begin.
Anchoring Exercise
Remember a specific time when you were really ( confident in a group ). Proceed
on when you or your subject has a memory or experience (real or imagined) that
is felt strongly. Close your eyes and fully associate into that chosen moment in
time, (putting yourself in the appropriate body. Use this only if putting someone
in someone else's body or identity), looking through your eyes, seeing what you
saw, hearing what you heard, and have the feelings of being ( really confident in
a group ).
Have the subject nod their head, wiggle their finger, or say "peaking" as they feel
that state filling them up to almost as much as they can feel today.
96
You, as the MC, or Hypno Dom, should be using a voice tonality and volume
that reflects the state the subject is accessing. To make an anchor intense, or to
associate different resources to the same anchor, you can stack anchors. Stacking
anchors are when you repeat the anchoring process several times by eliciting
several occurrences of the same or different states and anchor them in the same
place. Let’s walk through that now.
Stacking Anchors Exercise
To reinforce (or condition) an anchor, you can repeat the process you used to
establish the anchor on a regular basis, and if you notice you’re naturally
experiencing the state then fire off the trigger to further condition and stack the
anchor. Have the subject pick a memory or experience (real or imagined) where
they were confident in a group. You can choose the same memory or experience
from the last exercise or choose a few of them where you're confident in a group.
This time the speed of going through this process should be faster. If you stack 34 different memories of ( confidence in a group ) the next time you need
confidence you can fire off your anchor and you’ll feel an intense rush of
confidence surging through you.
To maintain an anchor, it should only be fired when it is desired and it should
have regular reinforcement or conditioning exercises. If there are many misfires
with the anchored state then it can be linked to other states, weakened, or even
extinguished. Anchors that do not have regular reinforcement or conditioning
exercises will fade away, but they can be quickly revived through this same
process.
Stacking Anchors Hand Exercise
To stack anchors in this exercise you’ll need to elicit several events of the being
confident in a group and anchor them in the same place. This is all that a stack
anchor is. One anchor stacked on top of another. The state chosen for a stacked
anchor can be the same or different. What you choose depends on your needs and
97
you’ll understand more about planning out those needs as you get into the
exercise below.
When chaining anchors, the states used for each stack of anchors should be the
same state. For example, the stack of anchors on the thumb below is all
confidence in a group. The index finger has a stack of anchors that are funny and
humorous. The middle finger has a stack of anchors for energy that made you
feel like you could keep going and going. The ring finger has a stack of anchors
that make you feel like you could have anything that you really want. The pinky
finger has a stack of anchors of feeling totally loved. Finally, your palm will have
a stack of anchors when you felt powerful. You can change these states a bit if
you like, just keep whatever you change consistent through the exercise.
To fire these stacks of anchors off in a chain I would have thumb touch thumb,
index finger touch index finger, and so on. To fire them all off you could steep
your hands together, and have all your fingers touch. Then press your palms
together and rub your hands together as if cold.
The more times you repetitively stack an anchor, the better. Like many things in
life, the more effort and energy you put in, the better you’ll perform. My
recommendation would be to spend 30 minutes setting anchors and make this
part of a story. Now that you have learned how this works take some time to jot
down how you might incorporate these skills, behaviors, and exercises into a
hypnotic conditioning story. Bonus points if use an erotic story that builds in
opportunities to surrender, taking pride in obeying, feeling like you’re accepted,
98
experiencing that wonderful feeling when you do a job right, feeling incredibly
aroused, and a need to belong. Even if you don't use the story format, I have
found the process of sharing this exercise very engaging for everyone involved.
As you advance in your anchoring skill, you’ll want to explore how best to
design these interactions with those you’re training. When you spend the time,
and do the repetitions, you’ll have an incredibly powerful anchor set to work
with. If you don't have 30 minutes to do this, then you’ll be pleased to know that
establishing an anchor just a few times is enough to get results. Not rocket to the
moon results, but results nonetheless.
Collapsing Anchors
Suppose you didn't like the placement of the stack of anchors on the palm of the
hand, because you set it off a few times when you didn’t intend to. You could
move that anchor to the subject's knee for example. You can do this by
instructing the move in trance and then practicing a few repetitions and pairing
new events with this stack.
What if you want to collapse or extinguish an anchor? It's simple. Create an
opposite stack of anchors, or a neutralizing anchor, and build the intensity up on
it. That neutralizing anchor must be in another place from the original anchor and
its often called the negative anchor. Using the anchor on the palm again as the
one you wish to remove; this would be the positive anchor. The labels of positive
and negative are referring to two opposing charges of energy that cancel each
other out when brought together. All the guidelines you learned about anchors
still apply. For the sake of location in this example, let's say this neutralizing
anchor is the tip of your nose. If we want to collapse the anchor of powerfulness
on the palm of the hand, then picking the opposite state of powerlessness will
work. So, might picking a state of uncertainty as a neutralizing anchor. For this
example, let's pick uncertainty for this example.
Go through the steps above to make sure that the subject is fully associated, using
solid emotional experiences is best, and be congruent with each state that you
have stacked anchors on. Then have the subject think of a situation or event
where you want to replace feeling powerful in. Associate them into the situation
or event and then fire off the uncertainty anchor. You should notice a pronounced
99
change in nonverbal behavior and on their face when you do this. Ask the subject
how it felt as the neutralizing anchor became the dominant state in that situation.
It should feel confusing and ambiguous as the newly paired anchor is associated
with the experience of the event.
Now talk about something else entirely and move around for a moment. This is
establishing the neutral state just like we did earlier. If we want to replace the
extinguished anchor in this event or circumstance, with this negative anchor, we
would simply continue pairing the negative anchor with repetition.
Have the subject think of a situation or event where they want to replace feeling
powerful in. Associate them into the situation or event. Then fire the anchors at
the same time until they peak. Release the trigger on their nose but hold the
trigger on their palm for at least five seconds longer. Remember when I told you
that applying an anchor long past the peak, can associate the weakening of the
state, or another state entirely. Watch the subject, they will visibly exhibit signs
of conflicting states until the integration is complete.
Now test your work. Let the subject process this for a few moments then ask
them how they feel. Future pace the subject into another event like the one
chosen in the situation or event. Ask them how it feels. Most people say that this
pattern feels strangely good, as if there is a potential possibility being made.
Other people will absolutely hate it because they dislike feeling uncertain.
If you'd like to replace the anchor that has just been collapsed. Again, collapsing
an anchor is canceling one out by running two opposing emotions into each
other. Begin by selecting two opposing states to bring into contact with each
other. Our neurology creates a weird unsettling reaction within us as this
happens. Collapsing an anchor can result in temporary confusion, disorientation,
and even light amnesia. It’s just like that moment where you know you forgot
something but what was it? The technique of collapsing an anchor is also called
integrating anchors in some circles. Please recognize that I have not chosen
another state to replace the one on the palm of the hand. Doing so is not needed.
When this technique is done effectively the two opposing states should
effortlessly melt into each other all by itself.
100
Subconscious, Conscious Overlap
“Everything is energy. Your thoughts advance it, your emotions intensify it, and
your action directs the momentum into your life. Your choice reflects what’s
truly yours.” Joseph W. Crown
Learning how to convert conversations into trance is a skill not unlike the
induction process of hypnosis. Bringing conscious attention to something that is
generally outside of awareness transitions a person into an altered state. That
natural transition is a trance state that can become goal-directed and shifted into
hypnosis, a mindfulness exercise, sensory-based exploration, and undirected
interactions; such as daydreaming. Even undirected behavior like daydreams and
play can take on aspects of goal-directed behavior at times. Our conscious and
subconscious parts of our mind ideally work together without conflict and
transition back and forth. Let’s get into this section and try out a fanciful
experience that explores this. Take the time you need to fully explore the next
paragraph.
If I were to ask you to pay attention to the palms of your hands, and really notice
the sensations present, would you also notice your breathing slow? I could
describe a swirling sensation in one of those palms. It would emerge as quickly
as a passing rain shower, while your awareness is present there… Hold onto that.
You may not notice how your attention alters temperature and blood flow, but
it’s all being regulated for you… As your attention flows, so does a difference in
temperature here. As you focus in, enjoy an easy comfort moving through your
body. Breathing in and out slowly will cause you to feel more relaxed. I could
ask you to think about the space between your toes… You could have your mind
go to a place where you hold the most tension in your back. When I ask you to
think about how your favorite socks feel, you begin to assemble those sensations
for yourself. You might be wondering… okay, what’s next?
I have been leading you through statements that may lead to an altered state and I
have attached blatant descriptions of whimsy, comfort, and even where to find
your stress. There’s a desire to learn more, and even a building curiosity about
what it might be like to try this yourself. My goal was communicating with you
in a descriptive way and inspire you to explore in a nondirective manner through
my directions. When most people go through this exercise, they can recognize
101
that their awareness begins to reach out gathering details that it wasn’t instructed
to. As you read through that paragraph you began to bring in elements normally
outside of awareness, which brought some overlap between the subconscious and
conscious processes of your mind. At the point you really got into this, some
instructions were certainly better accepted than others. This section is focused on
your learning to see these moments, and training you on a method to create them.
Look back at that experiential paragraph above and see if you can spot all the
instructions leading attention, and sticking with you before moving on.
As people begin to access information like this, they’ll become absorbed by what
you are asking them to do. The example I used was very simplistic in that
paragraph, but you will discover more sophisticated ones as you move through
this book. We’ll examine where you can start bringing commands and
instructions into communication as you begin to see these natural trance
moments, and create them yourself. You should consider this a conversational
trance hijacking introduction. To practice utilizing trances with others, we will be
using the 54321 Method. The routine skills you acquired while learning to pace
and lead will pay off here.
The 54321 Method is a mindfulness exercise that is used to help individuals
break their state. To say that another way, it allows a person to do a pattern
interrupt on themselves. It works by shifting their thoughts out of routine, or
problem states, and into undirected altered states. You can use this exercise to
practice bringing people in and out of trance states. This method works by having
you bring your attention to five different elements. I’ll run over the method
quickly before exploring it more fully with you. Take your time reading it as you
did above.
5. Bring your attention to something you see fully.
4. Bring your attention to something you feel fully.
3. Bring your attention to something you hear fully.
2. Bring your attention to something you smell fully.
1. Bring your attention to something you taste fully.
102
This is a useful grounding exercise that can encourage a calm and mindful
experience. You don’t have to use each sense in the order that is listed here. You
will quickly find that just mentioning one or two of these will be enough for you
to insert a command before continuing. The first linguistic pattern you will learn
to use with trance hijacking is pace, lead, command.
For example, as you read this paragraph you might notice the unique darkness of
the letters on the page. You can feel the gentle pull of gravity on your body, as
you notice the border of this page. You can feel great, because you are learning
something new. Using your peripheral vision, bring your attention to the
surroundings around you, you will hear a pleasant sound that can allow you to
relax even more easily…
These are the same skills you will use when creating hypnotic stories with
inclusion trances, you can dive right into mindfulness, or simply hijacking
trances conversationally. You can add commands in where ever it feels natural
and for most people, these commands appear as if part of the description of the
scene as I did above. Many commands will not be remembered consciously, but
that doesn’t mean they’ll be missed. Below is the modified command structure
you can use for this exercise. As you practice allow yourself some freedom to
develop your own distinct rhythm and style by which you’ll deliver hypnotic
stories by. Let’s begin!
5. Bring your attention to something you see fully.
4. Bring your attention to something you feel fully.
3. Bring your attention to something you hear fully.
2. Command
1. Command
While speaking and reading have many similarities, to practice this skill in the
text you’ll need creative modifications. For example, as you read this you might
notice the beating of your heart, and think of about the white background of the
page. You’re listening to the sounds of the words being spoken in your mind.
103
You might think about how much fun you can have trying this out, and doing
something new. Living this life, and doing this work, is about creating yourself
anew.
If you haven’t figured it out yet, this is also a method you can use to practice selfhypnosis. Go back over the above exercise a few times coming up with new and
inviting details, and interesting commands.
Conversationally introducing people to trance
I have been asked many times how I transition a conversation into a trance in a
way that feels natural. You should consider what you just practiced as the lead up
for your first conversational trance induction. The last section taught you how
you can pace, lead, and command to shift into a simple trance induction. This
next exercise is pace, lead, and elicit. You have the basics from the section above
and this section is about testing and demonstrating these skills in meaningful
contexts. You deserve something you don’t have to question. You deserve
someone who is sure of you. Let’s get to work!
We are all in relationships with each other, but I've found that most people today
don't like holding hands in public anymore. They keep muttering something
about having to know them. Do you know what’s attractive and amazing?
Relationships that encourage both self-acceptance and personal growth, also me.
Your art is developed through your relationships (new, transitory, and familiar),
and these shared elements of commonality establish experiences that develop
with the person. The Crown Control System has been designed to be used with
the operator's relationship style and to shape that style into their art. Pacing,
leading, and eliciting is the final piece you need to practice, test, and impart
progressive commands with. Not every trance needs to be developed into a
deeper hypnotic state for the experience to be meaningful.
When you are introducing the concept of hypnosis, trance, or doing covert work,
it doesn’t take much, to begin with. Having a lead in that connects what you’re
doing to something more becomes the introduction of a story. Albert Camus
couldn’t have said this better. “I love life - that’s my real weakness. I love it so
much that I am incapable of imagining what is not life.” I'm going to share
104
something with you that you could use today. It may be as simple as asking
someone if they would like to try a creative exercise to generate ideas, achieve
inner quiet, or step into the life story of someone completely different.
What Do You Offer Exercise?
This exercise explores the relationships that are tied to the goals and outcomes
you would like to explore. Your goal with this exercise is to present an
experiential training or exercise that you can offer to others. Write out your
approach and outcomes/goals for your exercise like the ones I mentioned above.
Write some notes about what each exercise would entail and explore various
effects you could bring into each exercise. Come up with at least three different
areas of interest you can apply your skills to today.
I’ve written out a lead in that I could use to transition you into exercise two.
Allow me to talk with you as I would someone in front of me. Let's try a
relational exercise here together now. Allow yourself the freedom, to share with
me, the first thing that comes to your mind as you read the sentences below. Just
say it out loud, or write it down. Just give yourself permission to discover what is
right on the periphery of your awareness as those details come to your mind. As
you discover the answers coming to you. Say them aloud, or write them down
here. It will be as if I’m there with you. It's going to be beautiful. Taking time as
necessary, and move one line at a time. This exercise is about discovery. So just
follow that first thought to the next and don’t stop until you’ve gotten to the end
of what’s available to you. In this moment, what’s that first thought leading you
forward like your first step?
Perfect. This is what we will explore in the association gaps of experience for
exercise two. Subconscious conscious communication is always happening and
your mind is ready to fill in any gaps in experience with associations from
expectations and belief. It really takes very little to engage the subconscious to
move with your direction.
Association Gaps of Experience Exercise Two
105
Move through this exercise and engage with the experience to understand what it
offers you. Consider each question and fully answer it before moving on. Think
of this experience as a free association or listening to your intuition as you go
about your day. The only difference is here you can look back to see what has
been omitted and what your subconscious has filled this experience in with. Be
prepared to write down what comes to mind so those descriptions don’t escape
you after the exercise. Let’s begin.
You start out on a path. What does it look like?
Shifting forward just a bit. What are the details that grab you in your
surroundings?
What time of day is it? How does the air smell?
Ask yourself who is walking with you?
What are the details that you become aware of from your walking partner?
When thinking about the details, select one at a time and write down what
impressions stay with you.
Walking forward together, something gets your attention. Describe what's
happening.
As we walk together you come upon an animal. Describe what is happening with
the animal you see. How does it make you feel?
Describe what is happening as we move past the animal.
Behind us, there is an odd noise. What is your attention drawn to?
Up ahead there are wide open spaces. You see clues that people may be nearby.
Describe what you see. What may these clues reveal?
106
Something ahead of you catches your eye. You're drawn forward. What is going
through your mind as you come closer?
How does your body feel as you move along the path?
Something happens that makes you smile. What you discover tells you that
you're about to take part in something meaningful, and this isn’t the first time
you’ve thought about this. Describe what you found and what it means to you.
End of the Exercise
How did you do? Were you surprised at how easy you could fill in the details?
Anytime you use your mind this way you'll make connections and you can get
curious about. As you were starting out did you notice how certain you became
of each detail as these impressions kept coming to you? What this means for you
is that your subconscious and conscious are actively working together in order to
accomplish and describe these associative goals. Every single reader of this book
has a different mental representation of everything going on, but there will be
some interesting similarities. I could tell you more, but to really go deeper into an
experience you’d really have to let go. I’m curious now. Have you ever done
meditation, or tried hypnosis before?
Did catch the embedded commands in the paragraphs above or transition line that
could lead us into the next exercise together? This exercise had clear guidelines
and expectations for you to follow along with. It demonstrated how well you
were able to follow instructions, your comfort level, and many details might be
linguistically harvested to further discern what to do next. Those details would be
the first step in deciding if I wanted to work more with you and you with me. The
conversational hooks are here for you to discover and adapt. This exercise even
had a few instructions peppered through this text dealing with how to relate to
this information. Statements like, “give yourself permission to discover what is
right on the periphery of your awareness as those details come to your mind.”
Instructions on how to think about an exercise are not always delivered as part of
the exercise itself. They can be delivered in your transition or lead into the
exercise, as I did here. Your lead-in is personalized by the impressions,
107
observations, and answers that the subject communicates to you. The outcomes
or goals can change to align with that personalization.
This exercise is a state of trance and one that you’ve shared with other people
through learning and play since you began communicating with others. This state
can lead to more profound trance states simply by including social proof
techniques, hypnotic tests, which are commonly referred to as suggestibility tests,
and offering the next advantage. Just like taking personality tests people enjoy
taking hypnotic tests because they get to learn about themselves, and their
potential. Hypnotic tests are an underserved resource for many people and they
are available free online and from your local library.
What’s great about introducing these tests is that you can do this
conversationally. Hypnotic tests may include having a subject’s hands rise into
the air as they are told they are attached to a balloon, or having their hands stuck
to their chairs as if glued. What might happen if you combined hypnosis with
questions? Asking questions of the subject allows you to set up a feedback loop
to take them into a deeper state of hypnosis as they utilize commands to take part
in a story you’re guiding them through. The more details they choose the easier
and more solid those details end up becoming. A nudge here or there should
increase engagement. When you start creating your own story outline with a
subject, you’ll have the opportunity to give them commands and your
instructions prime them about what the experience will be like.
Your linguistic pattern can take on pace, lead, elicit, and command, and you’ll be
adding in sensory, contextual, and story-based details in conversational trances.
You will repeat this linguistic pattern over and over interspacing commands
where it feels natural as you engage your subject in a story. When engaging a
subject in a hypnotic trance, there can be interactive moments designed in to keep
the subject’s mind involved and there will be less of a need to pace. This is an art
and with practice, you’ll find your own style and flow. How elaborate you get
with your stories and setup is up to you.
You can find more ideas about setup approaches and using inclusion trances in
my book, The Tao of Relationship Maintenance for Mind Controllers. What you
should take away from these scripted examples is that we are all in a constantly
shifting altered state all the time. Even while being associated into a storyline, as
108
you were above, the subject begins to recognize themselves and identify through
backstory, goals, emotions, and actions presented in context. This process is
exactly how we make sense of the world and interact with each other in daily life.
Meaning making is both a conscious and subconscious process. All of this serves
the subject by allowing them to take part in a story through interactions in
context with real and hypnotically guided tests, tasks, and experiences. The
emotions experienced can transition us, and transition with us across states
easily. When dealing with intense emotions keep in mind that they serve as a link
to quickly re-associate into a memory, state, or retelling/reliving of events again.
Hypnosis allows us to work with concepts outside the boundaries of everyday
time and space.
As an MC or Hypno Dom, you’ll learn to direct those states and craft
personalized experiences. Relational hypnosis works so well, because so many of
us have accepted guidelines of how we relate to each other, how to treat authority
figures, how to behave with lovers, and there are not always clear expectations
on emotions, and actions that are permissible by society or in specific cultural
contexts. So why not include epic stories as part of these experience and explore
these contexts through them? Try on and try out these roles and identities desired.
Stories in themselves can bring us into light trances. Combining stories with
trances allows us to fully embody what it means to be living differently. We have
skipped over finding ourselves and moved into creating ourselves with all the
colors that make up a sunset. We are taught to fold up the energy of bliss and the
wildest of storms into our DNA. You will learn, love, and inspire where you feel
most alive. Congrats on beginning to learn and practice inclusion trances. You
can do almost anything with an inclusion trance that you can do with hypnosis.
Be good to each other and whatever you do, leave them better off than when you
found them.
Hypnotic Assessment and Experiential Convincers
Now it’s time to put the pieces you have learned together and follow a simple
hypnotic script to test the hypnotic ability of your subject. These short exercises
begin your work setting up a hypnotic context, and you’ll understand how easy it
109
is to take someone from everyday awareness into a deeper altered state. Consider
what follows in this chapter to be hypnotic inductions. Hypnotic induction is a
process undertaken by a hypnotist to establish a context for a hypnotic trance
state to occur in. This chapter starts to have you interacting directly with
inductions and transition states.
If an induction already sounds like a bit of contextual reframing, or an engaging
story to you, then you have been paying attention to my philosophy of relational
hypnosis. An induction is simply a way to talk about and encourage an
experiential transition to an altered state, in a way that makes cultural and
contextual sense. For example, remember having to put your head down on your
desk with the lights out in school as a kid? That would be awesome as a working
adult, wouldn’t it? Making sense of the world of culture and contexts becomes
part of the work we do because it’s part of the way we relate to the world.
Beginning with simple hypnotic goal-oriented exercises will give you an idea of
how someone will perform during a longer, and more comprehensive trance
period. Stage hypnotists also use some of these inductions as suggestibility tests
to quickly test audience members and identify the most responsive people
present. What may surprise you is these same exercises make up sections of
clinical suggestibility and hypnotizability tests in research settings. When taking
part with these tests you’re also moving through these hypnotic trance states.
How well you, or your subject, functions with these states initially can be the one
reason you wish to proceed with them further or not.
As you move through this section, you’ll find that I combine many different
types of hypnotic phenomena into these induction exercises. I believe presenting
them this way assists you in learning them as a natural progression of developing
your language skills. This next paragraph is what I call the hypnotic agreement
set. It’s the information I often share with a subject in a practice group to create a
shared understanding of the hypnotic process, and it is what they are agreeing to
when they consent to their first formal hypnotic experience. You could think of
this as a pretalk before doing a hypnotic session as well. As you read through this
next paragraph imagine you are saying it to someone who wants to know more
about the hypnotic experience before you engage them in a formal exercise. In
sharing these exercises you’ll want to share with your subject how wonderful and
relaxing hypnosis can be. Almost every time I’ve talked with someone in a group
110
setting, what hypnosis is has been already explained to them. Not everyone has
someone to prepare a group for them, and I still like to ensure that I have my
definition of what hypnosis is shared with them. Some combination of this
agreement set is almost always used by me as I transition into an exercise.
“The more intelligent a person is, the more quickly, and powerfully, you can
realize the potential you have with hypnosis. Anyone can go into hypnosis if they
can follow instructions and allow themselves to flow with the experience.
Hypnosis and trance are experiential states that are colored by what you hold in
your awareness as you engage with it. After the experience is over, we will talk
about what happened and process the experience together. Just allow the
experience to happen as it’s simply a shift in awareness. Don’t try to help me. I
will take care of any effort necessary for you to do this. Can you agree to do that?
Do you have any other questions? This exercise will be… Are you ready to be
hypnotized?”
There are several ways you can get agreement and consent. Use what works best
for you when doing a formal exercise. We’ll begin with a few of the most
approachable tests of hypnotic ability that you can use in almost any setting.
Read these tests over. Try them out yourself first, and imagine yourself
explaining the instructions to others. Working with others always comes next.
When you present these activities to others, you should be able to explain the
exercises and demonstrate to them what they are about to do. Recognize that this
demonstration also primes the expected behavioral activity. It ensures there is no
misunderstanding during the experience itself as to what is supposed to happen.
Your explanations will leave you room to connect one activity with another. I
like to model how a person should have their hands as we start the exercise and
have them following along to what the expected outcome is. I will almost always
do some small correction with their posture when the subject shows themselves
to be ready. I will be observing how the person reacts to being touched.
If there is hesitation and the person cannot agree or consent to take part in the
exercise do not proceed. There can be potential problems that a person has that
they do not want to share with you. Things like trauma, PTSD, or mental illness
just to name a few. We are not doing therapy and should seek out eager, curious,
and well-grounded people to share these experiences with. If someone fears that
111
something could set them off, or trigger them, do not choose that person to learn
with. I’ll say it again. If someone does not give consent do not proceed. That
does not mean you have to stop the activity. If there is more than one person
you’re working with, you can ask the nonconsenting person to step to the side as
you get consent from others. Working with people in a group setting for
entertainment purposes may involve posting a sign on doors and on the wall that
hypnosis is part of an event. Logistics depends on many variables so plan ahead.
After the exercise, is finished I will ask questions to get the person contributing
information about the experience, this further engages them in the experience,
and supplies criteria a person can use to deepen the next activity more. This
harvested information can be used to perfect your technique and utilize preferred
sensations, and word choices while developing a profound personalized state
with the subject. The following are some questions I use.
How did you do? What was that experience like for you? What parts of this
exercise resonated the most for you? Where there any sensations that you felt
more profoundly as you moved through this exercise? Did any words or phrases
stick out or seem absent for you in this experience?
You may recall me asking some of those questions above even in the text here.
Alright, let’s begin with one of the most popular hypnotic tests and social proof
exercises, Magnetic Hands.
Magnetic Hands
We are going to have our hands together just like the Dali Lama in the picture
below when done. Move your hands to that position with me now as I transition
into a transcript of me doing this activity.
112
“Put your hands together as if you were blessing and recognizing the divinity
around you, but here, now, you are becoming very present. Feel the warmth of
the palms of your hand, and the most pleasant sensations of comfort in your body
as I speak with you. As you do, I want you to apply steady increasing pressure on
your hands, and notice how that affects the warmth along your fingertips, and in
the palms your hands. Take a long slow… deep breath… Recognize the growing
anticipation in your body, that might cause you to smile.”
(Watch the subject and meet their eyes with a big smile.)
“As you push together your palms imagine what it might be like to recognize that
there is energy there… a strong attraction… Every person, every breath, and
every movement… is made possible because it has potential energy. In a
moment, I am going to ask you to pull your hands apart slowly… noticing the
responsiveness here… as your awareness is exploring the space between your
hands… slowly moving them apart… so very slowly… Notice the energetic
potential there… it’s like a magnet… Your attention may be aware of something
like energetic strings… magnetically attracted, from palm to palm. Your
thoughts may drift back to one of those commercials… you know, where the
113
cheese on a piece of pizza is the focus as it gets picked up. Stringy gooey
delicious connection…”
(Use this cheesy story if the person loves cheese and pizza. Any hint of an eating
disorder or being lactose intolerant steer clear as the childish glee won’t be there.
Most people associate pizza with informal fun, sleepovers, friends, and being
drawn to college or work meetings because they fed them. In this case, my
subject is smiling big at this.)
“It can remind you of good times. As you feel that, allow yourself to explore the
joy that this exercise brings you.” (This is just me wanting to play and make this
experience more fun. This flirty cheesy humor can easily be edited out if there is
a need for that.)
“Now, with your two hands in front of your chest, palms facing each other, and
only inches apart. Imagine that your right hand is a very powerful magnet, and
your left hand is a pleasingly attractive metal… Magnet… metal… feeling the
attraction… Magnet… metal… Notice how your hands respond as I speak with
you now. As you hold that idea in your mind… Magnet… metal… feel the
attraction… gaining strength… Do you feel the attraction of that energy?”
Subject: Yes, it’s real. I feel it.
“That’s right... Now, focus your attention on the gap between your hands… the
magnetic power here grows stronger... Reaching out to feel connected…
Reaching out to come together… Magnet… metal… As those hands touch, think
back to a time when you are about to open an incredible gift… that gift is right in
front of you… Magnet… metal… As that happens, this attraction is increasing
even stronger and stronger… Magnet… metal… Getting even more intense.
Look me right in my eyes now… Magnet… metal… Locking together…. Do you
feel this strength locking your hands together?”
Subject: Yeah, they are stuck. I can’t believe it.
(If your subject is performing this well use the next line and count to five and
release them. This subject tested this when I asked her to speak and she
recognized she couldn’t move them. That’s all I needed. I’ll bring them out of
hypnosis and do the debrief.)
114
“Perfect… Now feel the power easing… You feel wonderful… Take a deep
breath and smile.
(If you’re subject is taking a bit more time to have their hands touch you can use
this Segway below.)
“In a moment, I'm going to count from one to five, and with each count, your
right-hand doubles its magnetic power, as your left-hand draws closer and closer.
And by the count of five, your hands will be stuck tightly together. Magnet…
metal… Feel wonderful as you experience that energetic attraction. Magnet…
metal…
One. Your magnetic right-hand doubles its compelling power… pulling your left
hand in closer. Magnet… metal…
Two. Feel the powerful magnetic attraction moving through your body.
Magnet… metal…
Three. The magnetic power of your right hand is irresistible. Magnet… metal…
Four. Almost there. On the next count, your hands will be stuck tightly together.
Magnet… metal…
Five. Hands stuck together as if they are one. Magnet… metal…”
(Watch the subject’s hands. If they aren’t tightly pressed together then you can
repeat the countdown or the initial instructions above.)
“Your hands are now stuck so tightly together, it's as if they had been glued
together with the most powerful glue in the world… And even if you wanted to,
you wouldn't be able to pull them apart. Go ahead and try to pull them apart, and
find that your hands remain tightly stuck together.”
(Allow them a moment to test and tug at their hands.)
“That’s good. Now, on the count of three, you will relax your hands
completely… and they will come apart easily… relax as deeply as you possibly
can. One. Two. Three.”
115
The Balloon and The Bucket
I used to call this exercise the book and the balloon. I recently changed the name
as I had a person imagine their e-book reader even as I mentioned a big, heavy
book in one hand. They were reading Tolstoy and the book was long, and deeply
philosophically weighty to them. To remove this unintentional ambiguity from
this ever happening again, I changed the book to a bucket. This is the next
exercise we will be going over here.
To start with this exercise, I will ask the person if they visualize or daydream best
with their eyes open or closed. Regardless of their answer, I will usually tell them
to close their eyes. I will tell the subject to extend their arms out in front of them
and I’ll be adjusting their hands slightly to observe their response. If I want to
further test compliance, I’ll ask the person to make a fist with their dominant
hand. Most people are right handed so I take that fist in my hand, turn it up
slightly, and then back down to reset the position again. The right hand often
turns into the position I set it in when it lifts. We are ready to begin.
“In this hand is a ten-gallon bucket that has a few stones in it. Tighten your grip
and notice the weight hanging there.”
116
(This is a compliance and responsiveness check. Good to really good subjects
will do this automatically. If you are following the last exercise with this one the
subject should be responsive to you immediately. If they do not tighten their fist
a bit here you may have more work to do in this induction. I then move to the
other extended arm and go through the motions as if I was gently tying a string to
their wrist with a balloon.)
“Around your wrist, I have tied a huge helium-filled balloon… Now, this balloon
will begin tugging at your arm to bring it up, higher and higher. You begin to feel
the gentle tug of this arm… up, up, up.” At this point, I give their arm a gentle
nudge up. “As this happens… the weight in the bucket here pulls this arm down,
down, down.” I then give a nudge on the hand of this arm down.
“Begin to notice how the weight is pulling down your arm… As you do… you
relax even more deeply. As you feel one arm going down… deeper and deeper,
your other arm rising, higher and higher. As this arm rises… you begin to feel
confidence fill you up… up and up... Your mind drifts to a time where whatever
you were doing… you did perfectly… As that arm climbs higher and higher…
that other arm drops lower and lower… into a comfortable, relaxed, space.”
If the movement is going slowly, I will tell the subject I’m placing small heavy
rocks into the bucket. That statement is all that it takes with a good subject to see
the effect immediately.
“Every stone placed in that bucket doubles the relaxation… that relaxation draws
the arm down. As that hand drops, the balloon rises up… confident happiness
moves through you. Hold onto that confidence with a smile for me…”
Once the subject’s arms are far apart ask them how far apart they believe their
arms might be. Almost everyone will not guess that their arms have gone as far
as they have. Tell the subject to open their eyes and be astonished at their own
confident potential. That is all there is to this exercise. Make it yours!
A quick word on troubleshooting these exercises. If you get an individual who
has no movement at all with their arms, they most likely have not been following
instructions, or they are deliberately resistant. It is possible to work with someone
that has little movement with this exercise, but as most hypnotists do, this person
117
would simply be screened out. If you get a subject that is not following directions
or wants to see if you can force them to follow directions just move on. This is an
exercise that is determined by how well they can focus, and allow their mind to
do what it naturally does. Any intelligent person with an IQ above 60 gets a
result. So, if they are having problems with trust, or an inability to focus you’re
not going to fix them in a few minutes. You’re offering an experience by
following along with an exercise, and if they’re doing something else let them.
More on this later.
The Finger Clamp
The finger clamp works by having the subject interlace their fingers, like in the
picture above, and instructing the subject to press their index fingers together
while the other fingers remain folded in. This is an easy exercise I like to do with
groups to demonstrate how responsive people can be.
If you’re doing this exercise with a group, you’ll address everyone at once and
tell them to watch you very closely demonstrate what’s expected. The first part of
this exercise is going to be attuning their subconscious mind to me, simply by
paying attention to me. I will say, “The finger clamp works by having you
interlace your fingers like so. (Same as in the picture above) Keeping all your
118
fingers folded down except your index finger…. Raise your index finger and
press that index fingers together while the other fingers remain folded in. Bring
your hands up to chest level and make sure that’s a good press between those
pointer fingers. We want the subconscious mind to recognize this as distinct and
part of the process. We are going to hold this for about ten seconds and when
done wiggle your fingers in the air. We will wait for everyone to be wiggling and
we will do this two more times together.” (Skipping forward now to after doing
this two more times.) Throw in a couple of jokes about wiggling their waggled
bits if you dare. Smile.
“Now, everyone here is incredible at giving me the wiggle fingers. As we do it
again, this time, I don’t want you to think about this exercise in any way or try to
help me. It’s about the experience. Assume the position and put your fingers out
there so there is a gap between them. Allow your awareness to be on your fingers
and bring your hand up. Notice what they naturally do. They are attracted to
touching. Moving together… needing to touch… This is what they have learned
and they come together so well. Look around at everyone and notice where their
fingers are.”
You can repeat the commands above as much as appropriate, but you should
have everyone’s fingers coming together quickly. This is one way to do this
exercise, check for compliance, hypnotizability, enthusiasm, and provide social
proof for the group that this works right from the start. This example is simply
capturing some of my approach to transition the audience. You can also do this
exercise one on one or without the three-time repetition. I’ll provide that version
in the next paragraph below. You could simply go right into the exercise. I tend
to like to inform people their mind and body is conspiring with me now, and
they’ll feel the urgings to move in pleasing directions. Remember to throw in
something to break state and offer inviting instructions or idea between exercises.
The Hypnotic Boss nearly finished me off as I moved deeper inside and I lost my
current place. Moving onward with another version of this exercise. Did that
transition make you pause and think fun thoughts? If not, you might be in a bit of
a grump. Instruct the subject to put their hands together and extend their index
fingers only. They should have their index fingers separated. Tell the subject to
focus on just these two extended fingers. Notice the warm and comfortable
119
energy emanating from the palms of their hands. That energy moves up their
hand and into those extended fingers… Bringing them closer together… bringing
them closer… wanting to touch and connect…. Don’t help or do anything… Just
observe your body and mind working together here…”
(Repeat these phrases in your best hypnotic voice over and over until the fingers
touch.)
“Gently pressing those fingers together …. you can sense a building attraction
here. You’ll find that you have begun increasing the pressure with these
fingers… they are sticking together… as you become aware of this attraction.
They are locked together… Locked so strong and solid now… it’s like they are
glued… When you are sure they are solid, and strongly stuck there, nod your
head for me… (subject immediately nods her head at me.) Test them now. See if
you can open them.”
(Give the subject just a moment or two and get their attention again.)
“Perfect… That’s good. You performed so well… That makes me happy. Now, I
want you to find a comfortable feeling of relaxation in your body… it can move
through your body as you notice it… I want you to hold onto that feeling with
your mind… Seek out where that relaxation is the strongest as it travels to where
it needs to go… your eyes… Your eyes are becoming heavier and they want to
close… (Subject’s eyes shut) Removing every bit of tension and muscle stress
from your eyes… hold onto that deepening feeling now… Discovering that it is
impossible to open them without putting stress back in them… Go ahead… try to
open them… (I can see the subject’s eyes moving a bit behind her closed lids.)
Try and notice… that relaxation taking you deeper. That’s good… you can stop
trying now… as your moving farther into trance then you have ever gone
before… Allow your body and mind to soak in how wonderful this is… Each and
every time you crave relaxation, you’ll know, you can come here easier… you
can come here faster… each and every time we work together…”
You have the choice to transition into a deeper state of hypnosis or have the
subject emerge happy, relaxed, and refreshed with a debrief. Use this moment to
explore what comes next in this hypothetical example. Take the time and
describe three or four possibilities and what you might utilize and inspire. When
120
working together you’d go as far as you agreed to and stop. Then decide together
how you want to proceed next. The moments where you debrief and get consent
for more become some of the most powerful moments of communication. Having
them use their words makes the experience more solid, real, and possible. What
is shared in those moments builds trust and results in fewer filters as the subject
shares more freely. That communication should be encouraged and conditioned.
That can be done in several ways and continually working together will make
this happen naturally. I recommend you work with trust and communication in
hypnosis to set ground rules with those you work with.
Elkins Hypnotizability Scale
Now that you have gone through a few of the exercises above you’ve gotten
some experience about what it is like to work someone. In working with subjects,
you have also started to develop your own opinions about what makes a good
subject, well a good subject. Utilizing a scale to measure the responsiveness of
subjects allows us to make better educated judgments about what they may be
initially capable of in hypnosis. When speaking about hypnotizability, I am
referring to an individual's ability to experience changes in physiology,
sensations, emotions, thoughts, or behavior while engaging them in hypnosis.
There are a number of hypnotic suggestibility scales out there and you should
review them all to understand where they overlap and where they seek to
distinguish a specific quality. In this section, I’ll present a few of these scales
next so that you may incorporate them in whole or in parts with your work with
others.
These scales give us a common language to describe the effects we are eliciting.
The scales also give us ideas as to where we might go next. Finally, learning
about these scales allows us to communicate with each other and share our
results in a fashion that others may replicate what we are doing. Here are a few of
the most commonly accepted scales of hypnotic responsiveness and
suggestibility.
Arizona Motor Scale of Hypnotizability (AMSH)
The test focuses on ideomotor movements within hypnosis and it was originally
121
developed at the University of Arizona to explore the differences between
"direct" and "challenging" suggestions given during hypnosis.
Barber Suggestibility Scale (BSS)
This test was developed as a quick, and easy test of hypnotic suggestibility. The
BSS consists of eight items and takes approximately 10-12 minutes to administer.
The test can either be explained as a test of hypnotic ability or as a test of
imagination. This test has been performed with and without induction on college
students to measure their hypnotic aptitude.
Carleton University Responsiveness to Suggestions Scale (CURSS)
The CURSS consists of seven exercises: two ideomotor tests (arm levitation,
arms moving apart), two motor challenge exercises (arm catalepsy, arm
immobility), and three cognitive suggestions tests (auditory hallucination, visual
hallucination, and amnesia for all preceding events).
Creative Imagination Scale (CIS)
A useful short test of non-hypnotic suggestibility. It was developed in response to
a perception that the BSS was too authoritarian and direct. The CIS presents the
experience of responding to suggestion as being under the individual's control,
and the administrator takes the role of guide or coach. The CIS is a 10-item test
of 'imaginative suggestibility'. As such, it does not involve a hypnotic induction
but instead looks at responses to suggestion in the absence of hypnosis.
Gudjonsson Suggestibility Scale (GSS)
The GSS measures interrogative suggestibility. This is a different form of
suggestibility from hypnotic/imaginative suggestibility. Interrogative
suggestibility is the extent to which, people come to accept messages
communicated during formal questioning.
Stanford Hypnotic Susceptibility Scale (SHSS)
There are three parts to this assessment. SHSS:A and SHSS:B are parallel forms
emphasizing motor items, which makes test-retest studies possible. SHSS:C
contains more difficult suggestions, typically cognitive suggestion, including
122
hallucination and age regression. This assessment presents items in increasing
order of difficulty. The SHSS:C has come to serve as the standard against which
all other scales are compared.
The Elkins Hypnotizability Scale (EHS)
This scale, like the many before it utilizes tests like the ones you did above and
scores them. Measuring hypnotizability is an important part of hypnotic research
and it's utilized to predict the success of treatment, training, and for the selection
of top performing subjects. The EHS has scored over 252 people to establish a
spectrum for empirical hypnosis studies. The EHS consists of 12 assessments that
begin with a hypnotic induction involving instruction for focusing attention, eye
closure, relaxation, and deepening the state. Next, the subject is guided through a
series of hypnotic experiences ranging from eliciting simple motor responses to
achieving amnesia.
The assessment exercises progress in order of developing difficulty beginning
with arm heaviness, arm immobility, arm lightness, arm levitation (Linking the
raising of the arm with associating into a state), elbow lift, clear imagery,
dissociation experience, faint olfactory hallucination, distinct olfactory
hallucination, vague visual hallucination, distinct visual hallucination, and
posthypnotic amnesia. The subject is scored based upon their responsiveness to
the hypnotic instruction given. A total score indicates the participant's level of
hypnotizability. You should already see the similarities between this and the
exercises I shared above.
The measurements for the scores presented in the hypnotic scales above are
recorded along a Likert-type scale spectrum. For example, think back to the
exercise where one arm went up and one arm went down. When the subject was
given the suggestion for lightness, on a scale from one to three stars, how well
did they demonstrate the experience of lightness by lifting their arm? A response
of 1 would be no not at all, and a response of 5 would be yes it was felt and
demonstrated strongly. I’m sharing this information to demystify the method of
scoring and developing a scale from your own experience of working with
others.
123
Even if just picking up this book, if you’ve worked with the material your
experiences will have touched on all these elements. Associating a subject into
scenery like the woods, the beach, or a garden in the park will come naturally as
you progress. The sensations of the sand below your feet, the perfume of flowers,
and the crashing waves are the distinct olfactory, auditory, and visual modalities
functionally utilized to revivify and develop hypnotic and everyday reality. Use
these tests or don’t use them. Hopefully, you are getting the idea that they are
already part of what we do.
There is no watered-down version of hypnosis by a skilled operator. Any of our
personal experiences and interests could be made into inductions all by itself. We
will get into working with hypnotic amnesia later in this book. I recommend that
you seek out the hypnotizability assessments mentioned here online and in the
reference section of this book. You will discover there is a lot of variation in the
way these assessments and the accompanying experiences are introduced and
utilized among professionals. Remember that just because our path is different
than some, it doesn’t mean we are lost. We are building a life that we don’t need
vacations from, and you are discovering what it takes to be a hypnotic researcher.
Progressive Muscle Relaxation Induction
Progressive Muscle Relaxation (PMR) teaches a subject how to relax their
muscles through a two-step process. First, the subject is guided systematically
through tensing muscle groups in their body such as their neck and shoulders.
Next, they are guided through releasing that retained tension in their body and
mind. This is done while instructing the subject to bring their attention to their
body, and notice how their muscles feel as that tension is released. This exercise
is simple and it attunes the mind and body awareness as you practice it. Choose
an area to focus on and begin. This chapter will go over PMR as a technique
that’s closely associated with meditation, trance, and hypnosis.
PMR is one of the most universal techniques spoken of as people think about
hypnosis work. It is also by far one of the more time-consuming exercises used
as an induction. Unfortunately, some hypnotists never evolve in their practice to
use something else with their inductions. This book has been written so you will
124
not have this problem. Many people who do PMR inductions and that’s all they
do. If this is all that’s used for as induction it can get boring for both subject and
Hypno Dom. In this next transcript, I will briefly outline a PMR induction that
transitions into a hypnotic session in ten steps. These ten steps have bolded goals
and your goals that you can personalize with each person you share this
experience with. Let’s begin.
1. Describe what you are going to go over with your subject and what they
can expect. Next, answer any questions about the induction or outcomes, and
ask for consent to begin. “I’d like you to close your eyes . . . begin to become
aware of the muscles and skin around your eyes. Focus in... making those
muscles tighter and tighter around your eyes ... As these muscles become tighter
and tighter, I’d like you to find the point that they are so tight . . . that your body
just wants to let that tension go… Nod your head for me when you have reached
that point.”
2. Follow this pattern of tensing and relaxing as you progressively move
throughout the entirety of the subject’s body. Interspersing statements of
relaxing the mind, releasing tension, stress, effort, and any other thought or
distraction that is not a part of this experience should be included as needed.
“Just let it go… Release the tension…. Soften…. Move your thoughts with this
wave of relaxation… tensing, hold, and releasing relaxation … to spread down,
and out through your body... Become aware of your scalp now… focus in…
tighten up your entire face… your scalp… and your neck… squeeze it tight…
Hold onto that building tension… Tighten them up as much as possible . . .
tighter and tighter now ... hold on to it all…it’s like the tension from a very hard
day . . . use all the frustration you can muster . . . bring in all the angst from
challenges and things holding you back . . . and make your muscles tight with
it… hold on to it for long as you can…
Feel your whole body tensing and responding… Until you just want to let it all
go… Take a deep breath… take in as much air as you can . . . Now let it all out
… Let it all go… Release… Tighten all those muscles again… hold on to it for
long as you can… Now release… Let it all go… Soften… Release all of the
tightness out…Locate all the tightness within the scalp, the facial muscles, the
skin… Let it all drain away… let it all fall away… like snow settling into the
125
earth… Follow the relaxation with your mind… just let it all go... Becoming
clear…becoming centered… becoming connected to the comfort in your body
and mind.”
3. Move the sensation and relaxation down to the subject’s hands. Have the
subject discover deeper levels of relaxation and comfort inside themselves. “I
want you to hold your awareness on your hands... Concentrate on your hands…
grip down tightly and make a fist . . . Hold that grip now… Feel the strength
within your fists… Making your fist tighter and tighter ... There’s power here…
Open up all your routine frustration, all the daily tension . . . Tighten those fists
tighter… Notice the strength you have there… Always inside you… Tighten up
as much as you can now… take a deep breath… And release… just let every
ounce of tension and stress go… Softening the muscles, releasing the tension,
and becoming aware up your strength within your relaxation… Find a gentle
comfort… moving through you freely… softening those muscles… rejuvenating
those fists… extending out through your fingers… relaxing them… moving with
that comfort… deepening certain pleasant sensations… as that relaxation is felt at
the very tips of your fingers… those pleasant sensations swirl in the palms of
your hand… and diffusing pleasingly throughout the body ... allowing you to
build up your strength… and build up your creativity … all of that comes with
this state of rejuvenating relaxation . . . knowing that each and every time you
feel this warm, pleasant comfort with me, you will go deeper and further into the
state of relaxation… The more comfortable you feel, the deeper you’ll move into
hypnosis…It becomes easier and more powerful each and every time.”
4. Create a cathartic opportunity in order to get a physical and emotional
release. “I want you to grip down with your fists and make them tighter and
tighter . . . follow the flow of tension into your forearms … getting them really
tight . . . spreading to your upper arms now. . . spreading all the way up to your
shoulders . . . finding the muscles grip tighter and tighter… it’s so hard to do…
Allow yourself to open up, even as you bare down… We are going to make it
harder for those little stresses to stick to you… think of all the things that might
frustrate you and bring you stress…. Tight up and open up emotionally… Collect
together all that tension and energy… I want you to try to hold on to that stress
and daily frustration ... try to hold on to it all ... until you feel that’s it’s okay to
let it all go… when you’re ready… release it… it's really okay… take a deep
126
breath… let it all go… just let it all go. . . breathing out ... letting go… relaxing
more powerfully than ever before… relaxation is finding your strength… and
bringing a calm wave of relaxing sensations to massage… and soften all your
muscles… Find where these sensations are the most intense and concentrate on
it…
Feel, the soft hug of air around your body… relaxation is finding your strength…
and finding there’s joy in your relaxation… And you begin to feel a better feeling
and more pleasant sensation… perhaps a tingling warmth that settles in your
hands, or your feet . . . where does it reveal itself to you? … Relaxation is finding
your strength … Do you feel this deepening hypnosis as a pleasant lightness or a
comfortable heaviness? Notice how acknowledging that, moves your relaxation
to deepen further… relaxation is finding your strength … Each sensation and
feeling, are uniquely a part of you… Allow yourself to go deeper, and further
into hypnosis, with each and every breath that you take… So, when there is a
problem, it might be one that you've taken with you to think about, or maybe you
don't realize you've been thinking about something… something you need to
make a decision about... <pause> I wonder... How does it feel to focus on these
sensations and rejuvenate your strength? (Pause) Take a deep breath…
Relaxation is finding your strength… Notice your strength and smile happily…
That's right. It feels great doesn't it?”
(Remember these decision and conversation points. You can ask the subject
about their experience here, encourage them to answer in their own mind, or ask
about this when you’re done. Not being able to recall these questions is a good
indication of natural amnesia as the subject is absorbed by the experience. This is
a good signal if you are planning on deeper hypnotic work. It is also okay if they
do remember them too. As long as the responses asked for at the decision points
were activated by the subconscious and they experienced them. You can make
your own scale of intensity like the hypnotizability tests to compare subjects if
you like, but really all you need is practice together, and consistent activation of
responses to build on this time together.)
5.Train the subject to attain and expect progressively deeper levels of
relaxation. “Bring your awareness down to the bottoms of your feet…
Relaxation is finding your strength… Compare the differences in posture,
127
temperature, and placement, between each foot… Move any tension out from the
bottoms of your feet… watch it drift away… what’s left behind is consistently
comfortably deepening relaxation… move your awareness like water rising up
into steam… drop by drop it contains what is there… moving down the body…
tightening all the muscles to push any tension encountered out . . . squeezing all
the muscles within the calves and shins . . . pushing out all the tension in all these
muscles, within the knees and thighs . . . pushing out all that tension from the
hips and buttocks… Tighten those muscles now . . . making them tighter and
tighter . . . and holding it all for the mental count of three . . . two...one ... Take a
deep breath… Relaxation is finding your strength… Let it out…let it all go, now.
. . breathing strong and even . . . feeling all your tension draining away…
Any tension encountered is squeezed out… drifting far away from you, the more
relaxed you go… Relaxation is finding your strength… Experience the self-care
of relaxation… Moving you more deeply every time… Relaxation is your
strength… Expecting a deeper relaxation, moves you into your strength and
comfort, each and every time you do this… Relaxation is your strength… Every
cell in your body is soaking in the recharging power of relaxation… Your
learning to relax completely… your learning how to recharge yourself and your
creative resources… this is self-care… Relaxation is your strength… The more
deeply you go… the more you build up this potential within you… the more
deeply you go… the more easily you build of this relaxation and resource within
… It all happens with the sound of my voice… Relaxation is your strength… It’s
through this relaxing practice, that you bring this strength with you, wherever
you go… Each and every time, you go this deeply, or even deeper, with me…
You get the benefits… you feel optimistic and creative… You feel every part of
you memorizing this perfect relaxation… every time we do this… you
immediately go this deep… or even deeper now… (Pause a few seconds.)
Relaxation is your strength… Practice, now with me… tightening your body to
exercise your strength… once again pushing out any tension encountered…
starting to intensify those sensations with your hands… pushing through any
tension found in your feet… filling those spaces with a deepening relaxation… It
begins again… circling down your body… moving through the top of your head
128
towards your feet… pushing out any tension encountered... taking your mind and
body even deeper… focusing in more… to the relaxation in my voice… taking
you deeper into this pleasant relaxation easily, and immediately… tightening all
the muscles from your shoulders, torso, your arms, hands… moving down…
pushing out any tension from your soles in your feet… pushing out any tension
from your palms of your hands… into your calves, all the way down… holding
onto to all that tightness for the moment… it is making your body hard, ridged,
and inflexible, like a stone… your face taunt... growing tighter… hard as a
stone… holding onto all the tension… and those tight quivering muscles in your
body… (Pause for a few seconds. You are ideally seeking muscle exhaustion
here.)
You are not made to be a stone… try to hold it to the mental count of three . . .
Take a deep breath… 1, 2, 3… Relaxation is your strength… Just allow yourself
to completely relax it all away… There is strength in deepening your
relaxation… release it all… just breathing in and out ... let go. Relaxation is your
strength… your being supported, encouraged, and balanced in this state of
relaxation… take a moment now… soak it all in… taking you deeper than ever
before… relaxation for your mind and body… (pause for five to ten seconds.) It
gets easier… easier, each and every time, we do this together… You go deeper…
each and every time you hear my voice… With my voice, you respond with this
relaxation… with my voice, you know I can take you even farther into hypnotic
relaxation…
It is from this practice together, that you’ll discover what’s important to hold
onto… and what we can let go… Just as important, is learning when it’s time to
let go… go deeper… deeper still… You are learning to go deeper… You are
learning to recharge your strength… go deeper… You are learning that this is
self-care… It gets easier, each and every time we do this together… Relaxation is
your strength… Following my instructions gets you there… Following my
instructions takes you deeper… listening to my voice takes you to where you
want to go… As we go through this process one more time… opening up every
atom of your body and mind to opportunity… to be completely present… totally
focused… to find enjoyment within our relaxation… I want you to tighten all
your muscles… every muscle of your body… you already feel your body
129
responding… That’s perfect… tighten every muscle of your body… hold onto
that effort even longer than you have done before…
Feel your strength as the muscles grip tighter and tighter…. your practice with
me is already developing your awareness and expectation… this can be done,
even when stress is squeezing you… Making your whole body tight and taunt…
just like a stone… tightening all of you… every part… until you know… you
don’t want to hold it any longer… Take a deep breath in… just let it out now…
let it go… breathe… Relaxation is your strength… go deeper into this now…
making it yours… deeper now… when there’s a problem that you've been
thinking about, or even when you don't realize you've been thinking about it all...
You can release it, just like this… being present in the now of this moment… Go
deeper with me, every time it gets easier… and you just let go…”
6. Bringing into the future a balanced level of relaxation developed from
today. “Allow yourself to completely memorize this state of relaxation… You're
doing perfectly… Anytime, you can use your mind to scan your body, and seek
out any area that is tight and tensed… Any time you need to recharge and get
some relaxation… the memory of what this feels like is right there… be present
within it… drink it in… this is taking care of yourself… and with each breath,
you can find your strength... and you are breathing in peace... creativity . . . calm
. . . balance… The gift of this relaxation is that it’ll go with you... wherever and
whenever you need it… You can bring where you are now into the future…
Allow your subconsciousness to do what it needs to… making this a resource for
everyday life.
Take stock on how deeply you can go today. This is a skill… our practice
together further develops its strength and comfortable calm… So, imagine what
it might be like to go even deeper into this pleasant relaxation… into this
creative… comfortable… calm… you are developing this skill for the future…
making you even more responsive… Each and every time, you go deeper, easily,
and confidently… you can feel this recharging you….”
7. Use time distortion to create opportunities in the future. “Every time you
hear my voice… I want you to become aware of the best feelings in your body
and mind… if appropriate, your awareness seeks out the deepest relaxation you
can perfectly experience … do that now ... Every time you hear my voice… you
130
can carry this relaxation deeper, and further, into your life as a resource... do that
now ... Allow your subconscious to dream… when you sleep and dream let your
relaxation and creativity lead you on an adventure… Life is an adventure… when
you go deeper… The ability to be calm, and at peace with yourself is broadcasted
out into the world… It’s a confidence that people will ask you about…
Go deeper… becoming more capable … for the next opportunity . . . the next
moment… that you can relax into… It’s all connected through this moment… be
present… Soon, the days will become weeks... and the weeks will become
months… the months will become years… You hear me perfectly… as your
moving deeper recharges body… and recharges mind... All this happened as you
got connected with the resources available to you… as you relaxed more
completely throughout the days your life… this moment of relaxation connects
you to the core of your strength… allowing you to be more optimistic and
resourceful… this all happens as come to understand how life can be…”
8. Emerging the subject. “I am going to count from one to five . . . at the count
of five, your eyes will open, and you will become wide awake… feeling fine, and
feeling better, than ever before. It is from this perfect place of relaxation that you
will return with more life… return with a more confident attitude about yourself,
your world, and your ability to enjoy the future. Beginning to count now there’s
one... hearing the sounds around you become more fully inspired and alive. Two
… your breathing deepens, and you are reconnecting with the world. Three . . .
feeling good and refreshed. Four... hearing my voice always makes it easier to
relax… and go deeper every time. And, five ... eyes open, wide awake and give
me a smile . . . Wide awake.”
9. Debrief with your subject. Discover what they liked and their impressions.
Get ideas about where to go from here.
10. Create a record of the sessions and your own impressions. This record
allows you to develop your art, manage future sessions, and demonstrates how
far you have come on this journey. This isn’t a personal history of the subject,
but details of their life, preferences, allergies, and interests are relevant elements.
Just let the subject know if you are creating a detailed record for your sessions
together. Mentioning what details will be included as personal identifiers will be
a question you should be prepared to answer. Not many people will be alright
131
having their personal name and identifiable details in a file of any sort. This is
more for you to keep track of the elements of what went into this session. If you
work with many people doing lots of different sessions this strategic planning
will pay off.
More on Inductions.
An induction can take 30 seconds to do, or 30 minutes, depending upon the
aptitude of the subject and the skill of the hypnotist. Hard-to-hypnotize subjects
need more time in the beginning and some very hypnotizable subjects just sit in
the chair and they're out. Testing for responsiveness helps screen for the qualities
you are seeking, but it also can serve as the induction to begin the work. When
starting out the main quality you seek in a subject may just be hypnotizability.
This chapter explores different aspects of inductions and will go over general
transitions with inductions that could be used in your daily life.
Have you ever thought about the ability for negative and positive hallucination as
part of daily life? When a person sees, feels, hears, tastes, or smells something
that is actually not there they are hallucinating. When a person can’t perceive
something that is right in front of them (such as their car keys) this is a negative
hallucination. Often, it’s the best way to hide something from anybody. Just put it
right in front of them. Hallucinating under hypnosis or in trance is appropriate,
natural, and expected. It’s something we do during our daily lives and our
conscious mind just rationalizes it away. To encourage you, or your subject to
hallucinate and revivify a real or an imagined experience, a hypnotist will
stimulate your imagination and fixate your attention in specific ways. For
example, I’ve seen many people lose their glasses that were on their head, face,
or even in their hand and that is a negative hallucination.
Fortunately, seeing those pink elephants and the green absinthe fairy having tea
is a positive hallucination. By now you should be settling in with the perspective
that all of us function by being trance machines in our daily lives. It’s simply a
matter of our subconscious mind being more dominant or less dominant than the
conscious mind at that moment. By learning trance and hypnotic induction skills
we are sharpening our natural skills to become aware of and utilize these altered
132
states as they occur in others and ourselves. Sometimes an induction involves
simply asking the person to recall a favorite place, an experience of comfort or
pleasure, or sharing an immersive exercise with instructions. We’re taking their
attentional engagement and associating personalized experiences as part of the
scene as if they were there. Seeing through another’s point of view, sharing new
eyes, touching, feeling, smelling scents floating around them, and reacting to the
details all around them in that scenario. For some, this is just another trance of
getting lost in a good book, movie, or video game.
I encourage imagining or revivification of details of remembered experiences to
achieve the involvement of all the senses in the scene put forward. Even if a
scene is dreamlike, the sensory information and associations interacted with will
be the same as those from everyday life. The goal of induction or any hypnotic
communication is conscious subconscious overlap in order to stimulate the
subconscious mind and encourage it to be more dominant. You can
conversationally engage trance because the subconscious is always active and
working with the conscious mind. The conscious and subconscious mind will
pick up on different elements in communication, and the communication between
those two minds in the moment is not always a priority.
One of the fastest elements to engage and stimulate the subconscious mind is
with sensory details, because the subconscious mind must represent those details
to process them. For example, I might ask you to close your eyes and imagine
smooth colorful silk, and white cotton balls. As you thought of those sensory
qualities your mind associated an image or experience, and represented it to you
in that way. That’s your subconscious mind working with your conscious mind.
Many of the conversational trance inductions I use utilize sensory involvement.
To encourage sensory involvement with a conversation partner or subject I might
ask questions like:
Look all around you. What is the first thing that catches your eye there?
You will see a flash of color. What is it?
What’s the quietest of sounds that you can hear there?
133
Take a deep breath and tell me about the aromas that are carried to you by the air
/wind.
How does the water feel on your skin?
Are you warm or cool?
These statements above look very basic. Don’t they? Crafting sensory examples
that engage the mind into an automatic action is the best. Think back to a time
when you listened to or talked with someone stuttering. As that person hung on
words and ended up stuttering more intensely you couldn’t resist forming the
words yourself in an attempt to help them or complete the communication. I’m
sharing again an exercise with something Domly and new. Notice how these
sensory involvement details engage the attention and build specific qualities.
“Notice the sensation of air on the back of your hands right now. Can you find
something very wonderfully pleasant about that? One of those hands feels better
than the other. Notice something really pleasant and wonderful about that too.
And when you do, you just might smile. It's simple, and I want you to hold onto
that feeling. Enjoyment is a trainable sensation and enjoyment and concentration
have a direct relationship. The more we enjoy a sensation, the more concentrated
we can become, which in turn increases the enjoyment even further. How did you
do with this exercise?”
“As you read this you may pause, thinking about the cold going to bed at night.
You will feel the cold and welcome it. You’ll have no other warmth but what I
bring to you. I will have you do things, and you’ll think about this throughout
your days. There will be times none of us believes them anymore. It can happen
like a dream. Even as your reading, you will have to pause or shift. No matter
what is going on, the cold and the warmth represents the forces fitting us
together. You’ll forever crave my desire and presence as you encounter that cold.
This will be so as long as you are mine, so snuggle deeply into the warmth of me.
I want you to consider what it is you carry forward into your daily awakenings
and dreams? While you do, I’m going to think about what we do next. I want you
thirsty for it.”
134
Let’s explore these sensory based starting points that can be led into a hypnotic
induction, or transition into a deeper trance and more. Planning out many
examples of transition points like the ones above will quickly improve your skills
for trance hijacking and hypnotizing subjects. We spend our whole lives
associating together elements that we’ve learned about in specific contexts, and
these elements are our starting points as we interact with stories, information, and
experiences. They are what we know and accept. What we know and accept is
what we bring forward. What follows are not only sensory based descriptions,
but these descriptions have been associated with a behavioral expectation about
what comes next. They will be some of the easiest for you to pick up and utilize.
Did you know we also control the hypnotic thermostat? I sometimes describe
either a very hot or very cold room to encourage the subject in one particular
way. Very good subjects will begin to either perspire or shudder in response to
how I set the hypnotic thermostat. Suggesting things like there's an ice cube
sliding down your arm and watching for responses such as goosebumps tells me
the subject is responding very well. These are all fun things to explore and
consider writing down. Not every subject is highly emotive while in deep trance,
or hypnosis. You will find out in your debrief later the subject had an effect from
your hypnotic instructions.
Eating is an activity that draws on all of a person’s senses. The food itself can
offer some generalizable experiences for us to draw upon. Foods like lemon,
bitter coffee, and burning toast are almost universal experiences in more than just
America. This is why during an interview I may ask about your food likes or
dislikes. That includes allergies and foods you avoid. I never want someone to be
in fear that they just ate some hypnotic peanut butter and they have a severe
allergy. Talking about the process of cooking is a great place to start in an
interview or hypnotic trance. It’s easy to have the subject combining flavors,
exploring tastes, and appreciating the presentation of perfect dishes displayed for
them. I don’t know enough about cooking to get very detailed with this topic, but
I have watched the cooking channel. It’s not my knowledge of cooking here that
matters. There are many chefs who will fascinate you enough to imagine what
could be on your plate and how it might be hypnotically experienced.
135
Some people go into a trance instantly when visualizing repetitive motion. I'll
often describe a scene for them in which they're swinging on a swing, rowing a
boat, sweeping a broom across the floor, watching the waves at the beach, staring
at the tops of trees gently swinging in the breeze, painting, gardening, running,
and walking. I choose the appropriate motion based on the information I gathered
through our interactions and interviews. All of us do so many repetitive acts that
some of the best hypnotists can even make imagining washing dishes a
captivating scene that transports us back to our youth. One of the things I loved
to do as a child was arranging my action figures just right on the dresser before
going to sleep. Getting at that info and utilizing these stories allows us to use
them in the stories we create.
Being in the audience of the theater of our imaginations can take us back to plays
at school, opening night at the movies, and Broadway shows. Depending upon
your interests, I might suggest that you're watching either a ballet, a World Series
game, a child's recital, or even a new reality television show. There is much to
choose from in this category of being a passive observer. Do you tend to be
apprehensive? Excited? What's your reaction when you realize that there will be
real consequences for what is decided next? The idea is for you to become
absorbed in the performance and put yourself in that action. Presentation here is
everything, and there is so much to keep track of. This is a useful perspective or
frame when dealing with resistant and highly analytical people. It’s a tool to use
when playing out what might be possible if the subject follows a particular
course of action.
Listening to music or attending a concert can easily transport some people into a
trance faster than a vocal induction. I separated this out from the last category
because language and music tend to activate different parts of our minds. The
language center in our brain is really seeking dialogued interaction to sustain its
attention. Movies and music are so broad a category that you need to really talk
to the person you’re working with to get the details. One can never just assume
everyone loves Pink Floyd and the movie Highlander. Everyone totally should
love them, but reality doesn’t always cooperate with our should’s. However,
most people today are walking around with a large library of music in their
minds. We can have our subject choose music that starts a playlist that they can
sing over and over throughout the day. Now with streaming music services, it has
136
become easier than ever to pair musical selections with activity and mood. I’ll
just through the idea for a sexual playlist out and you can figure out the benefits.
Relaxing and listening to a great story already comes with the expectation of
being an audience member. It doesn’t take much to think back to where we
snuggled into our beds and we got told tales of adventure. Even if we had
illiterate parents, we have all heard about these bedtime stories. We expect that
listening to a story we’ll begin to quiet our mind, relaxing the body, and to stay
engaged we can be motivated to tune everything else out. Sound anything like a
hypnotic experience? Even if we did not have someone to read us stories in bed
as children, we have seen it in movies, read about it in books, and most likely
been read to in school. Even if someone does not like to read themselves, they
often are receptive to a pleasant voice telling a delightful tale. I know people who
do not like to read, but they have told me about times where they could just stay
up all night talking to someone, and have no idea where the time went.
Surprise and shock are commonly used by magicians, orators, comedians, and in
stories where plot twists offer immediate intensification of emotion; they’ve got
you. Your attention is fixated to discover what happens next. When a person
experiences surprise or shock, they are forced to process and make sense of the
experience. In the moment that does not always happen logically or well. The
reaction to a shock or surprise captivates attention and pushes out all other
thoughts. This cognitive reaction automatically narrows a person’s awareness
into a single focus and this making them suggestable to commands and
instructions. This is why pattern interrupts work so well. Using any technique
that employs surprise, confusion, and shock presents unexpected elements into an
interaction that can hijack a person’s thoughts.
Emotionally charged environments, interactions, and states can rapidly become
disorientating and overwhelming. Going to a rally to protest, laughing in church,
being slapped across the face, and having sex, are all emotionally charged
experiences that tend to stick in our memories. How we interpret these events and
take action from them often creates or reinforces personal values for us. Our
emotions are rooted within our subconscious, and so our cognitive emotional
reactions to a highly charged event can even be expressed in a completely
opposite response. High intensity, emotionally charged events are seldom
137
planned for in our lives unless you have a condition like PTSD or phobia. At that
point, a person’s life is planned around reactions to these events.
When someone is feeling an emotion, they are expressing a cognitive-emotional
behavior that is subconsciously triggered by an internalized response to a
particular stimulus. Not one person says to themselves that they are going to start
feeling good for a few minutes because someone gave them a compliment. Being
analytical about our actions is part of behavioral training. Being overly analytical
is a defense mechanism that can rob a person of both the highs and the lows
experienced in life. Go meta on your actions when it matters and learn when to
be in the moment to associate into the joy and the challenges. Utilize what you
care about as the direction to head into as you seek out behaviors to observe and
decide what could transition into an induction. The things that you are passionate
about are not distractions as you learn about behavior and hypnosis. The things
you are passionate about are what calls you to practice, invest, and create a life
that matters to you. It’s in those areas of interest you will recognize the best
transitions and contexts for inductions.
Joseph Campbell said that if you can see every step of your path laid out in front
of you, it’s not your path. Our path is made step by step with adjustments in the
moment. This is what makes it our path. Getting the subject thinking along a
particular track starts by introducing elements that captivate their attention. In
order to draw them deeper into a focused or mindful interaction discover what
interests and fascinates them. That is the very definition and function of
deepeners. Those areas of interested fascination are topics that you may consider
as inductionless hypnotic inductions because your subject did everything for you.
Get in the habit of pulling apart the stories you like and are drawn to. They will
share common themes and still you love them. You have to recognize these
elements fully for yourself before you can use them as anything more than
descriptions about ideas.
Deepeners
Classic examples of hypnotic deepeners are walking down staircases towards the
basement of your mind, going up and down in an elevator, and repetitive
138
activities such as sorting grains of sand by size. Deepeners are sensory (visual,
auditory, gustatory, kinesthetic) involvement activities that are used to deepen or
intensify focused awareness by engaging with the activity. Engaging in the
deepening activity becomes the transition point as hypnotic
instructions/commands are layered into the activity which further moves the
subject into the desired state. If you ever woke up in the middle of a dream that
you wanted to get back into you were engaging in this process as you attempted
to revivify certain elements of the dream until you were back there.
Deepeners can also be narrative driven mechanisms that influence us by
connecting the stories that we walk through to goal-directed tasks. There are
times where deepeners and inductions can be one and the same. When you have a
very responsive subject that you hypnotize often this will be clear quickly. The
most important thing for you to learn here is that deepeners are just what you use
to increase and attune a subject’s attention, energy, and awareness. They are the
means that you’ll tie everything you want to lead into. I recommend trying these
skills in storytelling games so you gain experience applying them in multiple
contexts. I’ll share two of my favorite games for this.
Gloom is a circular story creation tool disguised as an RPG, delivered as a card
game, and it's fun. This is a game that invites you into tangents and silly dramatic
display of depression. Your goal is to ensure that your characters do not live or
die happily. It’s silly and encourages you to use your skills in ways that emphasis
more than pleasure while still having fun. To check out a playthrough of Gloom
https://youtu.be/LGIX5DhTC9A or go to YouTube. There is a lot to choose
from.
Cult Following: The One True Game is one of my favorites as it invites you to
practice every persuasion and influence attempt to come up with reasons why
you have the best cult for everyone. It’s as easy to play as Apples to Apples and
can get just as appallingly fun as Cards Against Humanity with the right people.
The cards themselves are very family friendly, well, as long as they don’t take
the subject matter of divine belief too seriously. You really need at least four to
five people to play this well. Check out a walkthrough. https://youtu.be/2OwtMh5nsw I highly recommend this game to anyone who likes to practice
these tools alone. This game provides great questions, contexts, and a goal that is
139
meant for your entertainment. This is a wonderfully silly, but the game offers a
useful premise to practice behavioral flexibility with your influence attempts
before using them on telemarketers. Their new expansion decks are great too. I
wish I got a commission here but I don’t. It’s just an awesome product that I
happened to get my own personalized cards too!
140
Fractionation
Fractionation is a cognitive deepening technique that utilizes our innate ability
for sustaining attention, and it's used during hypnosis and trance to bring the
subject in and out the state repeatedly. We all have a subconscious mechanism
that attempts to fixate and deepen attention after an interruption resulting in a
state with heightened focus. Repeatedly fractionating someone will deepen the
state a person is in, it allows you to train rapid responses to reenter a state, and
presents the hypnotist with another opportunity for compounding instructions and
commands. Fractionation is used in more than just the field of hypnosis. You’ll
find it in behavioral feedback planning (think slot machines), dating,
presentations, and storytelling. Those soap opera’s showing an emotional high
than cutting to a scene for an emotional low, transitioning to an exciting scene,
and then back to a dramatic low is a narrative-driven formula designed to
intensify attention and emotion. This chapter will explore fractionation and how
we might use it.
While fractionation will create heightened awareness and emotional
responsiveness, it will not increase your skill. It will make those multitasking
moments seem like you are doing awesome even if your response accuracy is
okay. Just remember that heightened awareness and physical responsiveness does
not always translate to actual aptitude on complex tasks. We do have an inherent
cognitive bias to believe that it does. The best example is people texting and
driving. They know they are doing it well, until they aren’t. The attitude you
bring to deepening someone’s state is important. Hypno Dom’s, unlike therapists,
who make a clear delineation to when a subject is formally in hypnosis and when
they are not, tell their subject’s they are still influenceable while in trance.
Therapists use formal hypnosis routines because it allows for a clear transition in
and out of hypnosis. Fractionation removes this imaginary safety net and
demonstrates how active our subconscious can be. Everything is hypnosis or
nothing is hypnosis. This statement should be making more sense as you learn
this material.
You may have read about hypnotists keeping someone in hypnosis for hours and
then doing an hour-long session. That is not the standard or goal you should aim
for. Hypnosis is dependent on focus and attention. Not everyone is ready for that
or has the time for that. In most instances, you’ll find fractionation has been
141
merged into techniques utilized for rapid induction, state (attention/emotional)
deepeners, behavioral conditioning, and rapport generation. The context you use
fractionation techniques in should determine the time you’d want to devote to
one activity. So, you could commit to doing hypnosis with a subject for an hour,
or hypnotize your subject for ten minutes and then brought them back out. Then
hypnotize them for another ten minutes, and then bring them back out.
In utilizing fractionation you’d be moving the subject in and out of hypnosis
rapidly and successively during your session. And before the end of the agreed
upon time they should have a VERY intensified state, they should have
comfortably practiced going in and out of hypnosis with you, they are convinced
of what is happening, and they are more eager to go under hypnosis with you
again. Longer hypnotic trances are still worthwhile. You might wait to use them
until you begin state proofing with your subject. More on state proofing later in
the book. I want you to understand that length of time in hypnosis does not mean
a deeper state of trance or hypnosis.
In the excerpt below, I give an example of how fractionation was used after
attaining initial trance with someone I met at a dinner party. This demonstrated to
people at our table how their subconscious mind is always active and aware of
everything that they were doing. As a hypnotist, what I do is teach people that
their subconscious is always active, and communicating. It’s often difficult to
explain their moment to moment thoughts by using their conscious mind as if it
were an island onto itself. Now that you understand the approach let’s get into
the example.
After locking this subject’s hands together with the magnetic hand's test, I had
her eyes lock and close. At that point, I asked her if she would like to feel that
relaxation more profoundly move through her. She said, “yes” and this is where
we begin below.
“In a minute, I will have you count with me. When I say one you will repeat after
my count. As you do, you’ll find that relaxation and comfort doubles… with
every number said. Starting from 1, with every number, you double that level of
relaxation and comfort…Now… One… say it with me now.”
Subject: “One…”
142
“With every number growing twice as relaxed. Twice as comfortable… moving
through your body… Two.”
Subject: “Two.”
“With every number growing twice as relaxed… Twice as comfortable, and you
start thinking about the best moments of your life… Three…”
Subject: “Three.”
“Double that comfort, and playful happiness moves throughout your body… it’s
the best moments of your life that fill you up with joy... Think about it filling you
up now… You are a container for it to express itself in the world… Even more.
Four.”
Subject: “Four.” (Subject is smiling broadly now.)
“Perfect, you’re doing so well... There are some many different paths in our
lives… we don’t want to take them all… Feel confident, and proud, for all that
you have accomplished in your life… your path has led you right here… Five.”
Subject “Five.” (Subject is quieter now and slower to respond.)
“Noticing your smile on your face… you… really happy… when I tell you that
you're doing perfectly… In a moment, I want you to move to an even deeper state
of relaxation … I want you to imagine I am writing on a blackboard right in front
of you… you remember those blackboards from when you were a little girl in
school… Think about how you would look to the teacher, as you feel like your
understanding the lesson… I will begin by writing the number one on that
blackboard… In a moment, I’m going to erase that number from the
blackboard… as I do… the number begins to fade from your mind… Taking with
it any stress, any hesitation from the day, and the lesson keeps getter better and
better… Now, as I write the number one, notice the contrast of the blackboard
and that chalk, white, number…. Feeling comfort and relaxation move more
deeply through you… Now, I’m erasing it… that number goes more and more
faint… until the number disappears altogether from your mind… Taking with it
any stress or thought from your day… Taking with it any hesitation.
143
I’m writing the number two now… find the most incredibly happy feelings… and
notice the contrast of the blackboard, and the edges of that chalk, white,
number... (I take a long deep breath and let it out with an “ahhhh”) Feeling the
comfort… feeling the relaxation move…. heavier… moving more deeply… I’m
erasing the number… the number goes more and more faint… until it
disappears... just gone… Taking with it any stress… any hesitation from your
day… feeling better than you’ve felt in a long time… And after this next number,
you might be surprised at how good you feel … Now… As I write the number
three … you find the most wonderful sensations in your body… focus on that
blackboard, and that chalk, white, number... The relaxation takes you, more
deeply… I’m erasing the number … the number disappears… as the relaxation
spreads throughout your mind and body… throughout your mind and body…
there so much more you can feel… hmmm… relax... into this… relax into my
voice… I’d like to explore how much pleasure you can have by sharing a
conversation tonight… Would you like to explore that with me now?”
Subject: “Yes.”
“Now, I'm going to ask you to seek out and select a very pleasurable feeling. The
most wonderful feeling you can discover secretly… you don’t have to tell me,
right now…make it good… and strong… this is for you… so make it the best
feeling that can be… Fully step into that memory for those feelings… reach for
all those good feelings with all the confidence and ability you have… When you
really feel those wonderful feelings, simply say the word, yes. Take all the time
you need in the next minute to do that now.”
In about twenty seconds the subject says yes.
“Begin now… building that wonderful feeling up inside you… How does it move
through your body? You don’t have to know how… your subconscious knows
just what to do… Hold yourself in such a way that this feeling expands through
you comfortably… as it happens simply nod for me.
Subject nods in a few seconds.
Hold yourself in such a way that this feeling expands through you quickly...
Subject nods in a few seconds.
144
Hold yourself in such a way that this feeling expands through you even more
intensely…
Subject nods immediately and the subject is sitting straighter now.
This is your secret feeling… At any point, you can pick a better feeling if you
wish… No one else will know what it is… Build it up now…make those feelings
stronger and get them closer to your peak… When it is close to its peak let me
know by saying yes.”
In a few seconds, the subject says “yes”.
“Now, bring together all those feelings of pleasure… bring together the best
feeling of comfort… build them up stronger… You don’t have to know how…
your subconscious knows just what to do… joining those sensations of relaxation
and pleasure now... bring them together … because together you can feel even
better than before… building them up more and more… when those feelings are
the best that you can make them, at this moment, say the word... yes”.
Almost immediately the subject says “yes”.
“Now, bring all your attention to this feeling ... comfort … pleasure ... wonderful
... comfortable … pleasure… When you believe you’re holding onto all the
pleasure that you can experience today say “yes.”
Immediately the subject says “yes”.
“Enjoy, how comfortable and pleasurable… it is to speak to me with an
incredible feeling… wonderful and good... Say yes if you’re enjoying how this
feels.”
The subject immediately says “yes”.
“Perfect… that’s right… when communicating this way… you can’t help but
anticipate the pleasure building with every yes… do you enjoy this feeling?”
The subject instantly says yes.
145
“Have you noticed how every time you say yes… that pleasure is building even
more inside your body… inside your mind. Say yes, and feel it intensifying even
more.”
The subject instantly says “Yesss.”
“Now, I want you to open your eyes and look at me every time you say yes. Can
you feel that you already want to say yes?”
The subject immediately says “Yes.”
“Can you feel how each yes increases that pleasure even more?”
The subject is smiling saying, “yes.”
“That’s right. Perfectly building it up more every time... When I tell you to close
your eyes, your attention will move to the where your feeling that pleasure the
strongest in your body… You’ll soon discover the more I communicate with you
like this… the better this pleasure will feel…. The better this pleasure feels… the
more you want to communicate this way… and the better you start to recognize
how much pleasure you can experience… Are you ready to close your eyes?”
“Yes.” The subject says closing her eyes.
“Perfect… Follow that pleasure moving all throughout your body... Discover all
those sensations that make you happy… as this pleasure moves to where you
really want it to go… Feeling all that potential pleasure being built up ever
more… Each and every time you say yes, you’ll either open your eyes to look at
me or close your eyes listening carefully to me… Are you ready to say yes and
open your eyes to look at me?”
“Yes.” (Subject looks in my eyes without a hint of shyness.)
“Perfect… Close your eyes building pleasure that up. (Subject shifts her feet and
shifts back and forth in the chair.) Now, I want you to follow along perfectly…
noticing that pleasure root more deeply inside you… each time you say yes…
open your eyes…. Close your eyes… When you’re ready to build this pleasure,
even more, open your eyes and say yes.”
146
“Yes.” (Subject opens her eyes)
“Good! Double that pleasure… that’s right… bring to this pleasure a feeling of
rightness... that this is a natural… that this is good… that pleasure like this has
been something you have been missing out on… As you get that feeling of
rightness… it melds together with that comfort…. Comes together with the
freedom to be yourself… allowing yourself to do this opens up pleasure for you
in new ways… Pleasure, throughout your body and mind… if you want that, say
yes."
“Yesss.”The subject is very focused and if this was not a public space, I would
have moved to train more obedience.
“Perfect…Double that feeling again… you can feel so much more than that…
close your eyes… and say yes if you are enjoying this feeling?”
I pause and the subject speaks yes softly.
“Now, when I will say the word, “wake” … you will awaken…. Opening your
eyes while remaining in a deep state of pleasure and relaxation… When I say
“sleep” you will immediately fall into a deep trance… this deep or even deeper...
Let’s test this now. Wake now.”
(Subject opens her eyes and looks at me. I give it a few seconds looking in her
eyes and she smiles.)
“Does it feel good?”
“Yess.”
“Perfect, now Sleep...” Subject’s eyes close and her chin drops against her chest.
“Twice as relaxed… twice as deep… feeling the pleasure from doing this right…
As you go deeper… this responsive pleasure is growing.” (I give her about ten
seconds before giving the next command.) “Wake now.”
(Subject opens her eyes and looks into my eyes. I give it a few seconds looking
back in her eyes.)
147
“Perfect… Sleep, deeper now….” Subject’s eyes immediately close. “Each and
every time you do this …. you are growing that responsive pleasure… building
your confidence… building your thirst for more… When you open your eyes…
you will know there is more pleasure, and more freedom inside you… more than
you ever imagined…. Wake now.”
(Subject opens her eyes and smiles slowly as she sees me watching her.)
“Bring your awareness back to the room… become aware of the sounds that are
around you... and you feel wonderful... that this voice is here with you... And
each and every time that you go into trance with me, you’ll respond more
powerfully. Relaxation will be quicker and better. Now take a deep breath and
tell me if you enjoyed that.”
At this point, I talk with the subject for about a minute and find out what she
likes and then take her back down. There are several examples of fractionation
here and as you practice this, you’ll begin to have a feel for what is working best
for your subject. Even just a tiny response can be revisited over and over to focus
awareness on that response and thus build it up. Keep in mind that whenever
hypnosis is engaged over and over the subject is practicing the skills to intensify
this state and reenter it quickly. The subject is still suggestable to the hypnotist’s
commands and instructions even as they speak for several minutes seemingly
operating at a normal level of consciousness. I hope this example gives you ideas
on how to use fractionation with yes sets, emotions, and connecting behavior to
emotional rewards. The reader should note that having a subject experience
pleasure and look at me repeatedly also connects me to that pleasure.
Fractionation Exercise
Go over this example above again, and this time look for where you could insert
two or three minor emotional lows to fractionate emotions in another way. Write
out how you might describe this to the subject.
Your approach may be similar to this. “You can come back to this wonderful
feeling anytime you feel yourself holding onto stress from your day, or holding
onto someone else’s stress. This feeling can be a resource and help you on the
148
toughest days. Let’s practice this….” The formula should be emotional
high/low/high/low/high/low/high/high then move on to another way of
fractionating.
Use lows for this exercise that are universal. Here are three suggestions you can
use below.
•
•
•
When someone you thought was a friend really let you down.
When you feel confused and don’t know what to do.
When you made a mistake and know you have to do better.
When ready find a partner and explain this exercise to them. Show them the list
of lows and get their agreement to use them. Run through this exercise without
these lows and then with the addition of the lows. After each exercise debrief
take note of the different effects of these approaches.
Please conversationally trance responsibly. Think about associational carryover
of emotions and rapport that you are developing with your practice. Please
recognize when you do this to yourself also. When someone says something in
anger or when hurting badly, and you keep replaying it in your mind. If you think
about doing that you will start to notice that the emotional energy is what is being
recognized and then suddenly it is being compared to the energy somewhere else.
Then you are back on the hurtful, angry, words and energy. Be your own best
friend and snap yourself out of that.
End of Exercise
You will notice that yes sets are used often for affirming positivity quickly.
Saying yes because you feel your thoughts align with someone else feels good.
Yes sets are used in sales courses, NLP instruction, persuasion and negotiation
attempts, seduction courses, and in many other products where developing
engagement and getting an agreement matters. Really, developing engagement
and getting an agreement is applicable to almost every situation in our lives. Use
it sparingly because if it’s used too much it will not be an effective influence
attempt. The conscious mind will recognize it as you’re doing something
potentially shady. So many salespeople have used it that lots of us already have
149
some resistance to it. You can get around some of this resistance by mixing in
statements for the subject to repeat back to you. This method should be used with
caution because doing fractionation associated with pleasure alone can create
extremely strong cognitive and emotional transference.
When you see a hypnotist or MC place themselves in the direct line of sight to
the subject as they do trance or hypnosis work this is the technique they are
intentionally utilizing. By default, the hypnotist/MC is designed to be the first
person the subject will see as they are accessing their ideal pleasurable state.
When this happens over and over subconsciously the association becomes paired.
Have you noticed that I use time distortion to varying degrees within my
transcripts? Bringing up the possibility of next time up, how she will respond
now and in the future, and mentioning being little in front of the blackboard. A
subject may not ever trance again with me, but she will have a positive memory
that will last a lifetime. Be happy in this moment. This moment is your life
Symbol Morphology
When using hypnosis and trance it’s easy to associate or pair one thing with
another. People are social creatures and when a person’s behavior is modified
that in turn modifies the behavior of others. Even if the answering behavioral
modification is a subconscious reaction, people around you notice something is
different. We share culture with our language but also through symbols, images,
memes. A heart means love <3. A dollar $ign symbolizes cash. It doesn’t even
look like a dollar. It doesn’t even have to be attractive, but we have learned what
that symbol means. Symbol morphology is simply defined in this last example.
One thing has become symbolic for another because we have connected it in our
minds and culture to be that way. Monopoly the game demonstrates how true this
is. Monopoly was intended to demonstrate why capitalism doesn’t work, and
almost every game has arguments, cheating, and hard feelings. All because play
money begins to be related to as if it was real money and opportunities being
taken from us. This is a lesson. Even in the imaginary play of children’s games,
we can come to feel a game represents us and our lives. This chapter highlights
150
how all the skills and techniques you can learn from this book come together
with symbol morphology.
If I were to ask you to imagine that your pleasure has a color to it. What color
would it be? Just let your first impression give you that answer. You may have
said red, purple, etc., and now that pleasure is a color that you can see and feel. I
could drop that colored pleasure into my hand and eat it like a cookie. We can
drink it with some lime, salt, tequila, juice, and an umbrella. We can visualize
this color is filing you up. You can notice how the pleasure in your body might
grow larger than yourself, the pleasure surrounds you like a misty aura, and
touches those near and dear to you. You can explore what that pleasure can be
transformed into across every sense and through the representation of time. You
can even move the energy and sensations of one part of you into another. Just in
case you ever wanted to move the stimulation of a pussy onto a mouth or anus.
And wouldn’t life be so much more interesting if farts were as contagious as
yawns? Smile, never try out this musing unless you’re really going to laugh at an
ongoing fart joke.
No one experiences things as they are. We all experience things as we are. The
possibilities of mixing all our senses, thoughts, and emotions into vehicles of
stories, commands, and experiential reality are only limited by our imagination. I
will say not all of it is pleasant either. When using fractionation with this
technique you’ll find that transforming a color to sensation, a sensation to a
word, a word to action, and on and on can be consistently building up a state in
someone that they will not forget. The October Man seduction pattern was made
famous by using symbol morphology, fractionation, anchoring, and synesthesia
to develop a new sexual identity within someone. It is worth a read!
The only word you may not know from that last sentence is synesthesia.
Synesthesia is the production of a sense impression relating to a part of the body,
or a sense (hearing, seeing, smelling, feeling) by stimulation of another sense or
part of the body. For example, you might believe you can smell purple, or taste
love. As you practice with these techniques you might try something like having
the subject see hues of light blue color around them, or you, when they say or
hear the number four aloud. This is not a far stretch for your skills. You just took
151
your first steps to accomplish this already if you transformed your pleasure into a
color. How does that color feel to you now?
Symbols are internalized and can take on many forms. Learning about these
forms is the first step to working with them. There are many things that all of us
value, but if you could name just two things you’d utilize in an adventure, what
would it be? If you just instantly began thinking about that then I successfully set
appropriate boundaries for you and a goal that started engaging you an adventure.
It’s not a far stretch to next ask about those values that are most important to you,
and why you decided the way you did. What having them does for you becomes
the exploration that I can use to work with these concepts with you. You may
have realized by now that hypnotic inductions are everywhere. Practically any
state can be induced, but some are more fun than others.
Working with symbolic morphology in a trance or hypnosis is easy. Choose
something with a strong emotional connection to it. It might be an object, person,
or experience. If you choose a concept to explore like what a person loves most
in this world you could attempt to narrow the focus across those loves. For
example, surfing and family. Both of these loves would allow a person to
experience different elements of love, but there is most likely overlap there
somewhere. Defining and exploring these concepts enough to be worked with is
all that is needed to progress on. You can explore these two concepts by making
them each a color and asking about their properties. If you want to transition
from what the subject is describing to another kind of love what would you do?
Think about this before reading more.
The key to being able to make successful transitions is getting good at describing
how these things are alike so you can associate into the likeness, and move away
from the differences. Practicing guiding someone from their present state into
another state begins by realizing what you are moving towards or what is being
moved away from. Our conversations can do this naturally without intending to
do so as we favor somethings over others. When attempting to move someone
out of their current state you might pace it, describing their present state, and then
begin leading into the state you want the person to go. Using transitional words
allows you to do this smoothly. Here are a few transitional words and linkage
152
phases to try out as you work this example: to the point where, consequently, as
if, it’s just like, in spite of.
Everything in this world becomes information and energy for us. Let me ask you,
isn't it weird we have a voice in our heads? Just like the one you used to read this
right now. As you read this, you can derive pleasure from it. There’s an
opportunity to engage with this pleasure in a unique way. This leading transition
is just a playful way of advancing your exposure to symbology and fractionation.
You’ve read over some examples of how I’ve used this material already. That is
unless you’ve skipped around in this book. Remember boys and girls,
procrastination is like masturbation. It might feel good to skip some learnings
today, but that’s because you’re already fucking yourself tomorrow. Now let’s
jump into an advanced utilization of symbolic morphology.
Using Symbolic Morphology in Context
I’m going over a more advanced and full transcript of this technique first before I
share a shorter example. Showing you the broader setup and conversation helps
build on the skills you’re reading about. Application is something you will also
have to do in your encounters in the field. In this example, I’ve done a few brief
exercises with someone I met at a hypnosis meetup. We’ve talked about
meditation and trance and she is not someone knowledgeable about hypnosis,
yet. This subject 's interests included power exchange and I found this out by
inquiring about her handcuff tattoo around her ankle. We’re talking and I
mentioned, “that the most pervasive form of despair comes from not being who
you really are.” And she took off on that theme. Some of these statements are
said simply to allow the subject to explore them and describe themselves in
relation to them. To use this strategy you may have to talk more often than usual
at first. I tell students that rain does not make a sound until it hits something.
Just be personable, get the person comfortably sharing about themselves, and
what gets them moving. We all have plenty of reasons to sit down and watch
Netflix, but what makes them move and explore the world, adventure, or another
person? That’s what you want to find out. I got her interested in training pleasure
to increase motivation to explore the world. I talked about how opening oneself
to these states allows us to be more authentic, creative, and motivated to reach for
the things that matter. Often society sends us conflicting messages about living
153
life with too much or too little passion. How do we decide to push back against
that? Once a person begins seeking more joy in their life, they tend to live it more
optimistically, and in more authentic ways. Do you have creative pursuits that
take you away from much of the world, but at the same time make you feel like
you’re more connected to it? (My examples are often writing, painting, reading,
and hiking long distance.) Getting back to my example, this is a woman stated to
me that she wants more passion in her life. Who doesn’t want more passion,
energy, and time focused on what they really want to feel, think about, and
experience?
This transcript borders on the erotic at times and it was initially done at a Meetup
Group. In reading the transcript below you will see the many opportunities for
creating a more erotic trance should the reader wish to modify and use this
transcript for themselves. Like the subject involved, you are invited here to
imagine these words resonating with you. Really, how often are you asked to
explore your feelings associated with words? There are many instances where
well-chosen words can shift feelings that the most well thought out and logical
debate cannot. Pay attention to the hypnotic dialogue initially and how the more
intimate and personal hypnotic dialogue is built on that.
As you read the transcript below take notice of how I spend time encouraging the
subject to process the relational aspects of their experience. When including these
relational aspects for the subject to process I'm further extending the generative
influence of the event in their life. I will encourage the subject to create as many
pathways out into their life so that both the subject and I can utilize those
pathways in and out of hypnosis. I’ve separated this transcript into goals and
steps that I used with the subject. I’ve also added notes to the transcript to clarify
gestures and posture to make this easier for you to replicate. This is a long one
and I’m repeating the technique over and over in different ways for you to pick
them out. Show Your Friends This Book. Imagine What You Could Do!
If you’re seeking to replicate this transcript begin with the following in mind.
Elicit information about a positive emotional connection to an object, person, or
an experience that you want to explore and intensify further. This also works
with negative emotions, but getting her angry or sad doesn’t make for good
company. State elicitation is just a matter of defining a state then having your
154
subject elaborate on it, and encouraging them to continue furthering their
experience as you work with them. Hypnosis and trance are mirrors: you only see
in them what you already have associated inside you. Let’s begin.
“Passion is expressed appropriately in different contexts. A few of my friends
have a love of snowboarding. They get to the ski lifts and feel their excitement
building as they look across those mountains. They know that it’s not going to be
easy, but it’s going to be great. I’ve gone out with my friends, and they look over
that mountain with awe and anticipation. As they get higher and higher, they’re
picking out the routes they may follow. I love watching them smile as they
anticipate the experience of feeling their body move down that slope. They get
excited noticing all the features they see around them. That hill could be a ramp
and someone spots a red fox going down into a hole underneath some trees. That
ice over there will be tricky as they turn this corner, and the whole time, they’re
smiling. You have anything like that?”
The subject goes on to tell me about snorkeling as an activity that she has taken
multiple vacations to do. She ends up telling me about a friend who lives to paint
and yet always seems happy doing this. Even if it means she doesn’t go on many
trips. This is someone who is happy sharing their passion and enjoys pleasing.
Her pleasure didn’t take long to transition onto someone else’s pleasure that
mattered to her.
“I have friends who love what they do for work. They tell me that a person
cannot apply for a career. A career is something that is developed through their
work and calls to them to pursue it. What a person feels is their calling also
defines their vision of themselves. We all work to embody goals that further our
identity and vision for our life. I think, there are passions between people that
reach to the core of their values, and touch on what makes them fully alive,
wouldn’t you agree?” At this point, I am getting as much information about this
person from the many different perspectives and roles in her life now. We both
are enjoying the conversation and I am taking notice of the elements she is
emphasizing along with her descriptions. At this point, it’s just knowing what to
listen for and using good conversational skills. When she leaned on “wanting to
be relevant”, I begin talking about aspects of being relevant for others and to
fulfill a calling.
155
“These passions allow us to imagine lives together and encourage us to be more
than a worker bee, or apathetic travelers. Finding a shared passion with a person
allows us to have a space to express ourselves in a way that we cannot do alone,
and it allows us to relate to the world in a new way. It’s a shared perspective that
keeps the other person in our hearts and minds truly relevant and connected to
what is shared. Our passion extends to things we love and seek out for an
adventure. How many times have you just thought of someone because you know
they love this… this thing… You know? It’s these shared interests and passions
that open us to shared ideas and adventures. Everyone seeks out adventure don’t
you think?” Questions allow the subject to elaborate on the themes and more
fully engage with me. The subject begins telling me about her friends love of
puzzles which got them both to enjoy doing mystery rooms together. Even
though her friend doesn’t like shows that are too scary she watches true crime
shows and they both talk about how and why someone did adventurous and
terrible things. These are all great topics to draw because she knows a lot about
them and enjoys to talk about them.
“It’s not always easy. Every activity we choose has the potential to brings us both
joy, challenge, and pain. Ask any marathon runner and they will tell you about
how it feels when they run. The motivation to get into that perfect state of focus
comes from the experience of being enmeshed within that total focus together.
Sometimes it’s a matter of focusing in bit by bit, and other times it just takes
over. Having an intense focus on what feels good, and moving that goodness
throughout your body and mind happens naturally. Think about it. Focusing in to
study, write a poem, or run has so many similarities. And every step forward
accepts any discomfort or distraction. Our mind learns how to let it go as we
focus on what’s right in front of us. (I point to myself.) Then that perfect focus
zooms in on what here, (self-point) to flow with the details of what we are
supposed to do, and the subconscious moves past the details and brings back a
stronger pleasure, because we are doing what we are supposed to do. Each part of
our mind has a job.
Consider all the ways you could feel passion now. Think about the activities that
bring together all the passion you anticipate, but there’s more. All the passion
you have felt doesn’t even touch on all the sensation you are capable of
experiencing. It’s like a puzzle that takes some figuring out. Perhaps one where
156
you never realized there were many pieces to this. It doesn’t matter what we are
doing, we could be running, scuba diving, or figuring out a great mystery. A part
of our mind returns to our body to check in and brings back with it… feelings,
impressions, and hints, that something important and interesting could be right
here. (Self-point and adjust in my seat. I look away and pause. She leans in a
little closer. That’s a good response.) We all have something to discover, and for
whatever reason, we have not expressed that potential or touched on this, yet. It’s
so easy to get lost in the details of the moment. It could be a bumpy road, fish
darting through the seaweed or an incline that brings the mind focusing in, but
there’s questions, feelings, and ideas that come alive in the background of all
that. Does that make sense?” The subject was silent for a moment but she nodded
and kept leaning in.
“I’m going to share with you something that most people never discover. Now, if
you were to take all your thoughts and feelings that you have with these
background emotions and passion you’ve experienced, and you don’t have to tell
me about it at all. Just take a moment to really bring that into your body and
mind… think about a time you were in the moment… doing what you love…
doing what you're passionate about means you bring the best of yourself
forward… bring them all together, it’s energy inside you… Allow your mind to
represent all this passion as a color or symbol. Tell what’s the first color or
symbol that comes to your mind… The first thing that comes to mind. What
would this be?” (If you present a color or a symbol together most people give a
colored symbol. If you present a color or a symbol the response tends to be either
a color or a symbol.)
Subject: Okay… Um, this doesn’t make sense but a circle with an arrow poking
through it.
“Now this gets fun! We get to play together. Check this out and look at your
hands. I want you to imagine that symbol there… and when you have it, begin to
pass it back and forth in your hands as if it was a ball. Try doing this with a
playful emotion now. See what happens.” I wait and the subject looks at her
hands. In a moment she begins to mimic the movement of having a ball there.
Then seems to be more confident of it as she mindfully accesses what that
experience is like.
157
This next step is about strengthening the feedback, increasing sensory involving,
and directing focus. Manipulate the color or symbol while having the subject pay
attention to the reaction in their body and your voice. Emphasizing that only
good memories, only great feelings, and only wonderful thoughts move through
this sensory filter of experience.
“As you do this you can sense the energy there… and it feels like a ball. Now,
this symbol begins to transform into a color. As you continue to move your
hands, you’ll sense this energy change.” The subject started slowing her passes of
the ball back and forth immediately.
Subject: It just goes away as it became a color. That’s so weird! It’s not a ball
anymore. Should I tell you the color?
“Soon, but wait until its stronger before you do” Subject nods with a smile.
“When this color moves somewhere it does so quickly. Keep passing the color
but as you do, notice this wonderful color travels through you too… Are you
having fun moving a playful color back and forth with your hands?”
Subject: Um.. this is funny and weird but like cotton almost… like a feather
touching down of cotton… so funny!
“Perfect… follow that playful pleasure through your body and describe it for
me.”
Subject: Umm, I guess it starts in my stomach and I notice it up in my chest.
That’s weird, right? I mean it is coming from my hands… Wait, it’s also moving
up to my face. Maybe, I’m just about to laugh and run away. I want to know how
this works.
“You’re doing well… stay in the moment now. This is about exploring and being
aware of the experience. We can analyze this together, later. Okay?”
Subject: Alright.
“Good. I want you to move the colored ball back and forth… doing this until you
are balanced and centered in the moment… BE present in the experience… BE at
peace… this is about recognizing what is in the background of your awareness…
focus… be present… let me know when you are ready to follow along again by
158
saying yes… Until then, allow yourself to be present with that color and energy...
moving it back and forth… back and forth… Putting everything else on pause.”
(We wait about ten seconds.)
Subject: Okay, yes.
“Perfect… Now, have the color dissolve completely into a pleasant sensation…
as it does, the color grows bigger, more intense… and you may experience it in
other ways… When you’ve done that, investigate how you experience this
pleasant sensation, and describe it.”
(The subject laughs.)
Subject: My color feels like freshly washed sheets somehow.
“Wonderful! Now, what’s it like when you compress that sensation down.
Smoothing it… concentrating into a pinpoint of intense light and color. Pressing
it tightly now…” (Subject is squeezing her hands together and then starts to use
her thumb pressing it into her palm.) “Hold onto it because you can already feel
like it wants to escape. It wants to expand again… building up more than before,
doesn’t it?”
Subject: Ha! Yes, it does. This is so funny.
(If you are reading this and smiling as well, then the command phrasing is also
being accepted and processed as it should.)
“I want you to put your hands together and picture that tiny, barely restrained
spot, becoming a delightfully inky energetic color… It moves up… doubling,
duplicating, and multiplying these passionate feelings within you… Look at me.”
The subject looks up at me. “Allow your hands to relax and imagine that color
absorbing in… moving with you… with circulating passion… comforting, but
exciting, with every breath… and finding you're turning up your palms… don’t
try let it happen… just makes it stronger…. And you smile bigger for me…
Make a fist, close your palms… and the passion moves deeper inside… Open
your palms up… and the passion glows more intensely… feeling wonderful and
great… Close your eyes… Allowing this pleasure to open you up more… and
readying you for more… Take a good, deep breath now… this color lights you
159
up from the inside out… warming you safely, sharing comfortably, and pulling
passion through you even more… It’s exciting isn’t it?”
Subject: It really is. So different than I imagined.
“Open your eyes and tell me you’re feeling all this perfectly now.” The subject is
smiling as she looks me in the eyes. I could have used the opening and closing of
hands more, but I didn’t because the subject was already looking intensely at me.
Subject: Yup, I’m feeling it.
“That’s perfect… you’re doing so well… sending you happy sensations now…
that travel along your hands… sending wonderful sensations across your
stomach… and up into your chest, sending the best sensations up into your
face… it's moving all through you now… getting to where it really wants to
go… as that passion makes it back into your hands… everything is intensified…
feels so much better… cycles right back into you… Tell me when you have that
now.”
Subject: Yup. I can’t believe it. I’m feeling this.
“That’s right. Now, allow that passionate energy to move into your stomach
fully… Stay aware of your body, as these sensations concentrate into your
stomach, moving up into your chest, moving up around your face… then it drops
back down low… touching the tips of your toes… working its way up to your
stomach… Faster and faster… this cycle of pleasure opens you up… Take a deep
breath now, and visualize that path... feel this playful energy of passion...
(Subject smiles.) You should know it well… it’s yours… Notice what happens
when this color of passion moves… faster and faster… Over and over… moving
more deeply through you… Tell me about what you are feeling.”
Subject: It feels like… Umm... I’m getting the emotion. It’s good… I feel passion
and I’m happy. SO strange.
“Well if it’s strange, I can stop here if you don’t like this.”
Subject: No. Please, I’m enjoying this.
160
(I spend the next few minutes moving the energy and color through the subject’s
body. I have it go to her shoulders, back to her hands, tell her the color is
spreading out and concentrating in places throughout her body. I move the color
down to her right thigh, then her knee, then her foot, having her notice the swirls
at the bottoms of her feet. Then I have her speed the color up as fast as it can go
and ask her what that’s like for her. I have it go down the other side of her body
having her pay attention to the growing sensations throughout her body. As she
notices the color, she is told to follow it… follow it throughout her body and
relax even more. She can follow my voice more deeply into that color inside her.
I ask her to slow down the color moving through her and describe how that feels.
At this point, I’m extending exploration just for this transcript. The subject has
manifested something in every sensory system so this is just further exploration
of those sensations at play. We’ve been doing this for about an hour so I think its
time to take a break. I know she’s responsive and there are others who have
watched this and want to talk and try. We debriefed and the subject agrees to
meet again later. The mentions at the beginning of our next meeting that she has
been thinking sexual thoughts about our session last time. What follows here is
developed from our conversation debrief before this transcript and is the
continuation of the earlier session. As you read this over think about how you
might use and improve upon what you have here.)
“Allow yourself to relax even more. We are going to explore some of the
passions I mentioned, and we touched on earlier. We are going to touch on some
of the best experiences of your colorful passion that you felt earlier, and we can
add in the best you’ve ever felt, until today… You will not have to describe those
experiences to me… It’ll be just like before… So, close your eyes… pick the
spiciest, most exhilarating, and best experiences you have ever felt… Together
we can build on that emotion… even as you enjoy feeling great… just like we
did earlier, okay?”
Subject: Okay. Sure.
“Perfect, and you don’t have to tell me about them… your job is bringing the
energy of those experiences, being fully aware of how it feels to enjoy that
pleasure… bring it into all your senses… One part of your mind deals with the
details of what’s important here, and you're totally focusing on what matters…
161
being there… and feeling like your body is present... containing all that
pleasure… focusing pleasure is just one part of the exercise today… Bringing
that pleasure to what comes next is where we really want to be… Are you
ready?”
Subject: Yes. I remain silent for approximately 5 seconds.
“Find the best feelings of pleasure that you can hold onto today… it could be just
before the best orgasm of your life… it could be something better… Pick the best
pleasure you ever had, or maybe choose a pleasure that you always wished you
had... it’s just the one we are starting with now… really get into that now… How
do you feel as the emotion moves through your body? … Step into this
moment… Does the pleasure begin gradually, or does it come on intensely all of
a sudden?... Do you notice yourself shaking or was it slow and sensual? …
Notice those feelings, and this pleasurable color interacts, and there’s action here
as this moment unfolds…. Replaying the best moments… allowing the
sensations to build… I’m going to give you a moment… and when you feel that
pleasure is strong, and present, all throughout your body and mind… I want you
to tell me how you are experiencing this...”
Subject: SOOO much sensation all at once. I… (Subject trails off but I can see
she is associated into the experience so I continue to be silent for a moment. The
exact description of everything is not needed. Since she is immersed in this
experience already, I just want to direct the sensory involvement presented to me,
and intensify the feedback described. Since she is not describing where she is in
the experience you simply offer imagery and another experience that links up or
overlaps with what she is experiencing. Then begin leading onward valiant
explorer!)
“If this feeling became a color, what would it be?”
Subject: Dark red and pink. (Almost no hesitation now. Perfect.)
“Where do you experience this feeling and color immediately in your body?”
Subject: My stomach and lower. (My suggestive prompting most likely got the
subject to pick a sexual, or at the very least switch to something erotic.)
162
“That’s good… Perfect… now… Allow that color to move through you… this
color is your passion… Notice the energy within you… and see this color getting
more vivid… more intense… and deepening… Are you feeling more energy
now?”
Subject: Yes.
“Perfect… this color moves through you… It's circulating into the deepest parts
of you… as it moves, it's every sensation of pleasure is getting LOUDER…
intensifying this pleasure effect on you… this colored feeling moves into every
cell of who you are… Imagine touching the world, or another person with this
energy and color…. As you do it darkens doesn’t it?”
Subject: Yes, it feels so good.
“Perfect… hearing yourself say how good this is brings more excitement to
strengthen this pleasure, doesn’t it?”
Subject: Yes, it really hot. (The subject licks her lips.)
“That’s a girl. That’s right and it's just what I want to hear from you…. (subject
meows at me.)
“That’s a good kitty. I’m rewiring each and every part of you with more energy
and pleasure. Meow for me and make it even hotter.”
Subject: Meow, meow.
“Purrfect… That sounds like a kitty’s in heat… I’m turning that up now… just
like I have the dial… As I do notice how your body melts into that color…
notice how this passion energy increases… What would happen if you took this
colored feeling and made it brighter… made it louder… made it more intense…
and feeling ten times the intensity of that emotion all throughout your body?”
Subject: Wow! I feel it… it's me and I’m surrounded by it… I feel it everywhere
like heat. (Subject is almost panting speaking. This is a rapid escalation of
pleasure and we never got into the specifics of the experience she decided upon.)
163
“Purrfect…Now, what happens when you transfer every bit of that color into
your awareness… hold onto all that feeling… Intensified… Triple those
feelings… breath with them… slow and steady… feel how that color soaks into
you…”
Subject: Ohhh, I’m soaking wet right now.
“That’s right kitty… it’s not enough… As this soft, warm voice reaches out to
you… brighten that colorful passion in nude ways… I want you to really look
now… keeping your eyes on mine… I want you to memorize just how good this
feels… I want you to find an intimacy that’s so easily lost by others… we can
explore that, and build this together… do you really want that?”
Subject: Yes, I’d really want this.
“Perfect… I want to give you something so wonderful you’re always going to be
happy thinking about what was shared… you’re going to have to play more…
you’ll here to learn something that you should never forget… life is very much
like being a boat at sea… there are ups and there are downs…there are storms
and there are currents… we will set our pleasurable course by the stars… and not
by the lights of every passing ship in the sea… so I’ll take a hold of that colorful
pleasure so much more… Ten times more now… memorizing how awesome it
feels… I want you to squeeze it all down again… small as you can into a single
intense point… feel that color radiating inside you… as an intense point of heat
moving through you… Hold onto it for as long as you can… feel it radiating and
communicating… points of color reaching for where it really wants to go… It
wants to go where you feel it the most… feel how much it want to escape…
intensifying even as you try to hold it… memorizing this passion and feeling…
How does that feel?”
Subject: Umm… I’m a sexy sun and it feels really really good.
“Perfect. On a scale from one to ten tell me just how good this feels.”
Subject: Oh… It’s around 7. Feels really good.
“That’s right... This is just how good you can expect to feel… it’s how good
people in the past were happy to make you feel… Oh, it can feel so much better
164
than this… I’m going to move a hypnotic dial... making you feel, you're about to
cum… Turning up every sensation and pleasurable you have… Go into that
experience you decided on initially… Feel what you felt the first time... now
even stronger… pumping energy and color through you… through your body and
mind… Notice how your body responds to me… Hearing my voice pull and
tease all that passion more... You can want this so much more than this… Notice
how your body responds… I’m fucking you with desire… you will thirst with
this pleasure… share with me your best now…”
The subject is moaning and panting.
“That’s perfect… I’m going to show you how much I like to play with my toys...
like a good pet now… go utterly limp… every muscle knowing what it’s
supposed to do… giving itself over to this primal trust… I’ll pick up any effort…
directing that pleasure onward… You can give me so much more... intensity…”
(Subject whines like a puppy for a moment at this so I use it) “You may want to
bite your lip, or take a deeper breath… whatever you do, it just makes this color
grow more powerfully, and fuller inside you… Every thought… every breath…
even the beat of your heart is soaking you... hot… purrrrfect… Now imagine that
pleasure scale again. See that number rising two points.”
Subject: Iiii went past 10 and now it’s almost 10.
(In hindsight I could have clarified if it below ten or above ten but it didn’t really
matter. I wanted it to be intensified and her to feel like this was the best she’d
ever felt.)
“That scale adjusts and is telling me you can go even farther. Say Mmmmmm
like you mean it.” Subject moans and Mmm’s for me.
“Tell me Mmmmmmm and that’s pushing the scale way past 10 again.”
Subject: Mmmmm… IIii feels like I’m going cum…
“That’s good... that’s right… but not without permission… release your attention
on that holding that passion… focus on where it grows… everything you do…
building it higher… like you are a cat purring… purrrfect… now I want you to
memorize how this feels… Pay attention to that pleasure scale as I speak to
165
you… I’m taking it back down to 6, now it’s 6... MMMmmmm.” Subject whines
a little and has a frown. “Now it’s 7. MMMMmm… Now it’s 7.5… Now it’s 8…
Listen to your body… notice how your body responds perfectly for me… every
sound, making this so much more powerful… Now it’s 8.5… that pleasure
awakens you… focus on how this feels... memorizing how much more you are
capable of… Feel it in your stomach, your chest, your face, and your whole body.
Your whole self is filled by this color… So damn good… This is a pleasure
you’ll have to be mature enough to grow into… Now, let’s take this five points
higher on the pleasure scale…” The subject is squeezing her legs together. Tell
me how it feels.”
Subject: Feels too good. It feels real good, but it’s so high… it’s like something
tries to keep this turning down.
(The subconscious mind will do this at times, and this is something that gets
trained while conditioning your subject repeatedly. This subconscious turning
down of emotion should be expected as it is the natural tendency. You can
simply point it out and then talk to the subconscious. It’s okay to do this. Be
happy, because wonderful, and pleasurable experiences deserve to be shared. Get
an agreement to work with you. Ask it to continue to protect the person so that
they are not overwhelmed in negativity. This allows the subconscious to
accomplish its goal, and then test it.)
“That is one of those unhelpful habits so many people pick up… At times some
people will associate into the negative and disassociate from the positive… They
do this because someone told them that they shouldn’t feel too good… That is a
completely backward way to experience good feelings in our life. Society sets up
expectations for people to get in the habit of not being too happy, sad, or too
excited. Society has many double standards that do not help anyone… Society
pressures introverts to socialize more… seeking to push them out of their comfort
zone… but Society doesn’t isolate extroverts to push them out of theirs… Don’t
chart your course by the lights of others only… Society does not come back to
make sure you’ve had enough… it does not come back to make sure you have
gotten your needs fulfilled, or the life you want… what you are living is not
societies life… That is not what you will learn with me… almost everything you
166
did was to change the way you feel… think about that… with me, you’ll move
beyond it…
Every time you make a change… you are expressing more of yourself than you
did yesterday… Being mine, I’ll encourage you to glow… Together we can turn
things up, so that you can feel more joy, more happiness, and more pleasure with
every breath… I don’t want you to give cranky judgmental people power over
your good feelings… They have their own… this is your life… this is your
passion… your time… your energy… you are really learning to experience
pleasure… Think about the most wonderful things in your life… think about
celebrating who you are… think about celebrating how far you’ve come… this
pleasure expresses that… something you may need to grow into… Tell me, you
want that.”
Subject: I want that.
“That’s right… Think about the moments you wanted time to stop for you… it’s
there where you felt like you were doing exactly what you were meant to… take
a hold of this… even when planning for the future… Think about how your life
would be different if you didn’t bring the cares and negativity of others with you
anymore... You can notice them… and choose carefully what you want to bring
forward with you… Imagine how bold the color of your passion would show
itself to be… How much stronger you could respond… It’s the ripples of this
passion that you share with others… these ripples are your legacy, even in an
empty room… and with each good feeling, you inspire… these ripples spread
out… they touch all the important people first… those ripples come back to
touch you… intensified…When you feel that pleasure and positivity increasing
inside you, I want you to let out a good lonnnggg mmmmmmm.” (Finding
yourself focusing in as you read too?)
Subject: Mmmmmmmm
“Purrrfect... That’s right… You experience that pleasure becoming stronger…
more certain… intensifying with every breath… Feel the resonating vibration of
my voice inside you… You are being led inward… to honestly find and
experience yourself… follow this passion and you follow my path… That scale
of pleasure pushes higher…. adjusting for more... and even better… Pay attention
167
to your body and experience… I want that pleasure number to go down, by one
or two numbers… I’m adjusting the pleasure scale in your mind… we are
building up the connections to bring you back to this level of pleasure, and even
greater… Tell me when you're experiencing that pleasure turned down now.”
Subject: Okay, now. You said it and I’m a 5.
“Good. That sounds like you did not like turning it down.”
Subject: I was really liking how good you made me feel. I want to feel more.
“That’s a girl. That’s improvement! You are developing a stronger desire to
reach for that now, don’t you?”
Subject: Yes. I want to feel more, please.
“Perfect. That is your thirst… Most people are other people… Their thoughts are
someone else’s opinions… their lives a mimicry, and their passions a quotation…
so they get what seems to fit other people… they get a 5… We are doing this
together… together, we build up from a 5… to become the best we can be… This
is what turns the dials up to 10… Mmmmm… Now, because you have followed
directions so well… I’m going to train you to feel even more pleasure… Feel it
building up… Each time you follow my directions perfectly… that pleasure will
increase exponentially… You feel so ready… I want you to pay attention with
your mind’s eyes, watch that pleasure growing… Obeying me… Becoming
harder to restrain... It just takes over… Yes.” I nod and she nods.
Subject: Yesss. Mmmmm
“That’s my thirsty girl… Perfect… pushing pleasure up on that scale again by
two… and four… and ten… Listen to yourself… purr for me.” The subject is
purring and making noises that are almost irresistibly fuckable. “You’re feeling
that pleasure as if you’re a soda bottle… when you move, you're shaking it…
when you moan, you're shaking it… you feel that pressure building up inside
you… The pressure is opening your secret pleasures and longings from the past
and future… creating a desire as strong as this thirsty need… that thirst responds
to this pressure… responds to this need… for me, you’re needing to know how
much pleasure you can give me today… Notice what your body is doing for
168
me…. Feel how good it feels to respond to my commands… The pressure is
building…. and it is finally about to release now…. Cum for me.” I tap the
subject on the thigh with my hand as she takes in a deep breath and releases it
moaning. “Keep going… Obey and cum for me… Cum, and feel your body and
mind waking up as you do this… That’s my girl… you’re enjoying this aren’t
you?”
Subject: Oh yes. That’s amazing...
“Relax and release further now… That pleasure is being turned down by two
now on that scale again… Nod when you feel that’s done.”
(She nods and has a frown on her face.)
“Good. That’s my girl. You’re doing perfect. This practice is going to make you
recognize that you can handle so much more pain, pleasure, and passion. When
you turned it down you wanted more didn’t you?”
Subject: Yes
“You wanted that pleasure to go up and up, didn’t you?”
Subject: Yes.
“Perfect…Hearing yourself say that is locking this desire and thirst within you…
In a moment, when I tell you… this pleasure will grow exponentially inside
you… you obey and you get to feel this pleasure… Look in my eyes. That’s
right… I want you to notice that colored energy responding to me, right away,
responding to my voice… growing thirsty, and fiercely, as I speak to you… As I
speak, you hear me on the inside… and you can go Mmmmm anytime… I
reward you with more pleasure… As it expands further now… Nod for me, when
that pleasure has grown so much, it’s getting hard to contain…Mmmmmm….”
The subject also makes the Mmmmm sound as she nods.
“Perfect… As a reward for following instructions, you get to feel pleasure. Swell
with this pleasure now… experience it, even more intensely than before…
awakening more at this moment… Notice the muscles of your body working in
response to my commands… as this pleasure builds up that pressure inside… you
169
want to move your body… (I incorporate the physical movements I am noticing
from the subject in the chair.) Feel the sensation of a man there… Feel this
longing... That pressure is building up as you move, so it’s okay to grind along
that chair… Now, that pleasure is rising higher…. Look in my eyes and this
pleasure climbs further... Feel that color swelling with the thirsty pleasure inside
you.” (Subject is locked on my eyes and is making the ‘mmmm’ sound.)
“I love, this passionate look of excitement in your eyes… You’re making me
happy…” I pause a few seconds allowing that statement to become an indirect
command. “Consider my eyes… Look deeply into my eyes as that pleasure
moves through your body and mind… Recognize the person I am… You can’t
stop smiling… That pleases me… knowing that you’re pleasing me intensifies
this desire, doesn’t it?”
Subject: Yes, it does.
Perfect… Notice what happens to that color, and your responsive body, as my
attention and energy affects you… pleasure rises… Tell me how this feels.”
Subject: I don’t know how this works, but I’m... Feeling good. Really good.
(Subject has not stopped smiling. She is staring right into my eyes with an
unbroken and unblinking gaze.)
My focus now is developing more interaction and building upon choices that
connect this into the subject’s life. As we progress further with the subject
automatic responses are reinforced and I look for ways to develop feedback loops
through this shared experience.
“Perfect. Feeling great… feeling wonderful… And the more you follow my
commands, the better you feel… Every time you consider my eyes, or you feel
this pleasure rising from obeying my commands… you feel this great, or even
better… Nod, for me if you understand.”
(Subject nods and is still smiling.)
“Perfect… Because even on the worst days, even in the midst of the hardest
challenges, you can find some relief… Frustration, anger, and sorrow can be
170
powerful for you… They are yours to respond to… and that response is within
your control… All you need to do, is allow your subconscious to turn those
responses into your strength… and use that strength by moving it forward… As
you do, you can feel pleasure… You’re looking into my eyes…. that makes you
feel great, doesn’t it?”
Subject: Yes. I love your eyes.
“Tell me you want to feel more pleasure than this.”
Subject: I want to feel more pleasure than this.
“Tell me you feel pleasure when you obey.”
Subject: I feel pleasure when you…when I obey.
“That’s a girl! Tell me you want to obey and feel pleasure.”
Subject: I want to obey and feel your pleasure. (The subject looks incredibly
happy and I did not correct her as the subject label’s this pleasure mine.)
“Notice how exciting it was for you to say that. Pay attention to those feelings in
your body. DO you want more?” Subject nods. “Tell me more please.”
Subject: More, please.
“That’s right. That’s perfect… This pleasure allows you to more fully express
yourself as a strong, capable woman… That capable woman does not go away as
you submit and surrender… she is just engaging with a strong capable partner…
she gets encouraged and appreciated for who she is… Close your eyes now…
Take this bolder pleasure down… moving far down on that pleasure scale…
because every day may not be good, but there is something good in every day…
You are being trained to overcome challenges, and this training will have you
coming back to greater pleasure… the time you spend with me encourages the
best of you even now… this training increases that perfect desire to obey… Nod
for me when you’re ready to proceed and have more of that pleasure now.”
(Subject nods immediately.)
171
“That’s perfect…The pleasure I am talking about… is just the pleasure you have
known today… Do you want to keep the pleasure you’ve discovered today, or the
pleasure you knew before we met?”
Subject: I want this pleasure.
“That’s my girl… There is so much more for you to discover… So much more
pleasure for you to know, you’ll be trained with this pleasure to obey… Do you
want to be trained by me to obey, and really feel this pleasure?”
Subject: Yes, I want to obey. I’m yours.
“That’s perfect… that’s my girl… feel this pleasure building up as you even
think about saying yes…. this pleasure’s building higher… you notice how it
feels to obey me… Obeying me builds your pleasure… Say yes, and feel this
pleasure flooding you now.”
Subject: Yes, yes. I’m ready.
“Feeling this pleasure flooding through you as you say yes, aren’t you?”
Subject: Yes, yes, yes… It feels so good.
“That’s right… perfect, obey, and feel all that pleasure flooding through you...
This pleasure is conspiring with me… This pleasure encourages your desire…
This pleasure encourages the best of you… Do you ready to obey?”
Subject: Yes, I want to obey.
“Feel that rush of pleasure with every yes… and with every rush of pleasure, you
obey... You are being trained by this connection to me… You are being trained to
feel this wonderful pleasure, whenever you think about me… and you obey…
Thinking about being mine… has you dreaming about how much pleasure you
can feel… dreaming, about how much more pleasure you have to discover… It
has you thinking about new things… and things you’ve always felt drawn too…
it has you dreaming about wanting to please, and say “yes”… Is this true?”
Subject: Yes, I want this. Yes, I want to please and yes!!! Yes, this feels so good.
172
“That’s right…that’s my girl… feeling this pleasure, building… and mounting
you now… Say yes, feel this pleasure, and obey.”
Subject: Yes. Yes. Yes. Yessss!
“Pleasure becomes yes… Yes, floods pleasure from obeying me. Doesn’t it?”
Subject: Yes. Oh yes.
“Perfect… now saying yes, over and over again… in your mind… Cum for me.
Come for me like a good girl!”
Subject: Yes. Yes. Yes… (She says yes quietly a few times and her legs begin to
shake.)
“Perfect, notice how those muscles respond to me… notice how your body
moves in response to me… In response to this voice of pleasure… my voice, you
can hear on the inside, inside your mind… You feel this pleasure, body
responding… focus on where you feel it the most now… Spinning faster through
you now… This pleasure moves where you thirst for it the most … there can be
so much more desire there… filling you up now… I could fill this up with me…”
Subject: Yes. Yes.
“That’s my girl. Take a deep breath in… and hold onto it… Feel that pleasure
building higher, senses buzzing… your heart beats faster, and this thirsting desire
is filling you up… breathing faster now… With each and every breath that
pleasure is responding more to me... it's being taught a pleasurable lesson…
Together, we are developing something important for the future… I’m building
the responses that encourage you to kick ass everyday… and allow you, to be
fucked and kneel… just like you’re in a fantasy novel. DO you want that?”
Subject: Ohh yes, yes!
“That’s right. Your body submits and obeys me… I’m building a pleasure that
holds you in the present, and more alive… Each time you feel this pleasure with
me, you’ll discover something amazing… and something meaningful to you…
moving in and out of you… this pleasure moving with you, in each breath… In
and out of you… this pleasure builds quickly in response to my voice…. that
173
pleasure growing bigger, and brighter… with each breath in, and with each
breath out? Tell me about this experience.”
Subject: It’s like pleasure is all around me. Like I’m soaked in an ocean of
pleasure, but it’s me too. Yes, awesome and makes no sense!
“Do you want even more of it inside you now? Say yes, and feel that pleasure
advances, and maturing who you are.”
Subject: Yes, please. I really do. Yes.
“That’s right. Perfect… Every time you say yes and obey, you discover that
pleasure responding… Let’s test this…”
In this section, my aim is to expand the focus of pleasure and kinesthetically
fractionate the subject with it.
“Close your eyes. I want you to discover what happens as that color expands
beyond, and around your physical body…. it’s becoming more present, more
tangible, all around you… You’re like a fish, discovering that she’s been
swimming in the waters of pleasure all her life… There’s something different
here with me… There’s something more… I want you to discover what happens
when this pleasure moves through someone else’s body... All that pleasure, its
intensified… all of it concentrated into my hands…glowing… It's coursing
through my body… and sparking colorfully and electric…. The pleasure builds
up even more in my hands… and it tugs at you… You feel how much you want
to be touched?”
Subject: God yes. Touch me, please. I’m yours.
“That’s my girl… Perfect… In a moment, I’m going to touch your knee… When
I do, you will feel this attraction rooting, deeply inside, stimulating every cell of
who you are… thirsty pleasure flowers… I want you to discover how you’ll
respond to this pleasure, from just one perfect touch… This is all happening, to
bring together all the pleasure you’ve ever known… before moving you higher
then you’ve ever experienced before… In a moment, I’m going to touch one of
your knees… Pay attention to how your body responds… as this intense pleasure
coming closer… (slowly moving my hand closer.) responding with thirsty
174
desire… When you feel me touch your knee, I want you to look in my eyes, and
say “yes” you feel that.”
Subject: Yesss, I feel it. (Subject stares fixated into my eyes.)
“Perfect… (I lay my hand on her knee and leave it there.) Feels good doesn’t it?”
Subject: Yes. Sooo good yes!
“That’s perfect… I watched you move closer even as I started reaching out to
you. (I saw the subject’s knee twitch as I moved forward again. This is a green
light that she is comfortable, happy, and the subject’s words are congruent with
her behavior. Meaning she is not just saying what she thinks I want to hear.) That
shows me just how much you're responding to me. That shows me how much
pleasure you’re experiencing as you obey. Do I have that right?” (It is always
good to ask and it gives the subject another opportunity to compound that
pleasure in their response.)
Subject: Yes, yes.
“That’s right… That shows me how happy you are to please me… your learning
you can touch others with this pleasure… this pleasure feels so good… it feels
like my hands touching you… bringing together the best of who you can be, isn’t
it?” (These statements may not seem logical to you but the subject has associated
meaning into them with trance logic. The subject becomes the focus of what
every part of their own experience is about and so these statements work with the
command phrasing to communicate with that personalization. This is what the
mind does naturally anyway.)
Subject: Yes, it feels so wonderful. I want to touch you with it.
“Right now, I am going to touch your hand. I want you to feel a rush of this
pleasure moving through my hand, and into you when I do… moving this
pleasure more intensely through you, even more... moving this pleasure more
intensely through you, even better… Tell me “yes” when you feel that now.” (I
move my hand and I’m pretty sure the subject came close to or orgasmed as I
touched her. Having my touch elicits the strongest pleasure she is capable of
today is what I am seeking.)
175
Subject: Yes… I feel it. You feel so good. I want to please you now. (Subject is
now tilting her body closer to me and leans in for a kiss.)
“Perfect. (She kisses my face, and I lean back keeping my hand firm on her knee.
This isn’t that kind of transcript. Smile.) Stay here. We are not done yet, and you
are being trained well… That’s my girl.” (I remove my hand for a second and
watch her eyes drop to my hand. I put it back and she smiles and meets my eyes.)
“Even more intense… breath in deeply and close your eyes… Notice what is
happening, as you listen to my voice, and that pleasure builds higher from
finding my voice…. Especially when you finding my voice, inside you… This
thirsty desire bonds you… to crave, and memorize the sensation, the pleasure, the
strength, of my touch…. Of my voice… of this time together… Mmmmm… You
want it, don’t you?”
Subject: Yes. Oh yes, so much.
“Perfect… That’s what I want for you… this is the only way to know what is
possible… this just how good it feels today… moving pleasure, in and out of
yourself with every breath... It’s empowering… it is masculine, reminding you of
me… what it means to be mine… Say it with me now… Mmmmm” (Subject
says mmmm.) MMMmmm…. Mmmmm… (Each time the subject says this with
me she is visibly getting more excited.) It’s the most incredible thing you might
ever feel, taste, hear, smell, and imagine… being utterly present in the moment…
it’s part of your lesson… Musky… reminding you of a masculine energy and
their passions… (Subject shifts a bit in her chair.) It’s more intense with each
passing second… it thirsts inside of you… thirstier knowing this pleasure now…
and you can’t control this thirsty pleasure anymore… it responds to me…”
(Subject is moaning and her legs are shaking again. “It’s mine to conspire
with…” (I pick up my hand and subject says, “Ohh, please don’t go.”)
“When I put my hand back down, I’m spreading this passion down, deeper into
you… intensifying… further than ever before… further than ever before…
Encouraging this thirsty pleasure… calling by finding my voice… and training
your desire to handle more… becoming thirstier… more and more, each time we
do this… (I pick up her hand in mine and subject’s body immediately shifts in
the chair closer to me.) Each time we do this, your body surrenders more… your
176
body recognizes these sensations and thirsts for more… and it reminds you just
how thirsty you are… leading you back here for more…
(Take what they give you and amplify it with this pleasurable energy and color.
This subject told me few men can keep up with her high sex drive. I warn you
that you best have one if you use this. Not only do I have someone here with a
high sex drive, but I’m stimulating that arousal and pushing her farther into that
state. Most men who say they have a high sex drive have never actually handled
a woman who loves sex and has a high sex drive.) Tell me how good does this
feel?” (I’m still holding the subject’s hand so her emotional state and the physical
contact with me will get associated together in one answer.)
Subject: Your touch feels so warm and good… It feels wonderful and I don’t
want you to take your hand away. I love how it feels when you touch me.
“Perfect. That pleases me, and together we are stronger... You’re becoming more
aware of how thirsty you’ve been… becoming more aware of how thirsty you
will be… And now, I’m going to touch your knee again. When I touch your knee
this time, you will feel this passionate color infusing into you… communicating
and connecting us, through touch, sensation, and sound… you can see this, even
more fully than before... Each wonderful reminder, more powerfully than the
last...
(I put the subject’s hand down and I touch the subject’s knee. Leaving my hand
on her knee I slowly spread my fingers apart there. The subject lets out a soft
‘Mmmm.’) Getting into our passionate energy… Memorizing what that’s like…
Smell the air around you… waking up your senses, as your mind becomes
sharper… and you know that this is all encouraging the best of who you are…
Holding onto all those feelings and sensations as I move my hand away. What
happens?” (I move my hand away.)
Subject: I want your hand again. I feel better with you touching me. It feels right.
I still feel good and connected but I love your touch… It… it makes me feel
better.
“Perfect… That’s something I love to hear. It’s perfect and pleasing to me...
Notice what that’s like as your body becomes very aware of the absence. I’m
177
going to touch your knee again in a moment… this response pleases me… feel
how good it can be to please me… (I reach out and touch her knee.) How does
this feel?”
Subject: Your touch is my pleasure too. It makes me feel so good. It makes me
know I’m pleasing you.
“Perfect… That’s right… Each time your responding more powerfully than
before…. Each time recognizing more of what you value and appreciate with
someone who makes you feel this way. (I remove my hand for a moment and
then I touch the subject’s knee again allow my thumb to caress her knee with a
few strokes.) How does that feel now?”
Subject: Yes. Thank you. That’s so good.
“Wonderful, I love a responsive woman. Feel the energy and connection between
us…. This is what connects us together… this is what encourages you… even
when I’m not there… It’s become a part of you… It will be as strong, and as
responsive, as your service will be to me… Imagine this connecting pleasure like
the branches of a tree… the tree reaches out towards the sun… and deeper
connective part, reaches through the earth and distance, to support the whole
structure and become the roots… both halves are needed to express a full life…
Have you ever felt this good connecting to someone?”
Subject: No, I haven’t. I’m so happy to have met you.
“That’s my girl. Do you like how I make you feel?”
Subject: I love it. I’ve always wanted to feel this good. It’s so good I only have
imagined it.
“That’s perfect… So, pleasing to hear… Looking back on this you’ll understand
how important it is to you... How this pleasure can lead you to discover more
about yourself… how certain you are, as a capable, and passionate person…
Take all the time you need, finding the connection of meaningful pleasure
flowing back from me to you… you to me… and from the future to the past...
and from the past to the future... we are designing life by what’s important to
us… take a moment to appreciate what that means… If you want this to be part
178
of your life, take a moment… make any adjustments you need at the
subconscious and conscious levels… When you are ready, becoming brilliant
with pleasure, nod for me … That’s my girl…” (In about five seconds the subject
nods.)
“That’s my girl… Perfect. I want you to think about how much you want this in
your life…. What it takes to establish and be part of a relationship like this. (I
remove my hand.) Think about this because a relationship should inspire the best
that you are today… and the best that you can be tomorrow… All relationships
are investments and this is something you should be certain about… This is an
important choice point… One that you have already agreed to… and I am
supporting your ability to choose and consent… at a certain point, we both will
know… Take a moment… When you have that answer, with certainty, tell me
this is something you want in your life.”
Subject: Yes. I want more of this in my life. This is what I have been missing and
never completely knew I needed. Yes. I am certain that this is important to me
and, yes, no one else has made me feel this good. This is what I want too.
(I put my hand on her knee again.)
“That’s my girl. Perfect… (I give her knee a squeeze.) That pleases me. I love
hearing you say this... This is about both of us, investing in each other, and a
future… Tell me one more time you’re certain this is what you want.”
Subject: Yes. This is exactly what I want it. I’ve been wanting this for a long
time, but I just didn’t know who or what it was. I’m certain this is what I want in
my life.
The subject’s response was quick and intense. I smile and give her knee another
squeeze.
“Perfect. That makes me happy and you should feel happy for that. Allow all
these wonderful things to inspire you… connecting you to who you really want
to be… now, and in the future… I want you to become aware of something
important… When I remove my hand notice that dimming color in your body
and mind. (I remove my hand.) Knowing that with this touch your building up
that energy inside you, but your pleasure also connects you to me… When I
179
touch you, really look at me… (I give her knee a squeeze.) feeling all this
wonderful pleasure connecting out from you to me… this is something we invest
in each other.”
The subject is smiling and puts her hand over mine.
“Perfect. When I touch your leg, you will feel this passionate color building
inside you… and every time you think of this moment, or me, you get to feel this
pleasure encouraging you… Notice my eyes and my smile. They tell you that this
is true, isn’t it?”
Subject: Yes. (Subject responds quickly and with conviction. She is squeezing
my hand tighter.)
“That’s right. When I touch you, that color and energy move through you like
electricity… Each time more powerfully, and more quickly than before. You
know with certainty, you have something important to come back to here, don’t
you?” (I squeeze the subject’s knee and then slowly open my fingers. The subject
has started squeezed my hand too.)
Subject: Yes. I do.
“Perfect…That makes me happy to hear. I want you to be happy… Feeling that
pleasure move through your body, bringing only good thoughts, only good
feelings forward with you… Getting these good feelings in life is a matter of
service… Being the best person you can be and serving well gives you
pleasure… Being the best person you can be, and serving well, gives me
pleasure… and it shows me you are your mine… So, take every bit of that
pleasure into your awareness… Intensify it… building it up, ten times stronger…
I’m moving that passion through you… you feel how your body and mind obey,
isn’t it?”
Subject: Yes… I wouldn’t have believed this before, yes… You are moving it
and me. I’m yours.
“That’s what I want to hear… That makes me happy and pleasing me brings you
pleasure. Doesn’t it?”
Subject: Yes. I love making you happy. I want to please you.
180
“Perfect. That you are already responding to your service training goals with
me… That pleases me… Double that feeling and l want to see that color soaking
you… Double it more as I bring that energy and attention into my eyes… I want
to watch it overwhelm you… I want it to soak every part of who you are and who
you might be… Looking deeply into my eyes you’ll experience how quickly your
body responds to me…. When I remove my hand, I want you to close your
eyes… to go deeper into this enlightened space… I want you to really feel how
far you’ve come today… I want you to feel proud. (I remove my hand.) Not
everyone is ready for this… and not everyone makes it as far as you have today.”
Moving forward I emphasize values, goals and present the subject with
responsibility within our connection. Emphasizing responsibility has become a
metaphorical leash in modern life and our efforts must acknowledge that. A leash
has two ends and the responsibility for what we bring and receive is attached to
every inch of leather. At this point, I count the subject up and we take a tenminute break. I pour us both a glass of water, stretch our legs, and do a short
debrief. I want to check in with the subject and make any adjustments here. Then
I simply have her select a spot on the wall and have her fixate on it. The spot
beats with pleasure and becomes her color of pleasure.
“Going deeper and feeling relaxation… Notice the difference in your color, in
your energy… Reach out with your mind… and find this energy and
connection… settle into those wonderful feelings… say yes when you feel all
that comfort and pleasure… (Subject remains still and quiet in ten seconds, so I
repeat the instruction.) “Say yes, when you feel all that comfort and pleasure…”
Subject: Yes
“Good. Perfect…When training someone the awareness of a connection can
easily become a leash… In having that awareness, a person would always know
they belong with me… always knowing, there is space and pleasure in sharing
our lives… This is the energetic leash of service… this is what this pleasure has
made you ready for… Would always being able to sense me through this
energetic pleasure make you feel more confident and happier?”
(I have a few items to point out from this transcript. Repeating these same words
and phrases over and over creates strong associations that prime the subconscious
181
to connect these associations together more often. This transcript is drawn out to
display the many expressions of symbol fractionation and morphology with
hypnosis. There has been plenty of time to start and stop BDSM play like
spanking, bondage, and some very enthusiastic sex. Get consent before you begin
and plan out euphoric hypnotic adventures together.
I want to introduce you to a cognitive bias called Pareidolia. Pareidolia is a
psychological phenomenon in which the mind responds to a stimulus, usually an
image or a sound, by perceiving a familiar pattern where none exists (e.g. in
random data). These interactions you are guiding them through will have a lot of
new, seemingly disconnected bits of information, and random aspects that the
subconscious mind is processing. This is one reason why you will find many
descriptions about how good they feel upon awakening, what happens when they
reenter trance/hypnosis, and how they may respond to a stimulus. I want to
intentionally reinforce this meaning-making cognitive mechanism with these
descriptions. Emphasizing these connections also tends to intensify them, as the
subject is getting feedback on their behavior. What is intentionally praised and
practiced becomes correct and expected behavior.
Simply having several hypnotic interactions with someone will strengthen the
associations shared together, practiced with you, or in your presence. Keep in
mind that when first meeting you the subject will also be carrying forward
cognitive biases that they have connected to words, phrases, images, and sounds
from other people. Our best performance and engagement with the subject comes
from learning about those biases and morphing them into activities like this. Ours
becomes the focus of incredibly intense attention when the subject is in these
hypnotic states. Think about that. How you work with them and your attitude
becomes one aspect they will be absorbing. Be ready to use the randomness that
comes your way as part of the adventure at the moment.)
Subject: Yes
“Perfect. Would being able to sense me through the daily pleasure in your life
make you feel more capable?”
Subject: Yes
182
“Are you ready and willing to take responsibility for this pleasure and connection
in your life?”
Subject: Yes, I want to.
“Perfect. That’s right… Feeling the pleasure of every yes. Mmmmm, and finding
that confident, capable energy grow within yourself… Feel that pleasure…Do
you want more? Say more please.”
Subject: Yes. More, please.
(Pairing the responsibility for this pleasure and connection with values the
subject responds to. I touch her on the leg)
“Opening those eyes look at me… Really seeing the person in front of you…
Feeling that pleasure move through your body… Looking into my eyes, and at
my smile, feeling wonderful... Really seeing me... mmmm… knowing I’m really
seeing you… That’s right. Feeling that pleasure move through your body…
Looking into my eyes and at my smile… feeling wonderful…. Notice the energy
and attention you bring to this… this is part of your service to me… getting to the
right mindset is part of your service to each other… getting here is practicing
pleasure… Intensify it… Finding it moves through your body and mind to where
it needs to go… Triple that feeling… feel how that energy and color soaks into
you… triple it more… and bringing your full attention to my eyes… Looking
deeply into my eyes… you notice how your body responds… You feel that color
encouraging you with every look… Ensuring that you can sense it developing
you… (I pause a few seconds.)
If you need a moment before we begin this is what we can do… This is
something you communicate… You know that as I look at you, I’m looking into
you too… I can shape this energy and color within… Each and every time you
feel this touch it gets better. Each and every time you experience this color it
makes you thirst to feel this good, or even more wonderful… Every time you
look into my eyes you feel me building up the best that you can be, today… It all
becomes part of your inner signal of this thirst… I want you to feel my energy…
taking control… moving everywhere it needs to…. I want you to really feel the
difference between this moment and the usual attraction you had known... I want
183
you to really feel the difference between this moment and the usual day you had
known... You have already come so far… Really understand you have changed...
(I remove my hand.) Open your eyes and tell me how do you feel?
(The subject looks at me and smiles but as she looks down the smile fades.)
Subject: I feel good. Really good. I feel like so much has changed. I don’t want
to forget this. It’s changed what I want in my life. Intimacy like this isn’t
disposable.
“That’s right… That’s natural… Look at me… allow this energy to resonate with
you.” (Subject looks at me and appears very happy. There is an opportunity to
change there and possibly a worry about losing this connection and/or feeling. I
choose to explore it and see what the subject reveals. I want her to express what
she is feeling and thinking.) “How does it feel to bring this connection within
you?”
Subject: Good… I feel really good. Makes me feel clear. Open to the possibilities
and I want structure from you. I want to serve someone who is a master like you.
“I’ve been teaching for many years, and it has taken me a long time to learn how
to bring my authentic self forward… I can offer this experience to you, but I’ll
also be holding you accountable for the mindset you bring to this service. I’m not
sure if you want this. Do you?”
Subject: Yes. I look at you and I feel like you are taking care of me. Encouraging
me to be better and more… expressive. I’d want to be yours. I want to make you
happy too.
(Being a participant or an observer can get a subject to access a specific state, and
this includes a hypnotic state. All of this happens by communicating with each
other and sharing experiences that really matter to us. This gets us exploring our
internalized hedonic capacity, adaption, and setpoints.
Hedonic capacity is a dispositional ability to experience pleasure in response to
stimuli that are typically rewarding.
184
Hedonic adaptation is the observed tendency of humans to quickly return to a
relatively stable level of happiness despite major positive or negative events or
life changes.
When it comes to our sense of wellbeing, emotions, capacity to handle stressors
we rely on something called a set points. Our set points are based on our genetics
and conditioning. While we may have emotional ups and downs throughout our
daily life, these are temporary. No matter what life throws at us, over time, our
energy comes back to seek the adopted set point for harmony and balance. Which
is an incredibly powerful subconscious principal when you think about all the
circumstances and experiences that can lead to the same set point. Whether it's
through isolation, grief, or pain, if we can experience joy and suffering, we can
become aware of the self-deterministic drive to open ourselves up and adapt.
This is the start of the journey for my assemblage point workshop, but today it
serves as a teaser for you thinking about the adaptive set points within the states
we all love to come back to. This section is showing you how to begin
conditioning hedonic adaptation and capacity through stimulating and
conditioning set points. As an advanced MC, Hypno Dom, or Enshrouded, with
these examples, you’re working with direct experiences. Even if they are second
hand as you may observe them.
This art will have you recognizing that life throws at us countless circumstances
outside of our control, and we will still have innumerable ones within our
control. To begin working with set points take hold of what you can control in
order to bring about more of the desired state. Over time, and with intentional
changes, you’ll see how your set points are responding to feedback and functions
of your life. What follows here builds upon the hedonic and erotic interplay with
the subject.)
Here I’m testing accepted associations and responsiveness.
“That’s perfect. That’s good… Looking into my eyes I want you to feel my
energy responding inside yourself. When I touch you, (I touch the subject on the
leg.) I want you to immediately feel that more powerfully than before. (Holding
her gaze.) Are you feeling that now?”
Subject: Yes, it’s like you… you’re touching me inside.
185
“That’s right… Encouraging your authentic self to express what it wants…
Inspiring your authentic slave to recognize the tug on her leash, closer to me…
(Subject leans closer as I say this.) Perfect… Feeling this energy move through
your body, to where it needs to go… notice what happens when I remove my
hand… (I remove my hand.) And close your eyes… Holding onto all that has
been shared with you… Taking only the most amazing feelings, and thoughts
with you… All that has been shared… all that you have, to prove your worthy
of…. feeling amazing… with only good thoughts and energy… This is being
your best self… this is service to me… If this accepted, and true for you, nod
your head for me….” (Subject nods her head.) “That’s my girl. Perfect. Smile,
feeling even more amazing.”
Subject: Yes. (I touch her knee.)
“When you feel my touch, now, and in the future… You will feel these
sensations… You will feel the joy of submission roll through you… and those
thirsty wants and desires are awakening further within you… You will find parts
of you are awakening… these parts have been slumbering for far too long… feel
this energy within you, and always watching over you… You look forward to
exploring this again, going deeper... getting developed further… each and every
time, this becomes a greater part of who you are… Each and every time, you
respond even more quickly… each and every time, you’ll feel this pleasure
multiplying… You will know you can handle more… Tell me, do you agree to
this?”
Subject: Yes, I do. I want to be yours.
In this section I give instructions for follow-ups, living well, recruiting others,
and responding to negativity. A polyamorous power exchange relationship is
something this subject and I both seek.
“That’s my girl. That’s right… Each and every time we touch, there’s always
something new you can discover… Each and every time you get to feel this
pleasure, you’ll always know that it connects to something more… (I remove my
hand.) Close your eyes. Each and every time we explore our authentic selves
encouraging the best of who we are. When you go out into the world you are
encouraged to kick ass and always have this strength… You are encouraged by
186
this energy and strength… the product of this passion, energy, and focus is you…
It's watching over you and reminding you of your thirst to kneel for me… Isn’t
it?”
Subject: Yes
“That’s right, all that passion intensifies until you open your eyes… look at me
feeling wonderful.” (Subject opens her eyes.)
I want you to say yes five times… Feeling the excitement and pleasure, feeling it
all throughout your body and mind… In a moment we are going to do this
together… Looking in my eyes now.”
Subject: Yes. Yes. Yes. Yes. Yes. (I love that excitement.)
“My slave swallows cum eagerly, doesn’t she?”
Subject: Yes… That’s crazy how great this feels saying yes!
“That’s a girl. This is what I want you to remember… I love training you this
way… So take this wonderful experience as a gift… and each and every time,
you’ll be building on it with me.... and explore the best parts of who you
are…and who you can be… There are so many things to look forward to. (I touch
her on the leg.) There are many challenges ahead for you… challenges to define,
shape, and prove you are capable of… And you know, you are more capable
now… we’ve awakened this pleasure inside you… Only the best thoughts and
memories flow through you as you think about this… encouraging the best that
you can be today… You get to take this connection with you… You get to live
life more on your terms… Looking deeply into the person I am… tell me, Do you
want this training to continue?”
Subject: Yes, I want that. SO much!
“That’s right. That’s perfect. When we find something, or someone wonderful, it
is only natural that we’d want to share, and talk about it with likeminded
people… There are negative people out there too… Not everyone thinks or likes
what we like... It’s because not everyone fits like us… Not everyone believes or
feels the same things… Not all of us have the same experiences… We all must
learn when not to accept their negativity and doubt… When you feel this good
187
you want to share it with people who get it, and people who will support you…
when they feel this pleasure too… the experience and the possibilities multiply…
Sharing with people that encourage and support you is what is important… When
you think about sharing this remember, you are talking to people who have never
had this experience… just like the person you were when you woke up this
morning… You couldn’t have known how good this would feel before we met…
This feels good doesn’t it?”
Subject: Yes. I want **** to feel this good too. (Subject names another woman.)
In this section, I’ll describe strategies to communicate this experience by asking
for consent. Encourage a desire to bring others back to you.
“That’s good… When you connect with someone, you light each other up… you
see she can feel this pleasure too... and finding things that light each other up…
she wants to explore… Sharing this with people who get it, makes you feel
good… It makes you feel proud, and confident… You’ve had this experience,
because its right for you… This is something you should ask consent from
another before sharing… Not everyone is comfortable with these topics… Not
everyone deserves to know… You are not a reflection of the people who can’t
love you, or understand you… Shine so bright that others have no choice but to
light up with you… Never again apologize for showing passion and feeling…
When you do so, you apologize for the truth… This isn’t for just anyone… and
you are certain it feels good to be here, with me, doesn’t it?”
Subject: Yes. It’s wonderful being with you.
“That’s perfect. That’s my girl. (I give her knee a squeeze, remove my hand, and
I look and point behind the subject to the floor.) Down there is uncertainty and
bad choices… People make them all the time… and we get to walk past them,
and encourage our best self… It isn’t our responsibility to change them… be
choosey who you share with… when doing this right, we get back here, to
certainty. (I point to her and back to me.) Some people do not like what we like.
(I point back down and behind her.) Some people are different than us, and what
is good for us is not always good for them. (I shrug.) Just like if you loved
chocolate… Do you love chocolate? (Subject told me she really loves boozy
188
chocolate coffee drinks earlier in the night. I have met some people who do not
like chocolate or sweets at all.)
Subject: Yes, I do. The ****** hot cocoa is my favorite.
“Perfect. Then this is for you! You get to treat yourself and enjoy it... Some
people are allergic, and some people think vanilla is better than chocolate…
Some people, will even tell you what they don’t want, and sometimes go further
by saying things like, “white chocolate isn’t real chocolate anyway.” Everyone
does not need to love, what we love… That’s okay… It’s no more right than
vanilla or dark chocolate… I think it is wonderful that we can be ourselves, even
if that means others think we are different… most woman I’ve met have at least
one secret they’ve never told anyone… some secrets connect with desire so deep,
that without someone to guide them, even a strong woman can feel that she must
be on guard constantly against losing control… guarding against showing her
passion… afraid of her temper, unsure of her appetite, unable to name her thirst,
only glimpsing the urgings of her sexuality, of her feelings, of her ambition, of
her secret fantasies… You are well past that now… aren’t you baby?”
“Yes, but I still feel there’s so much to discover with you.
“Pleasure is different for all of us… Each pleasure, and every experience, is just
as valid as any other… Each person can be just as authentic, as they are
knowledgeable, as they are comfortable at exploring the world, and themselves...
So, we’ve made passion our strength… it is in our comfort… and optimism…
our passion, allows us to make a meaningful difference in the world… So,
choose how and who you express your authentic self... Invite them along on this
adventure… and ask for their consent before sharing more… It’s okay to share
with them that this is not for everybody… too many people already spend five
days a week pretending to be someone else, in order to spend two days being
who we are... So, when your body says something, listen to it… When your mind
is fatigued or burnt out, respect that... You can either work with or against
yourself… As you become mine more fully, I’ll teach you to balance the needs of
the path, with the priorities of the experience… if you want that, tell me you want
that.”
Subject: Yes. I want to be yours. I want that.
189
END
I end this session by repeating some of the future pacing statements for the
experience and transitioning to a comfortable, but energized state. I stop this
transcript here. There are many ways you can end a session like this, and I have
ended here because this section is so long. In the above section, there are
advanced methods of utilizing symbology and fractionation. This transcript was
shared for the purpose of exploring an applicable example of this criteria and
pairing it with hypnotic commands. You can just do the basic fractionation along
with the major senses of visual, kinesthetic, auditory, feeling, and self-dialogue
to get results if you like. To explore those basic skills further you would only
need to pull them out of this section and practice them. The more you play with
these ideas and techniques the better you will be. When you make people feel
this good, they don’t get bored with the slow progression of hypnotic
development.
Please ask for consent before you talk about these topics with others. Asking for
consent begins the process of consensual communication between new and
experienced kink aware professionals. You should know that if you try to
connect with just a person's pleasure, they may view you as superficial and
momentary. When you can connect with someone’s pain and their pleasure,
something interesting happens. Your ideas and descriptions begin to both push
and pull them. You start engaging their problems as well as their joy. Seeking to
engage the whole person, you’ll connect at a more meaningful level than you
ever would’ve if you only embraced their smile. Take the time to plan out how
you’ll use your art to do that. Skillsets can be learned. That’s what makes them
skillsets. There comes a point however in any skillset where it becomes almost
entirely mental. Almost entirely reflexive. It becomes a mindset. This is where
you want to be and this is where practicing leads you.
When practicing symbol morphology, as I have above, you’re combining several
techniques and hypnotic skills. You want to move your description and
instruction across the subject’s senses and fractionate the intensity of the
experience. Have an explanation of how you work with the mind and do energy
work prepared along with potential hypnotic instructions you’d like to leave the
190
subject with. Use commands and instructions as part of the descriptions to
progress through the scenes you’re establishing, and you will be amazed at how
you'll be able to steer towards the desired results more rapidly. For example, can
you think of all the reasons that you want to use hypnosis to get the results that
you want, now? Use any metaphor that allows you to move the experience of
sensations across visual, auditory, kino, and leave the subject with some good
future paced self-talk. This ensures they speak to others about you and they
revivify how good they felt in the experience as they share. The examples I gave
above for this could easily be adapted to become a recruitment script.
This next transcript emphasizes the dominant sensory preferences of the subject.
Note that this subject just watched me take her friend through this very same
process. I got a chance to ask her what she thought about what happened with her
friend and did a value elicitation before beginning this. Out of the ten people that
I did this exercise with, this subject responded the most intensely. The best part
for me, was the friend that went through a similar experience a moment before
gets to now watch her friend go through it. This intensifies the effect of the
experience for them both. Several times, I watched both women close and open
their eyes when I told the one I was supposed to be working with to do so. By the
end, each of them emerged glassy-eyed and happy. Enjoy!
“Everything I'm showing you is a way of moving energy from one part of your
mind to another part. This part of your mind may not seem very active in your
day to day life, and you’re not probably aware of how often you’ve been drawn
back to this focus…. Back to this voice of adventure… I could be the very first
person to come along… and show you, that life can be lived in this way… What
would it be like… to feel yourself waking up, a bit more every day?... Learning
can be like slowly opening my eyes… to discover a flash of light in the dark…
even if my first reaction was to close them quickly… each time becoming
braver… When I was a younger Joe, I remember discovering how real my
imagination could be…
It all started one day, when I began thinking back to my last big decision... I let
my mind float back, to right before I made that decision… Right now, think
about an important decision that made you happy… It doesn’t have to be a huge
choice, just an important one… when you look back on it. For me, it was
191
choosing someone to share lunch with… and making that person really laugh…
It wasn’t what was given that mattered… It was being willing to share of myself,
and I gained a friend for life… It was one of the best choices I could make… and
thinking back to it, I just let my mind wander… I begin stepping into this
memory… imagining my lunch... Then noticing my friend… and she is upset...
She’s in trouble, I think to myself… “I need to step in.” So, imagine that… Focus
on that moment of action…. How it feels doing that…
Recognize this moment of opportunity, confidence, and certainty… You know
what you think and feel, you matter… you make a difference… not because
society tells you too… you did this when no one else was… you’re making this
choice for yourself… because it’s the right choice… Recognize, that you have
been doing this all your life… We all need to feel safe, and we all want to
communicate what matters… We can have that, with a person who brings out the
best in us... Have you ever really appreciated a painting, work or art, or had an
incredible experience that made you yearn to create and express yourself?...
Yeah, you don’t have to answer aloud right now… so consider what's it like, not
trying to awaken something deep inside?... And don 't think about it either…
there’s more to the world than we interact with… think about that… how much
more you could learn, do, think, feel, and be… as many adventures as
identities… as many identities as there are hats… so we can pick a good one…
One that matters to us, and our lives… Imagine what it might be like to generate
millions of experiences, knowing you will be sharing them with many people…
those experiences shared may be the only ones like that… those experiences
might be remembered for the rest of their life… together, you can explore
something no one else can give… the experience of you at this moment… it’s a
present, opportunity for each other… You’ll be the person today, that you want
to be tomorrow… Just imagine that this energy, and this emotion, has a color to
it… Extend your hand with your palm up… there’s a ball of color on your
palm… Once you have that color in your palm, make a fist, and nod your head
for me.”
(Subject makes a fist and nods.)
“Perfect… The color can slip around as if its warm liquid on your palm…
Explore the sensations… as you move this color, from palm to palm… doing that
192
now… As move your fingers, notice the sensations… and weight on the palm of
your hand… Nod for me, when you have that.”
(Subject moves her hands back and forth and is wiggling her fingers as she nods.)
“What does that feel like to you?”
Subject: “Umm. It feels like bits of wet sand. It’s like, I was at the beach and I let
the sand run through my hand onto my palm.”
“Okay. Perfect. Now, I’d like you to rub your hands together…” I gently nudge
the fingers on the subject’s hands closer together.) “Feeling the warmth. and
energy present, within that colored motion... imagine an aura around your hands,
and it's powered by this energy… When you have that… notice that glow moves
with you… you’re feeling the emotion and energy moving through you… hold
out your hands.”
(In about two seconds the subject’s hands begin moving out.)
“Perfect… in a moment… I’m going to hold your hands in mine… (I’m doing
this purely for the emotional intensification and to check her responsiveness to
me. All innocence and excitement here. Smile.) As I touch your hands, notice
how the color gets brighter… Watch the color begin to move into me… see it
with your inner eyes… draining all that color into me… The color moves all
around me… with each beat of your heart, and each breath… coloring me with
pleasure, happiness, and energy… That color is a connection… that makes you
aware of the most relaxed parts of your body and mind… As I hold your hands…
triple that feeling of connection and relaxation... I’m multiplying all this around
me… Notice how my touch, is drawing your attention, sharing new sensations…
and multiplying the responsiveness of this color… moving into me… moving out
to you… with this color and energy… you are getting to know me… I am getting
to know the person you are too… (I give this a five second pause.)
As you hear my voice, feel this touch, you come to understand that this color can
also be communicated with sound… pleasure is a sound, you have to tune into
it… right now, you’re doing more than calling out for it... you’re listening for
it… Sound moves with energy, and my voice intensifies all that color… I also
want you to see me with your inner eyes… and discovering me, and this creative
193
passion in the world around you… with this energy and colorful emotion…
you’ll be reminded of all we enjoy together… and all you do… When you have
that in your mind… I want you to triple the strength of that colored energy
here… perfect… I want you to hear this energy in my voice… and see this color
around you… feel all this pleasure coming back to you, coming into your life…
What's it like not trying to awaken something deep inside, now? … And don 't
think about it either… Noticing all this responding energy inside you, as I talk to
it… just nod your head for me if it gets even just a little bit better… (Subject
takes about five seconds and nods slightly.) and relax into it even further.
In a moment, I’m going to put your hands down on your lap and… (Subject
squeezes my hands tightly and shakes her head no.) When I speak to you, I want
you to notice that energy filling you up… moving from you to me… from me to
you… and inspiring you… I want you to feel my touch and believe that this
energy is a connection between us… it’s okay… it’s really good… and this
connection will be with you when you need it most… Are you ready to notice the
difference in your body and mind as I let go?”
(Subject frowns but nods.)
“If you do well, you can hold my hand again… so feel that energy moving deeper
into you… even more, as you hear me say, relax… comfort…. Passion…
curiosity… happiness… strength… connection… together… filling, you, up…
thirsty to take it all in… (I put subject’s hands on her lap and there is no
resistance.) I want you to appreciate this… like answering a call… you’re
responding to this energy… responding to this voice… inspiring you to create,
and be passionate… encouraging the thrill of sensuous energy … to have an
adventure… it makes you thirsty for more… notice how this energy comes to
energize you… To empower you… It's together, that we make life work for us…
It’s time to discover yourself… it’s time to seek together, what can be discovered
in this world… we can build new feelings… because, the interesting thing about
new feelings, is finding the right person to share them with… Wonderful ideas
and emotions inside you are waking up… discovering someone who inspires you
to express this energy, and make it part of life… That’s how you know this
person encourages who you are… (I put my hand over the subject’s hand.) Its
creative impact is essential to how you think about life… It’s the same with
194
sunlight… moving through time and space to nourish life… There is a lot more
to the light than what you can see… Light has both a mass and a vibration that
we can feel… think about being on the beach, and pushing your toes through the
hot, comfortable, sand… just underneath the layer in contact with the world
there’s relaxing cool…
That deeper coolness can be like a secret shared… feel it, through the soles of
your feet… Even with our eyes closed… it’s just energy, it’s this connection
between us… you will know when it is absent or farther away… Can you feel the
difference between us touching and me over here?” (I remove my hands and lean
back.)
(Subject nods her head.) Subject: “I don’t like it. I want you touching me.”
(I put my hand on the subject’s hands on her lap.) Good… Feel that making you
feel sooo much better… enjoy this feeling… I’m not sure if you’ve ever heard
someone talking about being nostalgic for something…it might be a wistful
affection for a time… it could be a longing for a person, a touch… or even a
place… I was talking with a fisherman, and he told me that this feeling is his
connection to home… I later learned the Greek word for return is nostos... and
algos means suffering… So, nostalgia is the sorrowful absence caused by an
unappeased thirst to return to the source of a connection... moving deeper into
such a sentiment can take you like the tide... Take a deep breath and slowly let it
out. (I remove my hand.)
Feel that energy moving out from you… reminding you of this touch and
strength as part of you. (I touch the subject’s hand.) Feel it coming back to you…
even stronger now… Each and every time we touch... stronger still… Each and
every time you hear my voice… filling you up… so you realize you carry it with
you… Connecting us like the tides of an ocean… there may be low tides, where
you see more of the sandy shores… and there will be high tides, where you
discover more of the ocean… so take a deep breath, and let it out slow... (I
remove my hand.) Some people recharge us… fill us up with life and
happiness… as you think about this experience later… you’ll remember the
wonderful feelings... and only good memories will go with you out into the
world... Each and every time you hear my voice… you’re connecting with me...
(I touch the subject’s hand.) filling you up… carrying this with you… feeling
195
only pleasing energy, moving to recharge you… feelings that challenge you and
encourage you… bringing the best of you forward… with the pull of the tides…
You will feel this energy filling you up… you’ll be glowing… like a lighthouse
in the darkness… you can use it to guide your direction forward… When the tide
is out to sea you will get thirsty… You will hear my voice telling you to pay
attention to the best feelings in your body, right now… Notice that with your
care, and attention… these feelings and this thirst grows… It intensifies to a rich
pleasurable color that radiates from you into the world… It connects out to the
people you love… like the ocean and the sky, there are cycles of energy
connecting the world... (I notice tears beginning with the subject.) No one gets
left behind… you are connected to the people who care about you the most…
you can see that on their faces… feel that in your heart… just like that… a smile
can be shared infinitely….”
END
I have the subject open their eyes and find three blue things, share something
comfortable that’s present, and conversationally debrief about how good and
connected they feel after having this experience. The mythic sea and the journey
to return home is a story we all find ourselves becoming part of. If life was a
book, every day could be a new page, every week might be a new chapter, and
every month could be the start of a new series. The limits of expression are meant
to be pushed, questioned, and charted. After you use these techniques a few times
you will be able to understand where I am using the same ones over and over. It
takes practice to make that understanding part of you. Next, I’ll provide you with
some guidance to help you begin constructing your hypnotic perspectives and
instructions.
Constructing hypnotic perspectives and instructions.
Take a moment to reflect on how amazing our brain is. Your subconscious mind
handles an incredible amount of information, essentially collecting together
everything you perceive and think. We use language so often that we forget its
complexity. We have within our mind a massive database of sounds, symbols,
196
and their multiple meanings. All of this information is accessed spontaneously to
express something as abstract as a thought and generate awareness. To do this
our conscious mind handles only a small percentage of the stimulus and
information received. The more you can be intentionally conscious of what you
focus on, the more you repeat highly charged experiences, and the more that
stimulus is recalled and associated with the overall experience of a specific
stimulus. This is the subconscious conscious feedback loop that is always
operating within our awareness of the world. This section will give you general
guidelines that you can use to adapt what you read in this book.
To learn this well you need to think about the experiences you want to share.
Those experiences will begin offering reasons, values, and perspectives (frames
to view and engage with the behavior in context) so you can utilize where the
behavior would naturally take you next. As you read through the next transcripts
look for how the pieces fit together and transition from one experience, effect,
and emotion to another. If you get even just one element to be accepted by the
subject than you have access to the subconscious process to bring in another. You
will notice that these commands and instructions successively build on one
another. Consider this the next step in pacing and leading because you’re
progressively advancing the experience after ensuring the subject is manifesting
it. The progressively descriptive hypnotic language sets the expectation for the
commands to be perceived by the subconscious mind and inevitably acted on.
The expectation here is that all the other hypnotic commands worked. You know
this because you tested them, and observed them in the subject’s answers and
responses. Unless what you have communicated goes against the subject’s
values, feelings of comfort, safety, something your saying or speaking about is
eliciting a reaction within them, or you have lost them somewhere. If any of this
happens you can bring them up to an alert state and figure out what is going on.
Then if you both want to continue to drop them back into hypnosis or trance. If
you are fractionating the subject as I have been in these transcripts then the
subject will tell you. Hypnotic trance is a heightened state of awareness so if you
hit on something the subject finds objectionable and out of context they will pop
out of that state. There is no reason you shouldn’t encourage the subject to
vocalize even while in deep hypnosis.
197
Encouraging the subject to vocalize increases interaction with them and bringing
them up and down in their level of trance improves their ability in attaining and
sustaining this state. There are many perspectives that people bring with them as
you engage them in hypnosis and trance. It’s no different than any other
experience. If the subject comes in stressed out, frustrated, or pissed at what
happened during their day than they may not be as responsive to what is
happening. Get the subject to agree that the attitude they bring with them is their
responsibility. If they need help to relax before beginning a session or something
came up while you were having a scene with them, deal with it. How you deal
with it communicates a lot about you. Many books are written on this topic alone.
Remember you are doing this together. You are not doing this to anyone. Take
care of each other.
We will be talking about framing problems and resources in and out of hypnosis
and trance a lot. We will not get into counseling at all. What we share is more at
the level of advice and asking the subject’s mind (subconscious and conscious) to
look for the answer. We are sharing experiences with each other here, and we’re
in charge of exploring experiences. That’s the nature of this work. It’s all
malleable and existential perspective at times. We’re sharing how the mind
works and not engaging in therapeutic issues. That’s also what makes this work
for you and your subject. If someone has issues that they need therapy for I’d
advise you to refer them to medical care. What we do here falls in the categories
of recreational, entertainment, educational, and spiritual lifestyle training.
After you have done this for a while you will come to realize that the most
powerful changes you inspire in others don’t always come from what you say.
The most powerful changes come from what the subject walks away with from
their interpretation of the experience. Sometimes what they hear and what I have
said is not even close. If you have done group work with someone professionally
or during school you’ve likely had a similar experience. Everyone is interpreting
the world through their awareness of reality and it’s not exactly the same from
person to person. The way in which any of us describes our problems and
successes sets up expectations and preconceived standards that will affect an
experience going forward. Those preconceived standards aren’t always in your
best interest, so change the transition scene, the perspective, the feelings, and the
identity hat, and the context with their preconceived standards change too. Play
198
with that and try an exercise that explores this the next time you feel stuck or
frustrated. Let’s look at an example of this through the hypnotic communication
tool of language patterns.
If you describe problem situations using generalizations and the present tense,
such as "I'm always messing up", or "I never seem to get it right", or "I have a
terrible sense of direction!", your subconscious mind essentially reacts with,
"right, got it!", and the problem inevitably persists. To change that, start
describing problem patterns in the past tense, and add in a "but…" and start a
new direction with the present tense: “I used to have a terrible sense of direction,
but now I am curious to see how that is changing." The more you become aware
of how you use language to describe yourself to others and to your sense of
identity (“I am”), the more you can focus and flow with your experience of the
world. Your descriptions of the experience your having is providing you the
awareness to be a more joyful, peaceful, free and balanced as a person. This style
if communicating matters as you begin creating hypnotic commands for yourself
and others. Please see the source material for this book, but your safe exploring
anything by Richard Bandler on NLP. That man has weathered storms and
overcome challenges while pursuing his passion and art.
As you start out learning these skills seek out stories that you can frame in useful
ways, share information that leads to positive emotional reactions or
development, learn to describe things according to emotional moods (a
comfortable cup of coffee), and don’t be afraid to use stories to make people
think. Leading a subject into an inner search engages their unconscious to work a
problem or task in specific ways. Leading into a particular direction can start by
asking questions. Asking questions along explicit lines ideally evokes and
facilitates subconscious responses. We can lead up to almost any interaction by
calling it preparation in a story.
We can prepare ourselves to go to sleep, but the conscious mind cannot make
sleep happen. Thus, if we directly order a subject, "Sit down and go into
hypnosis" they may sit down and be consciously unsure exactly what to do next.
The work we do with subjects is designed to evoke and facilitate the
subconscious processes that will generate the desired response to our commands
and instructions. The best way to build hypnotic stories and metaphors is to find
199
out what your subject is interested in, and build from there. The goals built into a
story are relatable to the contexts in our lives. All of us have watched a movie or
read a good book and been reminded of a scene where a character was building
on a challenge or task. That happened without a personalized hypnotic state, but
the subconscious mind enjoyed something about that scene. Ask about these
moments that got your subject thinking deeply about a character and their
challenges. Don’t be afraid to learn all you can about the successes and mistakes
of transitioning someone into an altered state from others. You won’t have time
to make all these remarkable mistakes and discoveries all yourself.
Beginning to work with Hypnosis
Many things can serve to be a hypnotic induction as you practice your art. All
inductions are just vehicles to engage attention and focus in order to evoke the
subconscious processes desired. Notice I did not say bypass a critical factor, nor
must your subject know you have these skills for them to work. There are times
you may want to use a subject’s disbelief, you may wish to cast doubts on
something happening, and it’s not always bad to have a subject second guess
what they know in relation to you. Know your subject, practice your skills, plan
to have multiple ways to do anything, engage your subject with their interests,
and network with others who use these skills well. If you are engaging people
with what interests them you will be successful. This chapter will share
techniques and advice on beginning the work with hypnosis.
You started learning formal inductions with progressive muscle relaxation
(PMR) earlier. PMR is often introduced to new subjects who come in for
hypnotherapy and group hypnosis. PMR has already been covered and we will
not go over it again in this section. What follows are standard hypnotic
inductions that every hypnotist and architect of mind control should know. These
standard inductions are the starting point to adapting your own vehicles of
hypnotic trance.
200
The Elman Induction
Dave Elman created a technique for doctors and dentists to hypnotize patients
that would consistently work, and could be readily learned by the doctors and
dentists in their office. Elman had no medical training himself, but his technique
introduced rapid hypnotic inductions by tying it to an old medical practice.
Elman touted what he called "the Esdaile State" which was believed to be the
inducement of a hypnotic coma in the client. There are likely thousands of
different versions of the Elman Induction in use today. The Elman induction has
an established format that makes it easy to learn. Each stage of the induction has
its own test for depth of trance and established hypnotic deepeners to progress
the state. These hypnotic tests offer clear and measurable behavioral outcomes
which provide reassurance and feedback for the Hypnotist during the induction.
This next transcript below is a modified Elman induction. It’s a little longer than
some versions of this technique and you will recognize pieces of this induction
within other transcripts as you progress through this book. I suggest you rehearse
this induction many times before making any adaptions of your own.
“Okay now (subject’s name) … let’s start by taking a big deep breath in … and
let it all out slowly… As you’re letting it out… just close your eyes and relax….
you don't have to do anything... Just let it happen… shrug your shoulders... and
let go, of all tension… let go, of all stress… Let your arms and hands go loose
and limp… Now, focus on the relaxation around your eyelids… bringing all your
attention around the smallest of muscles that move your eyes…. Observing the
relaxation present here… this relaxation softens these muscles… and smooths out
any tension, fully and completely… Now, relax your eyes, so completely… and
as long as you have this level of relaxation… your eyes will remain closed…
those eyelids are so relaxed... so tired, so heavy... that you just cannot open
them... When you’ve got them relaxed to that point… try to open them, and find
that they remain closed.”
(Test one is eye catalepsy. If the subject opens their eyes you begin the script
again with them, and you’d do this until their eyes remain closed. After just a
second or two of watching the subject’s eyes move a bit for this test, you can stop
them. Simply proceed on by using the language below.)
201
“Perfect. You can stop trying… and enjoy a comfortable wave of relaxation…
softening those muscles… smoothing out each and every muscle as this
relaxation moves through you… Feeling the weight of your body... Drifting
down…deeply…taking you deeper, down into relaxation… Imagine your
breathing leads out to an ocean of relaxation… this relaxation is moving down
from the top of your head…. And up, from the tips of your toes… feel this
swirling, comfortable sensation coming up from the soles of your feet… After
all, feet are just hands that step across the earth… Think about that, as this
comforting relaxation flows through you… moving deeper into this relaxation…
as deeply as you can go with these breathes... now…”
(I pause for 15 seconds observing the subject and giving her a moment to breathe
before moving on.)
“In a moment, I’m going to ask you to open your eyes… in a moment, when you
open your eyes, you’ll look at me feeling wonderful… feeling the most profound,
and wonderful comfort, and relaxation you’ve ever had… Then, I will have you
close your eyes again… When you close your eyes this time… you are taking all
these wonderful feelings with you… enjoying them more, as you move deeper
inside yourself… deeper than ever before…. You are going to go ten times
deeper… times more relaxed… into this wonderful comfort, and quiet
relaxation…. Now, open your eyes and look at me… As this wonderful
comfort… this perfect relaxation is ... taking you deeper…. go ten times
deeper… Now close your eyes… taking with you, this pleasant relaxation…
deeper inside…”
(I pause five seconds, allowing my silence to encourage the subject to go deeper.)
“Go ten times deeper… ten times deeper, into this comfortable, pleasant,
relaxation…”
(I pause five seconds.)
“Perfect… That’s right… Open your eyes and look at me… feeling this
wonderful comfort, and this pleasant relaxation, really look at me... and go ten
times deeper… go ten times deeper… Now close your eyes.”
(I pause five seconds.)
202
“Go ten times deeper… moving with this responsive relaxation, deeper into
yourself… go ten times deeper… Open your eyes, feeling wonderful and clear…
Look at me… taking all this deeper inside you…”
(I pause five seconds.)
“Your eyes lids are heavier… and they take so much effort to lift… This
wonderful comfort, and relaxation, is only allowing you to open them just a bit
now… Your eyes lids are heavier… and harder to open… In a moment, I’m
going to ask you to try opening those eyes… and you will have so much trouble
opening them… unable to barely crack them open… Now… try, try to open your
eyes and look at me.”
(Pause and observe the subject. If the subject’s eyes open too fast or linger open
to long repeat this starting at “Go ten times deeper” just a few paragraphs above.
If the subject barely opens their eyes this is perfect. You can move on.)
“Perfect… As wonderful as this relaxation is... you can go even deeper… It can
feel even better, as you take all this back down… even deeper, into this
relaxation… Now, close your eyes… Down, down, down, deeper than before…
Much deeper… All the way down.”
(I pause for ten seconds before moving on.)
“In a moment, I’m going to gently pick up your hand, and arm, by your thumb.
Your arm, will be loose and limp, like a cooked noodle… Don’t try to help me
here... Let me take care of all the effort necessary… I’ll just lift your arm up, and
move it back and forth… Your arm should be as loose and relaxed… just like a
spaghetti noodle. Now.”
(Lift up the subject’s arm and give it wiggle back and forth gently. You are
testing for complete relaxation and compliance. No tension in the arm at all
should be present. If there is tension, I tell the subject that all tension should be
gone. I put their arm down and I’ll repeat this section again. I would start at
“Perfect. As wonderful as this relaxation is...” Begin this test again and only
proceed when the subject is ready. When satisfied with the gentle shake back and
forth continue on.)
203
“In just a moment, I’m going to gently drop your arm onto your lap… and as it
drops down, you will go even deeper into trance.... going deeper down now....
deeper than ever before.”
(Drop the subject’s arm gently into their lap.)
“Dropping, down, deeper… deeper, than ever before…every muscle in your
body now… soft and sleeping… Letting me take care of any effort necessary….
Taking you down further than ever before… Every time I pick up your arm, these
feelings multiply…”
(Lift the subject’s arm.)
“Your attention and energy fixate on this increasing relaxation…”
(Gently wiggle the subject’s arm again to test for any tension from them
attempting to help you, or the subject tensing back up. Repeat this a few times if
needed to get the subject completely relaxed and noodle armed.)
“Even as I move your arm… I shake away any leftover tension, or stress, from
your body and mind… Each and every time this arm is dropped into your lap,
you’ll go deeper… deeper than ever before.”
(Next, we will be inducing simple hypnotic amnesia. Relaxing the mind and
inducing a relaxed fuzzy state begins with losing or forgetting thoughts and
concepts, such as numbers or letters. I will be using letters here as this method is
very similar to the Ten to One Method that I will be sharing later.)
“Soo much deeper… and each and every time, I pick up your arm, you’ll go so
much deeper into relaxation.”
(Lift the subject’s arm.)
“Each and every time this arm is dropped into your lap, you’ll go deeper…
deeper than ever before… More relaxed with every breath.”
(Allow for five seconds of silence and then begin again.)
“Now, I will begin to relax your mind, just as profoundly, as I have relaxed your
body… I want you to imagine a staircase… Much like you would find in a hotel,
204
or business office... Here the walls are cement and patterns of colors and shapes
decorate the walls.
(You have the choice of having the subject write on the wall and step down. Each
step takes them deeper, or just speaking the letter aloud and stepping deeper. If
you want them to write you should introduce a piece of chalk here. “In your
hand, is a cool white piece of chalk. It’s thick smooth whiteness only has a little
bit of weight, and when you write with this chalk, any tension, any effort, and
any thought… leaves your mind… Your mind is filling up with relaxed
contentment as you draw and write with this chalk.”)
“And in a moment, I’m going to ask you to begin saying the alphabet backward,
and out loud… Each letter you say aloud, helps your mind become more relaxed,
and comfortable… any thought, just leaves your mind with each letter… You’ll
find, that within just a few letters, your mind can grow so relaxed, that the rest of
the letters just fade away… go dim, dark, distant and fuzzy… as they disappear
altogether… When that happens, it feels good… feeling this deepening
responsiveness, moving through your mind and body… Begin saying the
alphabet backward slowly now.”
Subject: “Z.”
“Perfect, speaking it nice and slow… moving deeper… a comforting quiet settles
into your mind and body.
Subject: “Y.”
“Relaxing more and more… Slowing everything down… Moving you deeper
than ever before.”
Subject: “X.”
“Perfect… Allow them to disappear completely… taking you deeper than ever
before… Gone completely, and feeling wonderful...”
(Wait just a few seconds to ensure no other letter is spoken. In a moment you’ll
ask the subject if the letters are gone. If they aren’t gone continue on.)
“Are they all gone?”
205
Subject: “Yes.”
“Perfect….”
(This is the end of this induction. You can transition into the next phase of
hypnosis here or bring your subject back out of hypnosis.)
Counting the subject up and out of the hypnotic trance.
“I’m going to count to five in a moment. As I reach five, or even a little before,
your eyes will open, and you’ll feel relaxed, refreshed, and wonderful… You will
feel your energy coming into your body, and you take with you only positive,
wonderful thoughts… I’m going to begin… Recognize how your body and mind
are already responding… responding to the energy and my voice… and five…
Sounds are coming back into your full awareness from the background, and four.
You’re a little more awake with each number, and feeling good… This is an
adventure that you take with you… Three, your eyes want to open as you feel the
energy circulating through you. Two, feeling good, remembering back on what
you experienced here, and taking this relaxation with you to greet the world. One,
take a deep breath, and tell me about the best feeling in your body right now.”
Ten to One Induction
The Ten to One Induction can be used for self-hypnosis and hetro-hypnosis. You
will find plenty of similarities between this and the Elman Induction because it
encompasses an amalgamation of techniques. If you use the Ten to One
Induction you’ll have to work through each number and personalize the
commands and instructions here. What’s here is what fit for someone else. This
induction is incredibly easy to learn and its influence increases by utilizing
personalized specificity with your subject. As you read this over, you should
notice aspects of the PMR and Elman the induction throughout the transcript I
share below. I share this induction as part of full hypnotic experience first before
giving you just the basic Ten to One Method induction so you can see how
seamless it is to use.
206
“Your eyes should be comfortably closed… with your arms and legs in a
comfortable position… so you can relax into the experience of hypnosis… You
can use this induction to experience this comfortable state again, at any time…
We begin as your awareness is brought to the number one… My voice is
something you can always hear… so listen closely to the sound of my voice…
I’ll take care of all the effort needed… focus in… and focus on each of these
numbers… As I’m about to count down from ten to one… Each number will
have different associations, and influences, for you to experience.
I want you to imagine a chalkboard in your mind… This chalkboard might
remind you of being in the classroom for the very first time… This chalkboard
takes you to a space just outside of everyday time… It’s here that you can move
from day to day consciousness, and into a dreamy, drowsy, comfortable state, of
being utterly present... now, I want you to notice a stick of cool smooth chalk,
just below the chalkboard… pick it up. and write on the chalkboard the number
ten… As you write the number ten, you begin to feel a deepening sense of
relaxation… At this moment together, the number ten represents for you the start
of your exploration into the hypnotic process… When you think of the number
ten, you listen more closely to this voice of relaxation… this voice brings your
awareness to the most relaxed part of your body...
This voice of relaxation aligns the body, and the mind, with all that is being
shared together… This adventure of experiential learning reduces stress, softens
the strain and tension of the muscles, and encourages you to let go of any
confusion in your life… Ten is a powerful number to begin this process with… in
each moment, you’re learning by connecting things together… which can also
slow down thoughts … so can observe, reflect, pause, and when needed… ignore
what is not useful… so you slow down…enjoy the relaxation… and feel the
energetic potential in your every breath… and the comfortable heaviness of
relaxation… like a comfortable blanket, pulling it all around you… and realize
you’ve got the chance to discover more.
Now, I want you to erase the number ten from the chalkboard in your mind…
Deepening this state, relaxing your mind and body, easing away any stress or
tension… There are trillions of nerves in our body, and these nerves are listening
to every thought, responding to our every breath… and taking care of you, with
207
every beat of your heart… what you do matters… letting me take care of all
effort needed, for you to do this better… bring your attention to the most relaxed
parts of your body… as any stress, any tension, any effort at all… softens,
softens, softens from your head, face, and neck. (My voice gets progressively
quieter until I reach a whisper on this sentence. I return to a conversational
volume at the start of the next sentence in five seconds.)
It all, just slips off you… slips away… pleasant relaxing sensations begins along
the scalp, facial muscles, and neck… Zoom in, to observe these sensations with
your awareness… It may remind you of having the sun on your face, or wiggling
your toes, while enjoying the warm, comfortable, sensations on your skin... To
reach this level of relaxation on your own… all you need to do is close your
eyes… Place the number ten on the chalkboard of your mind, and erase that
number…. As you erase a number, you will easily be this relaxed, and quickly
recognize a deepening relaxation possible within you… hypnosis provides you
space, a space to go deeper, and deeper, into yourself… Soon, you’ll be so
relaxed… and so comfortable… we have created a sanctuary here… Any tension,
stress, or distraction simply slips away from you… being at peace means more
than staying within a place without noise… being at peace does not mean there
will be no challenges or hard work… real peace is knowing you're surrounded by
everyday things, and you’re comfortable and relaxed in your heart and mind…
Moving the direction of your attention to the soles of your feet, as your body, and
mind, is relaxed even further… start to follow the soothing, swirling, comfort,
growing in the soles of your feet... And let your thoughts go… feel yourself
relaxing more... a lazy, comfortable, heaviness, moves over you… just like a
favorite blanket, hugging you just before you sleep and dream… Letting go of all
thoughts, all cares, any concerns of the day… bringing yourself into perfect
balance, and you become more free… free to dream… and connect with life…
Following your curiosity… discovering what you like... what you really want…
What works for you here, can become part of living your life each day… (Paused
here for about 6 seconds.)
Now, on the chalkboard in your mind… write the number nine on the
chalkboard… The number nine represents this space and experience… The
number nine is about working on yourself… We all have the responsibility of
208
doing some things for our self… Doing so, improves our success... Doing so,
defines how we mature… and what we get curious about… What you do… and
who you are… benefits those you care about and love… so make sure you are
taking the time to feel the joy in your life… feeling appreciative, and happy is a
form of self-care… Doing this encourages you to recharge… all this joy,
curiosity, and appreciation, benefits those you care about and love… You’ve
been doing much for others, and less to improve and recharge yourself, for far
too long….
As you become perfectly relaxed… more naturally relaxed, than ever
before…Let go of any worry, any idea, that might have prevented you in the past
from just letting go… or taking care of yourself each day… taking time to relax
is self-care… Each and every time, you move through this experience, you relax
your mind and body more deeply….and you go this deep, or even deeper… more
easily, than the time before… You focus on the deeper relaxation of your body
and mind… Focusing on recharging your mind and body… Exploring your
experience, it’s a lot like exploring your own story… your starting on this path of
empowering yourself, and embracing happiness and gratitude… Spend some
time dwelling within the present moment… By doing this, time is not actually
being spent, but held on to, treasured, and released with a greater sense of
appreciation, and gratitude.
Reach out to the chalkboard in your mind, and erase the number nine… As you
erase the number nine, feel the relaxation moving through your body... Allow
your mind to follow the soothing, swirling comfort, rising from the soles of your
feet… And let yourself go… Feel yourself relaxing... as the intuitive part of you
opens your inner eyes… Intuition and curiosity allow us to discover opportunities
and new worlds… opportunities and new worlds may not come into focus with
our everyday eyes... so we change our stories… we change our focus, and
together we will play like we are out to recess… that may make you think of a
jungle gym, your favorite tornado slide, or the swings… and enjoy setting loose
this part of you… this playful part of you knows what is good for you today,
tomorrow, and the rest of your life… how you play is like magic… You create
something out of nothing, and you feel great doing it…
209
What you do here can become how you live your life… Every cell of your body,
it is being conditioned by your emotions and reactions to life... As we play, we
respond to challenges differently… SO ask yourself… How relaxed… how
refreshed… how curious and clear… do you want to discover and emerge
through this hypnotic opportunity today? how you play is like magic… You
create something out of nothing, and you feel great doing it… The number nine
represents this space and experience… This is about working on and with your
experiences of yourself… Upon awakening, you take with you only good
thoughts, perspectives, and creative possibilities… and you feel great doing it…
Your subconscious mind updates and changes the way that you think, act and
respond to everyday… It’s called learning… Learning is done best when you are
relaxed… feeling like you are at play, and recognize that it is alright to make
mistakes, or be creative… unless you change your thinking, you’ll always
recycle your experience… The number nine gives you this space… this
experience… that you are bringing deeply into yourself to play with… No
outside stress, no outside tension, no outside distraction, no outside confusion,
Nothing will cause you harm here… this is a sanctuary for your mind and body…
What you take out of this space, will only be what is good, and right for you…
You will make the right choice, at the right time, and in the right way…
Each time you go into hypnosis with me…it gets easier… you go deeper…
feeling more refreshed… and more confident… All you really need to do is
relax… and dream about a potential future… your best probable future flows into
your mind…It happens so freely, and so easily, that you can observe the
appropriate behaviors, the appropriate attitudes, and the appropriate beliefs that
will help you to accomplish your highest goals today... Your subconscious will
be looking for what works, even when the story is not yours… Someone else
may have struggled to find the answers that you need tomorrow… You’ll have it,
because you’re learning to be the best of yourself, at this moment…
Just let yourself go… further… deeper now… On the chalkboard of your mind
write the number eight… As you write the number eight, recognize the number
eight as a symbol for the journey you’re on today… This journey is connected to
the stories that surround you… and extend out through your life… The events in
the stories, and their experiences, can add to your knowledge and appreciation of
210
similar experiences… open your mind to new ideas, explore the world in new
ways… in this story you don’t have a life, you are life… you are connected to
infinite possibilities… As you begin to ask questions about your thoughts… and
ask questions about the standards you live by… Sometimes we discover
somethings can be better… Sometimes we approach opportunities and challenges
with a fixed mindset… and sometimes we can approach opportunities and
challenges with a perspective focused on growth... As we grow and develop
some things will not stay the same… when a flower doesn’t bloom, your efforts
will focus on fixing the environment in which the flower grows… You don’t
attempt to change the nature of the flower.
And there will always be things in our lives that we have no control over… there
will be elements of our experiences that we have some control over… and there
will always be something you can do to make a difference in the direction you’re
moving... Experience is just another story that we’re telling ourselves, through
our senses, emotions, and thoughts… Recognizing this allows us to take a
moment… take a breath… take into ourselves a question… where do we want to
go on our journey?… Can you imagine where it is, we are heading?... Think
about how we prepare, before we start out to get there… In this space, and on this
journey… You can recognize a point between what is creative, and what is
meaningful for you… Whatever you decide… this is your life… this is your
story… this is about taking the time to make it more meaningful for you… don’t
wait for the bad and stressful times to be over… Start now… Love now… Live
now… Don’t wait for people to give you permission to live, because they
won’t… it’s not their story… it’s not their responsibility… it’s not their life…
During this journey, you are getting familiar with trance time… that means what
matters to you here, can be connected with any other moment… When you are in
the moment… you are focusing in… seconds can be like hours… hours can be
like days… and all, you need to do, is to let go... Bringing the world into
yourself… settle into energy and resonance of my experience… bringing into
you, the sound of my voice… my voice and energy move with you… wherever
you go… Whenever you need it… As you erase the number eight from the
chalkboard in your mind… you go even deeper… deeper into this journey…
deeper into this moment… and bring forward your best self… you can feel the
confirmation that this is happening, it may come from the change in your
211
thoughts, or by the wonderful sensation in your body and mind… whatever it is,
allow it to relax you more… each time you feel this relaxation deepening… you
can imagine a sponge…. slowly taking it all in… down, deep, inside your body,
and down, deep, inside your mind… reaching into the very core of who you
might be… Multiplying these sensations… touching on who you are today…
opening awareness and energies, to all the possibilities you can be… in the very
next moment…
This is your journey… and this time together is meant to center you in this
moment… this voice… this energy… and focus, in… relaxing you deeper, and
deeper, than you have ever gone before… It’s all going with you…. In every
breath… through every beat of your heart… leading you back here… Our
journey is like discovering the layers of an onion… Each number easing a layer
of stress, strain, and confusion away… So that when you're focused on daily
life… You can look at the time and think… this is my favorite time… right now,
you get to be grateful… you get to be happy… right now, is the best moment
there is… allowing yourself to be happy, and at peace, doesn’t have to radical
self-care… this is just one of the natural states you were created to feel…
Relaxation is such a powerful and positive way to recharge your mind… and
refresh your body… relaxation deepens your focus… one momentary layer
stacks on the next… focus now, on the pleasantly deepening, responsive,
sensations, in your body… allow yourself to really feel wonderful…
This is your experience… this is your journey… and at this moment, you’re
taking it all in… The goals you want to achieve aren’t just for you, and you’re
learning all about them... They are part of something more… they are connecting
you to something more… So, you don’t have to ask what the world needs… At
this moment, ask what makes you come alive, and enjoy doing it… What the
world needs, is people who have come alive… We all are telling others our
story… and in every chapter, we are never in the story alone… You are
becoming more aware at the moment… and you can find the resources needed to
reduce any stress, remove confusion… so that upon awakening all of your
knowledge, skills, abilities… all the resources you have, are there to encourage
you to discover… As you make headway on challenges, you’ll smile… You can
be happy… work can feel more like play… this transformation happens in our
stories, and we can work our way forwards… and backward… to best prepare
212
ourselves, to do what brings you to life… so follow your fascinations, explore
what draws you back again and again… Trust it’s a message from yourself... to
begin the story in your heart… and your choices define your character…
On the chalkboard of your mind, write the number seven… The number seven
represents responsiveness on your journey… and your potential to respond to
uncertainty… so just let go... go deep… deep inside... toward your center…
allowing you to be present with me… and enjoying this moment, together… The
number seven represents your ability to be responsive… The number seven
allows you to become aware of how you dissociate from your connection to the
moment and what you feel… In dissociating from your connection… some of
your reaction to the experience does not fully come together for you… you may
have noticed this while being with others… While associating or disassociating
into an experience is not wrong or bad… there are moments that you should ask
yourself, if you are making the right choice... Are you seeking to dull the
intensity of an emotion, or connection to an experience? … Are you yearning to
feel more and strengthen the connection that’s taking place? Think about it….
You’re learning new ways to think, so you can discover new ways to be… On
this journey, the more responsive, and aware, you become… the more relaxed,
confident, and responsive, you can feel, as you progress through the story, here,
together…
Step up to the chalkboard of your mind, and erase the number seven… move the
focus of your attention onto your chest… hold your awareness of chest in your
mind… notice the pleasant relaxation there… follow the rise and fall of your
chest… knowing whatever life throws at you… you’ll be able to handle it…
recognize its okay to take a step back, shift into neutral… and just breathe… If
something unexpected happens, you will have the resources to do what you
know, in your heart, is right for you… You don’t have to remember these
instructions and commands... they’re being practiced here… so they can work for
you… so let them slip out of your mind… When you need them, they will be
there for you… Each and every time you go into trance with me… you’ll
immediately come back to this level of trance, or go even deeper… And all you
really need to do is concentrate on the simple act of breathing… Breathing,
grounds you, breathing allows you to move with the resources at your center… in
213
trance, you’ll train the physical body to reach deeper levels of relaxation for this
journey…
On the chalkboard of your mind, write the number six… As you write the
number six, your mind will begin to consider the constant current of time…
because time develops, matures, advances, and withdraws all things… My voice
will pause, for you to consider time, and continue to go deeper, and deeper, into
relaxation . . . (pause for ten seconds) even as you sense time rushing by… The
deeper you go… the better you feel now, and upon awakening… So, each and
every time you use this technique… you’re going to feel better, and better about
yourself… as your capabilities develop and grow… The number six represents
for you the passage of time… and considering time, as you move through the
world… you’ll begin to consider what really matters to you today, and in the
future… The true currency of life is time, not money, and we’ve all got a limited
allocation of that…
All of us have a biological clock, that clock seeks to align itself with the world...
and match step for step, with the people that matter to you… In this space, you’re
learning to consider every sense and ability you have... Every person can move a
mountain, but every effort begins by imagining what comes next… and then
carrying away a few small stones… Not everything should be rushed… you don’t
have to hurry… you can take pride in doing things quietly, taking each breath,
taking any step, with peace, and a calm spirit… you can choose not to lose your
inner peace for anything… even if the whole world seems part of the storm…
The breaking of a wave doesn’t contain the whole sea… your learning to choose
your focus, you’re learning to find calm within your center…
How fast or slow you progress, isn’t what matters here… time holds opportunity,
so seek to discover what matters most to you at this moment… seek to consider
what you want the future to hold… and allow this moment to encourages us…
encourage us to wonder if there is another way… I want you to become aware of
the state of your body's relaxation… and the clarity of your mind... you are going
to carry this experience and learning into your life... stone by stone if need be…
taking only good things for you to build upon… So, begin to think about where
you would want more relaxation, more confidence, and calm in your day to day
214
life… Think about having the ability to find comfort and at peace with yourself,
anywhere... and anytime…
You’re aware of the pace of time… and this is part of training your awareness…
it’s your choice… you choose how to respond at the moment… Whatever you
need to see, hear, or experience in this space… your subconscious mind will
provide for you… Moving these resources into your life takes practice… one
day, becomes the next… then the next day . . . then the next week . . . and then
next month… time holds challenges and opportunities… with practice, you can
learn to use them as resources… When the days become weeks . . . and the weeks
become months… and the months become years… all are connected by the
passage of time in your story… and at this moment… as I talk with your
subconscious mind… Some people feel a lightness, or a heaviness in their
body… others feel a tingling. . . whatever you are feeling is uniquely yours… No
two people feel the same in their experience of hypnosis . . . so delight in those
wonderful feelings… and just let go… go deeper with each word you hear… Go
even deeper, with the sound of my voice…
Step up to the chalkboard of your mind, and erase the number six from your
mind… Just let it go… feel yourself moving between space, as well as time,
you’ll need to organize your thoughts, consider your attitudes, and unify your
beliefs... it's like working with the information in the library of your mind… This
is your time, so let go… The number six represents for you a resting space, a
place of harmony and balance… Each of us has a natural disposition that we have
conditioned into our expectations… those expectations inform us if we are
feeling sad, neutral, happy, or angry... We have a sense of what to expect from
our body, mind, and spirit, when we wake up in the morning, and when we go to
bed late at night… We all have adopted emotional and energetic defaults that we
expect to be experiencing every day... One consistent desire I’ve found
among people who get this… is the desire to feel more fully and deeply… Our
default emotional and energetic range, are the conditioned set points that we have
settled on subconsciously as we grew up… Every day, we trained our biological
and cognitive resources, to respond as we do to the world…. What if we want to
improve upon those set points today? … How different would you want to
condition yourself to be?
215
We all want to make good choices, but do you have a healthy way to come back
to the best of who you are, after moving through the chaos of each day? … This
knowledge can be the start of a daily practice… and like exercise at the gym…
the activity helps you stay calm, refreshed, and at the top of your game… Each
and every time you experience joy, happiness, and bliss, it allows you to adjust,
or strengthen, a set point… conditioning your resting defaults, is something you
do every day, with your routine patterns of thoughts, focus, and actions… Do you
want to be a little happier? … Do you want to have more energy in your body
and mind? … We each undertake our daily routines in order to answer our
expected needs... Is that predetermined balance point good enough? … The bliss
of a first kiss… the intensity of returned love… and the best orgasm of your life
is not equal states of joy… think about it… it works the same way with sadness,
frustration, loneliness, and anger…
Ask yourself, if it’s healthy for you to stay with this default point… Have you
considered the impact of future relationships on this set point if you don’t
change?... Your subconscious mind is picking up on the cues that your conscious
mind is missing... At times the conscious and subconscious can get fixated on
something new, interesting, and shiny… Our actions, just like our thoughts, are at
times contradictory… We can correct and refine our thoughts and actions by
working through them…and working with what we focus on… In discovering
what is right for you… allow your subconscious mind to turn up the energy on a
set point… and turn up the joy from that old default state… Step into this… and
really feel what is different…. Notice the subtle ways your body moves
differently… Imagine interacting with others in better ways… in challenging
ways… and recognize how you approach work differently… How you move
through the world differently…. Imagine how you would interact with a friend,
with a lover… how you would have sex differently … Take all the time you
need, to explore this with your subconscious… Do that now…. (I remain quiet
for about a minute.)
Soon you will be thinking back over all the changes you made... Changes that
were instant, and progressive, throughout your life… Learning new ways of
doing, thinking, and experiencing the world… it’s a process that engages the
whole self… this can change your story for the better… I have had people tell
me, that in these moments, they have never felt more alive… This work lights us
216
up from the inside out… Your subconscious mind can continue this work while
you’re busy doing other things…. You can try out new behaviors even while you
sleep and dream… Everyone begins by seeking the resources that are most
helpful to them… and they discover how to be calm and aware when times are
stressful… you have the resources and skills to adjust your set points… as you
come to realize it… people may say you have a glow… When you move through
tense situations, uncertain situations, and happy ones… You’ll glow from the
inside out… We live inside our minds every day... be certain that living within
that space is a nice place to be.
Step up to the chalkboard of your mind, and write the number five... The number
five represents for you, connection and community… We all want what we do to
matter… We want a life that is meaningful to more than just ourselves… You
have a desire to communicate… you have a desire to be understood… you have a
desire to develop and grow… You have a desire to be part of something more
than yourself… and have what you contribute to with your time, energy,
attention, and presence, be recognized for making it even just a little bit better…
That’s why you are here… No one is alone… when seeking where you fit… you
have to develop yourself to fully contribute… this is where the story always takes
us… you’re on the journey to becoming more, and unbecome everything that
isn’t you…
You begin in your own way, to understand change… change is built into all of
us… the future you is watching the present you, through your shared memories…
this meaningfully matters to us… and others… because of our experiences with
the world, and each other, it’s all relational… How you treat others matter to you,
and influences how you will be treated yourself…. Our time together… can help
you discover connections that matter, encourage you to develop your skills, and
expand upon your talents… So, take your time and discover connections here…
this experience is meant to encourage you… This moment is meant to challenge
your passions… this moment is meant to further inspire you with new ideas…
because these connections open up opportunities to explore this world together…
Your just one decision away from a totally different life… No one is dreaming
about experiencing the world in complete isolation… All of us want to relate and
share… We are here to find the right people… As you interact with people your
217
learning new things… as you learn new things, there will always be experiences
that teach you how to live, and deal with change… Think about what you
enjoy… think about what you do well, and what encourages you…. There are
smiles, laughter, conversation, and connection out there… as people share
encouragement, and adventure… we are working together each and every day…
Some people are easy to be with… some people can make you miss them before
they’re gone… and others can make you want to step away…
Now, step up, and erase the number five from the chalkboard of your mind…
The number disappears from your mind, and you feel this relaxation, and
experience this encouragement moving through you… The more responsive you
are... the better you can feel… the better you feel… the more responsive you
become… and any fear, any anxiety, any stress will slip away... Allowing you to
live life more completely, and engage with more a responsive happiness…
Making you smile for no reason at all… smile, because it feels good… smile,
because this experience encourages the best of who you are… Each time that
you practice the ten to one induction with me, or on your own… you will find
yourself smiling just because it feels good… just because this is what I want for
you… begin to notice the smiles on the faces of the people around you… You’ll
know, that your smile, and those good feelings… are radiating out to others…
sharing this simple pleasure feels good, doesn’t it? … Perfect…
Now, step up to the chalkboard of your mind, and write the number four… The
number four represents what you communicate to yourself and others… It gets
easier to talk with people when you feel good… and people find you
approachable and interesting… because you make them feel good… You notice
their strengths and they begin to encourage yours… Every day, you practice
these skills… it gets easier… Making people smile, with your smile… becomes
playful and passionate… You represent the change you create in the world every
day…
Every night, and each day… your subconscious works in the background… as
you drift off to sleep… as you focus deeply… your subconscious works in the
background… no matter what you are doing… your subconscious works by
thinking through what you’re focusing on, again and again… and so you always
sit in the presence of the self… feel the universe moving around you... and with
218
the power of your subconscious… you make all the adjustments automatically,
that are right for you… from the moment your awakening in the morning… the
moment you realize you can be happy during the day… you recognize what it is
you control… feel the confidence grow… and your shoulders will roll back, your
chin shifts upward… and you’ll smile… if you are persistent, you’ll get it… if
you are consistent you’ll make it part of you…
You can feel extremely good… because when you do, it helps you learn… You
can feel extremely good, because it empowers you to be creative and flexible….
You can feel wonderful, because you are biologically designed to know bliss…
to know love… to experience pleasure… and no other reason is needed to move
through the world feeling wonderful… feeling good, makes you physically
stronger… feeling good, enhances your awareness, and you become more alert…
You can feel extremely good, because doing so engages you in the moment…
feeling good, you’ll be optimistic and balanced… people will want to be around
you in good times and bad… Being happy doesn't mean that everything is
perfect… It means that for that moment… you can be in the moment, and look
past everything that is not how you'd like it… And still find joy, appreciating
what is right, there… This makes you someone people want to be around… and
understanding this, allows you to share something important…
Now, step up, and erase the number four from the chalkboard of your mind… As
you erase the number, feel your body sinking ever deeper, deeper, deeper, and
deeper… than ever before… Your muscles ease, and your skin softens… taking
you deeper down, than ever before… Spending time talking, loving, and making
memories with those that matter… Each one of us… throughout every moment
of life… is creating invisible connections with every action, and word uttered…
you are creating invisible vibrations all around you… and you create a social
atmosphere that everyone takes a breath from… Most relationships do not wither
and die from natural causes… They are cut down by selfishness, neglect, lack of
consideration, lies, and all that hurts…
You teach people how to treat you by what you allow, what you stop, and what
you encourage… When a person begins to live their life in a way that’s closer to
their natural path… they feel drawn forward… They’ll start to sense a deeper
connection with others, and as a result, they feel happier… Feeling happier
219
allows you to relax… go deeper… and become more intuitively led… to allow
yourself to reimagine your best potential… it’s like checking out a new hat you
can wear each day… How you make others feel about themselves…
communicates a lot about you… We’re all born for joy, happiness, love,
curiosity, and acceptance… And when you find someone that radiates this… you
naturally are drawn out, and you crave their company… this is what you deserve
to be… this is what you deserve to feel… this is something that shows me, just
how well you fit with me… I love that responsiveness…
Now, step up to the chalkboard of your mind, and write the number three… The
number three represents the ability to get this, and make it yours… It’s time to
write some things down… get out your thoughts… think about it… You’re going
to cross your T’S and dot your I's… taking the necessary steps to do what
matters… As you do what matters, you feel pleasure… feeling pleasure in your
body and your mind… you get motivated… And when you change the way you
look at things… the things you look at change… getting it down in ideas, words,
drawings, and pictures… thinking through the understandings and experiences
brings you pleasure… engaging the world with pleasure reaches into the deepest
parts of you… As you describe what’s important… allow this gratitude… to be
the start of what you might explore… use all your senses to bring the best details
into focus… this is what we do here…
You’re going to accomplish goals by planning, so hold the details in your focus,
consciously and unconsciously it comes together… all the time moving you
closer to what you’re holding in your awareness and heart… What do you want
to focus on? Where is your energy and attention best applied? Allow your mind
to bring up ideas and insights… ask your subconscious mind to construct
multiple paths to your goals… allow your mind to challenge what you thought
possible… Ask yourself if you have the time you need to get it all done… your
mind knows how to keep bringing things into focus… the ideal result of every
situation needs to come into focus... Use your mind’s eyes to see clearly and get
down what is important… allow your focus to flow and refocus when needed.
Allow yourself to dream, and you can explore what’s needed… so go on a
journey and choose something that brings you alive today… step into each
adventurous scenario… and discover what’s important on each possible
220
journey… think about the goals… and focus in, explore what your subconscious
has brought you… In a moment, I am going to ask your subconscious mind to
bring up an adventure for you to step into… I want you to feel pleasure in your
mind and body as it does so… Ask your subconscious to give you an adventure
that you are ready for today… test this out, and step into that an imagined
scene… and discover what’s important here for you… move through this scene
several times to perfect your observations and actions…. Some people are shown
whole movies, others scenes like pictures, and others begin talking with their
deeper mind…move through this scene several times so that they become
adaptable and have fun… take all the time you need to do this, within the next
minute or so… Do this now….
(I wait for one minute allowing my subject to process this.)
Your focus is no longer drawn back into the past… your focus is drawn to
potential futures… A future that you can feel pleasure in your body and mind,
imagining what’s possible…. Discover the stories you are part of… get them
down… write them out, draw them, visualize them, and think about them… the
pictures in your mind are getting brighter and brilliant… your mind is filled with
possibility and vitality… When your favorite music plays in the background from
time to time, you’ll feel pleasure in your body and mind… you’ll get thirsty for
this experience… thirsty for these moments of clarity… Each time going deeper
than the time before… you’ll feel yourself letting go… Pleasure, because you
feel better perfecting your thoughts… Pleasure, because you feel amazing
learning these skills… This is the story of your journey… you feel yourself going
deeper and deeper into this…
Now, step up to the chalkboard of your mind, and write the number two… The
number two represents for you, the ability to just let go… let go of the moment…
let go of the ego… let go of judgment… let go of identity… allow yourself the
opportunity to truly just be… let go of the bonds that hold you back… Feeling
your body completely relaxed… as you move through the day, you interact with
others using different parts of yourself… each person you connect with has a
thread of energy linking them to you… this thread stays attached until the
connection is broken… Each and every day, we break off and strengthen some of
these connections… imagine what it would be like to see all the connections…
221
look at your arm, your hands, your whole body… look at the threads of
connections that are attached to you… notice if there is a few here and there, or if
you see bundles of them in places… recognize that each of those connections
takes some energy, focus, and attention… some a lot, and some just a little…
follow those connective threads out from your body to a stranger you bumped in,
to your family member, your friends…follow them, over and over… bring your
attention to the glow around your body… Bringing together all that has brought
pleasure to your body and mind… become aware of your own light and color…
it’s just another expression of who you are in this moment.
Together, we are going to let go of some of the connective burdens… you’re
going to cut these strings… It will be your choice to keep the connections that
remain… this is your choice… to be lighter and less burdened with diminishing
energy… As your awareness settles back onto the relaxation in your body now…
follow the relaxing pleasure that surrounds you… watch it become more
visible… this glow softly drifts up, around you… and above your skin, showing
you, your light… build up that light… intensify the colors present… as you do
this, the sound of scissors clipping rapidly begins…. One by one, those
burdensome aka cords of connection fall away… hear the sound of scissors, as a
gentle wind moves around you… faster and faster, the scissors move… notice a
difference as they do… these karmic scissors become an invisible whirlwind…
Snip, snip, snip… the scissors move, cutting away what is no longer right for
you… the scissors move, cutting away what was never your burden to carry
forward… and you feel lighter and better… feeling the energy move back
through you… even just a little bit at first… noticing your color brighten…
taking all the time necessary now… I want you to touch that brightening color of
energy… See what that does… watch the colors, feel the sensations they
inspire… as the scissors move around you… working with the deepest parts of
you… removing the aka cords that you don’t need to carry forward…. Getting
you clear and strengthening your flow and focus… if you change your mind,
reaching out to someone will attach them again… so let yourself be free… just
let go… I am going to be quiet as this happens… Clearing away those aka cords
now…
(I wait about a minute watching her.)
222
Your ability to communicate with yourself, is just as important as how you
communicate with others... Your ability to communicate with yourself, is just as
important as how you communicate with others... The more you're capable of
communicating with yourself, the more capable you will be when
communicating with others. The more you're capable of communicating with
yourself, the more capable you will be when communicating with others. Each
and every time you do this, you’ll find your head and heart clearing… feeling
better than before… The connections you choose to keep… come into focus and
become more intentional… Each time you give your attention, time, and energy,
you’ll be establishing their aka connection again… As you do, enjoy
meaningfully maintaining these connections…
This moment is for you… So just let go… allow yourself the release, and just
be… give yourself over to the relational dynamic you desire, and agreed to…
when you truly want to lose yourself in the moment… relax labels… relax
attitudes, relax thoughts… right out of your mind… give yourself a moment of
peace… none of us controls everything… sometimes, the moment you give up
control, you know what to do, even without even thinking about it… let it all
go… allow me, to take on all the effort needed to do this… when you really, and
truly, want me to take care of all this… you just need to relax… let it all go…
your being guided, taken to where you need to be… There is an invitation to
more here… (I notice the eyes of my subject move back and forth quickly. I
pause for a moment here.)
So, with all of your mind, body, and heart… let it all go… surrender in the
moment… open up, sincerely… you really want to explore where this goes…
you just might get, what you really wanted all along… In this moment you are
fully present… letting go, you begin recognizing how tightly you were hanging
on… go beyond what you thought life is supposed to be like… letting go is
celebrating what is… you get to create a life that matters for you… release
control appropriately, it’s about being balanced within ourselves… as one
moment moves to the next… and your burdens are not shouldered alone… soon
you will recognize that absolute control is an illusion… no one surfs a wave by
telling the oceans what to do… think about it… and let go…
223
You can kickass at your job, and your life, and still have someone to let it all go
with… letting it all go is living in the moment… let go of judgmental, and
contradicting rules, let go of judgmental, and contradicting people… let go of
how you should be… let go of what you should do… when you relax control,
your pleasure is built up with your strengths… you leave behind judgment… as
you respond to my control, feel pleasure… when you feel pleasure, let it all go,
and discover who you are… discover what you want to do, and feel… give up
your controlling and discover who you might be… flow with the moment… flow
with the energy… it’s alright with me… so let go… and form the habit of
removing stress from your life, and relaxing confusion… this will be as natural
for you as your heartbeat... as normal for you as breathing... and all you really
need to do is let go…
Now, step up to the chalkboard of your mind and write the number one… The
number one represents for you the power of stories… we all use stories to explain
ourselves… to understand how we fit into the world… and to describe what we
mean to one another… we share stories to express and explore how we feel about
things… we share stories to build upon our focus… (I pause a few seconds here)
some people think that the world is entirely made up of DNA, matter, and
antimatter…. I’m here to tell you it’s not... it’s so much more than that… because
in your heart and mind there are stories… You are more than what happened to
you… You are the person you chose to become… you carry this story from this
moment… Let go, and discover who you might be…
Right now, billions of constellations of neurons, are working together to generate
an experience of awareness for you... All your conscious energy and attention is
drawn to the elements you’ve shown it are important… but there’s another part
of you… a part that seeks out these stories that your habitually drawn too... and
so much that you don’t think too much about… life can be a repeated series of
standing up to sit somewhere else… you can BE the stillness within a world
that’s constantly in motion… you focus and contain the interplay of information
and energy within you... so move with this voice, and step toward this inner
direction… there’s a secret to stories… even those that have been contained in
books… it's a secret that almost everyone misses… because as you take in a
story, you have to stop at each question, and ask yourself, are you asking the
224
most important question you've ever asked yourself… and when you do, you let
go to receive the best answer for today…
When you get that… you approach the secret that everyone has missed… you
can’t just read or listen to a story… you have to experience it fully, and deeply,
on all levels… Then the magic happens… so step up to the chalkboard of your
mind... step up, and erase the number one… relaxing that number from your
body and mind... Relaxing into learning about yourself… Each and every day,
your mind works hard at delivering a seemingly consistent perspective from the
world… expressing who you are…. And who you could be… because that’s how
you relate to others… that’s the story you’re living in the daily world… Each and
every day, details and perspectives transform into contextual stories around us...
There’s another secret… each of us, moves forward more than one story… Each
of us has stories to tell… each of us has a perspective to understand our life, our
actions, and the details we encounter…
As you let go… you’ll move with me across multiple perspectives and stories…
you’ll bring back the best of what inspires you… you’ll bring back the best of
what really matters to you in life… after all, you are the reason… you are moving
towards the center, where expressions of identity, action, and awareness all come
together… the person most capable of disturbing your peace is a teacher…
reminding you that you are not truly at peace… and enlightenment comes from
trust…. so just let go… and transcend the upset… those in your life who can
push your buttons are your teachers… they come disguised, wearing masks of
context… thoughtless, frustrating, and apathetic… despite them, you hold the
frame of perspective… you’ve become aware of the teaching and the stories…
When you let go… you are free to eliminate everything that is not you, each
day… my voice goes with you... aware, at your center, we all seek harmony...
when you reach for this memory… my voice goes with you... when you reach for
this feeling… my voice goes with you... its right there… when you need this...
how wonderful it is, to be silent with someone.… become aware of the masters…
become aware of the teachers… look for me in everyone… everyone can remind
you that there’s still work to do…. These interactions point you towards the
center… and can wake you up… inspiring you to be the best you can be… now,
step up to the chalkboard of your mind, and write the number zero… I want you
225
to imagine that you rest in the center point of that zero… That you could literally
step through the chalkboard of your mind… and there’s a doorway here…
A doorway that allows you to perceive life and the many stories you encounter
from multiple perspectives… You are within the center of the circle… this is the
ultimate point of stillness and expression on your journey today… you are at the
center of it all… you are developing a place of balance… you focus the energies
and information that flows through here… in any moment, you can choose a
different story…. you can adapt your perspective… you respond to the currents
of energy and attention around you… this space is here for you to become
more…be yourself… and recharge you… at your center, you encourage your best
self… bringing alive here what makes you feel more alive… right now, look
above you, what is there… right now, look below you, what is there… reach out
with your hands and feel what’s around you…. breath deep, feel your energy
within you…you are developing out from the center… bringing only the best
with you now…
When you are here, you can feel yourself letting go… this is your center point…
a natural place for you…. A place we might come to build up together… really
experience this place as you sense with your hands, sense with your feet…
building up the energies that recharge you… and make you feel great… bringing
with you only the best thoughts, actions, and intentions to integrate into your
life… bring all that energy into you and see what happens…. when you hear my
voice, it will inspire your best self... when you hear my voice... it will make you
relaxed, and more comfortable to be yourself... take a moment… and intensify
the best of all that you can be… this space is at the core of who you are… and
from the center, you’ll bring this back into the world today… hold onto all of that
now…it’s time to prepare…
(I pause approximately 20 seconds)
Perfect… coming back to me now... each time that you use the ten to one with
me, or on your own... you will go deeper… each time, you engage in hypnosis
with me, it will happen more quickly than before… You will feel good knowing
that my voice will go with you… now, I want you to feel the weight of your
body. One, I want you to feel great, as my voice resonates within you. Two, I
want you to notice the sounds around us, as you feel the urge to move and shift
226
your body here and there. Three, you’ll feel wonderful and ready, just like you
had a restful sleep. Four, your mind is active and you experience more joy in
every moment. Five, your eyes open and your feeling wonderful. Smiling now…
Wide awake. How did that feel?”
I did this induction in City Park in New Orleans, with a subject that I met at a
yoga class. I call this session “Pointing to Center.” Doorways are something we
encounter everywhere, and getting to the center, or centering, will always remind
the subject of doing this. The symbol I describe here is the circumpunct which
you will find below. The circumpunct is where I begin to design a conditioning
space with the subject.
The symbol of the circumpunct is an ancient depiction that signifies the truth of
our perspective and reality. There are many ways to use and interpret
circumpunct. If you concentrate on the circumpunct, you can visualize your spirit
as the dot which is balanced within the world that we live. The circle can also
represent the universe and the dot within is the world in which we live. Within
the circle, there’s wide open space in which we all use to co-create reality. While
most people see the dot as our center, it’s also a sanctuary that we can retreat into
when things in life get chaotic. For those enjoying the idea of starting a new life,
erasing memories of our problems, or limiting capacity to access memories this
symbol is a perfect metaphor. In a sense, the circumpunct represents the
evolution of our souls to become truly awakened. This is about unbecoming
everything that is not you and awakening even if that means you’ll find yourself
uncertain, and at times ignorant. This transcript is written in such a way that
captures my rhythm and pauses. I’m cognizant that it might drive someone
obsessed with grammatic punctuation crazy, but this is how many inductions are
formatted.
Next, I’ll present you with a no-frills version of the Ten to One Induction. I will
be including fractionation with commands for the subject’s eyes to open and
227
close to intensify the hypnotic experience. Again, look for the similarities
between my method and form with what you are practicing.
“Close your eyes, and listen to my voice... Keeping your physical eyes closed, I
want you to imagine opening your inner eyes… Listen to me, and focus on the
most relaxed part of your body… As you listen to me, and hold onto those
sensations, allow them to flow from the most relaxed parts of you now… I want
you to focus on my voice… focus on these relaxing sensations… Together, we
will be relaxing your mind… together, we will be relaxing your body… As you
listen to the sound of my voice… and you’ll find the rhythm takes you to a
deeper comfort… like climbing into bed with freshly washed sheets, just makes
you happy… memories of comfort, and times of happiness begin to appear
before your inner eyes… increasing these feelings of comfort and relaxation…
notice how they move and expand within you…
I’d like you to imagine stepping up to a blackboard in your mind… This
blackboard, it’s just like the one your teacher wrote on to teach you letters, and
numbers so long ago… I want you to reach out, pick up the chalk, and write the
number 10 on the blackboard… Ten, tens, make one hundred... just as numbers
can multiply their effect… each number you experience multiplies your depth of
hypnosis now… Observe the feelings of relaxation in your body and mind… In a
moment, I’m going to have you open your eyes and look at me… As you open
your eyes, focus on the deepening feeling in your body…. the growing relaxation
comforts your body and mind…. Now open your eyes and look at me…. hold
onto those wonderful feelings… they mingle with excitement, that’s it… you
can’t help but smile… (I incorporated the subject’s smile as soon as it happened.)
Now, close your physical eyes… and go ten times as deep…. ten times as
deep…. (I pause for 3 seconds.)
Open your eyes and look at me… feel these wonderful feelings moving through
your body and mind… every time you write a number on the board… I will have
you open your eyes, and look at me…. Look in my eyes… feeling only
wonderful feelings… look at me, thinking only wonderful thoughts… Close your
eyes, and go ten times as deep, now… ten times as deep… (I pause for 5
seconds.) I want you to reach out to the chalkboard in your mind, and erase the
number ten… erase the number ten, from your body and mind… all thoughts, all
228
strain is erased further with my voice... Open your eyes and look at me… Pay
attention to how good you feel… hold onto this comfort and confidence… Look
deeply into my eyes, feeling wonderful… Now close your eyes, going deeper….
going deeper, and deeper… into this perfectly pleasant, hypnotic state…
Step close to the blackboard in your mind, and write the number nine… Once
you have the number nine written, open your eyes and look at me…. Listen
close, take my words, and my voice into you… taking it in deeply, and make it
yours… now, close your eyes, and go deep… go deeper… feel the relaxing
power moving through your body and mind…. ten times as deep…. ten times
deeper into this sensation…. Open your eyes…. look at me… that’s it… that’s
right… You are doing so good… feeling wonderful… encouraging the best parts
of you…. Close your eyes, and go deeper… deeper into your mind and body…
deeper into this voice… deeper into my eyes…. deeper than ever before. (I pause
for 5 seconds.) Step to the chalkboard in your mind, and erase the number 9…
erase the number 9, and feel all distractions melting away… going deeper into
yourself… my voice moves with you…. open your eyes and look at me... Open
your eyes and smile... It feels good… people love to learn about hypnosis,
because it feels so good to align their body and mind… So, close your eyes… go
deeper, with your body and mind… Our work here together, aligns body, mind,
and spirit… allowing us to train with purpose, and strengthen your focus…
Step up to the blackboard in your mind, and write the number eight… As you
write the number… open your eyes and look at me…. each and every time you
do this it gets easier… each and every time, you go deeper…. And each and
every time, this gets better, faster…. close your eyes, bringing the strongest
feelings of relaxation and comfort with you… while your body and mind move
deeper, deeper into your subconscious resources… deeper into the creative
energy that allows you to express who you are… (I pause for 5 seconds.) Step to
the chalkboard in your mind, and erase the number 8… erase the number 8, and
think about all the creative things you enjoy doing... Think about the calm,
confident energy you feel, as it settles deeply within your center… bringing you
closer to center… with this wonderfully imaginative potential…. moving you
deeper into the center of your best self…. (I pause for 8 seconds.)
229
Step close to the blackboard in your mind, and write the number seven... As you
write the number seven, open your eyes and look at me…. each and every time
you do this, it gets easier… each and every time you do this, you go this deep...
or even deeper…. look into my eyes, and think of a time someone inspired you…
think about how you feel… think about what you are inspired to do… close your
eyes, and go deeper, moving into your center… go deeper into the center of all
you can be… each and every time you do this… you’ll find yourself going
deeper, deeper than ever before... Think about one of the most important things
for you, and open your eyes… look at me, and appreciate how that important
thing makes you feel… bringing your appreciation and joy into your center…
what you do here can have a positive influence in your life, and on what’s
important to you… aligning your center with your creativity, and inspiration…
because there’s a difference between simply breathing and being alive. …. (I
pause for 5 seconds.)
Step to the chalkboard in your mind, and erase the number 7… erase the number
7 from your mind and body… practicing this skill, allows you to center yourself
more easily … Open your eyes and look at me… practicing this skill with me,
because the greatest gift you can share, is developing this responsive potential...
When you do what you do best, you are helping more than yourself… you're
making the world a little bit better… so bring that desire with you… into your
center, and into your life… Practice these skills, and thirst to explore parts of you
that seek expression…. Close eyes, and give yourself the permission to
discover…. go deeper, and deeper, into what this means for you… (I pause for 5
seconds.)
Step up to the blackboard in your mind, and write the number six... As you write
the number six, open your eyes and look at me…. Ask yourself if this is as good
as you can feel today… ask yourself, when was the last time you felt this good…
to feel this good, and even better, it’s a connection to your best self… and that’s
not about becoming a new person, just becoming the person you were meant to
be, and already are… and you’re learning how to do it... So, close your eyes, and
bring greater joy into your center… go deeper and deeper… bringing in all the
happiness you can hold onto, right now… (I pause for 10 seconds.) Open your
eyes, and look at me… Ask yourself, is this is as good as you can feel
today…when you feel really good, that’s when an adventure begins, try new
230
things…. and discover new ways to do things… close your eyes, and begin
integrating new and potential adventures, into what really matters… Close your
eyes, and give yourself the permission to discover more…. going deeper, and
deeper, into what this means for you… (I pause for 6 seconds.)
Step close to the blackboard in your mind, and write the number five… As you
write the number five, open your eyes and look at me… Ask yourself, what you
really want…. Ask yourself, what you can enjoy today… Ask yourself, what
would make you feel wonderfully happy and alive… Close your eyes, and you
practice what matters, it’s all part of the development… getting you to the next
discovery of yourself… moving towards center…. Getting thirsty, possible
actions, and talents that can win the day…. encouraging you… make me proud…
open your eyes… look at me, feeling wonderful… bringing this energy and
connection into everything you do… adding this wonder to your center… so go
deeper… deeper… notice how good you can feel… like this… and close eyes,
and give yourself the permission to let go…discover more…. go deeper… and
feel free… deeper, into what this means for you… (I pause for 8 seconds.)
Step up to the blackboard in your mind, and write the number four… As you
write the number four, open your eyes and look at me… The number 4 allows
you to listen deeply… listening, as my voice goes with you… listening can bring
you back here in those quiet moments… close your eyes… as you listen, you’re
learning what makes you stronger, better, and what really matters to you… so
just be… bringing good feelings into your heart and mind… don’t let intrusive
thoughts settle in… You are the kind and gracious host, so leave them be... and
allow them to go with no more of your energy or attention… bring the best
feeling of relaxation, happiness, and wonder that you can be inspired to today…
When you have it, open your eyes and look at me…
Enjoy this moment… Embrace what you don’t know… because what you don’t
know, can become your greatest asset… It ensures you’ll be doing things
different from everybody else… you may find, what makes you happy, is
picturing your warm yellow light, and you pour over everyone and everything
that you love… so hold onto that wonderful glow… listening deeply, to parts of
you that usually only whisper… listen, as they speak… as this center holds onto
all that is you… holds onto everything that matters… let everything else go….
231
close your eyes…. go deeper… thirstier, and deeper still… Step to the
chalkboard in your mind, and erase the number 4… erase the number 4, from
your mind… practicing this hypnotic skill allows you to center yourself more
quickly, when things get stressful… bringing in more pleasure… as you feel
better and better…
Step close up to the blackboard in your mind, and write the number three… As
you write the number three, open your eyes and look at me… See with new
eyes… look, as if seeing for the first time… taking in colors, shapes, and depth…
take in how good this feels… Close your eyes, and go deeply inside… think of
times when you looked out with wonder and curiosity…. think about looking at
the world with new eyes… open your eyes, and look at me with excitement and
wonder…. Feeling so good, doesn’t it? … close your eyes, and good deeper… be
present at your center… present, at your sanctuary… bring in your best self,
bring in your best memories, and develop this space… (I pause for 6 seconds.)
Step to the chalkboard in your mind, and erase the number 3… erase the number
3 from your mind and body… practicing this hypnotic skill, allows you to
instantly center yourself, and respond even more powerfully…
Step up to the blackboard in your mind, and write the number two… As you
write the number two, open your eyes and look at me… The best way to know
yourself is to know others…. keeping your mind and heart open … close your
eyes, and go deeper… deeper than you have ever gone before… feeling better
than you’ve ever felt before… this is your moment… open your eyes and look at
me… each and every time you do this, you’ll go this deep, or even deeper… (I
pause for 5 seconds.) Perfect, now, step to the chalkboard in your mind, and erase
the number 2… erase the number 2 from your mind and body… practicing this
skill allows you to instantly center yourself, and respond even more powerfully…
Step close to the blackboard in your mind, and write the number one… As you
write the number one, open your eyes and look at me… this is your moment to
go inside, building all this wonderful energy, all these positive thoughts, all the
pleasing emotions… all this, is yours to express and adapt… this is how you
know, this is for you… that you fit… Now, close your eyes, feeling good…
feeling wonderful… conditioning you, build up the best of who you are today…
232
In a moment, I’m going to count to five… Once I get to five, you will be
refreshed, wide awake, alert, and feeling great….
One… all instructions and commands that have a positive impact on your life
stay with you… Two… you can center yourself in moments of silence… you
can center yourself in moments of chaos… this center is within you… Three….
You’re grounded, and more aware… become present, tune into this energy….
and with this voice, you’ll settle into your center…. Four… your awareness is
expanding out, and you're feeling great, your heart beat faster… Taking a deeper
breath and feeling amazing… like coming out of a dream… five. Alert, aware,
and recharged. Open your eyes. How do you feel?”
You can see in the transcript that I am layering hypnotic instructions and offering
a few hypnotic suggestions from an indirect or Ericksonian induction style. The
structure of both inductions in this chapter was the same, but the goals leading to
the commands were different. The difference in goals changed the tone and
contexts I utilized. You can find many of the same commands in both of these
versions. The Ten to One Induction is easy to use, adapt, and combine with other
styles of inductions or exercises. Make it yours!
Point Fixation Induction
The Point Fixation Induction is the hypnotic storyteller’s bread and butter. This is
a method that has been used for centuries in a variety of rituals, performance arts,
and meditation practices. Fixating another person’s attention on a single point or
one element is used in sales, presentations, sermons, lectures, and stories
everywhere. In this method, what is directly held in attention and what is
happening just outside of the subject’s conscious attention is a stylish interplay
that makes this a flexible and efficient induction. This induction can be used
conversationally or in a formal hypnotic setting. Variations on the Point Fixation
Induction can be used to encourage interaction with a subject and transition a
conversation into a trance, or a trance into a hypnotic experience. In the transcript
below I’m engaging a woman in a coffee shop that began out of a shared interest
in meditation and yoga. As you read this transcript look for the conversational
softeners, story elements used to engage with the subject, and ask yourself if you
would do anything differently in applying your skills to achieve the stated goals.
233
“Within each of us is silence. This silence, is the same blanketing phenomena
connecting together the whole universe. When we become aware of our self in
silence, I think, we can also become aware of the silence we are part of… I think
that as we experience silence, we can become aware of the silence within us.
well, that’s when we begin to get in touch with all that we really are… We are
not spirits that simply abide, but patterns that perpetuate themselves as we
interact with the world. Think about how you’re more aware, when you slow
down, be in the moment. You’ll have the bigger picture coming into focus, you
know?”
Subject: “What do you mean bigger picture? I’m still trying to understand what I
think I know.”
“Everything is both information and energy... This is no different than
understanding that light is both a particle and a wave… We all have limits on
what we know, and what we can become aware of in every moment… It's in
these moments, where we practice mindfulness, and trance, that more of our
mind fully participates in our experience. Even the concept of nothing needs to
be made tangible to be understood.”
Subject: “Can you give me an example?”
“Well, we can be mindful, and become aware of attuning our mindset, wherever
we are… Practicing a flexible mindset always improves our ability to focus and
flow… and it enhances how we learn and solve problems… For centuries
Masters taught centering oneself to get beyond impulsivity.”
Subject: “That makes sense. I feel better, more grounded, after yoga and
meditation… But you're doing trance or hypnosis. What’s different?”
“You got a couple of minutes to explore the topic? If you’re not interested it’s
okay.”
Subject: “Yeah. I want to know. I told you I love to meditate and if trance and
hypnosis is like that, I want to try it.
“Okay, wanna try an exercise that will show you how similar they are?”
Subject: Sure.
234
“You already know what the yoga class meditation is like. That is typically a
light trance experience for most people.”
Subject: “What’s the difference between state and experience?”
“A state is a congruent experience. So, you can be utterly happy, completely sad,
or confused. Your experience is attuned to that experience. I use the word
experience because you may not have the words yet to completely describe how
you think and feel. That make sense?”
“Subject: “Yes it does.”
“If you are open to it, I can share with you a two-minute exercise that will allow
you to increase your awareness during any meditation today. This works because
your skill improves with guided instruction and feedback. You can move into a
deeper state of relaxation by having someone guide you. Would that be of value
to you?”
Subject: “Umm. Sure, but what do we do?”
“Can you follow along and be open to the experience?”
Subject: “Yes. As long as it's not embarrassing.”
“It’s just going to be a focus on the awareness of the moment. I’m not going to
touch you… (I gesture around us) if anyone looks at us, they will just see us
talking. If that’s okay, I’d like you to comfortably settle yourself on the bench.”
(The subject pulls down her shirt a bit toward her lap and nods.)
Subject: “Okay, now what do we do?”
“I’d like you to become aware of the quality of air surrounding you… I’d like
you to roll your head back and forth along your shoulders… just for a moment.
That’s right, and relax your neck muscles… relax your mind, as you notice the
silence that is present here... even among the instances of noise... like a stone
making ripples in a pond… As you move your head… allow your neck to find
the perfect balance… listening to the silence… even between the words… the
perfect balance … as your head aligns your spine… your head and your eyes
235
begin to align, orienting straight ahead… Good, now, keeping your head and
your eyes looking perfectly aligned, look straight ahead of you… I want you to
keep your head right there… right there in alignment…begin to breath slow, and
deep now… Perfect, and only moving your eyes now… move them to look up at
the price tag on that wall… hold onto the comforting silence around you…
letting everything else fall away… As I talk with you, you’ll recognize that your
body relaxes into that silence… and your eyes are beginning to blink… not
moving your head… not moving your eyes… letting your attention simply notice
silence, as your eyes want to close… your eyes struggling to stay open… as your
inner sight begins to become clearer…
Allow them to stay closed now… just allow yourself to focus on that wonderful
feeling of peace in meditation… just allow this silence to bring you comfort and
pleasure… your mind and body learn to communicate more effectively in this
state… this natural relaxation is spreading through your body and mind… enjoy
this feeling of inner silence, comfort, and relaxation… think about what it means
to be light, to be happy, to be free… We all need to engage in self-care… so
relax, more and more… becoming aware of the silence that is part of you…
reaching it in my voice… in the silence there’s calm… in this silence, there’s the
opportunity to remove anything, that is no longer you… and you can grow…
putting your best self forward, each and every way… think about this… taking
with you an experience that could become deeper… that can boost how you think
and live… Look for the best feeling in your body right now… hold onto that… I
want you to pay attention to it… I’m going to have you focus back on me… 5,
taking a deep breath, 4 listening to the birds overhead, 3 bringing only wonderful
thoughts forward, 2, feeling good, 1, Now, I want you to open your eyes and look
at me. How did that feel?”
At this point, I debrief the subject and continue to share insights and
encouragement. I am a coffee shop philosopher as it is the interactions with
people that allow me to practice my artful influence attempts easily in that
environment. Sharing what I am practicing with trance and hypnosis often gets
others curious. That curiosity and instant presentation can be used as a starting
point for discovery together. You could do what I just presented in the transcript
above almost anywhere. Linking hypnotic topics together is no different than any
other topic of conversation you will have. After I have done this a few times in
236
the same coffee shop I often get referrals from people who I have shared the
experience with. While I don’t want to share a deeper experience with everyone
that I meet, I do want to share a good experience. I would be remiss if I didn’t
mention to subjects that talking about these ideas can be inspiring. Sharing good
feelings is something that enhances the way we all come together, again and
again. “If you share this with a friend who is also curious remember how you
found me.” “By being kind, curious, and chatting up an awesome caffeinated
guru” has been a reply I’ve used more than twice. Smile.
That’s all there is to the point fixation method. You pick one point and pace the
experience as you begin layering in instructions and commands. You can weave
in additional story elements that give the mind lots to keep track of as you keep
the focus on a fixed point. Try this exercise out for yourself. Keep your head
level and only move your eyes at least 45 degrees up. Then keep those eyes
focused there. The muscles will tire after a few seconds and blinking comes at a
rapid rate. Masterfully using these techniques means pairing it with what is
naturally occurring and increasing the details of sensual vividness from a
subject’s responses. While I did not invite this woman to a more private session
with me, I still get referrals from other women to me because of this. Choose
well with who you want to explore these experiences with.
Encircling Hands Induction
This is an induction that works well with those who have a desire to submit and
surrender with you. This induction encourages intimacy between individuals by
intensifying the state while touching them. Massage alone is enough for many
people to trance out with your touch. Combining touch and hypnotic commands
allow this induction to be used at any point in your training or conditioning a
subject. This induction is akin to a tactile progression relaxation.
To begin, have the subject lay down on a bed or massage table. Wherever you
choose to have them spread out be sure that it will be comfortable for you to
reach over them. You will be potentially bending over them for approximately 30
min to an hour to do this induction as its written. How long you space this out,
and if the subject is clothed or naked is up to you. I prefer naked because the
237
view of the whole body responding is satisfying and provides more sensorybased communication to intensify the feedback loop between Hypno Dom and
subject. Getting in the habit of utilizing everything the subject is giving you with
their responses to establish a rapid, and flexible, connection capable of moving
them through different states. Utilization includes using the environmental
stimulus as well. We can use anything that’s happening. For example, if a car
alarm goes off when you’re in the middle of this induction you could incorporate
a statement like the following. “You might hear an alarm, or music from vars
passing by, but as the noise gets softer, it takes with it any distraction… further
away. Allowing you to focus more on what is important to you, and encouraging
you…” Utilize everything to bring you closer to your goals.
This induction can induce subspace for those who have served in the lifestyle so
be ready for that. More will be said about sub-space later in the book, but for
now, if subspace engages simply stick to what you both agreed to for a session
together. The words in this transcript are more M/s lifestyle oriented, but they
can also be described as a mindful surrendering and energy exchange with a
subject. The language needed for this technique can be very minimal as it is with
my transcript. The transcript below can even be considered wordy for those who
want to use more tactile feedback and silence as the driving effect for deepening
someone here. Do not be afraid of adapting this induction as your style develops.
In this transcript, I have the subject lying on a massage table. This is her first
time exposed to the encircling hand's method. The nice thing about using a
massage table is that it's already associated with relaxation in most people’s
minds. Massage tables are also adaptable to an individual’s height in order to
minimize strain on the masseuse. I like to tell the subject to hop up on the table
and they’ll be no higher than corn and no lower than taters. It always gets a
smile. I like to pair ideomotor responses with positive and affirmative answers
with this exercise, but you do not have to use this technique if you don’t want to.
Ideomotor responses are where you ask a person’s subconscious mind to answer
a question by providing a signal for you yes and know. Moving a part of the body
or having an immediate sensation or emotion are common signals you’ll
encounter.
238
Hypnotists and MCs will often use a finger twitch to demonstrate an ideomotor
response, but it can be any involuntary response on the body. In this example, I
have a hot towel with scented oils next to the table. My subject is naked and I
will periodically move back and forth with the towel to squeeze excess water and
oils back into the bowl. I like to use warm rose water with oils such as lavender
in it. This allows for a light coating on my hands and serves as sensory based
cues that can be utilized later. Enjoy the transcript.
“Close your eyes… I will be moving my hands over your body… Slowly, I will
touch you from head to toe… Your role is to be responsive, and allow my touch,
my voice, and my energy to take care of all effort needed here… I will be
communicating to your subconscious mind… and there is nothing for your
conscious mind to do, but relax, and recharge... thinking wonderful… Allow your
mind to drift and dream… This is an exchange of energy, touch, and
communication… Not all of the communication will be done with words, but
everything exchanged, is information and energy... you will be tuned with my
energy… moved by my touch… and warmed by my voice… So, get
comfortable… and be at rest… At times I will be silent… no words are needed…
if you let out an ‘oh’ or an ‘ah’, that’s great… that’s wonderful, but you do not
have to do a thing… right now, I’m talking with your subconscious mind… so
that we can learn to communicate, and work together…”
(I lean over the subject and cup my hands around the top of her head. I do not
press down. I just let my hands rest there for about ten seconds. I want the weight
of my hands and my touch to make gentle contact like this all the way down her
body. Just like in progressive relaxation, we go from the head down. It doesn’t
matter which side you begin with. Let your hands circle around her body from
her head to her toes. Then do this again on the other side. You can think of your
hands as painting their body with fragrant oils and energy as you move along
your subject.)
“So, let go of everything… Just let go of time… (I move my hands down very
slowly and steadily. At this point I’m slightly warming and resting on the back of
her head.) Let go thought… go quiet on the inside… the quieter you become…
the more you can hear… listen closely to my voice… listen to the
communication of my touch… nothing is only one thing… feel my energy…
239
attunement comes when the silence around us, becomes the quiet echoes within
us… notice my warmth moving through you… softening your muscles…
relaxing your mind… moving your energy… deepening you with my voice…
deepening relaxation with my touch…
(My hands move down and my fingertips softly cover her eyes. I watch her face
for a reaction. If a subject presses into you or moves her head up that’s often a
submissive reaction. That’s wonderful that her submissive energy is inspired, but
you want to reinforce that she does nothing. That you are taking care of all the
effort needed and her tasks are to respond and obey. Direct her focus to respond
in appropriate ways. That is what happened here and like the testing piece of the
Elman Induction, I’d advise you to begin again until they understand and perform
as requested.) “I will begin again.” (I remove my hands and squeeze the towel in
the bowl and put it back down.) “You are to do nothing… do not help me… (I
place my hands on the top of her head and hold them there for ten seconds. Then
I begin my progressive journey down once more.)
I am taking care of all effort necessary… I’m communicating with your
subconscious mind directly… and we are learning to trust and communicate with
one another… so relax your mind… relaxing your body… follow the ripples of
energy… your body responds on its own… comfort moving through you…
listen, deeply, to my instructions and commands… feel pleasure as you respond
because you’re doing what you are supposed to do… relaxing more, deeply…
hearing my words… and the silence between them… takes you deeper into this
connection… enjoying the comfortable… this voice of relaxation moves into the
deepest parts of you...”
As you move down one side of their body do your best to encircle their body
with your hands completely. Notice any muscle tension or movement as you do.
Start over again if need be. Use only the weight of your hands, and a gentle
steady squeeze, you can associate the sensations of pressing energy and
connection into each communicative touch. Do this down both sides of their
body. Once you complete both sides of the three or four times you are ready to
progress to the next step. You can add more hypnotic patter if you like, but
remember this induction utilizes silence.
240
Congratulations, when you get to this point you have repetitively moved the
subject through trance and into a light hypnotic state. It doesn’t much matter
what other commands you include in this when you do it. However, I mentioned
that I tend to use ideomotor signals or ideomotor reflexes with this exercise. I
like to get the subconscious responses set and then use it to get agreements to
work together. So, let’s look at what it takes to create an ideosensory response.
Establishing Ideosensory Responses
Ideomotor reflexes or responses, are not as smooth as consciously directed
responses. The responses do not have to be a muscle twitch or finger movement.
Emotions, pain, pleasure, confusion, and clarity can also be used. I once did this
with a woman who had tendonitis pain in her wrists. When I asked her pain if it
was willing to communicate with me, a jolt in pain level was a powerful
convincer for the subject that this was not a joke. Her subconscious chose to
answer my questions by giving a strong shooting pain through one wrist to
answer “yes” and weaker burning pain to answer “no”. I once saw someone teach
this by using a pendulum and one man would hiccup every time the pendulum
swung a yes answer. Let’s get into how this works.
When you did the magnetic hands, the balloon and bucket, and the finger clamp
exercises you were working with ideomotor responses. Ideomotor responses are
movements that do not originate in the conscious mind. As you worked through
any of the above exercises you should have noticed the subject’s short jerky
movements. You can direct those movements and set them to correspond to a
yes, no, and maybe. Learning this skill allows you to communicate with the
subject’s subconscious mind like a Magic 8 Ball. The ideomotor movements here
can establish a communication system that does not include speaking, but in a
different setting can consist of writing. The easiest way to do this with your
subject on a massage table is to pick something readily visible, like finger and
toes movement, or ask the subconscious to pick a hand or foot to be the yes
signal. Then have it give you a no signal on the other hand or foot. I’ve
established this in less than a minute with a subject using a pendulum.
Since my subject has been primed to my touch and is laid out on the massage
table, I have access to the subject’s whole body. I brought a chair close to the end
of the table and I gently place my hands on her shins. I slowly slide my hands
241
down onto her midfoot and being careful not encourage a ticklish reaction.
Letting my hands have a little bit of weight to them I give a small squeeze on
each foot. Then talking loud enough that the subject would have no trouble
hearing me, I talk at her crotch. Smile. It’s funny to admit but that’s the general
direction towards her head too.
“I’m talking to your subconscious mind now… To better communicate... one of
these feet will represent a yes signal from you... I’d like you to express which one
of these feet is your yes foot… Move it now.”
The subject’s right foot twitched before I finished the sentence.
“Perfect. Every time you agree with me, I want you to share pleasure with the
subject… If you agree to give me another yes.”
The subject’s right foot twitches.
“Perfect. Feeling so good, and this can get even better, as we work together…
That’s what I want to encourage in you… as we work together, you’ll get to feel
more pleasure.”
The subject’s foot twitches.
“Perfect. All these yes’s mean you get to feel really good… Feel really
wonderful… (I squeeze her right foot and her yes foot twitches.) Now, I’m going
to call you by someone else’s name… When I ask you if this is you, I want you
to confirm that it isn’t, by responding with your “No” signal on the other foot.
Isn’t that right Shelly?”
The subject’s left foot twitches.
“Great job… Perfect… (I give the subject’s right foot, her yes foot, a little
squeeze.) Now there may be times when you are not sure of an answer… When
that happens, I have had some subject’s do nothing, and other subjects decided to
choose another signal. When I ask you how big the universe is, give me the
signal for uncertainty. (Subject’s foot twitched yes and I give it a squeeze.)
Perfect. You are doing wonderful... Now, how big is the universe?”
242
The subject’s toes pull back on the right foot and I’m not sure if this is a yes
twitch. So, I decide to ask again.
“I want to be sure you gave me the uncertainty answer… How big is the
universe?” (The subject’s toes pull back again and there is a difference between
this and the yes foot twitch. I give the right foot a little pleasure squeeze.)
Perfect. It feels good to be able to communicate together, doesn’t it? (The right
foot twitches and I give it a squeeze.”
From this point on it’s simply reinforcing the instructions and commands by
asking questions. As you approach the end of the session you could ask if the
subconscious if it would be willing to work with you to accomplish mutual goals.
The encircling hand's induction is complete when you inform the subconscious
that you will awaken the subject. Begin by giving instructions to awaken and
moving up from the body from the feet to the head with your hands this time. Do
both sides of the body for symmetry and give a little rub with the warm scented
towel on the last massage up to their head.
Here are some ideas that ideomotor signaling can be utilized for.
Getting some answers on a question or topic that could be sensitive in nature.
Getting a commitment from the subconscious mind.
Finding the root causes of events.
Accessing information that the subject knows but is unavailable to the conscious
mind.
Integrating parts/identities and behaviors
Hypnosis Is NOT Meditation
This section has been updated from the bonus section of my book, The Tao of
Relationship Maintenance for Mind Controllers. As you advance with your
skills, I recommend this book as your next step. I have often been asked what the
difference is between hypnosis and meditation. To begin, I'd like to ask you how
you might define the difference between these experiential concepts. I have used
the following descriptive proofs for years to define and compare the differences.
Perhaps it’s time for an update because you’re blending together meditation and
243
hypnosis techniques also if you have been practicing my techniques. Take your
time to think about these experiential states for yourself first before reading over
my explanation of these concepts. This chapter represents my development and
understanding of this topic. There are many changes here from the last time I’ve
shared this.
In hypnosis, you get to the trance state and then begin to work on yourself by
changing your relationship to a thought, idea, or behavior. In meditation, your
goal is on being awareness. The awareness is not on being aware of objects, but
on resting with the experience of awareness itself. To sustain a meditative state,
you work with your attention to let thoughts in and separate them from the
experience of who you are. During meditation, you’re deconstructing concepts
and thoughts to become mindful that you are not your thoughts, and thus become
more aware of the constructive nature of reality. To simplify this even further. In
hypnosis, you communicate with the subconscious mind and the relational
associations that is has learned. In meditation, you’re becoming aware of
subconscious communication and letting it go in order to sustain the attentional
exercise undertaken. As I have said above, you can blend techniques together.
Meditation is a trance state, and therefore a person could achieve some of the
same goals that a hypnotic practice can. Meditation in its many forms has been in
existence for thousands of years. Meditation is the umbrella term for the variety
of practices such as Zazen (Zen), Vipassana, Loving Kindness (Metta), Chakra,
Kundalini Sound, Transcendental, Mantra, Pranayama, some forms of Qigong
practice, Mindfulness, Taoist meditation, and many others. I would also organize
self-hypnosis into the meditation umbrella. If you can imagine with me that a
trance tree stands before you. At the top of the tree is guided trance and under
that, around mid-level of this tree, is self-guided trance experience. Each branch
on this tree has different styles, and within each of these styles will be different
techniques and goals for the trance experience.
All branches lead to the trunk of the trance tree and the closer one gets to the
trunk the more intense the states of awareness and consciousness can be
experienced. The trunk of this tree thrives without philosophy or dogma attached.
Philosophy and dogma were cultural perspective and flavor that brought you to
the experience and are simply what we carried with us on the journey there.
244
Trance states can be shifted and directed into focused goal orientated
progressions, but they don’t have to be. Awareness can simply remain on the
experience of awareness and the subconscious will adapt to this flowing
attentional focus. Guided meditation can increase communication with an
individual’s subconscious mind to change behavior to the same degree as
hypnosis, because at a certain point these styles of trance and techniques overlap.
This says nothing about the capability of the subconscious or conscious mind, but
we will get to that soon.
A skilled hypnotist would be an excellent meditation teacher, but a skilled
meditation teacher will not necessarily make a good hypnotist. Meditation
practice teaches more philosophy and principled style to affect one’s state than
hypnosis does. Meditation can become a way of life, and hypnosis is not thought
of this way. There are certainly philosophical styles of hypnotic trance like
Ericksonian hypnosis, Kappasinian hypnosis, and Neuro-linguistic Programming
to just name a few. Meditation tends to deal more with the nature of awareness
and the energy of consciousness in order to progress enough to access or
influence the cognitive and physical mechanisms of the mind-body connection.
Hypnosis more directly brings the subconscious mind forward to communicate
and work with the conscious perceptions and relationships of our lives.
In every moment of our lives, our subconscious mind is actively responding and
communicating with ourselves and the world. The conscious mind steers the
immediate actions and weighing choices. The subconscious mind handles not
only reactions, but it also fills in gaps and completes actions when the conscious
mind is elsewhere. Subconscious reactions are just as important as deliberated
action. Guided instruction to move through the trance state and exercise specific
goals are the standard elements that loosely separates meditation and hypnosis
from each other. If the goals are to get closer to pure awareness and engaging
your whole mind with a purpose meditation would be like walking, and hypnosis
running. A blending of styles and techniques makes guiding another through a
trance is what often happens. It’s important to realize that attention is the key to
distinguish between subconscious thought and conscious thought. Conscious
thought is generated with intention from your attention, and what we perceive in
our consciousness is not created by conscious thought. Everything else you can
245
thank your subconscious for. What our conscious mind is capable of is why
meditation alone can only take you so far, but everyone’s journey is different.
If we reduce meditation down to its simplest form, leaving out philosophy and
dogma, it becomes a conditioned practice of attentional exercise. Using this
definition, we can explore the limits of conscious attention in the following
example. You’ve been asked to give a speech on your favorite movie and what
its message meant to you. You may be the world’s most famous movie critic,
probably someone from Red Letter Media, but when you’re on that stage,
speaking about your favorite movie, you demonstrate the limits of conscious
attention and subconscious capability. As you’re giving that inspiring movie
speech, you are only consciously capable of being aware of the few words that
you’re saying at any moment in time. That capability of conscious awareness is
benefited from subconscious awareness that directs processes in response to your
intended action, and activates muscles to express every word and nuance of
sarcasm in your speech. All of the content of your speech, rehearsed or not, is
being arranged for you before you say it. Subconscious proficiency is the entire
goal of language fluency, because language and skill mastery eliminates much of
the attentional burden that was once required. Does this example also imply that
the skills of meditation can be transferred to the subconscious in the same way?
Yes, it does. The mind develops and adapts with our consistent practice, and for
some, a meditation or hypnosis practice could become one practice naturally. For
most, they will miss the benefits of energy, capability expansion, and awakening
because they get caught in the trap of philosophy and dogma. Build upon what
works for you and compliments the strengths of your best self. It is the capability
and conditioning of practice that will inevitably advance your development, and
in the end, it really doesn’t matter if you call it meditation or hypnosis. As long
as you are aware that meditation or hypnosis sit together on the trance tree, and
the goals, efficiency and expediency, cognitive capability, and energy (to enter
state, become aware of a state, and maintain a state) are the factors that ultimately
separate meditation and hypnosis. In beginning these practices, you will be
tempted to view that as hefty splits, but as you advance, you’ll see the splits as
simply geography. The many ways these techniques can be used together
demonstrate that they are merely different points on the same landscape.
246
If anyone is so inclined to diagram this trance state tree out, I’ll give you a head
start by sharing more on the different styles and goals of a dedicated meditation
practice. As you read over the descriptions below think about how similar
meditation and hypnotic goals and experiences are. Think through the goals of
the different styles and consider incorporating their techniques into your art. At
the very least, you may come to agree that once we get past the philosophy and
dogma, we are all practicing the same art.
Concentrative Meditation
In this meditative practice, the objective is to cultivate a single-point of attention
on an object, sound, image, on the breath, or a flame. Training and maintaining a
consistent focus on a chosen element the mind eventually drifts off naturally. If
another thought comes into awareness, or the mind drifts off the chosen focus,
the student learns to return their attention to the chosen object of concentration,
the student develops the capacity to remain calm, stabilized, and grounded
through this practice. A student will learn how to disassociate from everything
that is not from the chosen focus of concentration, and sustain that exclusive
awareness for as long as they wish.
Open Awareness
The objective of this practice of meditation is to develop the mind through
training a broader awareness. In contrast to the single point awareness practice
above think of this practice as maintaining that awareness 360 degrees all around
you. This training is done through consistent monitoring whatever is happening
around an area or individual without any specific focus. This practice cultivates a
broader awareness surrounding oneself, as visualization techniques for this liken
awareness to become a cloud or an aura. Other imagery associated with Open
Awareness meditation is awareness becoming like the spacious sky, or a river
flowing around, over, and through objects. The cognitive capacity to stay present
with the multitude of details arising at the moment is developed through this
practice.
Mindfulness
247
The objective of mindful meditation is derived from a combination of developing
oneself through concentrative awareness training and open awareness exercises.
A student’s focus in mindful meditation is a dual one and encompasses both
styles above. Students train in this method to sustain their concentrative focus,
and concurrently be aware of other phenomena surrounding them. This dual
focus can quickly drain the student’s energy to maintain attention on anything at
all. Mindfulness practice can be extended into daily actions, such as eating,
walking, jogging, driving, housework, and even video games. These are all
instances where we utilize this dual focus in accomplishing our goals.
Mindfulness meditation has become increasingly popular in recent years.
Transcendental Meditation
The objective of Transcendental Meditation is from a combination of developing
concentrative awareness, and to attain a metacognitive awareness of everything
happening to the “I” and surrounding the student. Concentrative and open
monitoring meditations require significant mental energy to sustain, and the selftranscending meditation practice embraces the achievement of transcending the
effort required of this triple focus meditation itself as a step of Mastery.
Mastering this meditation is like training to run a marathon that also involves
long periods of mountain climbing, and then swimming across an ocean to get to
your destination. Once you can do this almost no physical barrier on earth can
contain you or block you from your journey onward. Just like this example, there
is a point where the student realizes that they can sustain the mental activity of a
triple focus without exhausting themselves. Once a student has this experience of
feeling like they can keep going and going, it’s frequently referred to as
transcendental or pure consciousness. In this transcendental state of
consciousness, a student may learn to attune themselves within it, in order to
continue to live life within this state, and transcend their expression of self.
Guided Meditation
All states of consciousness can be guided and many exercises are often practiced
with prerecorded audio files, computer-aided biofeedback, or face to face
guidance. In one form of guided meditation called guided imagery, the student
follows the guidance of a teacher who elicits certain images, affirmations,
248
cognitive and emotional states such as peacefulness, desired experiences, and
behavioral modification done through a stage by stage progression that contains
interspersed instructions. Guided meditation and hypnosis are often the same
thing, and the labels used are those that appeal to a particular audience. Guided
meditation as a category is only limited by the imagination and skills of the
teacher.
Hypnosis
The major types of hypnosis that we will encounter is NLP, direct hypnosis (such
as stage and erotic hypnosis and hypnotherapy), and indirect (such as
Ericksonian, conversational hypnosis, self-hypnosis, and nonverbal hypnosis).
All of these types can use elements of the other, and this does not include
neurological and/or biological hypnotics. Things like hypnotic drugs, sleep
deprivation, biofeedback are perfect examples of neurological and/or biological
hypnotics. Many rites of passage have included peyote, staying up all night, and
vision questing to see the unseen. These quests for hopeful glimpses of Coyote
Grandfather or to be the next Nagual still have much to teach us. Unless you are
partaking in such a rite of passage, I would advise you never to use drugs to bring
on or further a state. Hypnosis can be used as a goal-oriented approach for
behavior modification, sensory intensification and diminishment, awareness and
state training, skill and memory enhancement, and identify/create reality
alterations.
Relational Meditation
The objective of Relational Meditation is awakening as one’s best self. Relational
Meditation incorporates inclusion trances to train awareness through
concentrative and open monitoring exercises, training the body to be optimally
responsive to physical activity and cognitive conditioning, encouraging living
one’s best life by becoming your best self, and designing one’s life through
learning and adventure. The goals here are a sensual appreciation of life,
harmony with oneself, and moving beyond philosophy and dogma by utilizing
what works in all of them. Relational Meditation honors sacred sexuality and
awakening with the Tao, or, the life force and energy of the universe. To become
one with the Tao, is to live a life of harmony, and recognize oneself as connected
to all things. My art is one of spirituality and a way of life.
249
Compliance Training vs Induction Scaffolding
Influence attempts and manipulative strategies to transition states of
consciousness for interrogation, changing a person’s values, creating the perfect
agent, or servant has been areas explored throughout history. Often people think
of these things as fabricated movie references, but that would be a mistake. There
are thousands of references from government agencies slowly sharing their
research into influence, human programming, and psychic abilities. I have
included one such link below. There are many books that explore theories on this
topic, and I share this because the reader should have some knowledge of
conspiracy theory. It is likely you may be confronted with one or more. What you
do with this knowledge is up to you. I’m not a conspiracy fan so I don’t spend
much time and energy reading much of it. What I have read over the years I can
tell you that more of this is true than any of us would like to believe.
https://www.cia.gov/library/center-for-the-study-of-intelligence/kentcsi/vol4no1/html/v04i1a05p_0001.htm
Hopefully, you can agree that techniques to manipulate behavior have been used,
refined, and usually kept secret from the majority of society for some time. If you
don’t believe it, I would encourage you to learn more about the topic, but in the
end, it is not my responsibility to convince you, or defend that information. You
just happen to be reading a book of applied behavioral modification that some
people will deny is even possible. The applications of covert influence are all
around us and learning what compliance is, where it's used, and if it is intended
to be used with an induction will be our starting point here. As a hypnotist, MC,
and Hypno Dom you’ll discover that your skill will allow you to shape
conversations, sway opinions, and artistically establish the necessary emotional
logic to get agreement in others. The definition of compliance in this book, refers
to changing one's behavior due to a direct or indirect request from another person
or group of people. Compliance is an action that is not always accomplished with
enthusiastic approval. Sometimes a person complies without much thought at all.
Such as using a fork to eat ice cream because the people next to them are.
250
This example may be bringing back to your mind pacing and leading strategies to
lead a subject into a trance, but if your subject sees others doing an action,
compliance may be part of their motivation to adopt it. Learning these skills will
encourage you to listen more critically to political, sales, and persuasive pitches.
The pace and lead strategy tends to work like this in speeches. Truth, truth, halftruth, truth, truth, untruth, truth, truth, and colossal exaggeration of truthiness.
For example, I am writing this for you (Pace - truth), you’re saying these words
silently to yourself as you read them (Pace - truth) and you relax further as your
thoughts are filled with bubbles floating into your attention (leading instruction
and command).
Here, compliance refers to an individual's acquiescence or follow through in
response to a request from a peer, or a peer’s modeled behavior. Compliance
should be distinguished from obedience (behavioral change influenced by an
authority figure) and conformity (behavior change influenced by a perceived
peer). This question may come to mind when you feel like you are the focus of
an influence attempt. “On whose authority are you asking me to do this?” In the
age of self-determinism and accountability, all of us should question why it is we
do what we do, before we ask how we can do it. The authority that seeks to
influence us could be someone who does not have our best interests at heart, and
seeks to have us responsible for the consequences of the action undertaken. Let’s
examine this further.
Consider the fact that adherence to almost any standard, plan, or routine would
be an unnatural act. To stay adherent to an ideal behavior a person would need to
be aware of benefits and consequences and then choose appropriately. When a
person is trying to quit smoking, stick to a diet, or manage a medical condition,
considerably more thought has to go into what can be done to encourage
adherence. Even just taking a vitamin every day is an unnatural act. Think about
it. I’m sure everyone has heard stories or experienced another person trying to
give up smoking. That person goes out with friends and they start drinking and
someone lights up a cigarette. The person quitting smoking is very aware of the
desire to join their friend for a smoke as they have many times before.
Imagine meeting a friend for lunch and one of you began a diet. The competing
priorities in your mind can be hard to stick with. Is it peer pressure to partake
251
here? You may imagine someone telling you to just take one bite of cake, or
handing you a cigarette after you say no. The others may have no other agenda
than to have you join them, and that makes partaking in the behavior even harder
to resist. Even if it’s against your doctor’s advice. There is often little to no
accountability or repercussions for the many moments that we conform to
behavior around us. This example is smoking or giving social encouragement to
have another bite of cake. It’s not life or death. Right? Let’s look at an example
of a chronic medical condition as unobservable conditions often get ignored and
stigmatized. Right now, across the United States and around the world HIV is
stigmatized this causes people not to get treatment, be adherent to their treatment,
and the disease spreads. When a person is virally suppressed and consistently
taking their medication, they cannot spread HIV. Please see the U = U campaign
for more info or go to https://www.preventionaccess.org/ To be clear I do not
have HIV, but one of my friends does. Getting back to the example.
The authority in this example is a doctor who just diagnosed someone with HIV.
HIV has become a chronic condition due to advances in medicine, but it's still not
a condition that can be cured yet. The diagnosis of being HIV positive would be
shocking to most of us. The changes to an everyday routine will need to be
altered. The environment could be used to provide cues to remind the person
about these changes that need to happen. Food must be ready and available to
take medicine. Alarms will need to be set. A pill might need to be placed in a
waterproof container to take in a pocket just in case the day’s dose is forgotten.
Attitudes about life, having a relationship, personal and partner(s) health, would
need to be reexamined. There is a whole disclosure process that I won’t even get
into, but the reactions by others will impact how this person lives his life. Fear of
judgment from peers, community, and being outed contribute to HIV spreading.
In this way, compliance with stigmatizing ideas can also lead to direct
consequences to the people around us. Think about the ideals you encourage.
Adherence to medication is dependent upon memory and the motivation to
establish a routine. The person can be successful 30 times, 100 times, or even
1000, but it only takes one time to break routine. Once a routine is broken the
person is at risk of losing motivation and having their past efforts fall apart.
Encourage a person to stay healthy, to live a good life, and do not comply with a
stigmatizing bias that any person is dirty. Prejudice and harm are rooted in
252
apathetic compliance. Learning these skills is not good or bad. Just because you
see them here doesn’t mean they should be used, because in my mind this work is
only as good as what you walk away with. Even your worst enemy can present an
idea to you respectfully, but it doesn’t mean you should take it.
Learning these skills and techniques allow you to understand when they are
naturally and intentionally being applied. Perfecting these skills as a performance
art allows a greater degree of compliance, openness, and responsive obedience
with others. Our learning here, however, cannot make us immune to the concepts
covered. These techniques work because they flow with how we naturally react
and respond. Everything we will cover in this work could be used to develop and
maintain compliance, obedience, and followership should an MC desire.
Compliance training has the goal of getting someone to the point that they obey
automatically and don’t think about it. This training is often gradual, but
compliance building is often utilized with individuals who are not motivated, or
need additional assistance getting past inhibitions.
Compliance training is used in two different ways. The first is to get the reluctant
or distracted subject more engaged and responsive when working with the
material. Responses are drilled so that they become automatic. This gives the
subject additional knowledge and context with possible experiences, and allows
you both to know where you may have overlapping interests. The second way
compliance is used is to intensify a motivated person, or like in the example to
demotivate them from a course of action. This is accomplished by providing
them additional knowledge, feedback, and experiences that increasingly stimulate
their responsiveness.
Compliance training is used daily by socialization agents to influence you in
ways that you would not expect. Our behavior is governed much more by the
unconscious forces than most people believe. What people don’t realize is that
their willpower is malleable. Willpower is thoughts about what should happen or
be real. Those self-deterministic “shoulds” are all preconceived thoughts and
biases. Our thoughts and our memories change in small or large ways every time
we access them. Our willpower, just like our thoughts is elastic, sometimes
completely nonexistent, and can be self-sabotaging. Having subjects with a
strong belief in their willpower is actually beneficial to the work you do with
253
them. Subjects who believe they have made their own decisions are far more
likely to be satisfied with their behaviors.
Even after some subjects are told they were manipulated into making decisions
that they normally would not have made, they will defend themselves, saying
they made the choices on their own. No one is immune from influence even if
they know that it is happening. We are all MCs. We all are distinguishing and
adapting to conditions in the world. For better or for worse, we are all sharing our
thoughts, experiences, and shoulds with each other consistently. Taking part in
life changes minds. Learning this material will help you to stop “shoulding” on
yourself, but it cannot make you immune from influence. No program or
information can.
When I refer to compliance training, from this point forward, I’m talking about
the overall process that instills pleasure and pride in the subject from learning to
act automatically through immediate feedback and control.
Entrainment
Anyone who has taken part in yoga, meditation, trance, hypnosis, biofeedback,
religious ceremonies, and therapy has undergone entrainment conditioning. What
we are doing as Hypno Doms, MCs, and Erotic Hypnotists, is utilizing a variety
of environmental, psychological, and culturally based techniques to create
experiences that develop our subjects. State entrainment is the act of relational
operationalization that you condition the subject to function in. There can be
more than one state that is used for development and operationalizing of the
subject. States like thirsting desire, submission, absolute love, belonging, and
more! Operationalizing is the mindset (attitudes, guidelines, and context), skills,
and awareness that you are conditioning your subject to function in. A variety of
techniques, props, and methods can be used to facilitate the subject getting into
these desired states.
As you work with people, you’ll discover that there are few things as compelling
to them as the desire to acquire more control or surrender that agency of control
to someone they love and value. We all seek to experience and investigate the
boundaries of our personal agency. We all are seeking elements that allow us to
develop and express the traits of identity that distinguish us with our values. We
254
want those traits and identities to attract and communicate with others.
Entrainment is developing interactions paired with skills, challenges, and
workable activities to demonstrate understanding and ability.
To begin planning out entrainment activities think of it like creating a
walkthrough with a social script for the experience and marking out emotions and
self-talk as drivers for the experience. Using hypnotic entrainment methods in a
normal conversation can drastically change the trajectory of the interaction that
follows. The same entrainment methods that work for an isolation tank would
also work in a hypnotic adventure where the subject is completing checklists on a
moon base. As a hypnotic communicator, and someone that encourages others to
use their imagination, you are not limited by time, space, or reality in your
scenarios.
For example, if a subject feels slightly confused or anxious from the induction,
the transition of moving into a more powerful and balanced state with the
guidance of the MC, reinforces motivation to move in the directions you wish
them to go. Entrainment teaches the subject that physical and emotional
responses are part of the experiential cues for the adventure. Hypno Dom’s will
work with experiences that are painful and pleasurable. Being able to work with
pain and pleasure offers a balanced, safe, and accepting mental space where the
subject never fears they have to censor themselves.
When you first start working with someone the experience of becoming
vulnerable in the presence of somebody they just met may cause confusion. You
should have already noticed the many ways I layer comfort, trust, and safety into
my transcripts. When the subject is experiencing discomfort or vulnerability, they
will unconsciously begin to seek ways to increase their comfort levels so I make
it easy for them. If you don’t provide the subject an easy way to get comfortable,
they will use what they know to do this. What they experience becomes part of
the practiced experience you’ll share with them again and again. That’s
entrainment. This entrainment experience with you becomes even more
important if you progressively layer in resources that matter to them.
Over time the subject experiences how following your commands only increases
their feelings of empowerment, thirsty desire, and meaningful appreciation. Over
time the subject’s subconscious automatically associates their responsiveness
255
with pleasure and obedience and their interactions with you. Entrainment can
also be pleasure conditioning in context. Subjects will have feelings of
vulnerability and intense euphoria as you work with them to increase their
responses, skills, and experiences in this way. As they continue work more with
you, they’ll go deeper intensifying all of this.
These experiences are utilized to improve the quality of their service and life.
Having the subject demonstrate how they can act with more specificity of
control, and interact with fantastic experiences of adventure makes the time with
you like something out of the subject’s dreams. Seek to make entrainment and
state proofing experiences part of your hypnotic resource building. We will get
more into state proofing later. As the desire to experience “more” increases so
does the control from the Hypno Dom. As pleasure and guidance increases the
subject’s thirst to obey, please, and become more confident in these wants also
intensifies. At this point, almost any instruction or command given by the Hypno
Dom will be unconsciously primed and followed.
Entrainment activities usually begin before a subject has been exposed to
hypnosis or trance. Entrainment activities are often presented as progressive
learning opportunities that are to be practiced through repetitive thought and
action exercises. These repetitive tasks and focus centered exercises are designed
to increase in intensity and effort over time. These tasks do get extremely specific
on tasks and personal skills utilized in the exercises. I will demonstrate a very
simple example of this in the transcript below.
“Today, we are going to practice deep breathing to clear the mind and energize
the body. I will explain this process to the group… for the first few breaths, and
after that… you should concentrate, listen… and observe… pay attention, close
attention to me… begin to extend your awareness over me… and bring our
energies into harmony… with each breath… in your mind, following your breath
down… moving your awareness down, towards your center... bringing with you,
peace and silence… get yourself comfortable… Before we go further… breathing
deeper… I’d like you to inhale and exhale slowly… moving deep within your
diaphragm… deep breathes… doing this a few times now... getting comfortable,
focusing inward… Allow your mind, to find profound quiet… as you take each
breath... in…. out…. in… out… breathing deeply, from your diaphragm…
256
moving towards your center… as you do this… you're removing low-quality
air… and priming your body with oxygen… Everyone, close your eyes…
moving deeper into this inward focus… when you have finished doing this… at
least three times… bow your head, just slightly forward… and continue to
breathe like this… listening for my voice.
Now, breath in deeply… and fully… for five seconds … and hold onto that
breath… for two seconds… You will hear my hand knock once… and then
twice… and you will release that breath… You will release, for ten seconds…
and hold for two… So, you will need to let that breath out, nice and slow… We
will do this for two minutes. Now (I knock twice on the wooden floor.) Let us
begin… Breath in with me… After five seconds… I hold for two… (knocking on
the wooden floor) Exhaling, for ten seconds… breathing in…. and holding my
breath at the peak… for two seconds… and I’ll knock twice… Inhale deeply, for
five seconds… and I hold for two… knocking on the wooden floor…. Exhale,
now, for ten seconds…. I hold my breath for two seconds… and knock twice….
Inhale deeply….”
I do this for two minutes speaking aloud and then I begin to add in other
elements.
“When I knock twice… you will answer by knocking twice on the floor.”
I do this for two minutes speaking aloud and then I add in additional elements.
“When you inhale open your eyes…. When you exhale close your eyes… I will
no longer speak the instructions.”
I do this for four minutes speaking aloud before adding in something else. The
challenge here is to stay focused on all the pieces as it gets progressively harder.
The subject learns to respond instantly through this entrainment exercise.
“I want you to imagine something you really want… With each breath… imagine
it more intensely… going over every quality of this... When you have that,
strongly in your mind… bring the hand you are not knocking with up, to cover
your heart.” (I wait until everyone has a hand covering their heart. When they
open their eyes on the inhale I speak again.) Feel these energies centering inside
you.”
257
I stay like this for four breaths.
“Perfect… As you exhale… I want you to let the hand on your heart… glide
down, and then be drawn back into place… with your inhale.”
I do this for two minutes repeating the instruction aloud, and then I change things
up.
“I want you to keep breathing… and allow both of your hands to move towards
the floor… Relaxing them… and hear yourself returning my knock in your
mind… Hear the knocks in your mind. (I wait for two breaths before giving more
instructions… As you breathe with me…. recall a time, when you knew you were
especially taken care of… protected… and happy… hold onto it … allow those
energies to grow, and develop within you… (I wait for two minutes before
continuing.) I want you to bring your hands, to where you feel this nourishing
and protective energies, most intensely… (I watch them open their eyes and close
their eyes holding on the stomachs, hands on their hearts, and one woman has her
hands on her diaphragm.) I want your body to relax… I want your mind to
connect these energies…to your future… connect them to your best self…
ensuring that what is needed is ready, and available now… and into the future…
Now, allow your breathing to return to normal… and at your own speed… bring
into your mind and body, a sense of appreciation… a feeling of gratitude… Let
everything else fall away… fill yourself up with gratitude…. Looking at me, fill
yourself up with appreciation…. I want you to smile. Smile, and feel
wonderful… it takes just as much energy to feel bad, as it does to feel great… As
you build that gratitude, feel it until it peaks inside… when it does, close your
eyes… close your eyes, build that appreciation, feel it until it peaks inside… and
smile as it does… You, don’t have to chase people… Be an example…You work
hard… You are passionate about what matters… You are important to people in
your life… So be yourself…The people who belong there will inspire you, as you
inspire them…So just do your thing… it’s the right thing… Close your eyes and
be silent… Letting the inner quiet, just fill you up… and when your eyes close…
Be at peace, and move into harmony with one another… when you encounter
someone stuck, or someone toxic… recognize they will not be changed, even by
the alchemy of your kindness… so smile, seek silence… move along, and be
kind… allow life to be their educator, and trouble yourself no more… Now, take
258
a deep breath… When you hear my voice next… we will begin the next
exercise.”
This group activity takes the same setup as a yoga or meditation class. I simply
used what was in the environment. If they did not have polished wood floors to
knock upon, I could have clapped my hands. If the idea of having hypnosis and
meditation mixed together seemed off in comparison with other mindfulness
practices, then you probably haven’t encountered Sophrology yet. Sophrology is
an amalgamation of Yoga, Tibetan Buddhism, Japanese Zen, hypnosis,
psychology, and neurology. The only thing its missing is Taoism in my opinion. I
recommend that you check this out if you want alternative ways to practice your
art and approach with people. Next, I’d like to introduce you to a very talented
Tist that has written a piece that demonstrates entrainment perfectly.
Guzalia Davis is a Tantra Dakini and Hypnotherapist helping people heal
themselves and become more whole. Common reasons why clients see her:
expansion of consciousness/spiritual growth; difficulties building relationships;
intimacy challenges; sexual difficulties - low or lack of libido, anorgasmia,
erectile dysfunctions, premature ejaculation. If you get the chance to know her,
she has a great sense of humor and is excellent at what she does. You can contact
her and find out more through these links. www.hypnosismage.com
Info@hypnosismage.com I think you’ll enjoy her piece below that perfectly
demonstrates an entrainment induction.
“I need you to sit still and close your eyes. I’ll let you relax for now... And you
know, it’s easy… it’s easy to relax deeply now… and it’s very easy to enjoy this
experience. All you have to do is to follow my voice and use your imagination.
And no matter how far you’ll go, you will always hear my voice… and my voice
will take you into a very special place … a place where only the good boys
allowed.
So, be a good boy now and listen to my directions. Take a nice deep breath in…
and breathe out slowly… Take another deep breath in… and let it out even
slower this time… Take another deep breath in and hold it for a moment… and
as you exhale, just allow all the tension to leave your body…
259
As you keep breathing deeply, bring your focus inside and scan your body. Look
for any discomfort, heaviness, tension… Just breathe it out… Breathe in fresh
air… breathe out all the stagnation… Breathe in fresh energy… breathe out the
heaviness… Breathe in relaxation… breathe out all the tension… Breathe in
peace and calm… breathe out the anxiety…
Just allow all the discomfort and uneasiness to leave your body… so your body
can relax completely now…
Every part of your body is relaxed now… every joint, every muscle, every fiber
of your body is completely relaxed now…
As your body keeps relaxing even deeper now… I need you to imagine,
visualize, pretend that you are standing in front of a big house… it may seem
familiar… or unfamiliar… it doesn’t really matter… the only thing that is matter
right now that this house represents dark mystery… excitement… thrill… and
it’s all mixed with desire… losing oneself completely in that darkness…
There is a big black door… As you walk through that door, you can see a
staircase. It is made of a beautiful white marble. And as you are standing there
on top of that staircase, you can see that there are only ten steps down… and you
know that as soon as you reach the bottom of that staircase, you will be ready to
submit to this experience completely…
Just remember, no matter how far and how deep you’ll go now, you will hear my
voice… and my voice alone… all the other sounds or voices will just fade into
the background.
I will count backward from 10 to 1, and as I count, imagine taking one step down
the stairs, and as you do, just allow all the concerns of the day to disappear.
10 – take one step down… leaving the rest of the world behind.
9 – take another step down, going deeper now… Going deeper and deeper with
each step your take…
8 – going even deeper now… down… deeper and deeper with each and every
number…
260
7 – another step down… feeling yourself sinking, sliding, drifting deeper and
deeper…
6 – going even deeper now… so very relaxed… every joint, every muscle, every
cell of your body is so relaxed now…
5 – deeper yet… the deeper you go the better you feel… the better you feel, the
closer you get to your desires…
4 – going even deeper… with each heartbeat… with each breath you take…
going deeper and deeper…
3 – all thoughts have disappeared by now… you can hear only my voice… as
though there is nothing else exists… only this place… only my voice… and your
desires…
2 – going even deeper… even deeper now…
1 – just let it go completely now… sinking, drifting, floating deeper and deeper
into that hypnotic trance…
Walk through another door and you’ll find yourself in a room where you can get
yourself ready for a very special meeting.
This is the place where you can take a relaxing bubble bath or invigorating
shower… whichever you prefer…
There is an outfit ready and waiting for you… it will be just perfect for the
occasion… with all the accessories that you may need…
Check yourself in the mirror… make sure that everything is perfect… admire the
way you look… Ready for that special meeting.
Did you hear the bell? I am waiting for you now.
Feel the excitement of anticipation is growing within you…
I am standing there… smiling… waiting for you…
And now I say…
261
10 - Walk closer… don’t make me wait… I can get mad…
Your heart is pounding… your body is trembling.
9 – Come closer… Understand now that there is no way back… just submit…
8 – Come a little closer… and twirl for me… you do as I say…
7 – Be a good boy… and dance for me…
6 – You have no choice… but follow my voice… do as I say… and I will be
pleased…
5 – I know that you like pleasing me… that is why you are here…
4 – Just do as I say… and you will be rewarded with a freedom from needing to
make any choices… I’ll make them for you… I’ll decide what you’re going to
do…
3 – From now on you will always hear my voice… sometimes it will be soft in
the back of your head… sometimes it will get louder… when you do what I say,
you’ll hear: “You are a good boy” … when you are bad, you’ll hear me getting
mad: “You are very bad!”
2 – No matter what you do or where you go… you’ll hear my voice… because
you are now tied to me… and you will do what I say… with overwhelming
desire to abide and please me…
1 – You belong to me.
Notice how peaceful it is in your heart… notice how the feelings of joy and
happiness grow within you… because you know now, you belong to me…
Once you fall asleep tonight and slip into the dream realm, you may see me
again… knowing that even when you are asleep you completely belong to me…
Day by day… night by night… you realize that I am your entire world… your
Sun… your Moon… you need me as air… pleasing me makes you happy.
Any time you’ll hear me say: “You are a good boy,” you’ll feel excitement and
arousal growing within you. You’ll feel the blood rushing through your body and
262
pleasant sensations spreading all over. And as I repeat: “You are a good boy,”
you’ll feel the arousal become overwhelmingly strong… impossible to contain…
making your entire body tremble uncontrollably… And as I look into your eyes
and say again: “You are a good boy,” you’ll be overtaken by a wave of
incredible, electrifying, intense pleasure… it’s so much more than you’ve ever
experienced before… and it will become even stronger each time you’ll
experience it.
I’m going to count from 1 to 5. As I count, allow all these suggestions to really
sink in, be absorbed, organized and become a permanent part of you. By the
count of 5, you will be fully reemerged, feeling refreshed and energized.
1 – absorbing all the suggestions… making them very true and real for you.
2 – know that as good as you may feel now, it will only get better.
3 – feeling content, satisfied, and very happy.
4 – feeling refreshed, full of energy and inspirations as though you just got back
from an amazing adventure… and in a way, it was a great adventure.
5 – whenever you are ready, you can open your eyes feeling fantastic.”
Ego Depletion
The technique of ego depletion results from having lengthy training or simply
communicating with a subject for an extended time. Ego depletion refers to the
idea that self-control or willpower draws upon a limited pool of mental resources
that can be exhausted. When the energy for mental activity is low, self-control is
typically impaired, which would be considered a state of ego depletion. Ego
depletion techniques are used to bypass or cloud the conscious mind so that
commands and instructions are more readily received by the subconscious.
Ego depletion techniques reduce conscious mind involvement by directing
attention to one or multiple tasks to focus on or track the details of. Each
additional element tracked and acted on requires more cognitive effort. Each
sustained effort will tire or drawdown conscious energy reserves and bandwidth,
causing every train of thought to slow, pause, or stop completely. Think about the
263
last time you multitasked and realized there were details you had missed. This
depletion of cognitive resources and capacity makes the subject more likely to
accept instructions and commands that are out of conscious awareness. This is a
naturally occurring phenomenon that happens with everyone as they multitask.
One way to use this technique is to use something like the following.
"I want you to pay attention to XXXXX. Concentrate on doing XXXX... you can
sense (Use visual, auditory, or kinesthetic examples.) how increasing your
awareness allows you to make distinctions that lead to greater control and
flexibility. Your work here, with me, is about refining and increasing this control
as you do XXXXX... concentrate harder... very good... recognize how you can
control XXXX differently... (Praise the subject and/or pair with affection and/or
contact)... and now you can stop and sense (Use visual, auditory, or kinesthetic
examples.) You take pleasure from this work… pleasure, within this focus…
because (reinforce previous instructions, commands, or set instructions and
commands to be paired with this behavior) ..."
Keywords for you to find more information on this topic are ego depletion,
neural entrainment, brainwave entrainment, and behavioral relationship
entrainment. This should be enough to get you started researching. I also
recommend you check out The Ellipsis Manual by Chase Hughes to get into this
topic more deeply.
State Proofing
State proofing is the sustained conditioning necessary to have a subject maintain
the desired state while performing a variety of tasks. This process begins by
having the subject do increasingly complex things in hypnosis or trance state.
State proofing is building in interruptions and distractions for tasks that the
subject must accomplish while maintaining the same level of hypnotic trance, or
to automatically move deeper in that state while achieving the goals. It’s about
conditioning the subject and the subconscious to work together during high
functioning tasks and the many possible distractions. Developing resources to do
this takes time and will exponentially increase trance depth practiced in order to
accomplish this. For example, what might begin as staying in state while there is
264
a conversation in front of the subject, may build to talking at the person, trying to
tickle them, pinching them lightly, and so on.
The extent of state proofing undertaken can be an adventure unto itself. Once the
subject can do this, they will be capable of stepping into other identities and
living them out. They might even become hypnotic messengers that are more
prone to inspiring others with their stories and lives. What follows here is an
interaction where I pair state proofing with some hypnotic interactions. Enjoy the
transcript. The subject is in a deep hypnotic state and this is state proofing
session.
“On a scale of one to five tell me how associated or present you are in this
moment, right now.
Subject: Five, sir.
In a moment, I will shake your arm... You will stay at 5, or go deeper to be
completely present... Are you ready to be tested?
Subject: Yes sir.
Perfect… Feel pleasure… let it take you deeper…
(I reach over and gently shake her arm.)
Perfect... Feeling pleasure… obeying… feeling pleasure… being present with
what you're meant to do… On a scale of one to five… tell me how associated and
present you are right now…
Subject: I’m almost a 5.
Deepening 5 times more…. Five times as relaxed…. Take the quiet deep inside
now…
(While training a subject you can have them move along a deepening scale. Each
time the sensations or state overflows it feels amazing. The deepening scale
stretches and increases focus and locus of the state. So, if a 5 overflows and feels
better somehow what would be a six is the new five. The locus of the scale
adjusts. The deepening scale interaction informs me if it can go beyond the first
265
self-report number, and the subject is able to work with this hypnotic metaphor as
if its a mind machine. The exactness of this deepening scale doesn’t matter.)
That’s my girl. You like being good for me, don’t you?
Subject: Yes sir. I love being good for you.
Tell me you love to obey me.
Subject: I love to obey you, sir.
(Subject has her anchor touched and is brought to orgasm. You will learn how to
do this later in the book.)
That’s my girl. Now, in a moment I’m going to grab your shoulders… and I’ll
shake your whole body... Your goal, is to stay at 5... or go deeper into this state,
as this happens… Do you understand?
Subject: Yes, sir.
(I move behind the subject in the chair and place my hands on her shoulders. I
quickly start to shake her abruptly and stop after a few seconds)
Good girl. Now tell me if you stayed at 5 or moved deeper.
Subject: Yes sir. I stayed at 5, sir.
That’s my girl… We are going to do this again, and I want you to stay at 5... or
go deeper... Do you understand?
Subject: Yes sir.
(I shake her hard and quickly. I notice there is no tension in her shoulders or
arms.)
That’s my girl. Did you stay at 5 or go deeper?
Subject: Yes sir. I went to deepening 5.
(Phrases like “Deepening 5” are wonderful to pick up. This was something that
made sense to the subject and I want to carry it onward as her trance word.)
266
That’s my girl… Feel pleasure for obeying me... Take that pleasure inside you,
making it part of who you are… appreciating that pleasure as you obey…
(I fire off her orgasm anchor.)
Now you are going to stand up on my command…standing up, on your own two
feet… and stay at 5, or go deeper to perform this task in this state…. I want you
to repeat back to me what you are going to do… and feel the pleasure of obeying.
Subject: In a moment, you will command me to stand. I will stay at this level, or
go to the deepening five, sir.
That’s my girl... That’s perfect… Feel incredible… and stand for me.
(Subject stands slowly and stays erect with eyes closed.)”
END
As you can see these exercises are interesting and exciting to undertake. The
exercises we choose are the contextual connection for how the subject learns to
use the resources and skills in their life. Progressive training not only has the
power to build upon the subject’s strengths but it shows them that their passion
and intimacy has power too. That power and energy can be tapped for motivation
and resiliency in their life. Think about that. The associations that trigger
meaning inside us also communicate to us about the content of our story within
an interaction. That’s a fine thread we weave here. As you can see from the
transitioning of one activity to another the structure of state proofing is the same.
Having the subject practice this technique often is what will allow an MC or
Hypno Dom to create vivid hypnotic experiences that go beyond telling an
adventurous naughty story. With an identity shift, the subject can be in the center
of attention for action, or as a bystander as the reality of the story unfolds. All the
while the Hypno Dom is setting up a game through involvement as we play
together. That last simple line of transition is enough to describe and move an
experience to another space and perspective. Brian David Phillips is one of the
people leading the way forward utilizing technology and hypnosis. Check out
how he utilizes hypnotic association by having his subject watching point of view
267
(POV). https://youtu.be/8fAERkFkuWw “What you see is your experience.”
That’s an easy hypnotic command to use and adapt!
Learning relational hypnotic communication is about being able to entertain with
a conversation, transition with smoothly or with surprised delight, and then
comes the nipple lasers with the detachable hypnotic spiral. Smile. Okay, that’ll
be in the platinum package release of this training. As a member of a society that
emphasizes the individual, and utilizes the collective as a means to get ahead,
there will be problems ahead if we stop seeing each other as people. As MCs and
Hypno Doms, we must actively take the reins and create pathways for individuals
to join us our journey. Chronic loneliness, anxiety, and depression are increasing
globally as the social bonds that once tied us together are loosened. Finding our
peers, our community, and our tribe has never been as important as it is today.
Find a community and a tribe that inspires and challenges you and it’ll improve
your life. It’ll improve upon what you thought was your best self.
One of the chief components we are really exploring in this section are
socializing experiences that individuals internalize and use every day of their
lives. An idea has no boundaries except those we accept and maintain. Relational
hypnosis explores the cultural hypnosis we all bring forward into every
interaction and invites you to ask questions. These questions begin with is this
something I want as part of my life? Is this something I wish to be defined by or
associated with? You are a better educated socialization agent as your practice
this art.
Hypnotic Regression, Progression, and Association
Regression to earlier times in life, or having a sense of a past life are some of the
fascinating areas of unexplained human phenomena in our lives. Reincarnation
has been an integral part of global cultural worldviews since the early days of
civilization. They document perennial beliefs in the existence of spiritual beings
who assume human form and survive death to appear in subsequent lives, or are
remade whole in another level of existence. More than that, spiritual traditions
talk of a person becoming the wind, an animal, and even another person entirely.
These ideas have been passed on to us and remade through numerous forms of
268
expression, like movies, books, and memes. This chapter introduces you to
working with and identifying concepts of regression, progression, and provides
you examples of transiting associations for potential action.
The ideas we pass on today about who we are, who we can be, and having a
subconscious expression of self has been talked about as myth, magic, religion,
and philosophy since ancient times. Much of the field of psychology utilizes an
assumption that the individualized self needs to develop and mature into itself.
For some that assume people grow into their labels and adhere to a supposedly
fixed identity. Even conversationally identity is talked about as being healthy
when it’s static in order to demonstrate a stable sense of identity during an
individual's lifetime. Well, unless there is a problem. Haven’t we all heard
someone say a person is just going through a phase? We are taught a lot of
conflicting lessons and we all do our best to make sense of those messages. Have
you ever wondered if revisiting key experiences and memories from yesterday or
even a long time ago, might change what you carried away from those
experiences?
Each time you access a memory it’s changed in some imperceptible way. Our
memory and mind are adaptive. Even the ways you go about intentionally
changing yourself HAVE to be based on who you are right now. So even if you
changed, the change still depended on your present way of thinking and the
limitations of that thinking. When we are relating to others in everyday life, we
are constantly accessing historically based context cues, and reacting with our
associational effect that is filtered through those historical experiences of context.
To develop ourselves we must change our thinking about ourselves and our
relationship in the world. Without even being in deep trance, we are doing this
as our subconscious is always working behind the scenes of conscious attention.
Take diets, for example, if we don’t work to change our associations along with
our actions, it’s just a matter of time before the old actions seek the comfort of
familiar associations.
When we utilize hypnotic regression and progression, we are not doing anything
unique. Our minds use these techniques naturally and they are familiar story
elements in the media that the majority of people consume. Regression
techniques can be used to associate into earlier experiences of your life (age
269
regression), into potential previous existences (past life regression), and within a
regression experience, a subject can have their psychological expression limited
by their associated level of development or form (capacity regression). For
example, regressing a subject back to an infant may cause the subject to lose the
capacity to express language or have lengthy logical thoughts. Consciously they
may not fully understand what is said to them either, and they may take on
infantile traits such as grasping. A subject may even take on a newborn’s sucking
reflex without any encouragement too. Capacity regression is not limited to age
or past life regression. The subject could experience the life of a frog, fish, a
mountain dragon, and even a slow-moving mountain.
If you could imagine the speed of thought and movement a mountain may have, I
would guess that you would arrive at conclusion with glacier speed. That a
rumbling thought may be concluded after an eon or so. I bet orgasm would be
volcanic and be epically lengthy. It is simply a matter of associating the subject
into the characteristics of that mountain. As I described it above, I’d also wager
you were associating into it yourself, even if just a little bit. You’ll decide
whether you see this better with your eyes open or your eyes closed.
Connecting a present emotion to an emotion in the past or in the future is called
an affect bridge. Smile, because it gets better from here! Think back to an
experience where you were unsure about something, but as you stop thinking
about that uncertainty, the experience got better and better. Select a similar
experience from your own life and when you have it read on. We’ll get to that in
a moment as we explore theoretical transitions that are possible with these
concepts. Enjoy the next transcript.
"And your attention goes to the feeling of your socks… their hugging your feet
and legs… and the warmth of your shoes… one foot feels that much better than
the other, doesn’t it?... Yeah… You might remember what it was like… to have
someone sit you down, and talk to you, as they put on your socks, and put on
your shoes… One foot at a time… You would fidget, and talk, as you thought
about the day… or giggle with a tickle… That used to be a whole event, getting
dressed... and how exciting it felt to be getting ready… going out the house…”
In the transcript above I used age regression to encourage a feeling of safety,
being taken care of, and guided onto what comes next. There are many different
270
ways to proceed after this transcript with that selected experience of uncertainty.
For some, just having them remember being guided and taken care of will be
enough to remove some or all the uncertainty. How did your prospective
uncertainty respond to the paragraph above? I’ll give you a few ideas to inspire
you with transitioning away from uncertainty and confusion. While your goal
could be anything confusion and uncertainty are two states that we all must learn
to deal with. In moving forward, we can frame a feeling of uncertainty about an
observation or a task and slowly have pieces of it come into focus. Those pieces
become understandable and the developing skill comes to you with proud
understanding. Being certain feels good, doesn’t it?
You might then ask the subject what is the first thing they notice that tells them
that things are getting better. Looking for that signal that this is right. It’s time to
take the next step out into the future. You can move the narrative of the subject’s
experience back and forth between their younger self to an older self that has
attained greater mastery and experience. Don’t stop there. Take the future subject
who knows how things got to feel great, and bring them into the past to instruct
their younger self. At this point, you can tell them that they are the teacher and
you are their younger self. Have them tell you exactly how they feel, what you’ll
experience, and what you need to do.
You could explore the process of getting from uncertainty in the past to feeling
great about the things that matter today. Each step shortening the time it took to
do this, and each step establishes that great feeling from the past to the future.
The subject has the benefit of having a more experienced self-directing the
course forward through life’s challenges. It is the merging of youth and
experience that selects to bring only the most useful and confident skills back to
this moment in the timeline. We are all a product of our reimagined past and
imaginative journeys of the future. The subject is once again gaining more
control and confidence as they engage with your control and guidance. Learning
this way feels great. Remember, the events you choose to work with do not have
to have happened before to have influence. Just like we don’t have to really know
a character in a book or a movie in order to grieve for them or cheer them on.
Let’s look at how this might play out with a capacity regression.
271
For example, if I paired a confusion induction with a capacity regression, I would
efficiently disorient the subject with time, place, and perhaps identity and form.
Ensuring that few things made sense to them until gradually reorienting to one
detail that transitions them to the next step. In this example, I’ll use water as the
transition state into and out of blankness. Stepping into this nothing makes sense.
Then bubbles are recognized in the blurry blue confusion in front of you. The
bubbles are sliding freely out of a curved elastic resistance that seems to hold
them back. Meaning making is a slow process. The details are jumping from one
confusing bubble to another and the details around you stay just out of focus.
Until out of the confusion I tell them to recognize an intense need for certainty.
The need to have some definite detail anchor them.
This reassuring feeling becomes part of securing these details. You want to
discover how this all works. The subject becomes happy to accept definite
reassurance and specific commands. Bit by bit the subject learns that they are a
tadpole. There are many stages in their development until they know what it
means to become a frog. So much learning is needed to recognize what it means
to be owned by a human Master. Tadpoles can’t speak, and they can’t hold onto a
thought for too long…. Bubbles… blur… seeing with new eyes. This potential
hypnotic adventure is a retelling of the fairy tale or a hero’s journey of becoming
the best frog they can be. At least this time… Insert maniacal pet store clerk wild
laughter as he looks directly at the subject through the plastic bag. The subject
can only watch me fasten a rubber band to the life sustaining container they now
realize they’re in. I’m taking them home with me. I may call you my little
bambino.
Outlining a Past Life Regression
While you may not be doing a past life regression often, it is worthwhile to have
an understanding of it, and how hypnotic questioning works. Utilizing an openended hypnotic style of communication is needed for hypnotic regression
sessions. This same style of communication will be useful in hypnotic
progressions, training the subject to respond during deep trance work, and
conversational hypnosis sessions. Learning how to utilize this open-ended style
of communication with your subject begins with their self-report of what they are
aware of and experiencing. You can use questions to encourage a subject move in
a particular direction instead of suggesting, instructing, and commanding them
272
to. Recognizing the difference between open communication and leading
communication will be the chief goal you will learn in by practicing these skills.
In this section, I’ll outline parts of the regression process and provide transcripts
to demonstrate how to practice this communication.
There are times when it is appropriate to lead or steer the subject in a general
direction, but you have to become aware of when you are doing this with your
language. We want to know what is happening without influencing the reporting
feedback from the subject. Study the examples in the transcripts until you feel
comfortable connecting the transition pieces and questions yourself. These
transcripts build and reinforce the knowledge of the techniques already learned
and should be adapted with the style of the operator doing hypnotic work. We all
develop our signature phrases and preferred methods as we do this work. That’s
how mastery starts out so when the urge to write a note grabs you do it. Enjoy the
transcript.
“I want you to imagine we’re making a list of items to create a model landscape
and today we are going to work on forests together. The items selected will bring
out the characteristics in the different type of forests. Each forest will have
slightly distinct types of fruit, and different types of animals. Each of these
details need to be painted, and placed perfectly, to be representative of their
routine, in their natural habitat. In some of these forests, there’s a lot of rain, and
other forests there can be long stretches of snow… All of the different conditions
need to be considered, as you settle in, and focus on developing this list… I want
you to imagine these scenes, and however you feel the most comfortable, I want
you to take notes, as you explore them… Those notes could be handwritten on a
pad of trance paper, they could also be put into a digital tablet, or computer in
your mind… I want you to consider what makes you feel the most relaxed as you
do this… What makes it easy for you to focus in deeply… discovering the most
important details to get down… What makes you the happiest, knowing you will
remember these items the best… When you’re ready, I want you to give me a
nod of your head… That nod will signal to me, that you are moving deeper into
relaxation… that’s right, give a nod, moving deeper… you are relaxing deeper…
shifting more into comfort, as we move forward… Nod your head, when you are
ready to proceed.
273
(In a few seconds the subject nods her head.)
Here’s how we’re going to proceed… going deeper, into details of this list… You
will put a capital “A” down, and you will think about all the fruits, and all the
animals that begin with the letter A… listing, all the fruits, and all the animals
with the letter A, clearly in your mind… You might start with apple, aardvark,
and ant… Taking the time needed to get it all down… relaxing deeply, making
this list… noting the details of each element… When you’re done with the letter
A, you go down further…. Further down into the details… putting the capital
letter “B” down… How many different fruits and animals do you know, starting
with the letter B?... Hmmmm…. Allow yourself to really think about that…
Taking them down now. Getting as many items listed as you possibly can…
Really enjoying yourself… feeling wonderful, finding you have the concentration
needed, to do this perfectly… What happens when you suddenly think of another
fruit, or animal, for another letter… you adjust… getting it down, relax farther,
and focus in… (Pause for 5 seconds.) Return to it... comfortably finding the
letter…. I choose the letter “a” to return too… I write down alpaca… go down
further, looking over each item for “a” … you, can take a slow deep breath, and
moving down with each item… as you think of another… you can put down
anchovy… and feel wonderful... You’re doing a great job… Now go way
down… deeper into comfort… deeper down, to the letter “B” again.
Have you thought about all the things that could bee here? (Ensure you
emphasize the animal bee, because we want the phonetic ambiguity here.) As you
get down all these names, I’d like you to consider which ones you like best…
Some animals are just funny… Have you heard of the Blobfish? … Some would
say it’s the ocean’s ugliest fish… Did you get that fish down on the list? … It’s
important that you take your time… and concentrate, thinking deeply, about
what you’re doing… Picturing each animal, and item, on the list completely, in
your mind. It feels so good, relax into this… it feels very good, getting each item
on the list… it feels wonderful, as relaxation takes you down deeper… Perfect,
now let me explain… how you will proceed with this task next…
In a moment, you will be going through this list yourself, exactly as we have
been doing here together… You will finish with b, and go on to c, d, e… all the
way to z... Once I tell you to begin, you will no longer pay any conscious
274
attention to me, your conscious mind will be on providing a complete list….
Your subconscious mind, will be moving deeper into this hypnotic state, and I
will be talking to your subconscious mind… You will not pay any more
conscious attention to me… as I speak, I’m talking directly to your
subconscious… we will be moving deeper into hypnosis, as the conscious mind
focuses on its task… You consciously can’t hear me… continue on finishing
your task… going deeper and deeper… getting it, down into trance… Going
deeper all the time… Each item on this list… taking you deeper and deeper…
Each item the conscious mind gets down… creates an even more powerful
trance… As I am talking with your subconscious mind…
In each and every breath… your feeling more comfortable… The closer you get
to the letter z… the more incredible you can feel… and the easier it will be…
taking you deeper… or even deeper, with each and every breath… taking you
this deep, or even deeper… with each and every item the conscious mind gets
down… You begin now…”
You have the choice to repeat the last paragraph once or twice speaking more
slowly each time, or add in further deepening instructions and commands. Next,
we transition with standard deepeners to further develop the state with guidelines,
goals, and additional context. You can choose to do a progressive relaxation here
(if you think you need to for an anxious subject), or move to stairway deepener
after reading the above paragraph a couple of times. I’ll be sharing the stairway
deepener below.
“You find yourself walking to a staircase… the stairway goes down, and down,
many floors... In this comfort and relaxation… you can move down each stair,
comfortably, and increasing your relaxation… There will not be any discomfort
here… only enjoyment, and pleasure, you’re paying attention to how your body
moves… moving down… along these stairs… Each step takes you down deeper,
into this delightful hypnotic place… Each step, helps you feel more, and more,
relaxed… enjoying… as you learn about this hypnotic place… On five...
descending this hypnotic stairway… each step down, breathe in this moment...
treasure every little bit of it… get excited over how you’re able to respond from
this point onwards... Each step down, and the comfort responds in your body…
more deeply, each step down, into this hypnotic space… and the desire responds
275
in your mind… Study the sensations of your body… recognize the enjoyment, as
you feel yourself move… deeper down and better with each stair…
Filling your life with adventures, not things…. Giving you stories to tell, and
bond over… And four… every number spoken multiplies this depth… multiplies
the intensity of relaxation, and trance... each step down... left foot, right foot, left
foot, right foot… down, down, deeper now... each step taking you deeper…
towards your best self… down… into this wonderful hypnotic space… And
three… every number multiplying the positive effects… multiplying the intensity
of relaxation, and enjoyment together... halfway down the stairway now… you
can begin to see shadows ahead…and what appears to be natural light below…
This light is reflecting calm warmth, all around you… taking you deeper into this
hypnotic place... moving closer to your center… your subconscious mind is
communicating with me... you are being prepared to do the work that matters…
you are being prepared to feel the warmth, and energy that resonates through
you, in this place…
And two… every number multiplies your ability to respond… your ambition can
be to seek… seeking to get as much life out of each moment as you possibly
can… seeking as much enjoyment, as much interest, as much experience, as
much understanding as you can contain... you don’t do this for labels… be a
better you, for you… you are being prepared to do the work that matters… you
are being attuned to feel this warmth and energy… this energy resonates through
you, connecting you to this place… there’s an opportunity here for you… almost
to the bottom of the stairs now... You can see better with the natural light… its
brighter along the walls and stairs... you can sense ahead of you there is a special
place. It makes you feel comfortable, safe, and curious... You sense this is
somehow both familiar and new… And one… you are being invited onward…”
The locations of Crown Order Protocol (COP) provides a planned route via
associating stories with mental geography in a hypnotic trance. As you begin to
map out and create these experiences, I recommend that you keep the same
transition descriptions between the foundational locations of the COP. Repeated
use of this hypnotic geography establishes a conditioned response with it and
makes it easier to create ongoing hypnotic adventures. Utilizing the COP will
also allow you to easily transfer control, and work together with other MCs and
276
Hypnotists. Establishing a standardized hypnotic process and geography allows
you to easily talk about the effects you are getting and encouraging with a subject
within these hypnotic spaces. To learn more about the COP, and get the
descriptions and imagery used for this, read The Tao of Relationship
Maintenance for Mind Controllers – A Hypnotic Guide to Long-Term Care &
Deliberate Change.
This is the point I have subjects exit the staircase deepener, or any other
deepener, as they start the journey into this hypnotic landscape. I will next
describe a shaded space that brings the subject through a tunnel. Their footfalls
echo against the walls and there are three bright lights up ahead of them. I use the
image below as an anchor and a representation for this space.
At this point, it’s a simple transition into a past life session. I recommend
working with the COP to have the subject experience The Chamber – Neutral
Identity State, and then The Chosen Door - Mutually Designed Identity State to
explore this technique further. It isn’t necessary for you to do that to begin
exploring regression today. When the subject steps through the door it will close
behind them. They will be standing at the beginning of a long corridor that has
many doors and seemingly extends infinitely. This space responds to my (MC’s
277
or Hypno Dom’s) direction and needs. The goal of this space is to move to the
door that is pulling the subject towards the goal you made together, or through
your instruction. Telling the subject to find the door that calls to them and
answers a need in their current life. Their subconscious will draw them to the
right place.
The doors in this hall are filled with the symbolic expressions of lives and
professions. The subject’s eyes are attracted to the scenes on tapestries and
painted all around them. It’s easy to get a sense of the stories that are connected
here. Instruct the subject that as they move through the threshold of the door,
they will be able to speak and respond to your questions. They will remain at this
level of hypnosis or go deeper, as they communicate with you. However, you
have them move through the chosen door do so now. Then comes the open-ended
questions that allow the subject to share with you the details of what they are
experiencing. The following are a list of questions that will get you moving the
subject through the scene. Add any of your own that seems relevant.
Look at your hands. Describe what you see.
Look at your feet. Describe what you see.
Is it light or dark there?
What do you notice around you?
What are you wearing?
What is the quality of anything you are wearing?
Are there any kind of tools, insignias, or other things that would indicate your
role at this moment?
What is the temperature there?
Is anyone there with you? What is your relationship with them? How are you
interacting with them?
What do you hear around you?
Describe the place you’re in.
278
What is your gender here?
What is your age?
Allowing yourself to become ever more aware of the events and circumstances
here. What impressions and ideas come to mind?
What are your circumstances now? What is happening at this moment? What are
your feelings and emotions here and now?
Is anyone from your current life or lives there with you in this time? Describe the
relationship and impressions you have.
General phrases to have the subject explore around their initial entry point.
Allowing time to progress a little bit. What is happening now?
Moving onward from this place where are you drawn to?
What is occurring at this time? What are you doing at this time and place?
Allowing time to move even further ahead, what is happening?
Allow this self to take you to someplace meaningful and communicate what they
wish to show you.
Talk with the world around you to understand these circumstances, the place, and
time.
Allowing time to move ahead to another event later in this lifetime.
What has happened in this lifetime to date? What is notable to you as you
advance through the years?
What events are occurring? What happened that brought you to this present
moment?
Moving to the final moments of life.
279
As you move ahead to the final moments in that lifetime describe what is going
on.
How old are you now?
Who is there with you or close by? What are your emotions, feelings,
experiences at this moment?
What are your circumstances, and what events lead you here?
What is important to note about this particular moment?
Allowing time to progress, you cross the threshold of life and death. Describe
this.
Look back on your body and describe the impressions you get.
What occurs in that place following your death? What do you feel is next for
you?
Send a message out. Ask to see your guardian spirit or angel here. Describe what
happens.
Now let's move upward and look to the light. Describe what you are
experiencing. Is anyone waiting for you?
Allow the light to embrace you. Describe that.
Looking back at the life you are leaving is there anything that stands out? Any
communication or things that you should know, or recognize to carry forward
with you?
What was the lesson or purpose for this particular lifetime? Was the lesson or
purpose achieved? Is this lesson or purpose being carried forward with you?
As you move through the light it heals the hurt and pain. Take it in and share how
this is expressed with you. Allow any healing to take place that is needed from
this lifetime onward.
280
Are there any teachers, guides, or other higher beings there? Joining them, what
do they say, do, ask?
At this point, you have the choice of whether to take the subject into another life
or back to their current life. Once back I recommend you take the subject to a
room along the hall with a fountain in it. While there have them ask their spirit
guide or angel to reveal himself to the subject. Have them look around the room,
hallway, and up toward the ceiling. Years ago, I had a past life regression and I
was told to do this very same thing. The hypnotist gave me a moment to look
around as I told her that I could not find a guide anywhere. Then I looked up
towards the ceiling. There was a snowflake like manifestation that radiated
energy and emotion. I never forgot this experience and did not have to believe in
a past life to receive it. When you finish working with the subject be sure you
reverse their journey through this hypnotic geography.
You do not have to believe in past life regressions to master these skills or have
influence with them. Using direct commands and open-ended questions that
aren’t leading is an art in itself. These techniques can be used in a similar way to
move into a potential future. Teaching this skill makes it a short skip and a jump
to life progression and other hypnotic adventures. If you would like to learn more
about how to regress yourself and others, one-on-one or in a group setting, I
recommend you look for A Practical Manual to Past Life Regression - Step by
Step Guide & Hypnosis Scripts for Your Metaphysical Practice, by Guzalia S.
Davis. This book is much more in depth than this brief overview.
Working Terms of the BDSM Lifestyle
This section contains the working terms to begin within the Ownership and
possession or O&p lifestyle. Individuals you encounter may also describe their
philosophy on how these definitions work for them within their personal kink
engagement. Kink here refers to sexual activities that fall outside of typical oldfashioned missionary sex and expected roles of relationship conformity. It is
281
important to ensure that everyone is working with the same definitions as you
begin to build relationships with others.
This lifestyle will demonstrate for you that treating others how you want to be
treated doesn’t always work. You must communicate with them to know how
they want to be treated and discover what specific behaviors mean to them. You
must learn to communicate and bridge the interpersonal gap of meaning and
values. So, if you want to show someone that they are loved you must first learn
how they recognize and appreciate those feelings of being loved. Expression and
communication become building blocks of every relationship, and the structure
of a power exchange relationship is very appealing to those who live this way
each and every day. This lifestyle is about communal self-discovery and
encouraging each other to find their strength, seek harmony in themselves and
the world, and never to fear something or someone because of their difference
alone.
These lifestyle definitions below are framed by actionable consent from all
parties in order to express and explore these identities together. When working
with individuals you’ll find that they can fit into more than one of these labels so
explore that. You will also find that some of these labels/terms are often used
together or in some cases used interchangeably. I recommend you explore and
define that with your partners. When guiding someone new through experiential
spaces you should take care to allow them additional time to process the
experiences. The very moment you describe and identify yourself as a Hypno
Dom you begin to represent and reflect this community. So, I ask you to live and
play by this code. Be the person that breaks the cycle of hurt. You were judged
too quickly, because of this… deliberate, and choose to understand. You have
been excluded, because of this lean towards acceptance. You have had people use
guilt and shame on you, because of this choose sincerity and compassion. Be the
person you needed, and demonstrate the strength that embodies the harmony of
your life. The smile on my face doesn’t mean my life is perfect. It just means I
appreciate everything I have and I want that for you too. Let’s begin going over
the terms that apply to this art. The answers that define the characteristics of
these terms have to be your own, because these terms describe and define
identity. Identity perceives our story and sets the tone for what we believe to be a
static reality.
282
Safeword: As Hypno Dom’s we are often presenting overwhelming experiences
that make it difficult to process what is happening verbally. A safe word is an
agreed upon spoken command between the Dom and the sub that can be
vocalized just in case things become too overwhelming. While this idea sounds
great it isn’t, and I don’t recommend them. I do not use them. A safe word is a
word that is not naturally spoken. A safe word is chosen because it won’t be
accidentally spoken. In the intensity of a passionate moment, anyone can be
overwhelmed and they may say “No.” over and over. No is not a safe word. No
means stop immediately to me. When using a safe word, the responsibility to
stop an overwhelming interaction is completely given over to the sub. What
happens if she cannot think of what it was or manage to speak it?
After this event, the sub may feel like something terrible just happened because
she could not both submit and be responsible for her own wellbeing in the midst
of M/s interaction. A safe word is one of those safety procedures that are taught
so that people have some training wheels to begin M/s and D/s interactions. I’m
not saying that setting up communication for the sub to communicate during
intense situations is not needed. This communication should begin the moment
you begin interacting with a sub. Safe words are too often treated like free-range
consent passports, and if I want to empower my subject, I want her to say no
when she means it. I don’t want her to keep reading herself to say “Nacho
bullion! My safe word is Nacho bullion!” This is an important conversation to
have with anyone you may have a session with.
I inform a newbie that anytime they use the word “No” all action stops. They are
to stay put until I am able to deal with them. This empowers them to say no and
use their voice in all areas of their life. “No” should be an all stop word for you
too. In the beginning, when the Dom and the sub are just building up these
communication expectations a session may stop and then start again, because
someone said no. That’s okay. Teach them if there is something they feel must be
communicated, they can say “Sir” and expect me to answer them. I will work
with someone a few times ensuring they understand and can reliably
communicate with me like this. I want to know if something is not quite right, or
if it's distracting from the experience. It could be a binding is too tight. They may
feel like they got a splinter, or they forgot something important. Whatever it is,
communication is what connects you together and discover how to act as one.
283
After All, we are acting as Masters and guides so we must make this experience
easy to understand, natural to communicate with, and it is us who shoulder the
responsibility of the consent given. We are providing the experience and should
be confident that we can take the sub into states of awareness and experiences
that we have prepared them to process and indulge in. Safe words in the Crown
Control System aren’t used because consistent communication for discipline and
safety are always in place. When a sub/slave is wearing a ball gag and restrained
I will go over communication with them before they are gagged. It might be a
specific piggy grunt, eyebrow raises, or it could be something else. If I have to
look away from the sub/slave for more than a few seconds I prefer something
with an element of sound like two taps on their stocks. If it is decided that the
sub/slave wants to struggle and say “no” for a specific interaction that is alright
with an agreement. For example, a consensual nonconsent interaction may have
one corner of the room be a pause location and any movement towards that space
is a directional signal to pause. I will purposely allow for more freedom for the
sub to get over to that spot. The sub may even say, “I want to get over there.” My
hands will be off them and I immediately stop.
Put your trust in communication and the Crown Control System. Do not rely on
the illusory assurance of safe words. If you go to public play areas that demand
you have a safe word to play in that space use the name of the play space or
simply saying “no”. Any alteration from a sub using Sir in a public space tells me
there is a problem and this level of communication comes from practicing
together.
Dom: Dom is the abbreviated version of dominant that gets tossed around in
lifestyle speak. Other titles that act as synonyms to this word in the world of kink
are Master, Owner, Daddy, and Top. Each of these describes subtle shifts in the
relationship. The term Dom is a generally used lifestyle title. Dom can at times
signify gender of the person in charge as you’ll notice Domme is often used by a
woman. Being a Dom also fits into a general philosophy. It often signifies a very
liberal concept of power exchange relationships. How far a Dom’s control
extends depends on the people involved in the relationship. People using this
term need to spend a considerable amount of time on ensuring that they have an
agreement in what they will and will not do. They should periodically give
feedback and check in to negotiate the relationship interaction or rules.
284
Master: A Master is an individual with a set of skills to reshape another under
their teaching. A Master takes a sub and transitions them into their objective role,
function, and trains their skills to represent what matters to the Master. A Master
may transition the sub from personhood into an objective state much like
property. A Master may also transition a sub to live somewhere between these
two extremes. A Master seeks to find an individual with the desire, capacity, and
ability to serve the way they see fit. A Master may choose to do this in part, or as
a whole transformation of the sub’s world. The sub belongs to the Master as long
as they are actively part of the Master’s care.
Owner: An Owner recognizes that the only preparation and skill needed by the
property is their ability to obey. Skills may make the property more or less
useful. An Owner steers property to skills and roles that develop what is desired
from them as property. Doms, Masters, and Owners can claim ownership of
those who serve them with consent. Sometimes a written contract will be
involved, but not always. Often a collar and a collaring ceremony will be
involved. All that is really needed for the Owner and possession relationship to
be established is the desire and agreement. I identify as a Dom, Master, and
Owner. I may be referred to any or all of these depending on the individual that
comes to me and the activities we engage in together. My preference is to train,
test, and develop someone long term.
I enjoy having submissive women pressed down by my feet and feeling their
responsiveness. Watching that wetness grow, intensified by their instinct to
surrender. Telling me how she feels this becoming a need, how it makes her feel
safe and taken care of, and she starts begging for it all again. Training and testing
a woman excites me. This experience will ensure that every hole a slave has will
be penetrated and her mouth will know every inch of my body. Her actions will
align with her words to demonstrate her service and validate that this is who she
is. She has nothing to fear or be ashamed of here. Putting all that together gets me
hard and happy. My goal is to have the sub becomes an extension of me. Their
service begins with learning how to develop within this interaction.
Top: The terms Top and bottom refer to dominant or submissive not to who is
physically on top in any particular position. The term “Top” is a very general
term, but I have not come across anyone who uses it as a title of identity
285
expression. For example, people may call me Master Joseph, Master Crown,
Hypno Dom, or an exclusive Top because I don’t switch. I have had someone tell
me that they were Sam’s Top. I have never had someone present themselves as
Top Philip or Philip Top as they introduced themselves. It even seems silly to
type it, but that is just because no one has made it a cool title yet. If you’re 19
years old reading this, do yourself a favor and put Top and not Dom or Master on
any online profiles. Too many of us will point and snicker because we know
almost everything you probably think you know you got from porn. Give
yourself time to learn and earn respect in the kink community. If you identify
with a title make it yours. Choose a title that matters to you. I have a friend who
chooses to be referred to as Pirate T and she’s a badass pirate mistress.
Switch: A switch is someone who participates in BDSM activities sometimes as
a dominant and other times as a submissive. Some people who switch will
describe themselves as versatile. When you ask them their preferred orientation
of dominant or submissive it’ll often depend on who their partner is. I have
noticed that versatile and hetero or homoflexible are now being used when
inquiring about an individual's sexual preferences often. If you’re bi and you
don’t have a male or female partner, you’re might be on standbi. Smile. Being a
switch is not the same as being hetero or homoflexible. Being a Switch refers to
their dynamic expressed while engaged in power exchange activities. In the
circles, I travel the term “Switch” is used often and is encountered much more
than the term “Top”.
Some individuals do not want to be referred to as anything except their primary
expression of dominant or submissive even if they switch. Others feel
comfortable embodying more than one energy inside them. I often come across
women that are submissive to a man and wanting to be dominant with another
woman. These aspects must be considered if you want to keep one woman and
play with others together, or keep many women and direct that play. Creating the
space where you train the Switch to act as a top with a woman means you are
also setting up the guidelines for that too. When I train a woman to Top one or
more slaves, she takes on the designation of being Alpha. That Alpha designation
means there are clear guidelines when this behavior will be engaged in. The
Alpha is always sub to me, but that does not mean a scene cannot happen where
she is serving me and being served at the same time.
286
Always remember there is no formula, technique, or stereotype that will make a
relationship work for you. Only you can do that because we are living examples
of how relationships can work. There will be people that dated for ten years get
married and end up filing for divorce a few years later. Strangers have fucked
and threesomes agreed to be no strings attached have ended up in committed
relationships. Some people never get married, move in with partners, or have
kids and have happy social lives with partners. Not roles, nor societal
expectations have the answer for our relationships making it through tomorrow.
That depends on us so do what makes you happy.
Demisexual: A demisexual is a person who does not experience sexual attraction
unless they form a strong emotional connection with someone. This term is more
commonly used in terms of bonding, and forming intimate relationships with
someone. The term demisexual is often used by individuals associating with an
intimacy orientation leaning "halfway between" sexual and asexual. You see
demisexual and you should know that leading with overly sexual language in
your communication will often get you passed over fast.
Sapiosexual: A sapiosexual person is someone who finds intelligence, wit, and a
responsive mind to be the most attractive feature in a partner. This is a person
seeking engaging experiences with another person and will more readily look
past their potential partners looks to the person they are.
Asexual: Being asexual means a person has a lower sexual interest, but can still
have an attraction to others. Many asexuals still have interest in romantic
relationships and have sex. Sex itself, is just not as high a priority as a connection
for them.
Compersion: This is a state of empathetic happiness and joy experienced when
an individual's current or former romantic partner experiences happiness and joy
through another romantic partner or interest. Compersion has often been referred
to as the opposite of jealousy, and some advocates state that developing it within
oneself is a healthy process for combating jealousy.
Limits: When someone asks about limits, they are referring to what a person
does not consent to engaging in while partaking in their kink. Hard limits are
sometimes referred to as non-negotiable limits. Soft limits are those more easily
287
negotiable for consent when the person feels secure with a partner. A practical
consideration when dealing with limits is that they are state and context based.
Hypno Doms’ will offer a variety of experiences that take individuals out of their
everyday way of thinking about themselves and the world. Relationships and
people develop through communication and experience. You may have a lot of
limits or you may very few. Each person who is part of your relationship will
have their own opinions and limits to consider. Repeatable results are the
cornerstone of science, consent, and active participation in living a life that
matters. This is a topic you will need to be very accustomed to. It won’t matter if
you are talking online or in person. People talk freely about their limits and will
ask about yours. You are here to develop an opinion. Ensure you investigate what
works for others, just as much as you explore what can work for you.
Sub-space: Sub-space is a term used to describe a state of flow where a person is
actively absorbed in the thoughts, feelings, and sensations of their submission
and service. They are totally present and in the moment. Dom-space is the term
used to describe a Dom entering their active flow state where they’re absorbed in
the thoughts, feelings, and sensations of their dominance. I have never heard of
someone identifying with Switch-space as of 3/5/19.
Aftercare: The practice of aftercare is very attractive for a lot of people. It is not
standard practice for everyone, and how aftercare happens is not a one size fits
all concept. Aftercare simply refers to the time and attention given to partner(s)
after an intense sexual and/or hypnotic experience. Aftercare doesn’t need to be
overly sentimental, grand, or even creative. Aftercare is meant to be an
intentional display of acknowledgment, appreciation, communication, and at
times a routine way to pamper one another. This is an activity that you both agree
on as this is something that falls under relationship maintenance. For some
aftercare is an intense cuddle moment where partners are held tightly and slowly
transition back to the world together. Not everyone wants that.
I have had subs and slaves want to be ordered to their floor pillow, to lay
between my legs and suck on me, want to curl up and nap, and want to soak in a
jacuzzi in silence. After engaging in intense experiences like hypnosis and
BDSM, both the subject, and Dom can experience a rapid drop in stimulation,
emotion, and energy. Respectively, this phenomenon is called the sub-drop or a
288
dom-drop, as the endorphins and adrenaline still pumping through their body
slowly begins dispersing. Not everyone experiences this in the same way and
some may not be affected much by this at all. It only takes one time for a sub or a
dom to be affected strongly by a scene to fully appreciate the planning in setting
up aftercare protocols and expectations.
Aftercare represents a moment in time where there’s a planned pampering, and it
ultimately demarks the shift out of the mindsets and behavior within a scene.
Some people must return to the office, take care of kids, and move on to other
priorities after these moments shared together. At times life would be easier if all
subs could just be put back in their closet or cage, and when we want them again,
they are present, attentive, and perky. I have heard subs and slaves say the same
thing about Masters, except we go away into magic boxes and pop back in a
flash. People don’t usually work like that and while it can happen, it doesn’t
happen that way most of the time.
There are times that people, in general, can feel unsure or unsatisfied post-sex
and aftercare can often relieve some of this. Getting people communicating about
what they liked and didn't like about an experience can even increase the
satisfaction felt about an experience by extending the intimacy through
conversation. This is the debrief that can give you both information to develop
and improve what you’re doing. The experience of providing aftercare is flexible
but translates well to what is done after sharing some form of intimacy. If you're
using aftercare practices after casual sex, the experience might simply entail
letting your guard down, discussing the experience, and making the other person
feel appreciated, sexy, and desirable. Aftercare should be good for both of you
and sometimes that will mean compromise.
Aftercare is also dependent on the situation, and not everyone wants the same
things all the time. You’ll find out these bits of info by talking through the
experience later, and sometimes the feedback will surprise you. For example, at
times a person may not want to be touched at all and that is fine. Aftercare is
relationship maintenance and that often feels like work, but the people you are
fucking and doming will think of you as a better lover because of it. Discover if
your partners enjoy extended aftercare, or a pat on the head and a warm towel.
Relationship maintenance is something that can be engaged in even with a one289
night stand. Every one of us who have been in a relationship knows what it feels
like to be taken for granted by a partner. Aftercare alone can help to alleviate
much of this perspective as you engage them with affection, pampering, and
attention. This concept is not universal and it is sometimes seen as less important.
It is, however, one of the first things individuals who are new to this lifestyle will
notice and they will often say its appealing to them. You might be surprised that
subs enjoy planning aftercare activities for you both with your encouragement.
I have found that many people who are new to BDSM discover aftercare from
porn, BDSM community sites, and even romance novels. Aftercare as a concept
is magically emphasized for them, and if they aren’t getting it than their partners
are taking them for granted. While you can look at the most attractive person in
the world and be certain that someone is bored fucking them, aftercare is not, and
should not be about just one of you. Talk about what matters and I’m telling you
aftercare can help continue the intimacy and energy you have in an experience.
So, making sure to take time for cuddles, stroke each other's hair, and savor the
moment after enjoying experiences of intimacy whenever possible. A Hypno
Dom may even consider this time spent on aftercare as anchoring. When you use
aftercare in this fashion you are creating an opportunity to utilize a natural trance
state. What you make part of aftercare is limited only by your imagination.
Scenes: A scene is an experience where negotiated kink activities are acted out
either publicly or privately. The term scene is casually thrown around in many
different lifestyle conversations. Hearing something like the following isn’t
unusual. “Those two redheads had a public scene with Master Crown last night at
NOBLE, which is a local dungeon in New Orleans.” For some people, a scene
can be like a stage play where they act out an experience as it unfolds, and for
other people, it is a safe moment where they can engage in activities that make
them feel good, whole, and express a part of themselves that is held back from
much of society. Other ways people refer to a scene are play, encounter, service,
session. I have heard a couple of people refer to their scene as a moment of
unrestrained identity expression.
Lifestyle communities: Today so many people are questioning our society’s
values, and asking what gives meaning to life. They bemoan the “loss of
community,” and are looking for ways to design their lives and express living
290
meaningfully to them. Think about lifestyle communities as an intentional
community where people are drawn together by interests and values. They are a
collection of people who have chosen to come together with common interests,
and each cooperatively seeking to create and express a lifestyle that reflects their
shared values and interests. The lifestyle communities that express and share
kink, love interests, and identity expression are numerous. I’m talking everything
from Christian M/s, BDSM, O&P, LGBTIQQ, Swingers, Polyamory,
Homesteaders, etc., basically, it’s a journey and adventure following one’s
passion for living out particular values and philosophy in daily life. The things
that we do and yearn to do more of are our lifestyle interests and community.
Relationship anarchy: Relationship anarchy (RA) is a philosophical perspective
on personal boundaries and relationships. Relationship anarchy is the belief that
relationships should not be bound by rules aside from what the people involved
in the relationship mutually agreed upon. A relationship anarchist believes in
total freedom for their personal relationships, and every partner decides on a case
by case basis what they want the relationship to be like. They may have sex with
more than one person, they may be celibate their whole lives, they may live with
someone they aren’t having sex with, they may live alone while being partnered,
they may raise a child with one celibate partner, or multiple sexual partners, they
may raise a child as a multiparty parent, and they may do just about anything that
their choice and circumstances allow for.
Relationship anarchists believe that no behavior is inherently romantic, and RA
philosophy only recognizes behavior to be inherently sexual when a person is
using one’s genitals to engage in sex. What determines the nature of behavior is
the individual’s feelings and intentions behind it. Those involved in RA see no
guarantees of commitment or complete emotional intimacy in any relationship.
They try to ensure that no scale of importance is used to compare each person
and relationship. Sexual relationships are not superior to non-sexual
relationships, romantic relationships are not superior to nonromantic friendships,
and that equality means that a nonsexual and/or nonromantic friend has the same
amount of access to love, intimacy, physical affection, and support as anyone
else in their life. Living RA means you will have to express and explore your
relationship(s) as an agreement of actions as everything is a social contract.
291
This relationship style is not an easy one but it can be fulfilling for the right
people. This is a style that a Master may wish to impart within the relationships
of their House. Since each person has a different sense of ethics, values, and
needs RA serves as more of a vehicle for individuals to express what they want
in nontraditional relationships. Not everyone wants to think about this level of
detail with their current or future relationship. When meeting new people, you
have to learn their rules and begin negotiating between all parties. Think about
what works for you and the boundaries and agreements you will need to adopt
and establish.
Cuckold: Not simply a man whose wife/girlfriend cheats on him, but rather a
man who actually gets aroused by knowing or seeing his partner in sexual
situations with other men, such as flirting, kissing, fondling, and sex. In
particular, situations where he is NOT actively participating, but instead sidelined
to the fucking, just observing, and/or even completely not part of the scene.
Unless he is used as the fluffer or cleanup that is. The men who enjoy fucking a
woman while cucking her boy toy in this sort of arrangement are called Bulls.
These activities can be paired with some humiliation play for the cuck. Some
woman also enjoy being cucked. While the majority if cucks will be men you
will come across cuckqueans also. A cuckquean or cuckquean is a female
cuckold (cuckold being the more common word for wittol). Cuckquean refers is
the female equivalent of the male cuckold.
Daddy or Daddy Dom: A Daddy or Daddy Dom, is a dominant male who takes
on the role of a father-like figure. While daddies can be domineering and
authoritative, they are also usually protective much like a real father would be.
This type of dominant in the lifestyle is most recognized in daddy and little girl
relationships, where the little girls are actually adult women playing in their role.
Age play and Daddy play are often misunderstood to those outside of the kinky
community. Acting as a daddy has nothing to do with pedophilia, nor does it
have anything to do with incest. It simply mimics aspects of the nurturing
relationship between a father and child. A power exchange relationship with a
daddy is more about letting go of one's responsibilities, as a warm dominant
figure takes the reins of control.
292
The daddy is responsible for taking care of his little girl, or little boy, but he is
also responsible for punishment when it's necessary. A Daddy Dom usually
knows he is one and he doesn’t have to be convinced of it. You will find Daddy
Dom Little Girl abbreviated as DDLG in online groups and for munches. The sub
who takes on this innocent role is often called a Little. DDLG relationships don't
have to be sexual. Littles tend to like watching their favorite cartoons or movies,
doing art, playing with stuffies, and sometimes a sippy cup, binky, or a diaper
can be involved. The age of the Little is up to them. DDLG is a submissive and
dominant relationship except its restraints and toys are often those things we all
had growing up. When a woman takes on the authoritarian Domme role she is
called a Mommy in this relationship category.
Erotic Electrostimulation: Electrostimulation, also known as electrosex and estim, has been with us for as long as we have had electricity. Electrostimulation
uses low-frequency electrical stimulation on or along the body of males and
females alike. In the 1970s, kinky folk discovered that bare speaker wires could
deliver a pleasant tingling sensation and they began using music for rhythmic
electrostimulation. At that time, there were no professionally made attachments
for such play, so people built their own out of copper plumbing parts and other
metal pieces. Resistors were placed in series to control the intensity of the current
for safety. This is a fetish that has grown rapidly through the years and is
appreciated by many who partake in bondage of all sorts.
There are so numerous kinds of electrostimulation devices now, but the first
thing that comes to many people’s minds are jolt inducing cattle prods, Tasers,
and the farm friendly electric fence. Today some electrostim units can be
connected to the internet for remote play and even controlled via radio frequency
by key fobs. These devices are used to provide various sensations and are not just
about shocking someone. Sensations produced may feel like getting stroked by a
partner, tingles, spasming, and more. The people who enjoy electrostimulation
get excited about how these sensations feel like it’s coming from within you.
Some people discover these machines at Fetish Fairs as there are booths that
offer demos so novices can get a sense of these sensations. If someone brings up
electrostimulation for a session with you just know that devices like this are even
used for cognitive therapy, sexual dysfunction, masturbatory play, and are not the
293
mind blanking shock therapy seen in movies. It’s still okay to take it slow and not
Taser yourself.
Erotic humiliation: Not every bit of sensual sorcery you use will be tactically
produced, and erotic humiliation is one of those tangible intangibles. You should
have noticed that it often pops up in the many categories here. As with all sexual
activities, some people have sexual fantasies that involve humiliation, and others
undertake this as part of a scene. Sexual fantasies relating to humiliation are
common and what is considered humiliation play varies from person to person.
One of the most common misconceptions about humiliation play is that it's antifeminist. But the truth is many feminists enjoy being called names such as
“bitch,” “slut,” or “whore” as they engage in these scenes too. Some sexual
humiliation involves inflicting a little pain such as spanking, but much of it is far
more focused on ridicule, mocking, deprivation, and embarrassment. Let me
share two examples to demonstrate just how similar this is across gender lines.
Amy is such a cuckquean. Her boyfriend brought home some chick from the bar
last night to fuck. They told her to sit in the corner and watch, and then
demanded she clean them both up while calling her dirty, humiliating names.
Amy loved it and keeps asking when they can do it again.
Jenn brought home her friend Sarah from the club for her boyfriend to fuck. She
sat on the side and directed action with her boyfriend and her friend Sarah. Jenn
was telling them exactly what to do and how to do it. She loved dominating them
both every chance Jenn got.
In both examples, gender could easily be flipped. What matters here is what the
partners like, consent to, and are actively seeking out. When someone reveals a
fetish to a partner, this usually is a result of comfort and trust between them.
However, the desire to be humiliated may be a motivating cause for confession
also. The act of confessing can itself be humiliating and part of a scene.
Humiliation is something that a sub usually discovers their preference for in the
moment, and later they find themselves seeking it out. Humiliation play is 100%
reliant on strong communication so tell your cock pocket it’s time for a spin or
she’ll be crying lesbian tears. So much of what we say in the throes of passion
turns out to be a sentimental comedy. Just be sure you talk through the play and
294
the language used before you jump into this. These words can hurt as well as
allow someone to reclaim them to heal.
Primal: Primal play in the kink context is about getting to a place where the
masks of civilization fall away. Primal play encourages people to act on their
urges and impulses without overthinking them. These coital commandos describe
their urgings as raw, unfiltered carnal feelings, but they consider joy, silliness,
deep feelings of love, intimacy, bonded connectedness, and even sadness and
grief to be primal expressions. “Primal” doesn’t necessarily have to mean “being
rough” (though it often does). Behaving Primal is often acting animalistic and
that includes scratching, biting, general brute force, and animal-type noises like
howling, snarling, growling, etc. Primal is being unrestrained and unfiltered with
whatever your feelings present are. The term “Primal” can also refer to a type of
play, an identity, or a style of relationships where primal play is at times
synonymous with pet play. Primal tendencies do not always conform to rigorous
structures involved with protocol, but Primal relationships often have d/s
elements displayed within them. Primal play can be found subdivided into
preferred roles such as:
Predator: A primal who seeks to hunt and attempt to capture prey.
Prey: A primal who seeks to be hunted by and bound to a predator.
A friend of mine once said to me being Primal means I can fuck who I catch.
That about sums this category up with a growl and a snarl.
Breeding: I have heard the phrase “You breed it, you own it” many times over
the years. Most of you will have undoubtedly heard of or practiced what many
call breeding. You maybe did not think much about it. Breeding is the act of
fucking another person bareback (without a condom) and cumming inside of
them. Breeding can be viewed as a form of dominance and an expression of
ownership over a person. This term is used by those who are straight and the gay
community. It would not be uncommon to hear someone say the following:
“She was on all fours for the breeding party last night. One day she may surprise
me with triplets.”
“William met this guy at a bar and after a few drinks he took him out to the car
and bred him right there.”
295
The above examples illustrate that this is not an impregnation fetish. An
impregnation fetish is an intense arousal from the possibility of impregnating
one's partner or becoming pregnant via the act of unprotected vaginal intercourse.
The impregnation fetishist is turned on by the riskiness of their actions rather
than an actual desire to face the consequences. Both males and females are
described as getting bred simply by the deposit of seed from owner to property.
Your kink is not my kink: YKINMK is a common kink acronym in the kink
community. Often this is said when one person isn’t into an activity, but it’s not a
judgmental statement about what brings pleasure to them so long as it’s safe,
sane and consensual. Saying YKINMK is a clear but polite statement of dislike.
Training and conditioning: Training is talked about in every new M/s
interaction and sprinkled through many posts on lifestyle topics. Training is
designed instruction and preparation for a subject’s particular role, function, and
participation in your service. It is context specific and short term. For example, if
you are training to be a black belt you are preparing mind, body, and spirit to
perform appropriately in context. Once you have proven yourself to be of a
certain level of skill and ability within this discipline, every practice after that
point you undertake is to hone and condition your mastery of mind, body, and
spirit with this discipline. Conditioning is long term maintenance of disciplined
practice and exercise of mind, body, and spirit to ensure mastery level
performance under any circumstances.
Think about how you will have your sub demonstrate their trust, discipline, joy,
obedience, knowledge, selflessness, and acceptance in context. To do that you’ll
work to have her trust absolutely, accomplish without hesitation, or holding
anything back. What you’re asking for takes courage, trust, and acceptance. Love
is not necessary but it helps. Everything presented here falls under these related
values. In a world where so many relationships can become toxic, destructive,
and disappointing, the Hypno Dom becomes a rock of stability in a continuously
changing world. Never underestimate the power of security, stability, and ability
to bring purpose and meaning to a person’s life. You as the Master and Hypno
Dom are the socializing agent that is conditioning correct action, good thinking,
and celebrates the achievements that happen as part of service.
296
Etiquette training: One of the anticipatory ambitions a slave must develop is to
plan ahead in order to ensure she can provide pleasure for her owner in every
way. Every action undertaken, and every word spoken is a reflection on her, her
training, and consequently her Master. A slave is to be educated in her service to
you. Your attention on her is to ensure that she is able to overcome awkwardness,
rudeness, dealing with a difficult conversation, and is not sloppy. A slave should,
therefore, learn etiquette in all its forms for the circumstances she will be in. A
slave to me becomes an artisan of influence and etiquette. I expect a slave to be
organized, aware of her duties, and knowledgeable enough to know how to bring
out the best in any environment. Developing these experiences is not easy but it
creates a slave with confidence in their ability to run a home, a business, and is
able to hold her own in talking with anyone.
While some Masters prefer to keep all slaves in the same manner, they might
keep a dog or cow that’s just one role for a slave. I have had slaves that
specifically stated that they desire to be an animal and this was how they want to
be treated. That is their role but not the only one they will fulfill with me. Those
slaves were able to roam a field naked and collared until they found the shade of
trees to nap under. When I would take them into the house later, they’d have a
dog crate in a guest room, and an Amazon box with a dog bed in the living room.
While this role is appealing to many at times, I still want more from them than
this alone. Not every Master will want more, but this gets back into personal
preference and self-knowledge.
Not everyone is a Hypno Dom and not everyone wants to be. Not every role is a
good fit for consistent expression in today’s world or simply the environment you
are in. I no longer live a home where it’s easy to let a naked slave out to pee or
fuck on the grass in the sunshine. I now live in the city and while day trips like
this are possible, they are not my highest priority. Things will always change. We
live in a world that is often highly scheduled for working and loosely scheduled
with personal time. More meaningful practices are encouraging a greater
emphasis on privacy, silence, and the need to disconnect from the daily world. A
subject may find this experience with you like a kinky boarding school and the
students are not always wrapped up in studies or practical skills. I mention this
here because many people think this has to be 24/7 service, and that is a lifestyle
change for everyone. Plan out how to onboard your subs into one or more roles.
297
While learning the different styles and displays of etiquette you may feel like it is
never ending study. I can promise you that its time well spent with a slave, and
they will make you grateful for this time. This is just one useful building block
that represents a world of experiences and knowledge to explore together.
Ideally, you are designing structure and role related responsibilities that are
sustainable should have one or more people serving you over time. Living and
training someone to be yours takes on an intimate intensity that is difficult to
describe simply. Being this utterly present and engaged with someone is not just
attractive, it is what everyone knows they want once they get a taste of what is
possible. In this focused connection with each other, there is less energy for
stress, drama, or distractions. A slave will know the pleasure of pleasing her
Master and her mind will work to anticipate her duty through the presented
needs.
A slave honors me by her performance and service. I notice where her attention
moves and it's my task to correct even that when I observe it drift. Shifting
attention to service-oriented tasks designed to ground the subject within the
service-oriented mindset. Tasks like filling a half empty glass of water, removing
socks, getting me dried off coming out of the shower, etc., the routines of life are
the preparatory details of a service-oriented life. When people serve you, they
need instruction on how to become involved and integrated into your life. Some
people fill roles with us for a short time and other people come to us with
certainty staying for the long haul. It doesn’t matter if they are new to your life or
experienced in this lifestyle. In every relationship, there are elements that will
need to be learned, relearned, and abandoned from how they lived before. Living
this way makes it very natural to pick up on each other’s moods and desires. The
heart of training beats with gratitude of engagement with life. What we live for
together becomes the defining character of all these terms. We teach who we are.
This is just the tip going in and it's all you need to get started.
Coming together
The topic of how best to come together is frequently talked about. The question
that usually gets asked after that is how to meet people into what you're into. This
298
chapter is about communicating what's important to you and exploring the
potential fit with someone, or somebodies, you want to partner with in the
lifestyle. In talking about this topic, the only way I know how to get into it is by
sharing what's important to me and what I do. Talking with people and sharing
what’s important gets the message across about what you're seeking. Your
circumstances may be different than mine, but I invite you to use the parts of this
that fit well with you. For some interests, you will have to work harder than
others to find likeminded and interested people. I encourage you to go out and
start talking to people about things that matter to you. This chapter is simply on
communication to do just that.
So now you’ve found someone who has some kinks, that's great. How do you
transition into talking about what you want to do? The answer is simple and it's
engaging with others. If you are being playful and fun with a conversation ask a
tempting or teasing question that gets you both talking about things you will
enjoy. If you’re going from reading their profile online to saying hello in person
why not start with something you both have in common? Often, you’ll be able to
take away topics of interest from their profile, their behavior, and project the
feeling you want to convey. I mention online a lot here because many people
discover each other online first, or will pop a person’s name into Google right
after saying hello at an event. As you do this be subtle and give respect and
courtesy to your potential partner with what you find. Air on the side of
respectful nonjudgmental communication for what to share. You do not have to
agree with everything a person has on a profile or says to respectfully interact
with them. Those new and familiar conversation partners will associate the
adjectives you use to describe other people with your personality. This
phenomenon is called spontaneous trait transference.
As you engage in conversation listen and move into the topics you’re both
passionate about. You'll be sharing what you want and what delights you with
M/s experiences usually in quick topical changes. They'll be doing the same and
their experience, history, and values will be communicated through their stories
and humor. This is where looks matter 48% and harmonized preferences paired
with responsive enthusiasm are 52% of the equation. I get behind this math if a
person is open for the experience, looking for more than just a pretty picture, and
299
will give you their time and energy to establish a connection. There will always
be someone more attractive and less attractive than you. A lot of attraction comes
from how you make others feel and what you inspire them to express. Engaging
with others is often less about us, but how they perceive us, and respond to those
perceptions.
I have had many meaningful interactions with people sharing only the iconic face
of a cartoon character wearing a billycock. Trust me when I tell you that what
you say, and how you say it, matters a lot more than your beauty. If you drop
dead handsome it helps but it isn’t everything. When you make it past the sharing
pictures, checking off the kinks list, and are into stories about the ideals of
exactly what you're both looking for; that’s where you want to be. At that point,
it's all up to you. You beat the math and stand a chance at getting beyond stranger
danger. After putting yourself out there it still comes down to a numbers game.
How you present your experience, likes, and perspectives will resonate or they
won't. I call this the I like trucks and you like trucks moment. It's shared interest
and common ground that becomes the foundation to explore everything else.
Centered around the M/s dynamic is your chance to do a value elicitation if you
really want to dive deep into this aspect with the other person. If you need to look
back on the section going over value elicitation.
Some words of advice. Do not treat a person who identifies as a sub, slave,
property, etc., as less than if you both have not agreed to explore that dynamic
together. Even if you are both into humiliation and degradation you should
respectfully pace and lead into these areas. You can deferentially do this and pull
back if the person isn't following you to that space. For example, if she/he says
"Talking with you is giving me ideas." You can say something like this. "Talking
like that can get you tied down and fucked." The response you get will allow you
to know where to go from here. Then back off if her reply isn't sexual. Allow the
person to come to you and demonstrate where they are. Recognize that being too
aggressive can be a turn off for some also. There’s no getting around talking with
others for consent, encouragement, and agreement.
When to introduce the title of Sir or Master into the dialogue should go off the
rapport you're getting and the agreement set in the conversation together. If the
300
person is new, or if you are unsure, use the term as a guide with their feelings.
Tell them that when they begin to feel submissive, or when they feel it’s
appropriate to begin referring to you as Sir or Master. This is commonly done
before any formal training as this question of addressing you should be clear at
the agreement of roles. Pay attention to the moments the subject uses these terms.
These are the moments that they are responding to their submissiveness with you.
As I meet people, I want to get to know the person they are. I want to know what
makes them happy, what drives them, how they imagine the future, and what we
have in common. There are people I'm interested in that we just have kink
interests in common. We like the same things around those interests, but that's it.
There are people that I have met that we have more social interests in common
and less kink common. For me, there really has to be a balance in these areas if
I'm to consider a long-term arrangement. Working towards a common goal, and
training them to fit within a larger role can also work if you’re limiting their role
with you. Each person we accept into our life dedicates a specific amount of time
that we can be social and express ourselves as M/s. All of us have a finite amount
of energy and time, because of this we must set aside time from other activities,
and create this space intentionally. There’s no getting around putting in the work,
the time, and energy while things are new and exciting if you want to establish a
strong connection for the future. It's best to begin with structure and discipline as
new skills are always added through those elements.
Figuring out how well someone fits in our life takes time. There was a time I
thought bad sex is still sex. That was good enough, but enough of that kind of sex
gets old. It took having some very boring sex to realize that I needed more than
sex to really be satisfied. That sentiment got me into the focused dynamic of
relationship training you have here today. It's more than what is liked, desired,
and pleasing. When teaching another to surrender I must go first into my Dom
space and invite them to take their subspace. The subspace and the Dom space
are as much energies as they are expressions of our nature. Everything we are
sharing is communicating what matters to us. For example, I do not use safe
words. I have seen people use them to put the responsibility of stopping an
interaction onto the very person who is supposed to letting go and surrendering
with the flow of events. As a Master, I am presenting new, sometimes repetitive
301
instruction, and at times the interaction is overwhelming and over stimulating to
the sub. That automatic response is a natural response.
The biggest offenders I have witnessed violating safe words and consent values
tend to be those who preach safety first for everyone. Ask for help and advice
whenever you think you need it or want another opinion. Educate yourself and
choose for yourself. Don’t allow anyone to continually ask for updates of more
details or bully you about an event after asking them for advice. It’s okay to say
no to anyone you do not want in your business. If you would like to learn more
about consent and these issues surrounding consent, I suggest you begin your
search here. www.ncsfreedom.org/
There is no universally accepted way to engage in kink or life. Some people are
in the lifestyle just for the sex and that’s fine if you consider this simply a
bedroom activity. Many of us don’t. Training for an M/s relationship must have
communication and trust as part of its foundation. Communication and consent
are important and necessary. When I talk about slavery, or being property, this is
a consensual identity and choice. A slave or a submissive becomes an extension
of myself and training someone often establishes a bond for life. They are attuned
to me and I am tuned into them. That attuning process relies on consistent
communication and conditioning. If there is something that a slave is unsure
about it is their duty to ask for clarification in order to perform their task to the
best of their abilities.
In your search for community and a partner, or partners, be good to each other.
Be respectful, be dynamic, be curious, and be passionate. We are developing the
life we want through our choices and shaping the experiences that activate
harmony of character within ourselves and others. In these moments we can
allow everything that isn't us to just fall away. Opening up about our love,
passion, and what we need in our life takes courage. This life is not for everyone,
and I would never want it to be. It takes dedication, discipline, and desire. Not
everyone has that in the same way or in the same capacity. Embrace your
weirdness and step out of routine to move closer to what you want. I invite you to
take my hand and go on a journey that brings you to where the Masters are. To
learn more about these topics and advance your skills check out my book The
Tao of Relationship Maintenance for Mind Controllers.
302
Creating A Personalized Hypnotic Experience
When working with subjects we have to take into account not just their interests,
but what we agree on together for a hypnotic experience. This chapter will be
focused on creating a personalized hypnotic experience. Your success will come
from your ability to combine different aspects of experiences and communicate
with your subject verbally and nonverbally. When beginning to work with a
subject you want to inspire trust by sharing the experience you agreed on with
them. Do not engage in bait and switch. You will not only damage your
reputation if you do, but you will find that few people want to work with you.
For example, if you’ve agreed to share a relaxing and comfortable experience
with a subject to help them unwind it would be a breach of trust to do an
induction that focuses on helplessness and loss of control. If you break trust, they
may become uncomfortable with all the ideas you’re presenting to them, and the
subject might feel uncertain, or perhaps unsafe doing sessions with you. There is
a time to engage in kink aspects but pushing these themes on people is doing so
without their consent. Do not do it.
When the subject wants to engage in kinky hypnotic themed adventure and
you’ve agreed to set it up, enjoy it. I’ve seen too many newbies think a bait and
switch is alright and that can leave a sub feeling manipulated, coerced, teased,
powerless, and toyed with in an unfun way. Have your sessions focus on feelings
of safety and empowerment when a sub asks for it. They are telling you what
they need. Please, do what you say. Communicate about the elements of the
experiences you are providing; get agreement and consent for the experiences
you are offering. Doing so will guarantee that you are providing a personalized
experience because you’ll be working with the subject’s input. When you work
this way, you’ll be communicating with the most preferred elements that the
subject already knows affects them deeply.
This book has already provided many elements you can share to flavor themed
experiences with a subject. I’ll provide a short list of additional themes you can
incorporate in your hypnotic menu offering, or use as one-offs for your themed
hypnotic adventures. You’ll still want to get criteria from the subject about
303
descriptions of how the sub experiences these elements as well as their consent to
explore them. Not every iota of detail needs to be defined before trance or
hypnosis. These elements can be further described or developed while being
fractionated in and out of the state. As you read this section keep in mind this
quote from Neil Gaiman. “Fiction can show you a different world. It can take
you somewhere you’ve never been. Once you’ve visited other worlds, like those
who ate fairy fruit, you can never be entirely content with the world that you
grew up in. And discontent is a good thing: people can modify and improve their
worlds, leave them better, leave them different, but only if they’re discontented.”
Be the porn you wish to see in the world. The first step to getting to more of what
you want is deciding that you are not going to stay where you are.
Enjoy my brief hypnopedic list of themed hypnotic adventures possible. It’s far
from exhaustive, but worth your time planning out how’d you make them
happen. Application is everything.
•
Safe, protected, and having a place where you belong.
•
Everything connects back to you, thirsty to submit, and happily owned.
•
Blanked, intelligence and will be drained away, and arousal is
conditioned to automatic obedience to you.
•
Drugged, amnesia, and forced to enjoy unconditionally obeying.
•
Dazed, and waking up after being experimental drugged, and discovering
your new hyper-sexual responses.
•
Slipping between identities as you sleep.
•
Playful Little, addicted to hypnosis, and becoming many different horny
people with a cue.
304
•
Playful Little, discovering that more play makes them hornier, and they
need to convince you to play with them.
•
Kidnapped, held captive, and fighting how good it feels to be remade.
•
Emptied of thoughts, identity, and emotions, programmed through forced
orgasms, and tested for the new mission.
•
Signing a contract of slavery or one’s soul, being continually conditioned
by a hypnotic helper, and being trained to seduce and bring home others.
•
Empowered, focused and driven. Coming home to offer your submission
as a time traveling servant to the House of the Crown.
•
Submission locked on a person or thing. Automatically obeying, and a
countdown is set for your submission time limit. When the submission
alarm sounds you have no memory of what happened.
•
Tricked, addicted to semen, and go through withdrawals without it.
•
My presence awakens you. My touch makes you more alive, and you
become aware of a hidden level of existence by becoming
unquestioningly mine.
•
Blackmailed into signing a contract of slavery until the debt is paid. You
have little choice but to earn your release.
•
A movie is selected and plot points begin to become active in your life.
You realize this movie has become reality, but there are some differences
you can’t quite understand.
•
Tricked to open a cursed object you have no choice but obey me or the
spirit hunting you will have its way with you. There is no other way but
305
to become my apprentice and learn magic.
•
Selected by a secret organization you’ve been taken to be trained as a
mind controlled operative. You are now considered property and will be
trained to be a weapon and a spy.
The Importance of Being Clear
Destiny is a gift. It offers a precise goal even when walking an unclear path.
Trusting in destiny helps to filter out what isn’t really important. Some go their
entire lives seeking a purpose that might claim them and lift the burden of doubt
from their shoulders. If you represent yourself as a Master or Dom you should
have a somewhat clear sense of what you want. You also should have an idea of
the time, energy, and the expectations you have for others. You become a
purpose all your own as you take the lead. This thought process can contain the
type of relationship you want with someone. Yes, it’s alright to figure that out
together with a prospect. You can offer snippets of that experience while still
remaining flexible like the following sentence. “Ideally seeking long term, but
open to short term with likeminded subs. Kinky folks and others interested in
hypnosis and mind control are also encouraged to reach out and say hello.” Ask
yourself if the message you are putting out there is clear and communicating
what you want. This what this section seeks to explore.
Do you want to really learn about the lifestyle? It's not just about reading and
watching porn on the internet. There is no one right way to do BDSM, D/s, M/s,
or any relationship style (with or without the kink). It's about living it. It's about
talking with others and making connections through commonalities of good
partnerships. Sometimes the best people you can meet are those that think
differently than us. Even when they're thinking is as different as night and day.
As you read this chapter think about all that’s being presented, and try to answer
this one question fully for yourself. What do you offer as a Master?
In the BDSM world, there needs to be cooperative roles, passion, and responsive
participation. The journey of a Hypno Dom is not a straight or level path laid
down in front of us. Our path is a spiral of intention, feedback, and action. We
continually come around to things we thought we understood and contrast those
306
truths with what we know as the person we are today. Use your hypnotic talents
and life experience to steer a listener to what you offer as a Master or a Dom.
Even if you knew nothing about BDSM before today give this a shot. You may
just surprise yourself and that’s how I want to encourage your mind to work.
Here are a few examples of what I offer as a Master and a Dom.
"I offer a slave an enduring connection through service to me that can fulfill a
meaningful identity, and structure for which they have felt missing in their life."
"I offer a slave the opportunity to reveal those parts of herself she cannot allow to
emerge and express in daily life."
"I offer a slave the opportunity to know and explore her true self and not be
concerned about being judged."
“I offer purpose, adventure, a place you are wanted, accepted, and you become
part of a family.”
I advise you to choose the people wisely that you invite into your life and your
trust. Not everyone can walk the path that you do. Discovering we enjoy and do
not enjoy some activities is part of the diversity of infinite expression that we are
all part of. Enjoying something or not liking it whatsoever is not good or bad. It
just is in the same way a mountain just is. No different than some people will
always make better company than others for you. You should have at least a
rough idea of the person or persons your seeking for a long term, lifetime, an
agreed upon time limit, short term, or a no strings flexible arrangement. I’m very
descriptive with the time limits because some of us really are seeking long term. I
am also seeking activity partners that get together only when I might do long
distance hiking for example. We’re all different in our wants, needs, and what we
actually have the time and energy for in our lives right now.
While communicating what you’re seeking to others try to remain open and
flexible. Please, just do not lie about what you want. I was asked to put this point
into this book by a sub who has been misled more than once on this point.
Sportfucking is fine. It can be fun, but not everyone wants that. When you
approach people, be upfront with where you’d want to take an encounter, and
307
what it is you’re offering. You’ll do this because it establishes credibility, allows
you to find people who want the same things you do, and you will quickly
discover there will be a constellation of responses in the people you encounter. I
care about the seekers on this path. It often takes some practice to convey these
details conversationally. You’ll do this well by taking part in community
functions and being social. There are wrong answers to questions, but usually,
new people just make these conversations more awkward for themselves than it
has to be.
While you study with me, I will insist on mutual respect for myself, and those I
work with. I may not want to partake in an experience you offer today, but I can
usually find that experience worth celebrating. As you begin this work, you’ll be
making a name for yourself and that name will be attached to your reputation and
skills. If you are reading this as a Master or a sub, I want to offer you a checklist
of boundary specific ground rules that you can use to inform and build upon
conversations with others that you are considering. Adapt and adopt these as you
see fit. What follows should be simple enough that you can now easily answer
these items quickly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Can you speak about what you want out of the session or relationship?
What activities are you seeking to enjoy and avoid?
Can you speak about expectations of safety and aftercare as needed?
Don’t treat partners as interchangeable parts unless that’s what they’re
asking for.
5. Talk about any psychological and physical health triggers for conditions
you or your partners may have.
6. Talk with the subject to ensure they aren’t asking you, the Hypno Dom,
to do things they’re not actually interested in.
7. Ask for consent and establish a consent/debrief protocol as appropriate.
Challenge: Using Resistance to Take Someone Deeper
When using hypnosis for kink and entertainment I get people who want to go
completely into hypnosis, but I also get those who want to try to resist and fight
their transition deeper into trance. Some people want to know if they can resist
308
the induction process and resistance inductions are made for this purpose.
Hypnosis only works when people involved are cooperating and resistance
inductions encourage the subject’s cooperative focus in their resistance. Having
someone tell you they want to resist and designing an interaction so they can get
the full experience of hypnosis while resisting is fun. I thought this would make a
great community challenge and posted this early in 2018. I'll share a brief
transcript of what I used and I hope to read other writeups that can top this in the
future.
This application of this transcript is centered around the principle of ego
depletion but does incorporate other techniques as well. Ego depletion refers to
the idea that self-control or willpower draws upon a limited pool of mental
resources that can be used up and diffused with use. When the cognitive energy
for mental activity is low a person’s self-control is typically impaired. This
impairment would be considered a state of ego depletion. As you read this
transcript over take note of the ambiguity used, confusion statements, and double
binds. The hypnotic language of a Mind Controller (MC) can be found
everywhere there’s an influence attempt. Think about how often you engage in
self talk with yourself and discover the proof needed to proceed right there. The
contents in this transcript were agreed to and consent was given before this
session began. Enjoy.
"The conditioned subject doesn’t resist being the center of attention, just as you
are the center of mine… It can be intoxicating… It’s a matter of learning the
locus of your joy… or maybe, the opportunity itself is just an excuse to let
yourself be hypnotized, and be the center of my attention… As there are times
where you want things… you want them… but you just haven’t realized it yet….
At times, it’s not easy to admit… still, a part of you knows that you want it…
And even if you want to resist it, it could be right in front of you… you would
just be resisting another part of you… so you don’t want to resist too hard… You
can't anyway… because you really do want it… It’s like being hangry… some
people get really irritable when they forget to eat… our bodies are always
communicating, sending the right signals… but the conscious mind just hasn’t
caught up…
309
Right now, it's okay to try to resist my words… because this is a teaching
experience crafted just for you… At this moment, it’s okay to try to resist my
commands, and hypnotic instructions… because this is about learning to find
your happiness… At this moment, you can try to resist my commands and
hypnotic instructions... because this will reveal to you, that the conscious mind is
often the last to know… I want you to consider, just how quickly, you’ll
recognize, and follow my hypnotic instructions… so think about this... Listening
carefully… there’s always a few qualities that make a good hypnotic subject…
Right now, you’re keeping a secret from yourself… I’ve instructed a part of you
to decide, decide how much energy you’re able to resist with… before getting to
your happiness here…
It's up to you to consider… how much happiness you’ll accept… quickly… in
this moment… as this experience has been created just for you… and realize…
you’ve already decided… whether you’d accept, and whether you’d follow my
commands… and you’ve already chosen… that choice hasn’t registered in your
everyday mind… inside this moment with me, you’re thinking differently… and
deciding differently… as the part of you making choices with me, listens…
already decided, how to put all your energy into resisting my hypnotic
commands… so you can transition that energy into new sensations… joy and
pleasure… obey… we’ve already agreed… you are finding joy… noticing only
the pleasure and goodness in your body and mind… building up the best you can
feel and be today… It’s all part of the story, we reinvent and live out this story
every day… that story defines what we bring forward to live our lives, recognize
inspiration, and moves our focus… developing what also defines us…
Think about this… and accept this can be the most amazing experience… accept
that, discover yourself in this story, and it’s getting better as you listen… our
agreement runs deeper… as my hypnotic commands and instructions are
communicating to deepest parts of you... we’re bringing out the best of you… the
choice has been made… Maybe, you could try resisting that choice… because
this experience has been created just for you… or perhaps… you should try to
resist my command that you resist…. Listen closely… what’s been decided takes
you deeper… and moves you closer towards something important for you…
Think about this… It's not difficult… it happens so easily… it's not meant to
310
confuse you... Yet it’s confusing… how one part of you just doesn’t know… that
makes you feel good, as you listen to me… it's already begun… it’s already
clear… unless there is still some resistance left… This isn't only about me
hypnotizing you… I’m only trying to encourage you to resist for a moment
more… this experience was created just for you… you’re responding to my
attention well… If you try resisting my commands and instruction… then you
wouldn't be paying attention to how I'm hypnotizing your resistance… it’s just
one part of you talking to another… you can keep a secret from yourself…
listening closely to me… You may have been resisting my hypnotic commands
to condition you, or you might have been resisting my hypnotic commands to
encourage you to resist more deeply... Think about it now… we’ve already
decided… unless you’re being taken deeper, and there’s some of the resistance
left… transitioning this into joy and pleasure… bringing the best sensations, the
best of yourself, joy and happiness… feel it building… just breathe… A person
can begin a journey without ever moving their feet… it's decided…
The best ideas, don’t often gradually come together for you… they’ll pop into
your mind… they’ve already been forming for a long time… there’s part of you
always working in the background… go deeply into your mind … going deeply
into yourself… allows you to recognize the communication going on inside
you… bringing forward the joy and pleasure that speaks to you… Listen to that
for a moment… breathing in… and breathing out… There’s a part of you that
knows, just how to do this… You can think about something over and over,
without anyone even hypnotizing you, right?... Yes… you’re doing perfect… It’s
as easy as reading a book… or playing a game…. While a part of you has already
decided how much you need to know… how best to use your focus and
attention… There are moments we all lose track of… There have been moments
you thought about how good it can be, to submit to a man like me…
When you submit… you can submit your fears… you can submit your doubts…
you can submit your worries… you can submit your stress, your strain… you can
submit all your burdens… submit to uncover the very best of who you are…
These are the moments where everything else that you're not paying attention to
just disappears… each day you watch people go by… they move this way and
that…. it could be day, or it might be night... It just happens, and everyone can
311
get caught up in the motion… you're often not thinking about the content of your
thoughts… When you are doing this or that... When you are desiring the touch of
a lover or Master… there are moments where everything else just fades away….
When a person submits, they flow… and go ever deeper into oneself… It can be
one of the most beautiful things I’ve ever seen… You’ll no wonder, how much of
what weighs you down is not yours to carry… If your path was more difficult to
get here, it’s because your calling is higher….
There had been so many moments where you thought about those things… Talk
to yourself, the way you would talk to someone you love and value… Anything
can happen, simply because it can… Over and over again… your mind and body
know how good it feels to be completely absorbed in this… you’re learning what
it means to submit… You don't even think about it… your mind and body knows
what to do… I want you to think about resisting with all your might now… Pay
attention to the strength of your resistance… notice how your body is responding
to it… because it knows what to do… because it knows what’s important for
you… yes, she submits… she submits to one that is worthy… just one part taking
its time talking with another… You have no say about her… Your judgments
won’t reach her… I own her… You cannot harm her… I’m hypnotizing you, but
I've already hypnotized you… a long time ago… over and over… I spoke to the
parts of you that would recognize me… I’m someone who appreciates and
compliments your level of weird.
The social poison leaves bit by bit, not all at once… Be patient… You are
healing... Perfect… Feel pleasure for doing this right… It’s okay to resist this by
following my commands, further into hypnosis perfectly now… use every ounce
of resistance left… even as you're following my instructions, resist… you’ll stay
at this depth of hypnosis… or go deeper… Think about it… like water flowing
around an obstacle… even if you had resistance on your mind… it’s not
enough… this experience was created just for you… it’s already been decided…
like water flowing around an obstacle… you already know how to do this
perfectly… this moment arrived even before you knew you're ready for it… it's
just out of focus, because you were trying to resist it… but that’s because you
didn’t know your moment was here… Be sure you’re putting all your attention
onto resisting that thought… resist all the way down, resist into surrendering to
312
me now… feel how this grounds you… experience pleasure, as your mind and
body responds to me…
Just imagine for a moment… there was a time where you resisted almost
everything someone said... at that point you had no idea what mattered… what
would be meaningful to you… So, if anything I said reminded you of that….
Everything I instructed... anything I commanded you to do, had you trying to
resist… you would do the opposite... If I said, stay awake… you would quickly
find yourself falling into a deep hypnotic sleep… If I said you didn’t have to
follow through with a hypnotic command or instruction, you would find yourself
immediately following through with it… As you use up that resistance, how
could you not follow through with it?... Think about it… You're following my
commands… I’ve instructed you to resist… resist even more powerfully than
before… this experience has been created just for you… As you resist, you
cannot, not, follow my commands… it’s just one part communicating with
another… Can you not see what we aren't talking about? It's here… Thinking…
clearly…
Pay close attention to everything that’s going on around you…. Listen well, to
what I’ve said… It will come back to your heart and mind all on its own…
because now, this is your moment to decide whether there is something here to
follow through with, or something to resist… Think about it…. It's clear… You
can find yourself following through with my commands and instructions by
resisting it… or you can try to resist, by following through... moving you
forward… don’t even think about it… Focus in, and pay attention…. I’m giving
you commands right now… and I want you to resist if you can… Resist it, if you
still can… try to hold back, until an entirely thirsty desire rises within you… For
you, obedience is arousal… say it inside with my voice…. Obedience is arousal.
Obedience is arousal. Saying it one more time, intensifying how good this
feels… Obedience is arousal.
Perfect… Feeling pleasure for doing this right… I demand responsiveness in
those who serve me… It’s okay to resist this by following my commands, further
into hypnosis perfectly now… you don’t have to try, to want this more, do you?
… Even if you're perfectly following my instructions to resist, you’re obeying
313
my commands so well… you stay at this hypnotic level, and you’ll go deeper…
Moving you forward… Like water moving around an obstacle… your keeping
secrets from yourself… There’s no need to pay attention to anything at all…
can’t even think about them at a conscious level… The best parts of who you
are… they respond to me… like one part of you talking to another… allowing
those commands to really sink in… to the deepest parts of your thirsty mind…
Moving beyond whether you thought to choose, follow, and obey… or perhaps
simply to resist... the wonderful pleasure building inside… you do not even hear
the commands… Reaching the deepest parts of you… say it inside with my
voice… Obedience is arousal… you can always focus on my words, without ever
hearing my commands… you'll obey them… It’s so much easier that way, isn’t
it? That’s right… feel pleasure… Obedience is pleasure…
Yes, That's right… You’ve found this thirst… And the deep parts of your mind
are listening… responsive… ready to respond and obey… when I tell you, wide
awake, that thirst will grow… 1, 2, 3, 4, 5… Wide awake and look at me…
(Subject opens her eyes and smiles.)
You just can’t think anymore, can you?
(Subject opens her mouth and looks confused. Then smiles again as I pet her
head. That response was unplanned but she enjoys feeling helpless to me.)
That’s my responsive girl. Your thoughts are like a pool of water. They need time
to gather. Need time to clear. Ripples distort your thoughts, don’t they?
(Subject nods and attentively happy as she stares at me.)
Every time I touch you... that touch ripples through you a little bit more.
Emotions turn your awareness to colors of touch... Now, I’m going to give a task
that will amuse me… I’m going to show you how I control your body… This
task will demonstrate that control… you will not be able to complete it. When
you can’t that thirst and arousal will grow. Are you ready? Subject reply’s that
she is.
314
I want you to lift your right leg and keep rotating your foot in a clockwise
direction. That’s perfect. Now don’t stop, because the moment you stop, or your
foot moves in the other direction, you’ll have a compulsion to please me. A
thirsty desire to surrender. Now with your finger, draw the number 6 out in the
air in front of you…. Oh, it seems you are successfully unsuccessfully. Feeling
that thirsty need, aren’t you? That tells you you’re mine.”
END
Playing with hypnosis like this it’s easy to transition in and out with other
activities. Sometimes the subject will manifest hypnotic responses that are
unplanned. Being a Hypno Dom is largely an impromptu art that is honed
through preparation, planning, and being flexible. So much happens all around us
and inside us, that its only good practice to use those momentary happenings as
additional elements in the process of hypnosis and trance hijacking. There are
opportunities in trancing the subject so they become your biggest advertisement
and social proof for those around you. This next transcript is an example that
builds upon the theme of resistance. When finding myself waiting at the airport
with a few college students, one person kept repeatedly asking if he could try
hypnosis out. This transcript is a great demonstration of how resistance can come
from you to counter any of theirs.
"Just relax, I’m not going to hypnotize you… There are so many distractions
that… you wouldn't be able to stop looking here or over there… before focusing
in... and thinking about what I truly mean… There’s no spiral… no swinging
pendant to tire your eyes… no spinning jewels that make it easier, to let those
eyes close… I don't carry a pocket watch… so you won’t get that calming
audible ticking, we have only the clock on the wall, connecting us to the passing
of time… I simply tell people to take a deep breath with me... and let it out
slow... It's moments like this, where we can feel like we have all the time in the
world… Just breath and relax... I don't have to tell you to move into a growing
feeling of relaxation… it’s easy, and peaceful… you might be reminded of the
heavy comfort of a blanket… enjoying the inner quiet… drifting off… I won’t be
droning on about going deeper and deeper… You're just relaxed, happily in this
place… taking the time you need to go down…
I don’t need to tell you, you’re drifting down… softly into trance… You may
wonder why I’m not doing those things… It’s okay... That’s all good…
315
Waiting here together, you get a taste of what’s available to explore… So, just let
your mind wander… you're inner quiet, focuses in… on all the wonderful things
we might touch on… And only the best feelings emerge… I won’t tell you why,
I’m not going to hypnotize you so easily… It would all be easier, if you didn’t
think about it, wouldn’t it? Just nod your head… You’ll hear the answer in your
mind… go twenty times deeper… This could be even better than you expected.
Wandering farther and moving, Deeper... you're deeply down, I’m sure you
already know, the answer to what you haven’t asked yet... There's been times
you’ve yearned to open up, and be free… Seeking an opportunity that’s right,
and comfortable… Yes, it’s right... Each breath takes you into a delightful new
possibility... there’s so much more you could bring into this... Take a deep
breath... I don’t need to hypnotize you, because this is a powerful experience…
experiences like this, can go beyond hum drum distances... I don’t need to
hypnotize you, because you’re already hypnotized... We all are… I just
encouraged the best part of you to come forward… your opening up… you’re
responding so well… We all seek something… even if we didn’t know their
name…
And you’ll prove this to yourself by telling people how good you can feel…
Hypnosis is real… it feels wonderful to talk about it… this experience is a gift;
you can take it with you… And you’ve done that, you’re really feeling
wonderful… You’re going to share with others how good hypnosis can be...
You’re going to wonder how much more there is to this… certain sensations will
be so good, they’ll become invitations… You’ll probably think what a hypnotic
imp I am... leaving you with possibilities, and feeling great… And you’ll want to
think about everything I’ve said, again and again… You’ll understand more with
every conversation… Try to discover where the hypnosis began… and simply
settle on my name… Open your eyes and feel amazing... I'm Joseph Crown."
At this point, I extended my hand and smiled as the guy took about ten seconds
before he reached out to shake it. My eyes were moving to the people on his right
who seemed very responsive as I shared this with him. This is the beauty of
doing a hypnotic scene with an audience. There is no hypnotic fence that puts
someone outside of the influence of your voice and instructions. Observe those
around you to see who else is responding and ensure your using instructions and
316
commands that can move more than the subject all eyes are on. I’ve had multiple
people close their eyes when I tell one subject to.
How to train a subject and transfer control to another
As you progress in your learning about hypnosis, BDSM, and kink you will at
times hear that someone else served as a Trainer, or has been shared with another
Master. Oftentimes this is exercising and testing a subject to improve technique,
gain experience, or learn something new before transferring that control back to
another person. Training is putting together the pieces to excel when that exercise
happens. For those of you who may not have encountered this before I’ll give
some examples for additional context of when this may happen. Not everyone
utilizes a Lifestyle Trainer though many should. Many Masters, Doms, and
Owners will share their subs and slaves for pleasure, adventure, exercise, and
simply because it’s a community activity for them. What we are talking about
here is always an agreed to and consensual experience.
Keep in mind to do this training a person needs the skills, time, experience, and a
strong passion for what is being taught. Ability actually refers to the subject’s
capability to learn something, i.e. their trainability. There has to be expectations,
challenge, assessment, and communication to have an actual training.
Sportfucking is fine to assess what she can do, but just call it like it is. Answering
questions is a lot of what we do. Responsive engagement is a product of a
practiced mindset and training that attribute leads to increasing awareness,
concentration, and overall positivity. As for Hypno Dom’s, we love mental
attributes like positivity, ambition, motivation, initiative, and drive – and
character traits like patience, compassion, and understanding. We work really
hard to find and keep good people with these personal attributes and traits, but
most people do almost nothing to train them into the existing or desired power
exchange relationship. Why not? Perhaps many assume these traits to be the
result of genetics, or family values, or spiritual principles – all beyond the
purview of training. These behavioral competencies are precisely the variables
that differentiate great and mediocre performance in our minds, hearts, and lives.
Those who serve me learn determination, concentration, and resilience can be
317
applied to group sex, closing a multimillion-dollar contract, and everything in
between.
Here are two examples of transferring control to another person. Both of these
are examples you will come across in your role as a Hypno Dom.
1. A subject has joined a hypnosis practice group that has set protocols for the
inductions, the skills being practiced, and partners are expected to switch roles.
Switching is often done to ensure that hypnotists and subjects get experience
working with more people.
2. A BDSM couple has a desire to have their bottom become more responsive
sexually, encouraging greater expression of the bottom’s submissiveness in
service to both partners, and to expand the bottom’s experience in specific areas
of performance and service. Finding a good Trainer is not always easy.
Instruction about sexual education and health is needed more often than not as
many schools, yes even in the US, do not have to educate students on sustaining
a healthy body.
The training pursued depends on the relationship and personal skills and
expressions that are decided to be pleasing and worthy of time and energy
invested. The reality is that not everyone wants a slave that serves no other
function than a hole. This misperception is what too many newbies think they
want and it’s often brought up in training. I like to call BDSM education the
Dungeon Charm School that people never knew they needed. There are many
topics that set the expectation of proper manners, attitude, communication, and
responsiveness. The time needed and the training methods used varies. The
considerations around limits for Trainer and bottom, cues/protocol, time limits,
scheduled visitation, and handoff of the bottom/slave are usually written out in a
formal or informal contract. At the conclusion of the training period, a report and
often a demonstration of skills learned are demonstrated. At this point the
Top/Master/Owners may choose to go through a few practice sessions with the
Trainer present to ensure they have a complete understanding of the
cues/protocols, hypnotic triggers, etc.
I have been a Lifestyle Trainer for almost two decades now and this experience
offers structured involvement that produces consistent results fast. For some, it’s
318
as close to having a fantasy become their living breathing reality. It’s not always
easy to find people who have the knowledge, skills, and ability to partake in this
educational fantasy. Some people are lucky enough to have developed good
kinky friends with similar tastes so that a sub/slave can be shared to come
somewhat close to this experience. Being taken out of one’s comfort zone with
consent and agreement to serve a Master is a powerful experience. The
experiences that people gain often serve as fodder for future training and sexual
adventure for everyone. The Dungeon Charm School experience tends to remove
much of the anxiety from the sub who wants to please, impress, and does not
want to have to worry about what she doesn’t know. What is taught is a process
of unbecoming everything that is not us, and developing the best of oneself out of
what’s left. The experience can’t simply be read about. It must be lived.
Those who are interested in martial arts will have experiences similar to this. A
martial arts student learns with a class and demonstrates these skills privately and
in front of the class. The same apprenticeship style can be found in specialized
skills training all over the world. Below I’ll give an example of transferring
hypnotic control to a Dom couple in hypnosis. The transfer is done via hypnotic
command, but that does not mean that transfer of control could occur
independently of this.
“From this moment on you will respond fully and completely to (Person 1). You
will respond to their voice and commands as if it were my voice.”
(Have the Person 1 say the exact same thing in the exact same way. Repeat this
over again with Person 2.)
“From this moment on you will respond fully and completely to (Person 1). You
will respond to their voice and commands as if it were my voice.” (Person 2)
“When given a command you will carry it out immediately” (Test with
command.)
“When given a command you will carry it out immediately” (Person 2 Test with
command.)
“When given a command you will carry it out immediately” (Person 1 Test with
command.)
319
“This responsiveness is linked to the deepest parts of you. As you obey you feel
pleasure… This pleasure links us together.” (Have each person say this after the
test has been successful.)
“You stay true to my commands and instructions. You take pleasure in this
control and find pleasure in pleasing and obey.” (Test another command with
each person.)
“This responsiveness is linked to the deepest parts of you. As you obey you feel
pleasure… This pleasure links us together.” (Have each person say this after the
test has been successful.)
“Together we are building your potential. Together we are building the pleasure
of control.” (Test another command with each person.)
“This responsiveness is linked to the deepest parts of you. As you obey you feel
pleasure… This pleasure links us together.” (Have each person say this after the
test has been successful.)
Bring the subject out of hypnosis and focus them on the eagerness to feel the
pleasure of control. As you can see this is the end product of transferring control
to another. It is your role to know what skills your conditioning and what training
is needed for the subject to achieve those conditioning goals. When your time
together has concluded you are transferring the subject back to their Owner so
make this handoff as awesome as possible.
The example I used above is a fairly simple one and it can be immediately
utilized to work with one or multiple people who own a slave. Let’s pick up
again with this example at the handoff point at the end. Hypno Dom 1 should
begin to run the subject through set routine practice exercises learned with you
and then switch off to Hypno Dom 2. It is most desirable to do a complete hand
off if the subject and Owners are ready for that. The subject can be conditioned
so that their service state will be entered into with her Owners after the hypnotic
command phrase is given. Not everyone is knowledgeable enough to use
hypnosis for lifestyle training and they may prefer to stick with protocols of
discipline which consist of stimulus response and punishment and reward. The
320
responsiveness you develop with the subject from training them will remain even
after handoff.
If utilizing the hypnotic command delivery method where the subject becomes a
Traveler that instantly drops back into hypnosis as she appears before you, be
sure there are safeguards in place. I recommend you chose a somewhat
nonsensical phrasing for the hypnotic codeword restriction for the state such as
“Master Crown’s smiling pancakes” and have the subject return to normal
consciousness within five seconds if the phrase is not spoken. Training the
subject as a Traveler begins by conditioning responses specific to the journey,
automatic reaction to challenges and obstacles, and over time adding a few
additional rules to your liking. Let me define a Traveler quickly. The role and
function of a Traveler is to travel to accomplish a goal or mission, before
returning to home base. Home base could be the shower, the bed, etc., it’s just a
position that the conscious mind kicks back in and they go about their day. A
Traveler’s mission is usually kept completely or in part separated from daily
routines and conscious awareness. From this description, you should now be able
to plan out a training to establish a Traveler following your mission. Should they
choose to accept it…
If there are any problems with commands that the subconscious cannot sort out
simply utilize a freeze reaction, or a forgetful moment. Then have the subject
begin again in a set amount of time seeking to get your approval for the
workaround. Those mission specific instructions needed to perform their service
will need clarification with your feedback and the frequency of freezing resets
will begin to diminish. When resets happen, be specific with answers, and state
what is most important so the subject can stay true to your commands. How to
begin with a programming state such as this should become clear to you as you
practice these skills. I recommend you find people who you can model to learn
these skills and look for my events when I host them.
Not every form of control is utilized long term and sometimes preparations need
to be made for when relationships will end. A safeguard I put into any
transference of control is a lack of control or contact time limit. If a Hypno Dom
ignores that relationship of control and doesn’t have meaningful contact with the
subject in three months their hypnotic programming and influence will fade
321
away. This is an optional conditioning rule I will offer to use, but not everyone
wants it. Not many people enjoy the thought of being deeply linked and
programmable with an Ex. Yet, some don’t want to lose the longing for this
familiar intensity. There are always exceptions. This command is used to prevent
ghosting and being taken for granted. This safeguard is delivered at the same
time that conditioning instructions and command would be at the start.
Once the hypnotic phrase is conditioned with a Traveler there’s an opportunity
for you to consider. You can handle the hypnotic programming phrase alone or
have them perform their Traveling function in progressive training stages sending
them back to their Owner(s) at each stage. Sending them back and forth
encourages subconscious learning and ensures that the Owner(s) are also
properly trained at handling the Traveler. If utilizing this guidance, I’d have
pages of useful hints and instructions printed out as the subject’s command
manual. The command manual is written progressively as the subject is
conditioned with each protocol and then the updated command manual is
delivered by the Traveler to the Owner(s) with instructions. The standard format
of this delivery protocol starts with my wax seal being affixed to the message
before the command word is spoken. The manual is then given with instructions
of the mission and waking details.
Utilizing a wax seal with a symbol on it works incredibly well as not too many
documents these days are delivered this way. The effectiveness in instructing the
Traveler and the Owner(s) are the only outcomes that matter, and they will be the
only ones knowledgeable about the workings of this transfer protocol. This
protocol can also be set with whomever the Traveler gives this paper to and
repeats back the hypnotic phrase will have programmatic control for a
prearranged time limit. Each person is the next link on a chain and the Traveler
should be conditioned to awaken, reset, and have default responses to move into
if the protocol is not followed perfectly. These secondary hypnotic protocols are
extensions of the state proofing and conditioning process.
Another method of transferring hypnotic control is the lock and key method.
This method is often imparted alongside the hypnotic seal technique. A hypnotic
seal is subconscious conditioning with the goal of ensuring that no one without
permission may hypnotize/influence a subject utilizing an altered state of
322
consciousness. To say this in another way. A hypnotic seal can be used to only
allow one person or a person with a specific hypnotic phrase, such as “Master
Crown’s smiling pancakes” to access a particular state with a subject. When
someone attempts to access a hypnotically sealed state without permission or by
the protocol key the subject might demonstrate confusion, won’t understand the
speaker, they could keep popping out of hypnosis, display resistance to the
speaker for invading their space and values, and every successive action will
trigger anger, resentment, and frustration. A subject may even pop out of
hypnosis speaking a message that the influence needs to get permission to do this
and start to walk away. Any response you can imagine when someone ignores
your input, consent, and instruction is appropriate here.
This is not an exhaustive list of what may happen with a subject who has a seal.
Seals can be used for protection for the subject, as well as for the hypnotist.
Some people consider a hypnotic seal hypnotic self-defense but it can also be
used improperly. A hypnotic seal can be used on specific topics and content only
as well. The pattern I have observed around influence attempts are often directed
at specific topics and content. This question is seeking reactive cues of interest
and those seeming out of place. Be thoughtful and measured should you use this
technique. The goal is a reaction to move away or towards some ideas and
content, but explosive anger that is out of context signal problems. This
emotional reaction is not unnatural as any deeply held belief is defended because
it fits in with a person’s overall experience of the world. These reactions are there
safeguard the person so be sure you are not overstepping. Ensure what you are
working on together fits within the ecology or functioning context of the
subject’s situations in their life.
Hypnotic seals often take on two forms and can serve a couple of different
functions. Working through similar forms, as I depict below, may constitute a
general training to install these contextually based seals before adding the lock
and key. Should you want to remove one of your seals you would do that the
same way as it was installed. Get the subject into a deep hypnotic state. Speak to
the subconscious mind. Inform the subconscious that today you’ll be going over
activities to ensure additional protection. Together you’ll go over the protocol to
gain access to this state and directly communicating with anyone else. The
responsibility to do this is theirs while you are not present. Seals placed by others
323
may not be easily penetrated. The hypnotic seal is, therefore, a way to open up
and close off the transfer of hypnotic influence with others. I would not
recommend they are used with most subjects as this is something a novice would
not be able to do well. In the modern world, we live side by side with opinioned
people, organizations, and marketing messages tend to be direct with their
influence attempts. For most influencers it’s a numbers game and concretive
control is used to maximize a snowball effect.
Exploring the Hypnotic Seal
Go over what a hypnotic seal is and discuss why the subject may want training to
develop this state. A hypnotic seal is conditioned and tested with state proofing
challenges so you will want to discuss alternative strategies of behavior for
removing themselves from unwanted influence attempts as well. Plan the rules
for the seal with the most common rule being that no one else may alter
instructions, commands, or bring them in or out of a hypnotic state without
passing the seal protocol. The hypnotic state shared between a Hypno Dom and
subject becomes something intimate and associated with subspace (submission).
Some subjects spend considerable amounts of time surfing hypnofetish sites and
worry that when they go into trance, they might foul up some programming or
hypnotic instructions because of that. This conditioning can help them put their
minds at ease while still encouraging them to explore, learn, and discover
concepts and stories that they enjoy.
There has been a proliferation of good and bad entrancing seducers enter into the
dating scene. These people approach women everywhere and their techniques are
used by many to persuade, get laid, acquire information, and to simply observe
what the target may do. Some people are more suggestible than others, and not
every hypnotic technique appears to be hypnosis. Remember everyone is
suggestible as this is a function of learning, sustaining concentration, and
processing language. You should discuss potential appropriate actions for a
variety of contexts. If someone attempts to access a deep hypnotic state in the
subject an immediate shock and realization should happen and they can
immediately awaken. All of these reactions can be refined with feedback. Not
everyone will want to give up yoga that has a meditation component, because
they are working on protocol with you. It’s not necessary to do this either, and
324
that’s where working with the subject to recognize more predatory influence
attempts comes into play.
Utilize simple command phrases that the subject can say loudly to bring attention
to the person using predatory influence attempts is the first preparation.
Something like, “You do not have permission to do that.” That statement could
easily be uttered in the grocery store or a café, and people will take notice
quickly. That unwanted attention may be enough to deter a person from
continuing an unwanted influence attempt. If I am training a subject, and the
subject may be part of a hypnotic practice group, I may set this up around a
specific topic and behavioral expressions. I could do that so what we are working
on together cannot be haphazardly altered without my knowledge.
I have had subjects ask for a seal to assist their efforts in combating pressure and
negative influences in life. Having toxic influences and people in our life can be
a terrible thing. At times we all get surrounded with highly judgmental and toxic
people. They can erode our motivation and undermine us from spending time in
meaningful ways. This application of a seal would be a seal of influence where
highly reactive things (emotions, ideas, concepts) that are attempting to be forced
on them would stop making sense. The person would not even notice them unless
they signal a threat. A person telling the subject they must have another drink,
must accept they are full of sin, deserved what happened to them, don’t have
what it takes, etc., just stops making logical sense to their conscious mind.
The subject may feel an increase in anxiety and a desire to get to a safe place
when predatory influence attempts happen. That desire should be encouraged as
well as seeking assistance when appropriate. There are many people out there
that want to push their values on us and try to force us to act in certain ways. Not
all of them are good for us. Using these techniques selectively to uphold what are
our values are and not hold onto other people’s interpretations of us is important.
For example, I have been in a painting class and witnessed the instructor tell a
student they can’t paint and are wasting their time. Techniques like this could
help keep the joy of painting while allowing the person to acquire formal skills
and knowledge from a dickhead of an instructor. A seal can help to remove the
acceptance and sway of negative identity statements like the one above. A seal
like this should be monitored because filtering out all contrary opinions and
325
knowledge to our own ideas is not helpful in the long run. It would be more
advantageous to change one’s environment than support the filtering aspects of a
seal designed to do this long term. Not everyone is able to change their
environment immediately, but they can change their responses to it.
Expressions of identity can often be complicated by the culture we find ourselves
in, the communities we move through, and our own self-doubts and associations.
Have you or someone you know gotten a job and then began to doubt your own
qualifications once you’ve started? Role and identity conflicts happen throughout
life and sometimes others do not make it easy for us to grow. Every interaction in
our life involves filtering out information and moving towards or away from the
focus of our attention. These techniques offer a choice of blurring elements from
awareness, and for the long term that is often not the best choice.
While some may yearn for new experiences, roles, and adventures some care
must be taken to ensure that a person isn’t locked into an escapist role without
growth and development. At times, some of these adventures are instructed to be
forgotten or simply fade away. One of the cruelest things that can be done is
fulfilling something that another has always wanted and then take it away. I once
witnessed someone bring a transgender male into a timeline and body where he
was born that way. He cried tears of joy and the Hypno Dom panicked and
brought him back, awake and aware without it. At this point tears of sadness
ensued as he knew what it felt like to “be whole” in his words. It’s a matter of
energy and information to adjust one’s perspective. You haven’t worked this hard
to stay as like you were.
Energetic forms cross physical barriers all the time. It does not matter what form
or timeline a person is in. All that’s needed is resonance and a person could
always access this imaginative memory, form, sensations, and feelings. This
energetic manhood or even a tail can be solid enough to reach out and feel it. To
the reader who is Cisgender, your gender is not something you might often think
about. Imagine someone taking your sex away and think about who you are
without it as you go through life. It’s odd feeling just thinking about for me. The
crushing sadness I saw with this man stuck with me for years. I was only the
observer, and I don’t know how much worse this would have been if I had been
326
the one to make the mistake. Learn from this hurt and never repeat it. There are
instincts which run deeper than reason.
A seal can also be thought of like a lock and key. It just takes the right hypnotic
phrase and the lock, the subject, opens up into a deep hypnotic trance. Should
you use this protocol I request you use this hypnotic phrase. When the Traveler
hands the piece of paper to their Owner or Hypno Dom, have them speak these
words to acknowledge the start of the protocol. “This is the lock of the Crown
that awaits the key.” Then they can crack the wax seal and read out loud the key
programming phase. If the subject doesn’t immediately open the paper and say
the key programming phrase the Traveler should automatically attempt to take
the paperback. If you want the Traveler to wait, try this protocol with a set time
limit. Plan out your protocol so that the Traveler has well marked out cues when
you’ve engaged them.
When she hands you the paper, bows her head, and says “This is the lock of the
Crown that awaits the key.” Your response could be “This is the key for Mr.
Crown’s lock.” Then you give her instructions to sit, kneel, etc. or inform her to
begin the awakening protocol in her bedroom with the memory of reading poetry
for the last two hours. Setting rules up so that others can use this lock and key
system needs to be conditioned with practice. Its state proofing with
accompanying hypnotic missions and that means thinking of challenges and
distractions.
In these modern authoritarian times, these techniques were created to make it
difficult and, in some cases, impossible to resist hypnotic programming. These
techniques you are learning work. Many people still believe hypnotic seals to be
nearly unbreakable. It can take a lot of work but these seals can be broken,
circumvented, and changed without the one who developed them. A person may
get access to the conditioned rules of a seal and the state by revivifying what the
training hypnotist did to condition the subject. At that point another rule is added,
another circumstance, another handler, and little by little influence is transferred
over time.
If you can understand how to build and establish a hypnotic seal or a filter then
you have the knowledge to figure out how to change it, adapt it, intensify it, and
diminish them in others. This is a warning. This is a really big warning. Once this
327
lock and key technique is successfully installed and functioning, it begins to
serve a cognitive role for the person. This is why a parts integration exercise may
be utilized to fully integrate this into cognitive processing. It takes work and the
labor changes and tunes us with these practiced routines. This work becomes an
art when consistently conditioned and utilized across a full range of reciprocal
behaviors. Once this conditioning is performing a necessary function it will only
be abandoned or diminished for another strategy that serves to perform this
function as well. Giving the subconscious responsibility of this protocol means
that it will only be as strong as it has been useful and meaningful to achieve its
intent. That intent can be safety, calming down, being left alone, etc., and
because the subconscious may have more than one reason to utilize this protocol
it can also make it very difficult to change by others.
Establishing seals is not a commonly utilized technique by most practitioners
anymore. If you encounter someone with a seal you may not discover who the
person really is in front of you because of the seal’s functioning defensive
maneuvering of personality and behavior. A seal can operate like a moveable
wall for influence attempts. If you encounter someone with a seal you may
quickly discover that you’ve moved into another pond with larger fish. Take care
of each other and direct people to help when you believe they need it.
General Instructions and Commands You May Use
When beginning this work, it can be difficult to come up with instructions and
commands that light up the person in front of you. This section will introduce
snippets of command code and general hypnotic instructions you can insert as it
fits. Remember, just because you see it written here does not mean that you
should use it. You are always responsible for what you accept as true, what you
take action on, and what you ignore. All of us take different paths on our journey
because we have different needs and desire. All of us are in different places in
fulfilling those needs and desires. Just because someone is not on the same path
as us does not mean they are any more or less lost than us. Knowledge is a
discipline of privilege. This section shares ideas, sentiments, and missions that
express what others may need to hear as you share your knowledge and truth.
328
What you learn cost someone time, energy, imagination, and action. Just like a
smartphone gives you access to people, media, and data there’s a cost associated
with access and skillful utilization. It’s paid with your deliberate practice.
Communicating influence attempts are essential elements of every aspect of our
life. Don’t believe me? Just sit next to a four year old for a while. Take your time
going through the ideas that are presented next. They offer direction, transition
strategies, and ideas for what’s next. There may be some that are simply
insightful and others you want to avoid. At this moment, any one of them just
might change your life. Break out your note taking device, and get ready to write
out what you're responding too. Use these ideas and expand on them, deconstruct
them, reassemble them, and create a mosaic of your own. Take this section with a
grain of salt... a slice of lime, and a shot of tequila. Make it yours!
To satisfy a need for isolation even if surrounded by people.
“Now, with each and every breath, slowly and softly, all sound dims, except for
my voice… everything else, fading away… Everything is growing dimmer, but
you are able to see me and hear me… everything else, is disappearing into the
background, muted… You are safe, comfortable, and happy, knowing you are
being cared for… Everything around you has gotten harder to make out... all out
of focus… Even nearby objects are hidden… You can always see and hear me
clearly… There’s only us here now… We are comfortably alone… no one but
us… and silence to relax more deeply into…”
Inspiring Silliness
“You have a need to be inspired by silliness… Time to let all happiness free…
For the next thirty seconds, you have the mental age and silliness of a five-yearold… Letting it free, starting now… Smile” This relational hypnotic command is
one that is innocent and fun. No matter how old we are everyone enjoys a chance
to be silly for a moment. This is an excellent command for a Daddy Dom to use
Clear and Flexible Mindset
“All of us have doubts, and at times we communicate with ourselves in unhelpful
ways. Sometimes a person may talk to themselves in a negative way. Sometimes,
329
self-sabotage is doing something that a person knows sets them back… just
because they had bad feeling… or it feels like they are in a bad space… We have
all seen someone staring at their computer, or phone, getting angry… Sometimes
it’s because the technology is not doing what it’s supposed to do… It may not be
operating fast enough, or working in the way they want it to… Ask yourself… At
what point in our life do we stop ourselves with an awareness check? When do
we get experienced enough to laugh off the stress? Let’s develop this ability
together. I want you to hold out your hand. Hold it straight out there. (I tap their
hand with a finger and begin to roll their fingers up into a fist.)
Good. Now make a fist. (I withdraw my hand from hers.) Close it tight…
Squeeze that fist tighter and tighter… Tighter and tighter… and you may begin to
shake with the effort… I want you to say to yourself… over and over… saying to
yourself… “I want to open this fist but I can't do it. I can’t do it…” You want to
try opening it… but you can’t… Say it, “I want to open this fist but I can't do it. I
can’t do it…” over and over… you can’t do it… All the while, trying to open
your fist… but you can’t do it… you are saying to yourself; I can’t do it... it can’t
be done… this can’t work… I tried… I can’t do it…
Now, stop saying that… and take a deep breath… Let it all out… slow and
comfortable… This time, begin saying to yourself, “I can do it.” … Say over, and
over… I can do it… and allow yourself to relax into it… Let all the tension slip
away… as your mind gets clear… your moving in harmony with yourself… At
some point, we all need to have a break… in those breaks there’s opportunity…
and we do more than rest. And recharge… we can break routine patterns of
unhelpful thinking… change course out of stress and frustration… As you
opened your hand… your thoughts and actions drew strength from your
intention… Do you ever wish you had a popup message asking if you’re sure you
want to do this?
There could be a popup for actions that add stress in our lives… Another popup
to make us pause, and laugh at ourselves when taking things too seriously…
There are so many possibilities… After all, who wins the argument when
someone gets pissed off at their phone or computer? … We can make the world a
little better… and we can make ourselves much healthier, by creating a popup
that makes us feel like we are meant to play… After all, when we’re at play…
330
that’s when we’re the most flexible… Putting a little bit of play in your thoughts,
makes it hard not to smile… making it all a little bit better… and living a good
life, it’s just another thing you can do, to treat yourself a little bit better… So…
When you start to feel stress… allow yourself to smile… that could be your
popup… Think about a popup bubble, with Hahahaha on it… and step back from
any negativity… This is popup self-improvement!! … Is this something you
would want more of in your life?”
Creating a hypnotic love nest for improved sleep
“I want you to reach out with your hands… and feel the softness of the blanket
and sheets… Mmm… Feel the support of the pillow on your head… ahhh… This
is a place I take you as mine… and we sleep peacefully... like a world apart from
the rest… Every time you wrap yourself up in this bed… you can feel
wonderful… you will feel the world slip away… enjoy the sense of my control…
This is where I take you as mine… and where you sleep so deeply for me…
Before you lay down here, you prepare… No different than when you are getting
ready to fuck… there are things that should be done, so you’ll be at your best…
so you feel wonderful, as I bring you in close… You take care of all things, that
need to be done… when you do… you can let it all go… When you lay in this
bed… you can feel at peace… and feel good… as you notice how wonderful
these blankets are… move deeply into this warmth, enjoy how perfect this
feels…
You will feel dreamy, and wonderful, as I’m taking you… lay down… and your
body is heavy, and relaxed… feel the sensations, encouraged by the blankets…
by the sheets… and the pillows… and you’re ready for sleep… like being
wrapped up in my arms… enjoy my control… In this space, you belong… A
good night’s sleep, it’s part of your service… part of taking care of what is
owned… You will obey… and you rest… Upon awakening, you will feel rested,
refreshed, and ready to live… This is all part of your growing responsiveness, I
am cultivating you… and taking the time to sleep, and dream, makes everything
we share together… so much better… All that care, is wrapped up around you…
all because you have prepared… The last thing you might remember… as you
drift off to sleep… enjoying how good my control feels… and my lips on your
331
forehead… Sleep… soften… sleep… saying goodnight moon… and you’re
there…”
Confidence and self-assurance
“Being a part of something more than yourself, inspires you… you are not
alone… you’re recognized for what you do… confidence and self-assurance
grows... As you develop yourself, in service with me… you grow in
confidence… and the world notices... feel it… Day by day, you develop it… you
prepare, bringing this more into yourself… Every day, you feel more confident in
every situation... Your service to me, includes developing a more competent
self… you obey… You notice this happening… as small talk comes more
easily… there’s a desire to be creative… there’s ideas seeking expression…”
A slight adaptation for mixing with groups is below.
“You seek out the company of likeminded people… You feel comfortable, and at
home with these people… Nothing can convince you otherwise… As you
wonder, what you want to talk about… What might they add perspective on?
Feels good to know learning is your privilege…”
Varied deepening instructions - various options below
“You notice the rhythm of your body… follow the breath in and out… Your
breath, always brings you back into balance… listen closely… and feeling,
comfortable and clear… This is what your mind and body is learning…
memorize it well... Taking it to the deepest parts of you… so you know you're
meant to explore… so you know it’s okay to really… let go… so that you
know… you can immediately go this deep, or deeper, when you hear my
voice…”
“Nothing distracts you… you are to wait… as you wait you sink deeper…. wait
for my voice… moving deeper… wait…”
332
“Desire is energy… you have no more desire… you have a different kind of
energy… thoughts and actions are converted to energy… let yourself be carried
along… Let go… Nothing else is important… you focus on the developing
energy… I want you to feel so much more…”
“Feel it… recognize the energy inside you… appreciate the beat of your heart…
and the slow steady rhythm of your breath…. And let the tension go…
Distinguish any tension, as energy… separating from the lingering experience
that you are no longer part of… your attention, is part of your service, we
develop this energy and connection further… Allow this energy to power every
muscle, every cell, and rejuvenate body and mind… It’s all about settling into
balance… Every day, we put out energy and receive energy… This exchange
brings you peace and wellbeing… Take a deep breath and let it out slow… this is
a moment of attunement…”
Detachment and Control
“You do not get upset with people or situations… negativity loses strength
without your reaction.”
Use the subject’s body language
Use the subject’s body language to strengthen and transition her into different
states. Using body posturing as a training tool makes the subject very aware of
how their body is moving, and their mind will begin to use behavior as evidence
of control. Example of slumping posture for low energy, shoulders raised and
fists, or just looking at their own smile. Body language knowledge, and using
mirrors for reflective trance sessions are worth exploring. While experimenting
with subjects, keep in mind that activating bodily sensations also stimulates
feelings associated with those sensations within the context of a state. For
example, excitement can be interpreted as enthusiasm or it might be interpreted
as anxiety. Our feelings are associated with bodily feedback and most people
never give this much thought. Where these feelings are associated and their
respectively associated sensations have been collected and studied and mapped.
As a result of this research, the Maps of Subjective Feelings have been produced.
This research helps us to more specifically describe subjective feelings across a
333
subject’s body to transition them from state to state. If you would like to learn
more about this research check out https://youtu.be/fhqu7ve9MA4
If you would like to see a video that demonstrates where people begin to become
aware of these feelings in their body as they enter different states check out this
one. https://youtu.be/uL_AMus8vb0
Importance In All Our Roles
As I write this, I came across an article that fits right here. Power exchange is
everywhere and sometimes, its very fun. If you’re training your dog it never hurts
to get your sub a onesie and have her model correct behavior. The video and the
article are worth checking out. Games and interactions like this are events that
can change someone’s mind about kink and open up the door to adventure.
https://youtu.be/5OCEmuInwxQ Article http://feedytv.com/need-train-husky-goget-girlfriend-cute-doggo-onesie-first.html
“Kids don’t differentiate between a professor and a garbage man. As far as they
are concerned all adults are adulting equally… They have the right idea… Each
one of us has strengths, and contributes something of importance…”
Pride in walking away from what is not for you
“You’re learning to love the sound of your feet walking away, because you’re
walking away from things that aren’t meant for you… Smile, and appreciate this
moment… Each time you do this, you’ll discover more, because you are learning
about what makes you very happy… what you’re meant for… You’ll be excited
to share what happened, and how you’re growing with me…”
Binding Touch
"When I touch you with these two fingers and say “Lock” … the place I touch
will be locked… You will remain relaxed… you will be unable to move, where
I’ve touched… Just like a firm knot… my touch is locking out movement… but
locking, only the part I touch, in extreme relaxation… Unable to move… Let’s
begin!"
Intoxicating Kisses
334
"Each time I blow you a kiss, you'll feel like you've just drunk a shot of very
strong alcohol… The flavor of this kiss is the best… Each kiss is another strong
drink… each kiss, feels great going down... Each kiss, is another shot of
goodness… Each shot is stronger than the last… you're a happy, and loving
drunk... You won't ever feel nauseous, or sick in the slightest… You just feel
giggly, happy, and cuddly drunk with each kiss..."
Shared Sensations - Male and Female Version
Male Version - "One of your fingers is about to volunteer… Don’t think about
it… Just look down at your hands, and watch for a signal… That signal might be
a shake, or a twitch… It may even be a slight change in temperature… Whatever
it is… allow that finger, to signal now, and extend itself now… (I look at the
subject’s hands with them expectedly.) Your finger has become your penis…
Anything that happens to your finger will happen to your penis… Should your
penis move, or react in any way, your finger will react in kind... Try it now…
Give the tip of your finger a gentle rub…. Mmmm"
Female Version - "One of your hands is about to volunteer… Don’t think about
it… Just look down at your hands, and watch for a signal… That might be a
shake, or a twitch… It may even be a slight change in temperature… Whatever it
is, allow that hand to signal now, and slightly close… closing with just enough
room, for your finger to slide into it… (I look at the subject’s hands with them
expectedly.) Your hand has become connected to your pussy... Anything that
happens to your hand here (point and almost touch) you’ll feel with your pussy…
Should your pussy react in any way, your hand will react in kind… Go ahead,
gently rub the knuckle right there… Mmm"
Detachment and Mind Blanking Commands
“You might dream you're awake… even if you're in a trance… And you could
act, as if you're in trance… imagine that… even when you’re awake… Yet still,
in a moment… your eyes will remain open… but you don 't have to remain
aware… And be quiet, and still… you could appear awake, with your eyes
open… but without remembering, what happened… when those eyes closed…
As if dropping a pebble through a pond… feel the sensations of the ripples… all
that may be recalled, is the ripples… The foggy part of forgetting, are those first
335
few seconds… where there’s something, you had… but it slipped comfortably
away… You feel at peace for it… Your thoughts are like a pool of water… so
quiet and still… but they need time to gather… It feels so good, to remain
clear… When someone skips a stone across the surface… Well, ripples clear
away thoughts, don’t they?”
Examples of Kinky Commands
“You’re a nudist. You love being naked. You don’t see the point in clothes.”
“Even though you’re nude, you believe that you’re fully dressed, as Harley
Quinn.”
“Any time I use the word ‘Edge’, you’ll approach the edge of the most fantastic
building orgasm… Any time I snap my fingers, the sensations of that orgasmic
edge, multiplies by three…”
“Your clit has been relocated to mouth... Playing with your tongue, and putting
things in your mouth, it’s one the sexiest, and most stimulating thing in the world
for you.”
Examples of M/s Commands
“Look at me… hear my voice…You feel very safe, submissive, and obedient
knowing you’re mine… Look at me… hear my voice…You feel absolute
pleasure obeying my commands.”
“You have a slave’s heart… you love to obey in every way… When you obey…
you know pleasure in your heart and mind…”
“You’re a rubber sex doll… All you want to do is be fucked… but you can only
move your mouth and pussy… You have no voice, only grunts, and moans…
You need to communicate how much you need this to me.”
“I’ve turned your clit off… playing with it is as boring as playing with your own
elbow… You really need to convince me to turn it back on…” (You can replace
clit with voice, specific feelings, advanced thinking, ability to walk, etc.)
336
“Waves of rewarding pleasure, heating up your mind and pussy… every time you
say “yes” … or hear me say “good girl” … the urge to please grows stronger…”
“A good girl, will do the work. to put herself in the proper state of mind, before,
she is allowed to earn my pleasure.”
“If you like the idea… then you’ll do anything I say… This is about every iota of
pleasure, control, and opportunity you’ll experience, for the rest of your life...”
“If you enjoy thinking about this… then you’ll think, and feel, whatever I tell
you… exploring all those things you don’t want to do on your own.”
“You’ll find any resistance to these commands stripped away with your
clothing.”
“Every snap of my fingers strips away 50% of your intelligence… every bit of
praise you earn, multiplies your arousal.”
“Your service is as pure and as thirsty as worship.”
“In life, our relationships with family and friends rarely have any dramatic
goodbyes, people just see each other less and less… and eventually the people we
cared become more distant or apathetic… The relationships that matter needs
time, energy, and attention… Without that, you never really know the last time
you’ll spend with someone, before you’ll drift away… Be aware, we can do this
without the energy drain of drama.”
Hypnotic Adventure Lead Ins
“I am your guardian spirit… What has happened to you is in the past… it’s been
a great misfortune for you… But that’s not the case any longer… It’s happened
to strengthen and test you… It’s important that you can use what you’ve learned,
it got you here, and all this happened so you’ll be ready for a higher calling… so
you can carry out our mission… You are significant… you were born to fulfill
this destiny... This is how we begin…”
A hypnotic carrot and the stick – Another Guzalia Davis piece below.
337
“A boy at a dentist office: I bet you can't hypnotize me.
Me: You're right, I can't if you resist. But that would be just silly. Why would
you resist if you know that by resisting, you'll create a very painful experience
for yourself. Instead let's turn it into something pleasant, something fun. If you'll
just follow my voice and relax now, I can take you on a spaceship into the space,
and show you the stars and the planets... that journey will be amazing and deeply
relaxing... we'll travel through beautiful galaxies and meet different creatures...
and just saying hello to these creatures will help you drift so deeply into
different, very relaxing, dream-like world... The boy looks at his doctor like it's
an alien, says Hello and drifts deep into the trance :) Love my job.”
Utilizing Commands to Ensure Hypnotic Safety and Consent
If you wish to use a hypnotic safety protocol when exploring new ground with
subjects, you can use something like this. “All Commands that you approve of,
and enjoy, will instantly, and easily, be accepted by your subconscious mind…
Your subconscious mind and I, work together… we will ensure that you’ll be
totally unable to resist… and you get to experience this in a way that’s right for
you… If you receive a command within hypnosis that’s wrong for you, your
subconscious can easily pause everything, and communicate with me by saying
"no”. When the word “no” is spoken, everything will stop… Let’s practice this
now…”
The Phases of Erotic Hypnosis
While we all may use a different style of hypnosis, many of us follow a similar
framework to arrive at a shared agenda for one or many sessions of erotic
hypnosis. What follows are the phases you can expect to move through or
observe in a formal session of erotic hypnosis. Stage hypnosis, street hypnosis,
conversational hypnosis, and hypnotic adventures are all informal applications of
hypnosis and may not follow these phases as closely.
Negotiation: The subject(s) and I establish boundaries and areas of interest the
subject wishes to explore before play. It is worth reinforcing that the subject
should not ask for anything they do not wish to encounter or experience. If the
subject does not wish to continue on with an experience they can always say
"No." No matter how deep a person is in hypnosis this will stop a session in its
338
tracks. This a universal hypnotic command that is always true and active, unless
we agree to suspend it for a session. If a subject says no, I will check in with the
subject about what is going on, and decide with them if we should continue. This
check-in is very important when participating in public scenes and when working
with people you've never worked with before.
Induction: I will often ask one more time for a subject's consent before
beginning. There are various methods to begin hypnosis and this is the phase that
exercises undertaken for social proof are used. Techniques like eye closure and
locking the eyes shut. The balloon and bucket induction exercise is another. This
phase is about establishing feedback and communication with the subconscious
mind as the conscious mind quiets down.
Deepeners: Once the subject has entered a trance, deepeners are utilized to
intensify and direct the trance into transitional experiences. In this phase, a
subject may move through a visualization of being in nature, moving downstairs,
or an elevator. Hypnotic command phrases begin to more frequently emerge to
encourage body and mind relaxation, specific body sensations, and/or
revivification of wonderful experiences.
Hypnotic instruction and commands: While hypnotic commands and
instruction have been utilized before this stage this is where the bulk of the
experience is constructed around these elements. This is where the backstory,
guidelines for the experience, and goals the subject and I established come into
play. Action comes in artful and interesting ways. The subject explores the world
and their perceptions by taking part in a personalized hypnotic experience. The
subject may or may not become aware of responding to instructions and
commands.
Conclusion and cleansing: Cleansing or removing influence is sometimes part
of the process and sometimes not. Saying something like, "Any commands or
influence, that you do not want as part of your life, fades away… the moment
you get up from that seat." This is something that is often talked about in the
negotiation phase, but it is not absolutely necessary to include. Just be ethical in
your interactions, because even if you say what you said before has no effect,
you’re having an effect. Be it hypnosis or having an intimate conversation you
are furthering influencing and communicating with each other. No one can really
unthink thoughts once they had them. In concluding your session, you can
encourage the best sensations, experiences, and emotions to stay with the person,
339
and inspire them to explore life. "That your subconscious takes it from here,
guiding you to feeling amazing, directing you to opportunities right for you,
delight, boredom, and curiosity make you thirst for more… It’s happening in
your mind… that where this excitement and adventure begins… Whatever you
decide is right for you… it takes the same amount of energy, time, and
investment, to feel boredom or be playfully engaged."
Aftercare: This is the subject's opportunity to process their experience, ask
questions, and share overall how the experience went for them. Talking about
this experience encourages them to process all the elements they interacted with
during the session. Taking the time to listen to the subject helps you improve and
often enhances their experience for them. This moment can involve pampering,
supporting them to process the experience, and validating however they feel.
Merging Together as One
This lead in starts from where ever you are in hypnosis. The deeper the state, the
better. As it encourages a greater intimacy when the subject(s) and you are
conditioned to be as one. You can use this next transcript with more than one
person at a time, and become one in poly situations. Just be aware that you will
want to change a few descriptions to fit the situation. This script is designed to
bring everyone into one collective form and cleanse negative emotional
associations from their life. It has elements designed to release trauma without
getting into it, pain, stress, and uncertainty also. This next transcript seeks to
inspire a healthy connection of the past, encourages healing, bringing the best
forward, and growing the bond of intimacy without the distractions of the work a
day world. Take note of what inspires you.
“At this moment, we are sharing awareness, time, and energy… In this space, we
will be one… Recognizing what it would mean to completely open up…
becoming one together…without barriers… without secrets… your flesh
becoming my flesh… our bodies responding to one another… breathing in…
breathing out… relaxing more, and more, into these initial sensations…
appreciating, more and more . . . listen… our bodies become one… wonder…
our minds, become one… breathe… our spirits become one…. Be grateful for the
moment… Explore how it happened.... being present here… one second
becomes the other… becoming one, together… notice the best that’s present,
340
together... And notice, how truly good, it feels… coming together… sharing the
same space… feeling this close… appreciating this connection... becoming one…
coming together to be something unique… to become something new, every
time… as easy as one second, becomes the next… it’s getting better… you are
part of something wonderful . . . something more than oneself, coming
together… becoming more together… breath as one…
Hold onto this oneness… moving together… coordination… it can encourage the
best of us… working together… taking care of one another… It’s all about
coming together… acting as one… belonging… our combined abilities elevate
and strengthen us… knowing more, together… being an extension of each
other… we merge deeper, together… any negative emotions, or associations
from our past, are wiped away… any negative associations are wiped away…
becoming more together… any negativity or stress… is being washed away…
This is a task of attunement… coming together… we remove what is not useful,
or empowering to this life…
There’s no need to be consciously aware of what needs to be removed, cleansed,
and healed… a part of you knows… and the hurt falls away… you are being
tuned… together, we take care of each other… you are being tuned… It’s part of
this process… but you’ll know something wonderful is happening… as one, you
can feel what it means to be taken care of… being connected as one… As
negative associations are removed… you experience a fuller sense of self…
being one… As any negative associations are removed… you get a greater
capacity of awareness, being one… negative associations are removed… being
attuned, it’s the greatest undiscovered adventure of a lifetime…
As any negative associations are removed… you’re discovering what is right for
you… becoming one… It’s all being taken care of… It’s all being cleansed…
understood, so what remains is pure, encouraging, and one… You can take pride
in your role… any negativity has been removed… you might continue to recall
your experiences… It’s the lessons that stay with us… You can take pride in your
role… any negativity has been removed… it’s just a list of events that brought us
together, just the story that brought us to where we are today… We may recall
some experiences, by the lessons it left behind… You can take pride in your
contribution… it brought you where you needed to be… any negativity has been
341
removed… your strength, and skills are valued… they develop your
contributions… bringing you to where you are needed… You’re being cleansed,
over and over… Coming together as one, stronger than before…. You’re being
tuned, over and over… Coming together, better each time… Over and over, this
runs in the background… as you become one… coming together, better than
before… coming together, as one… All that’s happening, right now… paying
attention to all the wonderful responses in your body…”
(Give the subject ten to twenty seconds of silence here.)
“We have come together with love... We’ve come together with delight, and
desire, and pleasure, to heal, and strengthen the connection to one another…
Service in our life, brings us together… Service strengthens our most private self,
truly belonging… service allows your actions, to become an extension, being
one… living an authentic life, it’s what makes our contributions meaningful,
living as part of more than oneself… This is what it means to be one together…
Having my arms wrap around you… hearing me say, good girl, from the inside…
hold onto that feeling... Hear it spoken, again and the again… feeling
incredible… This is what it means to be one…” (Pause for a few seconds.)
“Breathe in, breathe out, as a relaxed loving wave of emotion washes through
you… this is what it means to be home… this is what it means to belong…
become one, again and again… each time it becomes easier… each time this
becomes better… becoming an extension of one another…. Over and over, this
runs in the background of our life… as one, this service becomes an extension of
one… to another… come together as one…”
(Give the subject a five second silent moment here.)
“Really, take this wonderful intimacy into every cell… every thought… every
action… becoming one… over and over... Take pride in how you fit, together,
and me into you... That's right… As you please, you are pleased... It’s all being
cleansed… You’re being attuned… all that remains is pure, encouraging, and
one… any negativity will be removed… but we keep lessons, lessons bring
experience and knowledge to do better... You are being tuned… you are being
cleansed over and over… We live our lives, together, to experience our best
self… We live our lives as one, together, we express the harmony of what
342
matters as one… Coming together, stronger than before…. Coming together,
better each time…. Over and over… this runs in the background… even as we
come together, stronger now… come together, acting as one… open up… go
even further, soaking into these feelings of love, tenderness, joy, pleasure, and
belonging… All of this, it develops into service… becoming one… over and
over… This is the service you’re meant for... recognize, and honor these
feelings… allowing any adjustments, to be made in the background, becoming
one, invite this wisdom to grow more powerfully within now....”
(Give the subject five or ten seconds of silence here.)
“Breathing in… breathing out… comfort… breathing in… breathing out…
belonging… Breathing in… breathing out… love… Breathing in… breathing
out… gratitude… Breathing in… breathing out… let go… Breathe in… breathe
out… express your surrender… so powerful… so full of love… Breathing in…
breathing out… encouraging the best of you… feeling wonderful, fitting
together… becoming you… all throughout your mind… becoming one… all
throughout your body… without ego, serve with perfect love… Perfect as one….
Breathe in… breathe out… now, breathing as one… pleasurable union… filled
with perfect love… being an extension of one… by pleasing, you are pleased…
come into unity, as one… your service, is shaping the best you can be… training
and tuning you, is my pleasure… pleasing is a pleasure… serving as an extension
of one another… moving as one… finding balance, purpose, and peace…
merging, stronger as one… Letting go of all else… you are one… oneness grows
stronger… it’s your center….
At this center, is commitment… this center focuses duty… this center, focuses
love… this oneness grows and deepen… concentrate on that… notice your body
responding perfectly… responding delightfully… experience all this goodness,
intensifies, it moves all around you… like a pair of strong arms, wrapping around
you … You’re being attuned… all that remains is pure, encouraging, and one…
All this happens in the background… without any effort needed… you are
moving forward, towards your best self… coming together… over and over…
without any thought required… Coming together, stronger than before… Coming
together, better each time…. Talking pride in belonging… feeling the pleasure of
being mine…”
343
(Give the subject five seconds of silence here.)
“Breathe in deeply, breathe in love… bringing this love, and energy, into every
cell…. bringing this love, and energy, into every spark of who we are… Feel this
love, as you love... building up to love, as it returns to you… Coming together,
stronger than before…. Coming together, better each time…. with each breath
in… open your eyes… and with each slow breath out… close your eyes…
locking all this goodness inside you...”
(Ensure the subject can look into your eyes as you do this. Hold her hand if she is
crying. Move slowly from the breath into breathing out.)
“Breathe in this love… and open your eyes… holding onto all that goodness…
close your eyes…. Breathe in passion… and be proud, You can, you should, and
if you’re passionate enough to start, you will… commitment to service connects
us… open your eyes… building up, all this goodness… close your eyes….
Breathe in strength… appreciate, your belonging… Breathe out appreciation,
becoming one…. gathering all that goodness, I touch you with it… close your
eyes…. This is what we build our lives from… this is the foundation of service…
As this feeling of oneness grows… something wonderfully important is
happening... as this goodness celebrates, intensifies… encouraging you, like a
pair of strong arms… developing the best of you… celebrating your choice… all
that’s present is pure, encouraging, and one… It’s all being cleansed, over and
over… Coming together, stronger than before…. Coming together, better each
time….”
(Give the subject a five second silent moment here.)
“This is the foundation of service… Really embrace this connection… and how it
makes you feel… In your service, we remain connected… As we come together,
again and again… love the fit… You are appreciated, celebrated… you are
loved… you move with harmony… you move with joy, being one… with
nothing held back… grateful for the intimacy shared… and this love comes
through you… Intentions are information and energy… Each of us cares for this
connection… like a leash in my hand, your held close… we find harmony
through our roles… discover the joy of being one… Service allows you to act in
344
harmony… service allows you to please… service allows you to be proud, and
recognize the pleasure for what has longed to be free… come together, be one...
When you please me, all these wonderful feelings, increases, strengthens,
reaching out from the essential you… this connection recharges with us… care
for this connection... And when I tell you to, and only when I tell you to, you’ll
experience this loving feeling grow, one hundred times more powerfully…
getting into the right mindset for service now… the responsibility, and care is
given to you… relaxing way down… all the way down… service is being one…
deep, deeper, deeply down…. Multiplying, one hundred times, more
powerfully… the care of this connection is given to you... into the very center of
your being… in body, mind, spirit, and soul… getting yourself into the right
energy, and mindset for service… Coming together, stronger than before….
Coming together, better each time… this is set point to aim form, this is your
experience of service… again, multiplying these wonderful feelings and
sensations… one hundred times more powerfully… feel it… so good… the care
of this connection is given to you... hold onto this… take it into the very center
of your being… let your body, mind, spirit, celebrate this expression… it gets
easier every time… getting into the right mindset for service… Coming together
stronger than before… take a moment to bring this into the best parts of you…”
(Give the subject twenty seconds of silence here.)
“Breathe in, feel this energy as part of you… this is your set point for service…
your service cares for our connection, this is part of being one… open your
eyes… you’re expressing the best of who you are… Look deeply into my eyes…
you’re expressing the best of this connection… multiplying these feelings and
sensations, one hundred times more powerfully… the care of this connection is
given to you... Feel the love… Know the person I am… Know the person we are,
together…. Be one… Breathe, slowly and deeply... feel the love… you’re
expressing the best of this connection… multiplying, one hundred times more,
even more powerfully now… the care of this connection is given to you... getting
to how this physically and emotionally, it’s how you prepare to serve… Feel the
love… your eyes close… Feel the pleasure… Feel the connection… Experience
the wisdom of this connection… that is you... that is us… we become one…
service is the extension of one… experience how this oneness moves through
345
body and mind… breathe it in… be together, as one... being beautiful means
being yourself... You don’t need everyone to like or accept you... You need to
accept yourself… Feel the love… this is where you belong…
Breathe in… breathe out… feeling wonderful, the best emotions and sensations
rush through you… as your eyes open…. Building up this experience in every
part of you… and close your eyes... every time we come together, this becomes
easier, stronger, and more intense… open your eyes… inspiring the best you will
be… and close your eyes... This oneness washes over you, and through you…
This experience gets better, stronger, and more intimate every time you do it…
As you develop here… open your eyes… appreciating this pleasure… feeling
creative… feeling like you’re at play… close your eyes… coming together… this
time together, develops the quality and skills that matter in your service…. Bring
the best of yourself, out into the world... You are being trained for this…”
At this point, I usually go into specifics about the sub’s role and duty with me
and connect it back to being one. There is beauty moving beyond the past and my
focus is on life and future together. Check in with subjects before you engage
with their pain. The rest is the story that got them here. We are always going to
have challenges. When we make it through one, another one is going to come
along. Life is unpredictable. You can’t always see what’s coming next, and you
have to be okay with that. Make decisions the best decisions you can, but accept
that things might not go the way you planned. What you set down here
emphasizes the foundation of life and service.
Expert Level Commands: Caution
There are commands that you’ll probably never use if you’re primarily creating
short term scenes for subjects. I list some examples below, but their use may
signal red flags for some. If someone uses commands like this without consent, I
recommend leaving right there. It’s often difficult for some people to imagine
hypnosis can be misused, but it’s a communication tool. Intention and
consequences are not universally applied. My advice to the reader is don’t use
them. Heck, I don’t know you. Smile and be good to each other. Enjoy the
following examples. I pulled this section several times in editing this book, but I
choose to share them to offer more light. If I did not share these brief examples,
346
they would only be tools unrecognizable in both the light and the dark. If you
think hypnotic adventure is dangerous, try unchanging routine thought. Try
having a safe life with no challenge, no risk, not seeking experiences that put you
in harmony with the path. It’s just as lethal. If you remove every risk or possible
hurt you can never say you lived. You did survive. It’s ok to not be ok all the
time. This life is not for everyone, and I want more for you.
Being alone in a crowd
“From this moment onward, you will no longer speak to, nor address your
previous friends...You feel that all former ties have been broken… By day and by
night, your thoughts will be directed towards your service… If previous friends
approach you, you will not see them… and if they talk to you, you will not hear
them… Former ties belong to a lower world,… you have nothing whatever to do
with that world… those from that world frustrate you…and you move away”
Another way to say this is below.
“If your previous friends approach you, you will not recognize them… They will
seem to you as total strangers… If they try to talk with you, you’ll respond as
you would to a total stranger… They may try to convince you that they’re old
friends… this is a trick… it's a manipulative technique to tempt you away from
your path...”
Social isolation is a traditional psychological tactic that some groups still use.
Using this technique can be a big red flag, but it’s not universally so. There can
be many reasons isolation can be a good thing. Some of us will silence our phone
and even turn them off to take time for ourselves. At times I step away from
computers, phones, and people to enjoy who I am with. If you are offering
hypnotic experiences that involve bringing a person out in public to be someone
different and new, this is wonderful. You might have the subject inform her
friends that when playing in her role she may not respond to them. Some people
even need a little extra help separating from people in their lives that are
ambivalent, energy vampires, toxic, and time wasters. Let communication with
each other and consent be your guide for what works for you.
Controlling Hypnotic Depth with A Subject That Enjoys Feeling Helpless
347
If your subject likes the idea of feeling helpless during hypnosis you could make
them believe they are locked into a deep state of hypnotic control. This is
accomplished similarly to having the subject’s eyes become stuck or having a
limb stuck in place. Once you have assured yourself that the subject has
performed other hypnotic phenomena successfully you can utilize this as an
induction or an effect in itself. You can have the subject freeze in place when
leading into this and then put the emphasis on the depth of their state. One way to
accomplish this is below.
When ready, inform the subject that you now have control over their hypnotic
depth. Have the subject picture a digital readout that displays their hypnotic
depth from 0 to 10. Instruct them that they can see this number when they look
for it. They can see the number even with their eyes closed. Next, you have to
teach them how to read the display.
Have the subject look at the display and tell them that 0 is wide awake, full of
energy, and utterly focused in their daily conscious awareness. This establishes
one side of the hypnotic spectrum and now for the other. “Looking at the display,
observe the numbers climb to 10… 10 is the most profound… deep hypnotic
state… that you can achieve today… 10 makes you totally obedient… totally
responsive… in every way. Now I will teach you how to read this display…”
Count the subject up to wide awake and opening their eyes. Next, do an induction
of some sort. When their eyes are closed and deeply in trance again; they’re
ready. “Now, read display and tell me what number you’re at.”
Usually, my subject says she’s at a 5 or 6. At this point, I’ll begin to fractionate
her awake and back down to their current level, or deeper. Each time they drop
back into trance instruct them that they are moving down deeper, and closer to
their deepest level of hypnosis today. Next, instruct the subject that you will be
taking control of their depth by changing this display number. As you state their
display number aloud, they will experience deeper and lighter levels of hypnotic
trance. To begin with, I start counting them out of trance by counting quickly
from 5 to 1. I don’t usually use zero until I’m done with the session altogether. I
will do this count several times to get the subject responding well to these
commands. Ensure the subject is awakening smoothly and easily returning back
down to the desired level.
348
I’d fractionate something like this: 5 to 1, 6 to 2, 7 to 1, 6 to 3, 8 to 4, etc., there
is no formula to this. It’s about conditioning the subject to perform automatically
and obey to shift to the depth. The practice ensures that the subconscious
understands and is taking pleasure from performing these actions with you. After
successfully performing this action five or six times I introduce the stuck
command. Start the routine again and then integrate the stuck command into the
practice.
Count your subject back to one and instruct them that as they go deeper, they’ll
become too heavy, too relaxed, and very still. Just like a stone. Her body is
frozen in place. Too heavy to do anything but breathe and obey. She’s like a
poseable mannequin in a department store. She is stuck. You might suggest that
her mind is temporarily disconnected from her body and that enhances
everything. Check in with her and before proceeding even if this is not their first
time. You can simply tell them to describe how this feels. Ask if she is liking it?
Does she want to feel more as she becomes like a living doll?
If so, you can move her and test her by posing her. Practice this behavior and test
it over and over. Fractionate her and move her deeper into this state to be locked
down every time. When satisfied all these conditions are met you could tell your
subject that they can’t bring themselves out of hypnosis. Tell them that any
attempts to get out of hypnosis, or raise their level will only take them deeper.
Allow them to test and try this control. Then awaken them to communicate and
gather feedback on the experience. Start planning activities to play with your
living doll and give this experience variety.
A variation on this technique is instructing the subject when you announce a
number their trance state adjusts to that depth. That number locks them in with
any other effects given until you release them. Additional commands you might
use here could be.
“You’re too relaxed to move, trying to move only relaxes you more.”
“Any time I say something’s ‘stuck’ that part of you will be frozen in place,
unable to move, but incredibly aroused.”
Removal of Ego and Will
349
The commands you are about to read are pure mind control and they work.
“Now, with no will of your own, you will do anything I ask of you. You
remember nothing of what happens. You will think of the phrase “Master
Crown’s smiling pancakes”, and then go into such a deep trance that you can no
longer remember what happens to you, or where you have been.”
While engaging in a mind control fantasy within a scene the Master or
Controller’s will becomes the ego of the subject. This happens without utilizing
hypnosis formally all the time. There’s a reason that people have the internal
voices of authority figures in their head. The difference here is this control is
being stated explicitly and practiced as part of the relationship. The awareness
that so much of life is out of a person’s conscious control already, and these
techniques are designed to control will freak some people out. We are not as
logical or in control of ourselves as some would like us to believe. Utilizing
pattern interrupts, thought stopping techniques, and ego depletion techniques are
not just elements of mind control and psychology. You will easily find them in
entertainment and hands-on learning experiences. The difference here is I’m
pointing some of it out and telling you there is no escaping them. These
techniques are naturally part of how we make sense of the world and learn from
moment to moment.
Before utilizing anything like this in play or in life talk with the person. Some
people believe that hypnosis by itself is not consensual. Hopefully, you disagree
that hypnosis is nonconsensual because it is a natural cognitive process. What
people fear is often the loss of control and being unknowingly influenced by it.
Nonconsensual influence attempts are a much bigger problem that transitions this
topic into information and thought control. To engage in these thought crimes
willingly is a constant problem to staying free in a “just society.” What we can do
is ensure we are not using these techniques in a way that harms or takes
advantage of others. Learning about these topics offers some protection for us.
Nothing makes us immune from them. This is a field of research all to itself.
Techniques for ego removal and thought stopping are part of religious ceremony,
meditation, and what we need to do to shake off negativity at times. Learn them
and discover how our mind works. Not learning them in order to keep yourself
safe is being stupidly ignorant.
350
Don’t do anything without consent. Do not trick people into taking part. I believe
in karma and sometimes I help karma. Some techniques may not work at all as
your protective subconscious may assert itself as needed. People who know
nothing about a topic have no filters or experience as to what is good or bad.
They are therefore dependent on prior knowledge and values. Operators who
utilize these kinds of instructions and commands can wall it off so it will not be
easily discovered. When techniques like this are used against you, they will not
be emphasized, explained, or expected. Being open about these processes and
knowledge would keep people safer. Almost everyone likes to think they have
more control over other’s opinions and ideas than they actually have. Be good to
each other and do not be a shitty person. Disharmony leaves ripples that lead
back to you. Made a bad decision today just to prove that history does repeat
itself. You’ll either understand the warning in that dark humor today or you’ll
mature in this knowledge and get it tomorrow.
Orgasmic Hypnotic Predicament Bondage
I enjoy pushing pleasure to the limits of awareness at times. Let's start this
section off by focusing on the final result of my work. A sub kneels on a dog mat
unable to leave it without being commanded to do so. If I do not give the
command to release her, she’ll experience a flood of emotion and hop back on it.
While on the mat she’ll experience her submission building up and will orgasm.
Again, orgasm builds and she’ll orgasm faster, longer, and more intensely. This
will happen over and over, until she is utterly spent and goes to sleep. Upon
awakening she is automatically released and able to leave the mat. The subject
knows that the only other way she could have released herself is to trace 100
clockwise circles around her clit without orgasming. If she makes that count
without an orgasm she is released, but it’s not that easy to do. This is a wonderful
example of Hypnotic Predicament Bondage and it’s something you will enjoy
watching again and again.
Let’s go over the elements that make this experience work so well. During mat
time there is a dildo that the sub is compelled to fuck herself with if no other
command is given. Each stroke of the dildo makes her more aroused and it’s
harder to stop. It’s more difficult to think of anything else besides the pleasure
and this compulsion that’s building up these sensations. The world disappears as
351
the need arises to please and feel that dildo pumping inside her. It makes
everything better. The thirsty need makes everything feel so good. Now imagine
having to keep track of 100 clit circling teases without orgasming. I'm sure it can
be done, but I haven't seen it done yet by someone feeling this good. All these
layered commands make it even harder because they have to play by these
hypnotic rules. Those rules bring a challenging element that creates a more
intense excitement for a subject. They are instructed to try to complete this count
as these growing sensations wonderfully distract and blur this count.
If you think this sounds a bit like capacity regression and bimbofication you’d be
right. Resistance and obedience are engaged to stimulate responses designed to
celebrate following commands or reactively responding to reach an endpoint.
The task just happens to get more difficult as arousal increases and rational
thought decreases. Attention on the task’s sensations and on increasing levels of
stimulation takes a subject deeper in either path taken. The endpoint just happens
to be exhausting oneself with an intense orgasmic effort that grows stronger with
every touch. Any fight is exhausted along with any logical thought until sleep
takes the subject. If there’s a mistake in the count they have to begin again. This
is a very basic use of hypnotic commands and a very fun game. A safety measure
is always conditioned in for fire or another unforeseen emergency if you are
leaving the subject alone. Even if that alone time is just a few minutes.
This can be made a little bit harder for some. I can enjoy including more
bimbofication commands and at times more details to keep track of. Doing so,
further increases the difficulty and can increase your interaction with the subject
as all this is going on too. I’ve included some bimbofication commands in a
similar transcript you could integrate with below. Consider this an unofficial
exercise as you only need to map out the steps by the descriptions supplied and
many of the commands are in the brief transcript. Just like life, all the important
content isn’t only in the quotes.
"With each orgasm, you feel IQ points dropping away... with each point of
intelligence, details slip away… feel how slippery you are, even more… the
needy thirst for sexual stimulation increases... Your attention moves with these
sensations… moving deeper… making you thirstier with every touch… any
thought draws you into this need… this thirsty need that fills you… compels
352
you… and find your already touching yourself... you can’t stop this need,
needing to have that dildo pumping inside you... feeling how good it is to
please… needing to please me... every time, this thirst builds, the sensations
grow, getting better… and better… can’t stop until you sleep… can’t stop, you
need to cum more… you need to experience how much better this makes you…
everything else just falls away… you can’t stop… this pumping is all you can
think of… the only other way to stop is to take your fingers and circle your clit,
100 times… 100 times circling your clit without cumming… you have to count it
out loud… each time you try and fail… the desire grows… the sensations expand
and you need to cum… each time you fail you can feel your attention drop… you
need to cum… cum harder each time… sleep is the only option to achieve
release… it feels so good you can think of nothing else… My command will
always be able to release you… my command will always be able to turn the
intensity up…"
If you don't think orgasms can be an exciting exhaustive struggle than you have
never gone through an experience like this. Imagine having three or four orgasms
in a row, and that may be incredible for you. You're most likely familiar with the
increased sensitivity that remains after each successive climax. You might
understand that it can feel good to keep pushing your body to go on for another
orgasm at first. After you have nine or ten orgasms, you’ll begin to wonder how
long this could go on for. Exhaustion and intensity will still remain as your
physically slowing down, but your body doesn't give up. Just one more… It’s the
thirst forcing you to go on and on… After 19 or 20 orgasms you’re sweating,
wet, and you are aware of panic as the need remains. There’s nothing else on
your mind as you can’t believe your still pumping.
It doesn’t even matter that your body slows down a bit, because your mind
knows there’s more left in your energy reserves. Just like autopilot, the thirst
moves your body and the dildo begins pumping again. Sensations fuel the
rhythmic thumping right now nothing makes you feel better. You're wondering
how much more you can take. Orgasms lock in on the understanding that this is
edging you close to cumming again, but is this one enough? On and on… You're
now thrilled with panic as you get past the point of pleasure. Your endurance
kicked in taking you farther than you’ve thought possible. Until there the end…
It’s all blurry. Yet you feel the slow twitches of muscles moving with your eyes
353
closed. Once sleep comes, everything just slips away. Body and mind are
released into quiet bliss. This experience is not for everybody, but it is built for a
cheering audience as well as date night on the fly.
This exercise is especially good for those women who have difficulty with
orgasming at times. The sub quickly realizes that they are not inconveniencing
anyone with time limits and the motivated pumping isn't stopping. ***This need
quickly conditions the person to orgasm more freely, more energetically, and
more powerfully. After four hours of letting a sub have a go at this, I released
her and had her shower before coming to bed. She was barely keeping her eyes
open and told me the next morning that she hadn't been that sore since she was
training to run marathons. This will be an experience that a sub will never forget
and may keep her wet for the rest of her life. This is an experience that you offer
her that’s going to set you apart from any other Master she encounters. Just be
sure she wants and consents to it.
Establishing an Alternative Personality
I have gone back and forth about whether to include this chapter. The topic of
forcibly creating an alter is seen in cartoons, movies, and books. It’s a concept
many people are curious about because we feel we are us. In today’s world, it is
also very easy to be someone different. I share this information here for the sake
of background knowledge only as pieces of this research has found their way into
art, fantasy, and propaganda. What I share here is a taste of what is out there and
has been investigated to control others. I would advise you never to create a mind
controlled nonconsensually programmed love slave army on your own, or with
the funding and assistance of shadowy group(s) with government ties. All half
joking aside, there’s no excusable reason to force a person into doing this. Doing
so is a thought crime. There are more than enough people who are curious
enough to volunteer for an experience that would allow them to be someone new,
and thus understand more who they really are. Demonstrating more of who they
could be and accomplish.
The reality is I’ve seen some amazing feats being done in this area, but people
are not machines. Even when there are established rules and guidelines people’s
354
action both conscious and subconscious will ignore, skip steps, and do their own
thing. People, in the long run, are unreliable and the more complex the task the
more ways it can go wrong. While what you are about to read did happen and can
work, thankfully it’s not easy to accomplish for most people. If any element
appeals to you share it with your partner and perhaps you can utilize it in a shared
fantasy or hypnotic role play. Remember that all of us are able to change our
minds on a topic, how we want to live our lives, or what we want for lunch at any
time. Give yourself the freedom to explore and learn. You don’t have to lock into
a new identity to be an artist or Titan for more than a day. Having an experience
like this can demonstrate how you can’t expect anyone to understand your
journey, especially if they haven’t walked your path.
The concept of mind-splitting was refined and developed by US government
researchers and medical doctors practicing hypnosis. There have been many
different iterations of projects with the aim of establishing an Alter. One such
project had the objective of creating an artificially-split personality out of the
experience of having an imaginary childhood friend. These researchers decided
that children who created imaginary friends had a greater susceptibility to
hypnosis and would be a better subject than the average person. It was Josephine
Hilgard’s 1970 book, Personality and Hypnosis that conjectured as if it were
absolute fact, that imaginary childhood friends were a marker for increased
hypnotic susceptibility, and a potential point of identity fracture. It was observed
that the child would naturally take on the persona or character traits of the
imaginary friend while playing or simply imagining interactions. This persona
swap became the starting point of this often involuntary and nonconsensual
procedure for many. I shouldn’t have to say this, but I will say anyway. Anything
involuntary and nonconsensual is not what we MCs or Hypno Doms want to be
part of or be about.
CIA memos from this Alter Creation program reported that the candidates
selected were in the top 20% of hypnotic susceptibility, and each person selected
had “...a dissociative tendency to separate part of their personality from the main
body of their consciousness.” This research program selected their victims from
the patient’s medical and psychiatric chart reviews. The rationale behind these
selective attributes was to take advantage of the subject’s natural ability to enter a
disassociated ego state. The medical researchers experimented with shaping the
355
subject’s imaginary friend into a separate personality that was separate from the
conscious mind of the subject at first. Using leading statements and command
phrasing like the following sets this. “You don’t have to explain your dreams.
They belong to a part of you.” This further associate’s characteristics of the
imaginary friend as part of the subject’s life.
The hypnotist, which was the patient’s doctor, would communicate directly with
this schizophrenic offshoot after it was successfully spilt. The doctor would
progressively command this offshoot to carry out specific activities which the
main personality would know nothing of. As the offshoot developed it was
conditioned to become a functional alter identity. This program is literary
explored in Marks, The Search for the Manchurian Candidate on page 184. The
selection process utilized medical doctors who were also hypnotists and as they
collected patient histories, they revivified the subject’s childhood experience of
having an imaginary friend. The doctor recorded the first emergence of the
imaginary friend as the “nucleus” that contained rejected, blocked traits, and
impulses that resonated with the person’s subconscious from one or multiple
contexts of the emergent nucleus. Doctors would use drugs and numerous
psychological techniques to separate this information out from the conscious
mind.
When researchers found that a person had more than one imaginary friend the
choice would be made to build up the split around the toughest, meanest one.
Successful results from this research inspired another specialized project to begin
in parallel with this one. This project exposed subjects to different types of
trauma to test how these events impacted the success rates of creating and
maintain alters. Researchers discovered here that some of the best military
hypno-programmed persons had been beaten or abused when they were young.
Researchers used the past experiences of abuse and applied intense pain, stress,
and emotion during field experiments to activate a dissociative identity within
them. The goal of these field experiments was to push the agent or operative to
associate into another perspective identity to deal with the stress and abuse. This
cognitive escape mechanism functioned similar to the one utilized in creating an
imaginary friend, and researchers proved this defensive cognitive mechanism did
establish an alter within a person. Research expanded from not only creating
356
alters but to establishing the best conditions for training subjects, and breaking
down previously valued allegiances or objections.
Civilian and military personnel are subjected to these tactics every day on the
street and in numerous named and unnamed locations. Operative conditioning
techniques are used to get people to talk and respond to questioning informally
and when detained. These techniques have many names and the most of methods
utilized are sleep deprivation, dietary and caloric restrictions, intense physical
and mental exercise/stimulation, use of drugs, and isolation paired with selective
social contact and/or specific stimulus. These methods of breaking a person down
often rely on the principal behind establishing alters and motivating a cognitive
escape mechanism from the past or present conditions.
Chase Hughes’s book, The Ellipse Manual, uses a noteworthy variation for the
creation of an alter, but he stays true to these well documented tactics. Hughes’s
recommends getting a person sufficiently deep in a hypnotic state and utilizing
the Mental Hallways method. The subject walks through this mental hallway
putting their hand out and feeling each door until they find one that feels
different. Once the subject finds their door, they are overwhelmed with a need to
get into it. At the point, they realize their only way out is through that door, and
the hallway has begun to quickly fill with water. The subject is quickly forced to
hold their breath until the door opens from an unlocking phrase spoken by the
Operator. The subject can easily breath again when the operator speaks the
unlocking phrase and the subject is drawn into the door. At this point, the alter is
completely described and introduced as the subject by the Operator. Confusion,
cognitive overload, and stacked realities establish the conditioning process that is
consistently built upon.
This process of entering through the door is repeated until the Operator is sure it
is stable and consistently repeatable. Now, testing and state proofing is done to
define the alter and prove to the main persona that the alter is in place. This proof
is done with details such as missing time, messages to themselves, and
discovering simple items are out of place. Isolating information between the alter
and the main identity is thought to strengthen the viability of the alter, but it is
primarily done to ensure one identity knows nothing about events from the other.
357
This is one of many methods used to create an alter, and I believe there is value
in establishing a neutral identity state, or non-ego state also.
I hope by now you’ve asked yourself if intense positive motivation could also be
used to create alters. Yes, they can. Most people can admit their happy self goes
about life a bit differently than their sad self. These two states demonstrate all the
characteristics needed to demonstrate a functioning identity. The difference here
is we aren’t locked into any one of them. I put my coffee down somewhere and
had a long, serious talk with myself. Didn't understand a word of what I said.
Half joking aside, identity and cognitive capacity is more flexible and difficult to
manage than one would expect. If government agents were giving out more
orgasms there may have been less complaints, but pleasure is relative. Operatives
are seeking consistent results to break down rational thought and cognitive
defense mechanisms; while pleasure is utilized at times, it isn’t the main
component of military and operative training. This is an area you will more than
likely have little contact with, if you are lucky that is.
The military wanted alters that could readily be created, activated, and not
recognized as an agent because of its main identity. This is not a reasonable or
ethical goal anyone should undertake. You as a Hypno Dom must ensure consent
and buy-in with any activity. All of us are capable of exhibiting this behavior
naturally, but not always to our own benefit. If a subject is undergoing repeated
orgasms, they are in a state that is powerfully responsive to activate for further
programming. This is a natural condition of biology and psychology. In this
responsive orgasmic state, the same techniques could be used from above, but
instead of flooding a hallway it could a building orgasmic climax that won’t give
it up until the unlocking phrase is spoken. When the subject is drawn into the
door, they are cumming into an alter. So let their story begin. The reality is all of
us transition into multiple identities or egos all the time. The difference is these
expressions of self are not cognitively walled off from our main or generalized
identity expression. Not everyone will find this topic easy to process or talk
about. Some people find it exciting and interesting, but others will fear they can
lose themselves. Mental illness is out there and people fear a great many things.
Be aware of that if you choose to share your thoughts on this topic.
358
There is no reason that alters have to stay walled off, or even remain active,
unless you’re engaging in top-secret campaigns. So much of our world involves
taking on new roles and identities that almost every person today
compartmentalizes aspects of their life, interests, and activities as they interact
with others on a daily basis. How we describe all this and what is happening
moment by moment has a profound effect on us. The relational power of words
to shape and confound us is inherent by the diverse expression of our selves.
How we describe ourselves and what names we carry forward can powerfully
influence the actions we take. By default, these names and words are linked to
who we are. Identity is performative. Every aspect of our reality is shaped by
words. It makes sense to be as watchful as possible with what words you use
routinely. Most people jump into identity statements too quickly. I agree with
John Locke. Personal identity is a matter of psychological continuity.
Let’s engage in a thought experiment here. Think about what it’s like to have an
identity expression as a Walker. You are a person that enjoys walking
everywhere. Walking is important to you. You like to feel your body move as
you are engaged in exercise. After a brisk walk, you can feel how posture
corrects itself and your overall energy improves. You walk along sidewalks and
pass people on bikes. It’s nice. You don’t have to bother locking a bike up or
dealing with anything you aren’t comfortable carrying. You travel through grassy
areas and places where the sidewalks are not so great. It’s easy to imagine, what
you’d like to do now. As a Walker you may decide to walk across town, down
the block, and what route you’d travel. Where you’d stop and rest, and what you
discover at the places you visit. Being so physically fit may make you more
confident to do more in the community. A routine starts to develop as you
become more familiar with all that you encounter. Each time, before you head
out for a walk, you’d go through a mental list to ensure your devices were
charged up. You’re feeling ready to head out. Where would this next walking
adventure take you? Think about it. First thoughts that enter your mind.
When your mind comes up with one or more answers you are associating into
and expressing the Walker identity. That identity now has a place within the
framework of not just how you think about walking, but how you think about
moving through the world. It’s simply a matter of developing that perspective
and maturing it from this moment on. If you don’t focus on it then you’re
359
allowing it to fade back into the general expression of life. Specialized training of
an alter is not connected to how the generalized main identity lives when there
are marked differences between the two. These differences ensure that identity
collusion doesn’t happen. Both identity expressions begin to think and behave
differently because their experiences of relating to the world are different.
Let me provide an example of this. Another personality may be created by a
relatively simple technique. The subject is instructed in deep hypnosis that the
[designated] part of their behavior/life is another individual of which they are
unaware of. This new personality knows all about the subject. The phenomenon
where the alter knows about the main personality but the main personality does
not know about the alter is called one-way amnesia. The movie Click with Adam
Sandler provides a similar example of such an experience. Sandler plays an
overworked architect who is overworked and ends up neglecting his family.
When he acquires a universal remote that enables him to "fast forward" through
unpleasant or outright dull parts of his life, he soon learns that those seemingly
bad moments that he skips over contained valuable time with his family and
important life lessons. The “fast forwarded” version of himself only cares for
what is important in those moments. These ideas are not new or radical in any
way.
If this “fast forwarded” experience would have been done with hypnosis it might
go like this. A name may be given to this alter ego, and it may then be
encouraged to function as a distinct entity by completing tasks, expressing ideas
from its perspective, and offered experiences to develop attitudes and skills all
it's own. This encouragement shapes the alter through working with them to take
on more depth, skills, a designated role, and experiences throughout interactions.
When one-way amnesia is utilized the goal is to develop the alter’s personality
while conditioning for obedience and amnesia. Conditioning obedience makes
the shifting from one personality to another like second nature as the
subconscious learns to make use of its full cognitive potential. Amnesia will have
the subject ignorant of that shift. It’s a subconscious rule that mental
programming for which the conscious mind is amnesic of tends to remain active
in the subject’s subconscious mind.
360
The first person recorded to deliberately split a personality was a French doctor
named Azam in 1858. Hypnotists learned that multiple personality disorder could
be cured by hypnotism and caused by hypnotism. Max Dessoir, circa 1890, found
through trial and error that everybody’s mind contained the potential for a second
personality, and that personality could be hypnotically stimulated to overtake the
original personality. For some researchers, this work still carries on today. The
old Operator method of mind control has not left us entirely, but it has discovered
new and innovative ways to acquire volunteers.
While I contrast the research with what is possible please do not confuse the two.
People who engage in these behaviors were not Hypno Doms and they did not
seek consent. They did not engage with a partner for intimacy and they did not
share their lives with them in meaningful ways. These people used violence,
coercion, and drugs to make to do this work. The people they experimented on
were thought of as one would think of livestock. I share this so you may learn the
unfathomable history connected to this body of knowledge. Some of what you
learn may help to protect yourself and those you love. Do not get lost in the
fantasy that you lose reality.
Hypnotic Intensity of Pain and Pleasure
Everyone I’ve ever played with has wondered how intense and real hypnotic pain
and pleasure is. In 1944 Raymond Wells, a Hypnosis Researcher, set out to
answer this very question. Wells wanted to test the extent that hypnotically
induced pain could affect a subject. Wells hypnotized a subject and told them that
he would be placing a coin on the bare, exposed skin of their forearm. Once the
coin was placed, head’s side up surely, Well’s gave the command that the coin
would first feel warm. The coin would steadily become glowing white hot. The
coin would feel like a hot branding iron pressed against the subject’s bare skin.
Well’s then told the subject that sensations of extreme glowing heat would
remain steady on his arm for the next 24 hours. This experiment was an
exploration of intensity and inevitably the subject’s endurance.
Well’s brought the subject out of hypnosis and gave him a journal. He instructed
the subject to record his experience for the next 24 hours. What the journal
described was a man attempting to deal with excruciating pain. The subject
361
described having a red swollen inflammation that was constantly burning through
the center of his every thought and movement. The described feeling like his
conscious mind was attempting to seek out and discover the source of the pain. In
the notes recorded, the subject looked at his forearm and saw at the center of this
fiery inflammation (where the coin was placed) there was an area so swollen and
painful that he couldn’t endure a touch to it. Not long after the session, the
subject described his inability to raise his arm above his head. As the pain
continued to intensify his forearm turned and began locking into a contorted
position. The subject reported that the pain was even interfering with his ability
to write. In his next entry, the subject reported a blister was forming within the
fiery inflammation on his forearm. As the pain continued to build, the subject
recorded shooting pain that began radiating all through him. There was now no
position he could hold that would give him any relief.
The subject didn’t last 24 hours in this experiment. Panic began overcoming him
as the pain steadily worsened. The subject called Well’s and he was immediately
hypnotized to remove the pain commands. As Well’s debriefed the subject about
his experience the subject mentioned the instant relief experienced when the pain
was taken away. Well’s believed that the subject had experienced an equivalent
pain threshold as someone that had a hot iron pressed to their arm. Since Well’s
publication in 1944, there have been many studies detailing the pain and
sensation numbing properties of hypnosis. Hypnosis has been investigated and
utilized for pain control in everything from dentistry to open heart surgery. The
capacity to have and recognize pain, numbness, and pleasure is all it takes to
stimulate and develop those sensory potentials hypnotically. Individually, a
person may be more or less responsive to certain pains or pleasures, and its the
context that may determine if one or both of these conditions (pains or pleasures)
are actively focused on.
In the last ten years, researchers have used imagining technologies, such as
fMRI, to record subjects under hypnosis that are actively being stimulated with
hypnotic commands for pain, anxiety, and even orgasm. A 2016 study found that
a woman just thinking about genital stimulation resulted in brain activations that
were approximately the same as those generated by actual physical genital
stimulation by a partner. This research should make even a new Hypno Dom feel
more confident as they are instructing a sub on having a hypnotic orgasm. I have
362
met a few Tists’ that called a hypnotic orgasm “Thinking Off”. That description
is not far from the truth. If you are curious to know what an orgasm looks like in
an fMRI you can check it out on YouTube. https://youtu.be/Xqj9auWq-hc
Research is beginning to uncover correlations between individuals entering
altered states of consciousness (trance) and having heightened sexual
responsiveness. A 2016 study found that altered states of consciousness can
quickly and easily occur in varying degrees during sex, and during psychological
absorption. An induction involving sensory focused stimulus is always a gateway
to trance, but this research describes trance as associated with greater sexual
satisfaction, desire, and arousal. That makes a lot of sense to me. Great
descriptions and clear guidance can intensify sensual phenomena and encourage
arousal simply by intensifying awareness around sensory details. Getting good
with hypnotic communication means you’ll see trance states everywhere and be
more aware as you interact with others. Engaging with trance phenomena, which
would include mediation, hypnosis, visualization, by itself can increase bodily
awareness, loss of awareness of time, loss of spatial awareness, and increase the
individual’s capability to focus, (also referred to as psychological absorption)
between oneself and one’s intimate partner. Many paths lead to center.
Practicing these skills will not only encourage you and your partner(s) to have
more sex, it may inspire you to be more responsive to each other, and have
greater satisfaction with the sex your having. I realize that this knowledge will be
a burden that you must carry as a Hypno Dom, and you will be lighting people up
in ways they have never experienced before. This is not just a marketing tagline
to get you excited about practicing these skills. Learning this specialized
knowledge is about understanding how we work as people and as a mind/body
collaborative. It changes how you’ll live and think about the world. There really
is no going back. My body may be a temple and I am the guru to whom it is
devoted. Let’s not forget a synonym for dad bod is a father figure, and you can
call me daddy if you want to. Smile.
Inducing Hypnotic Pain
Recently I was talking about hypnosis in the café. I had someone approach me
and tell me that he doubted hypnosis could be used to induce pain. He said pain
363
like the kind you get when someone says you’re a douche is not real pain. This
section is a community challenge for you to design an application from your
learning. What would you do with hypnosis to demonstrate hypnotic pain in the
example above? This is your challenge. Put yourself in this situation and apply
what you know. Much of what you will do as a Hypno Dom is impromptu and
you’ll need to create applicable interactions from what you know to inspire
pleasure, delight, and surprise. Punching the guy in the face is not going to work
here. Your goal is to describe what you could do and put those skills to work in a
potential application. Don't read any farther until you think this through and
apply your skills to the problem. Good luck!
Alright, here's my answer. This was not my most elegant piece of work. This
impromptu piece took a minute to think about. I reached into my pocket and I
took out a five-dollar bill from my wallet. I folded the bill in my hands and
unfolded it before asking the guy sitting with the one who inspired me to write
this challenge about his thoughts. He said he wasn't sure he knew enough to have
an opinion. The guy didn't know much about hypnosis except for what he had
seen in the movies and the comedy show that they both attended last night. I said
perfect. Then I asked him how much he liked going to the Dentist.
Most people do not like visiting their dentist and that’s too bad. If you're a dentist
I appreciate you and your service. I held out the five-dollar bill and asked the
questioner’s friend to hold onto the other end. I told him to not let go of the fivedollar bill until I do. I asked if he was willing to help me prove a point to his
friend. If his friend was right and hypnotic pain isn't real pain, he could keep the
money. I told him the moment he took the money the totality of this pain would
also be his. I asked him if he agreed and of course, his friend said, "do it". The
guy said “sure.” I told him all he had to do was resist the hypnosis that had
already begun, and overcome the pain as it intensified within him. I began to talk
about going to the dentist and a discomfort that begins even before they accept
what's going to happen.
The drill of the dentist and the splattering awareness of water… It just presses the
high pitched shrill through a person's teeth, jaw, and head. You can just feel your
jaw and face tighten up. The sensation is something not easily forgotten. Even
thinking about it, queasiness starts in the pit of the stomach, muscles tighten, and
364
teeth can grind together. It’s an awful kind of gnashing on the enamel, and that so
often results in headaches and migraines. It’s those back and forth movements,
and the sudden sharp pain that reacts to those dull body aches. It can spread
everywhere. (I drop my gaze to his lap for a second or two before looking him
once more in the eyes.) You know it's real. You’ll know when you feel yourself
shake. (I tighten my grip on the money as my gaze moves to his hand on the bill.
I felt the twitch the guy made through the tautness of the five-dollar bill. I smile
as I look him in the eyes again.)
This pain has an ache to it, and that ache will spread. It’s designed to intensify. I
repeated that he could keep this five-dollar bill if he managed to overcome the
pain and continuing to be hypnotized. He looked away and I told him he must
keep holding onto the bill until he was ready to accept it. This was after all
entirely about the pain. He shut his eyes for a moment and then started talking to
his friend. I could see the bill shaking a bit as the guy held onto it. I leaned in
close as he began singing a song and talking nonsense to himself or his friend. I
whispered to him that my voice would gradually reach him now and long after he
took that money. That money was his acceptance of the pain. In spite of anything
he tried. As long as he took this bill, he will begin to feel very uncomfortable.
This brief time holding onto the money with me was his one and only warning.
He told his friend that somethings really wrong here. I went on talking about a
developing pain in his jaw. This pain would spiderweb web up into his head, and
this hurt will grow into an agony. That pain is meant to swell and blossom into an
invisible migraine. That’s the thing about migraines. No one else can see the
pain. It just begins to shut you down as it becomes stronger, much harder to
ignore. What pain he takes now, will always be there. Hard to concentrate.
Something's off.... Very soon it will become excruciating. It will be unbearable.
Worse than everything he's ever known before. This is just his warning. As he
thinks about crying out for relief he may wonder if I'm still here. Giving this bill
back to me is the only way out of this pain. Give this money back to me to get
relief for your pain. You can always keep it, as some might reluctantly try to live
with it. That pain is concentrated by what is held in this hand, right here. (I move
my gaze to the bill and stare at it.) Now, I let go of the bill and hold my hands up
to the side of my body like I just surrendered with hands in the air. I’m holding a
surrender gesture, I imagined that the five dollar bill was hot and painful.
365
What you do now is up to you. It’s all yours I tell him. The doubter tells his
friend that he can't believe I gave him the five dollars and pulls his friend up. The
guy holding the bill didn't move fast as he was being tugged away. I slightly
turned back towards the person I was talking with before and shouted "Hey".
When the two guys turned to me, I smiled and pointed at the guy with the money
in his hand. "If you could only see your face. It's gotta hurt." Then I turned away.
The friend pulled him away again and they left. I admit I kept looking at the
clock; five minutes, ten minutes, and just when I'm getting ready to get a refill on
my coffee the guy comes running back in.
"Take it. Please take it. It's fucking real." I asked where his friend was and he
tells me he didn't want to come in there. The guy kept holding the five dollars out
to me and I admit I was very slow taking it back. When I finally did, I snapped
my fingers twice and spoke calmly. "Soothing all the pain away with each breath.
Breathe slow, and calm. Tell your friend he owes you big." There is a hypnotic
moral to this story, and that is demand at least five dollars to take the five-dollar
bill back. Smile.
Think back to the first time you tried a cigarette or had alcohol. I bet that those
first tastes where terrible, and perhaps painful if it sent you coughing
uncontrollably. Even after all of that discomfort, there were elements about that
experience that had you focusing on the perceived pleasure from the experience.
That pleasure may have been fitting in, taking a break, or letting go of the stress
of the day. When you can connect with someone’s pain and their pleasure,
something interesting happens. Your ideas can begin to both push and pull them.
You start engaging their problems as well as their joy. When we’re stressed, in
pain, or feeling an abundance of pleasure, our brains release A LOT of
chemicals; endorphin, serotonin, melatonin, epinephrine, norepinephrine, and
dopamine as your biology is excited by what's happening. And it's not just
physical pain but emotional and social discomfort as well that can set this in
motion. These chemicals are the biological messengers working through pain
AND pleasure so don't ignore them. I'd go so far as to challenge you to become
more aware of these moments where we work ourselves up in unhelpful ways.
Current research validates that hypnosis can reduce fear, tension, and pain during
surgery. Hypnosis can also raise the pain threshold so take care here. Past
366
research demonstrates that hypnosis can be used to increase pain, anxiety, fear,
and tension too. Your internal communication is the most repetitive, consistent,
and inescapable voice you will have throughout your life so use it well. At the
end of the day, if the voice in your mind is you, then who is the one listening to
it? This is always interesting to think about and discuss. I might just have to write
that down and use it in some hypnotic communication. Being healthy isn't just
about how much activity you get or what you eat. Your health includes what you
are thinking and what you say to yourself. We are conditioning ourselves to our
perception of the world every day.
Since I first wrote this, I got into a conversation with my friend Guzalia Davis
that utilizes this sentiment’s pain point perfectly. What I enjoy about Guzalia is
she gets a bit pointed with advice as she completes this challenge elegantly. I
hope you enjoy this bit as much as I did.
“#1... It is all relative. We all live in our reality. You create yours as we speak.
And I am co-creating it as I'm speaking to you. I can help you fill your reality
with pleasant feelings... or pain as you requested... But that is not something I
would choose to do. Although, who am I to make any choices for you. It is your
choice to experience pain. Although even pain is relative... some crave the kind
of pain that others would find to be torture. What is your pain? Where is it within
your body? I imagine, as it starts it's very subtle... so subtle that it makes you
question whether you can feel it at all... but with just moments passing, you have
no doubts left because your pain, just as anyone's, has a tendency to grow,
increase, become more intense... But I know nothing of your pain... it is yours
and it is growing, becoming more intense... " #2 Basic mesmerism/energetic
hypnosis. Pain is energy. You can collect your own or someone else' pain and
pass it on to another person. You can also create it within another body
energetically. You can also move energy aggressively within another body to
trigger pain.”
There have been a few other entries to this MC challenge, but this is the last I’ll
share. I’m not a fan of this technique, but pain is sometimes used as a stick to
motivate people to make better choices. At times there are more important things
in life than the avoidance of pain, such as the avoidance of disapproval, or the
risk of losing love. For example, if tempted to cheat on a diet a person can reach
367
for unhealthy food, and get queasy. A suitable associating technique to
accomplish this would be linking an imagined stop light that’s linked to either
nausea or migraine like sensations. Typically, the subject is told to relive an
existing memory and at the choice point in the action, the signal is linked to the
undesirable decision. At least three associations need to be established with red,
yellow, and green. Any lasting change has to result in a change of thoughts and
behavior.
There are many reasons why someone might accept an uncomfortable or painful
suggestion. The prize here is yellow and green can be used for wonderful visual
signals to light the way in your hypnotic adventures to better choices. Remember
as a Hypno Dom the submissive maybe your slave, but she’s also your
consenting partner. Don’t just encourage and reward her for being the best good
girl or sex toy she can be. Encourage and reward her to be the best version of
herself that she wants to be. We talk a lot about conditioning our slaves into
mindlessly obedient toys who are incapable of doing much anything outside of
serving, fucking, and living as sexy fantasies for us. But that’s not all we really
want in the long term. That’s just an extension of living a fantasy shared between
us that becomes reality. It’s all that some see. What we really want and love is a
woman who can be both within the world, and grounded within the shared reality
together. This is about establishing life on our terms. Think about it. If she didn’t
have any passions and delights outside of the relationship, then you wouldn’t be
able to play these delightful games! They’d be different games entirely. Those
games and dynamics create the roles that excite us.
Our social self is mixed together with cultural attitudes, deadlines, and
limitations that encourage us not to think too much about it all. This is our life
and all of us are wanting to live it well. What's it like not trying to awaken
something deep inside as you talk with others? And don't think about it either…
Don’t you hold onto that pain and boredom. That’s not yours. Engage with life
and each other. You know most people don’t realize that they carry the weight of
an atmosphere on their shoulders every day. They won’t know you’re studying to
be a Hypno Dom until you decide to share that passion with them to light theirs.
368
Planning Hypnotic Sessions
Planning out your hypnotic interaction with a subject ensures you hit all the
agreement points that you and your subject are looking for. Each style of
hypnosis will utilize different formats that have to be planned out, practiced, and
presentation glitter thrown at moments of epiphany. A basic plan of preparation
will be similar whether you are doing self-hypnosis or hetero-hypnosis. This
chapter will be going over elements to consider in your preparation and delivery
for hypnotic sessions.
The delivery, audience, and purpose of the hypnosis will only be somewhat
different between the many hypnotic disciplines. There will often be more
similarities than differences in how we practice and perform than some may like
to admit. For example, you could easily adapt parts of street hypnosis and stage
hypnosis to hypnotherapy. In this book, you read over transcripts that could be
used in a dentist’s office, yoga studio, or in a hypnosis practice group. Let’s
begin by laying out a basic plan for a subject to experience hypnotic relaxation
any time they are stressed.
Screening and interviewing your subject beforehand is best practice, unless you
are doing street hypnosis or stage hypnosis you have the time. Screening
individuals for private or public performances are often done with disclaimers
and acknowledgments of consent. Your screening criteria should be in
comparison with what others are doing in the field, and derived from what you’re
seeking. Screening and interviewing subjects will be very different amongst
hypnotic styles. For our example of bringing a subject into hypnosis to
experience hypnotic relaxation anytime they feel stressed we’ll be using a formal
induction. When I say formal its one you would expect if you met someone in an
office or did group hypnosis.
This formal induction is often what hypnotic scripts say you need them to begin
this work. Get know the subject a little. Getting rapport and consent assists you in
developing the most effective language with your subject. It’s great when you
can find out about the subject’s attitudes, emotions, interests, and anything which
may help you to decide on the choice of words, scenes, and any themes that they
don’t like before using them. Some hypnotists will have the subject describe the
most comforting and happiest places they have been or wish to be. It’s often an
369
easy trance session if the subject would enjoy revivifying or recreating those
moments with you. When doing a kinky hypnotic session, a negotiation BDSM
checklist may be used as part of this pretalk. A checklist like this is often used if
playing in a public dungeon and it helps to ensure there is no shame, limits, and
real interests. You can find an updated form for this purpose on my blog.
www.taoofthecrown.com/single-post/2019/04/10/Using-a-BDSM-Checklist-AsPart-of-your-kinky-Hypnotic-Pretalk
Seeking the best moments of a person’s life is a good conversational skill to
adopt as it assists you in collecting information about places, emotions, and
history of the subject that could be utilized during a session. More than that it
allows you to bring those best moment into new scenes that can be experienced
for the first time in hypnotic adventures with you. After the hypnotic scenery is
picked out than the goal(s) and/or reported problems are brought up. We aren’t
doing anything with problems here though. Our goal here is relaxation and
immersion in their best moments so the subject can fully experience hypnosis.
Getting immersed in a scene like the mountains, a forest, field, or the beach are
some of the most popular scenes.
Any goal(s) and choice points get worked into the action by instructions and
commands interspersed through a simple story in the chosen environment. We
want to be sure the subconscious mind associate’s instructions and commands as
elements to be acted on so we test them within the story, and by bringing the
subject in and out of hypnosis to demonstrate the effects as appropriate. We can
test associations after we go over them a few times by having people in the story
embody the characteristics we desire and modeling them for the subject as part of
the story. Choose stories and contexts that naturally encourage the goals you’ve
decided upon. Once this cause and effect story loop is experienced, and the skills
refined, we want the behaviors practiced in the context of a similar story. It
begins by having the subject learn the lessons in pieces and assembling them
together as part of their journey. Introduce the subject to helping characters in
this scene, realizing skills, and making choices dependent on new behaviors
instead of the old behavior, thoughts, and sensations. Again, our goal is to test
and provide feedback to encourage behavioral adaption.
370
The associated cause and effect story loop provides an example in context with
direct instructions to the subconscious mind. Next, we want to test this change to
ensure it is functioning properly in a few different contexts that the old behavior
was used. The new behavior is tested repeatedly in familiar and new contexts to
ensure old associations aren’t coming back, and that the new behavior works for
the subject. By going through this in a variety of contexts you can discover if any
problems arise or if old associations are still present and must be fixed.
For example, we will use smoking as smoking cessation programs have become
commonplace now. Finding alternative behaviors for craving and smoking
motivated activities at work or home may be easy at first. Having the subject
imagine going to a restaurant or a bar where the smell of cigarettes makes her
crave them might take additional trials to create a workaround. Some behaviors
are associated together in environments and most smokers will tell you that
smoking and drinking go hand in hand. Some of this is behavior is made worse
by poor impulse control and drinking alcohol reduces frontal lobe activity, and
allows subconscious patterns of behavior to more readily emerge. Working
through those environmental signals and social contexts will allow you to be very
effective as you’re learning what tends to trigger your subject towards specific
behaviors. Take a moment to think about what you might share with someone
wanting to relax and minimize stress conversationally and with formal hypnosis
before moving on.
Test out what you come up with in your imagination or with a partner. After you
are satisfied that the new behavioral choice is working well, you’ll tell the
subconscious to keep making changes that ignore certain behaviors and thoughts
connected to the old behavior. Give positive feedback as you run the subject
through another trial of the new behavior(s) and ask the subconscious if it would
like more practice to strengthen the association with the behavior. Tell the
subconscious to quickly run through hundreds of examples in the next minute.
When the subconscious has done this have it move a finger by twitching to signal
you. When the signal is displayed tell the subject you’re going to refine this new
behavior to make it even more part of them. Run them through the example that
was described when they came to you. Tell them that each time they are
hypnotized it will be more enjoyable and easier to make better choices. Each time
she is hypnotized by you, she will develop, learning faster, and more easily. Add
371
some general wellbeing and healthy living instructions and then lead the subject
back through the hypnotic scenery to the very moment they sat down.
The count up begins. When the subject awakens offer a debrief with interspersed
statements for reinforcement of the session. I sometimes like to ask if the subject
knows how much time has passed to see if they are surprised by the common
time distortion effects of hypnosis. The subconscious mind responds best to
images and symbols so asking the subject to visualize the positive outcome they
want to achieve should feel good for them. The subconscious mind treats these
visualizations as if they are real and practicing the new behavior should feel
motivating to the subject. Note, that the last sentence is also a reinforcement of
session goals and a post-hypnotic command. In the debrief ask about the old
behavior and their experience in letting go of it. Instruct them on any next steps.
When the hypnosis is over, they are still suggestable to you as they return fully to
consciousness. Tell them to take the time they need to collect themselves and get
excited about what comes next. Point them to the exit, library, or garden to
process and begin the day anew. That exit process is up to both of you.
Remember the exit process is like aftercare. It can make the experience better and
is something to look forward to in itself.
Let’s compare this formal induction structure with doing hypnosis on the stage.
As your skill grows you will be utilizing a combination of these hypnotic formats
in many different environments.
A Basic Hypnotic Session Outline for a Stage Hypnotist
When doing stage hypnosis, the goal is to qualify subjects for compliance and
responsiveness in order to progress them through a practiced routine. If you have
never seen a stage show I encourage you to search YouTube for stage hypnosis.
You will discover more than you’ll want to watch. In order to qualify subjects for
compliance and responsiveness, a hypnotist is constantly engaging in
conversation and leading formal and informal suggestibility and compliance tests
in his interactions with audience members. I have seen a hypnotist arrive early to
talk with people as well as send in others to check the room. These operative
Tists are there to assess the people and energy of the place. While I do not use
372
planted people in an audience, I know it still happens. Using plants or operatives
is not a universal practice, but if there is magic or illusion involved in the show
it’s a strong possibility they are there. This chapter will run you through an
overview of stage hypnosis as Hypno Dom’s will use many of these skills.
Since the stage hypnotist is asking for volunteers during the show there is the
potential for subjects to observe what traits are appealing and rewarded with
additional attention from the hypnotist. This desire to perform and please often
creates a fun show that people will talk about long after. There is also the
opportunity to point out unwanted responses and have the audience boo and call
out blame any time those behaviors appear. Get this push and pull working
together and there is no need to plant anyone in an audience. To work the
audience, a stage hypnotist has to understand more than just hypnosis. There
must be an understanding of presentation, storytelling, and performance. It’s with
these skills that the hypnotist must dismiss slow and unresponsive subjects as the
audience observes the demonstration of the volunteer(s) on the stage. It has to be
entertaining and moving along at a fairly quick pace. These qualification
demonstrations are run as part of the performance and serve to create side
performances with jokes with responsive subjects. Stage hypnotists often
integrate magic tricks and comedy to make the demonstrations, and setup time,
more entertaining while establishing social proof with the audience.
The performances I have been part of have included magic, ventriloquism,
singers, comedians, dancers, and live bands. As I write this, I have been asked
about the merits of developing a cupcake induction for an act. Even if you don’t
have the magic tricks of Penn and Teller these performances do not demand you
work alone. Understanding how to present and transition from event to event is a
useful skill that makes you a better communicator and thus a better hypnotist. As
a stage hypnotist, each event allows you to select the subjects that are the most
expressive and responsive for what comes next. This selection process creates the
illusion for the audience that you are controlling everything. I would not seek to
dissuade them of this, but it is the responsive personalities of your subjects that
make the show as you apply your skill.
The best part about learning stage hypnosis is that it teaches you to pair
presentation themes with the states of mind that you're seeking to shift a subject
373
into or through. This is a skill that everyone uses every day of their lives to
communicate with others and initiate influence attempts with. When you want to
convey that life is an adventure the excitement and the stories shared bring out
those themes. It’s no coincidence that sharing the backstory with previous
examples is called setting the stage.
I know a writer who developed writer’s block as she got halfway through her
book. She couldn’t seem to write more to go forward with her story. I suggested
she instead go backward and develop the motivation to go onward from the
character’s perspective. When this writer wrote more and more backstory about
this character’s past, she was able to slowly move forward with the story. Each
time the writer got stuck she began to do this with each character. Soon her
backstory was longer than the present story she intended to tell. Once she had
personal motivations, context, and circumstances pushing those characters
forward that one book ended up becoming two. The backstory became the first
book and the original story concept became the second book that was almost
completed. Having the second book almost ready for market helped secure a
publisher and sell the literary experience of this writer’s reality. Themes
presented at stage shows should be able to establish or hook into stories and ideas
we can all relate to and enjoy. Those routines can also turn heckling and meanspirited comments about subjects, or the hypnotist themselves back on the
audience member. To ultimately learn this presentation skill, you will need to get
out there and be part of the many shows ideally. This is where you see what
works.
Some of my favorite routines are having a subject unable to tell me their real
name and always saying a different name each time they’re asked, a body part is
stolen or fallen off, audience members become petting zoo animals to the subject,
hypnotic butt pinches, and becoming the testing expert of the world’s best liar.
Every hypnotic assessment presented in this book can easily be utilized in a stage
show with a little creativity. The progressive outline for stage hypnosis is one
compliance and hypnotic test after another. The routine tests are mixed with
jokes and presentation skills. Stage hypnosis has the benefit of getting a hypnotist
extremely familiar with working with subjects to establish waking trances and
playfully guiding them through routine after routine. I realize that sounds very
formulaic and that’s because the concept is. Small variations occur between
374
shows of the same performer, and large deviations or additions to the act, rarely
happen impromptu for most stage hypnosis performers. What really changes the
show tends to be the responsive subjects and the hypnotist adapts. The hypnotist
still has to embody the energy of this being a suspenseful surprise even after the
thousandth time performing the act. To quote Chester Cheetah, “It’s not easy
being cheesy.”
After learning that you can have a subject believe that they have lost their butt,
interacting with other people as if they were animals at a petting zoo, and
creating the world’s best liar, then creating hypnotic orgasms should just be
another thing you qualify and condition subjects for. While this chapter gave you
no act to use, this whole book contains material you can easily adapt for such a
performance.
Hypnotic orgasm
There are similarities between experiencing hypnosis and being in love. Both are
trances. Sexuality and service come together in the mind of the subject as they
successfully accomplish being trained to hypnotically orgasm. Repeated orgasms
for the subject often involves ideals of obedience, acceptance, and surrender
toward the power of Hypno Dom. Representing unequivocal sexuality with
intimacy is a means of establishing authority, furthering control, and encouraging
a supreme sexual thirst that can bond someone to you for life, are some of the
outcomes I have come to enjoy from teaching others to cum on command. The
hypnotic orgasm demonstrates an undeniable submission that is matched by
pleasure and pride for the control of the Hypno Dom. Your mission, should you
choose to accept it, is to be so busy loving your life that you have no time for
hate, fear, or regret. This is the knowledge will allow you to whisper in your
subject’s ear, “You can't rush something you want to last forever. Keep cumming
like a good girl.” This chapter will share ideas and techniques you can use with
or without formal hypnosis.
When you’re ready to teach the subject to orgasm on your command, keep in
mind there are 6 things you can manipulate in your overall conditioning. These
five things are:
1. The start and stop of the orgasm.
375
2. The intensity of the orgasm.
3. The sensations of the orgasm.
4. The locations of where the orgasm moves through the body.
5. The motivational urging for more orgasms and associations connected
6. The biological responses to orgasm.
What is shared below can be achieved by utilizing natural trances or hypnosis.
There are multiple ways you can begin to approach starting this training. You can
begin by having some good sex, getting her close, and saying in a commanding
voice, “cum for me.” Doing that alone, over and over begins to make an
association to your voice, the feelings, and the orgasm. Saying it again, while she
is cumming will intensify and reinforce the associations. Sex is a trance state all
by itself, and orgasm is a peak of that state. Each successive element you utilize
to train, and inevitably condition the subject’s ability, can intensify and expand
your control with her orgasm.
You can immediately bring the subject down into a deep hypnotic state and
associate them back into that moment just before an orgasm. At this point, you
can touch her or not depending upon what you have worked out. If you don’t
touch her, and she doesn’t touch herself, this can be a touchless orgasm or
thinking off. You may hypnotically instruct the subject that she will instantly
explode into orgasm, or she will not be able to cum without your command. Test
this by having the pleasure and need climb higher and higher. Then tell her that if
she begs you might give her the command to cum. This play is about excitement
and stimulating the mind, emotions, and body. Doing this gets the subject
associated into the orgasmic state over and over, and this introduces another state
to the subject, the pre-orgasm state, where conditioning begins.
The more intensely aroused and involved in this interactional state the subject is,
the stronger the associations become. Consider using a lot of eye contact between
you both here as elements of attraction and desire are also being associated onto
your voice, touch, body, attention, and pleasure. As you repeatedly associate the
subject to the seconds before a screaming orgasm, have her notice and describe
the signals her body is sending her about the intensity and the approaching
orgasm. Tell her that soon she will begin to distinguish between the different
types of orgasms her body is capable of generating. The more orgasms the
376
subject has the easier and more intense additional orgasms will be. Now, you are
guiding her awareness as well as training her to distinguish the transitions
between types of orgasms. There will be more on this soon. To have a subject
cumming on command will not only be exciting for them but they will need to
exercise this ability to keep it consistent and reliable. Orgasm conditioning pairs
well with behavioral training as it provides a wonderful reward for performances
in daily life and service accomplishments.
Given the lack of sexual knowledge that most people are raised with, the amount
of anxiety our culture has around sex, and how comfortable you are talking with
your partner about your sexual response, it’s not surprising that orgasms can be
an unexplored area for most. It’s a happy fact that the more orgasms you have the
more orgasms your body naturally craves. Whether you’re looking for immediate
gratification or long-term payoff, learning more about your orgasmic potential
will likely bring satisfaction well into the future. You’ll simply begin by having
the subject orgasm and choose a characteristic of the orgasm presented to focus
on and develop. Let’s look at the duration of time for an orgasm.
As you practice with the subject begin extending the time of her orgasm. This
can be done simply by saying, “keep cumming” again and again whether you’ve
brought the subject into hypnosis or not. Sex and orgasm are trance states. Begin
giving the subject commands that have her building up every orgasm stronger
and more intensely with you all the time. Using descriptive commands to notice
the sensations and instructing them to feel them more strongly is all it takes.
Have her notice the orgasm filling her up and lasting longer and longer. Practice
having the sustained orgasms until you instruct her to stop.
Have the subject paying attention to how her orgasm moves through her body
and mind. Start having the subject describe her sensations to you and begin
associating your touch with them when you say a phrase like “orgasmic touch
activated.” Good humor sticks around in our minds and this phrase will be
charged with a lot of anticipation and sexual energy every time you use it. You
can test this with a hand, your cock, and with the added attention of your mouth.
This is orgasmic pleasure conditioning and you will be fucking her body and
mind with an engaged passion few can match.
377
Think about how you want to adjust the intensity of her cravings for this because
she will want more. If you’ve gone down the list of orgasmic pleasure
conditioning from above to get here than she’s already potentially cum hundreds
of times already. Think about this conditioning from the subject’s perspective.
Finding a guy that they want, makes them feel good, that’s wanting to invest in a
future with them, and enjoys making them cum repeatedly is practically
impossible to resist. Choose your words carefully as you associate one thing to
another and be ready to consume lots of protein. When she’s with you she might
not remember any books she’d read, any classes she’d taken, or even her name
and phone number. I guarantee that she’ll know what to do when the clothes
come off and love every second of it. Attention like this is a valued and rare
pleasure in itself.
Motivation is very much akin to a hypnotic command. It only needs a firing
event that can be as simple as “Eat or drink, you’re thirst to please, and to cum
for me grows." If you don’t have a lot of free time and a high sexual drive, I’d
think three times or more before locking in these standards. Just like everything
else try them out together and find what works for everyone. As soon as you
strengthen this orgasmic association into a measurable and quantifiable cycle like
time, she may begin to expect and thirst for this on a schedule like breakfast,
lunch, and dinner. Keep in mind that everyone you will ever meet will eat even if
they’re not physically hungry. Sometimes they’ll eat because they want to enjoy
the taste, try something new, enjoy it because it’s offered, or simply because its
lunch time. Orgasmic conditioning is a motivational feedback cycle being
established between you so please take it seriously, because it won’t be a joke or
funny if there’s a problem. This is the perfect transition to conditioning the
subject to take care of some of these needs on her own and connecting with
tactile experiences of your touch, voice, and energy.
When you create a stronger need to regularly orgasm think about including the
ability for her to get off herself with permission. I confess I do enjoy orgasm
control so decide for yourself if taking control of her orgasms or not is
meaningful to you both. Here’s how I recommend thinking about this and
scheduling it out. At least once a day the subject feels the pressure building up,
thirsting inside her, and she aches for release. I’d go over the internal and
behavioral signals that demonstrate she needs to cum and release this pressure as
378
it’s building up just like a shaken soda bottle. It gets harder and harder to do
anything else that doesn’t agitate and stimulate this thirsty need. I’d start to
develop standards that are paired with this orgasmic scheduling.
Use standards that make sense for the relationship you are building together.
Here are more pleasure conditioning and power exchange standards that I might
use. The thirst to cum is part of her service and part of her self-care. Orgasming
is a signal that she is pleasing and doing well. Orgasming removes stress and is
how she primes her body and mindset before presenting herself to me. You can
add whatever else you want her to think about before and after she cums. These
standards become part of her internalized conditions for orgasm, self-care, and
consistent service to you. There have been some subjects that were less interested
in orgasms, or would only accept an orgasm after I orgasmed. Those subjects
wanted to bask in their submission and before losing themselves in doing
everything they could to cum. I might connect their mouth and their orgasm to be
linked with mine. Plan this out and don’t expect to use what is here word for
word every time. There’s a reason I’m not giving you a recipe here.
When it comes time to test your work its simply getting her turned on and
practicing consistently over and over to fine tune the desired result. I have
enjoyed including a command while I am away that sets the number of orgasms
she has to have. I use edging when they a subject does this so if I tell her “cum
three by three” she’ll start right there and edge herself close to orgasm three time
then cum. She will have to do this two more times to satisfy the three by three
requirement. Each orgasm has three times where she gets close to cumming and
is backed away from it (this is edging) before she hears me tell her on the fourth
time to “Cum hard like a good girl.” While sex and the orgasm itself is a natural
trance state the goal is to keep it consistent and build on each success.
It’s okay if being unsure of herself makes her nervous. Your role is to build on
each successive success and her subconscious mind knows how to do this. She
has nothing else to do except bring the right mindset and allow the expressive
potential of her body to answer your commands. Once you get one method of
conditioning orgasm on command repeatable, she’ll be able to perform it any
time and any place. Each successive orgasm conditioning method will happen
more quickly as rapport and communication grow between you. When it comes
379
to orgasms, one size definitely does not fit all. And while you should avoid
trying to compare your experience to someone else’s, it can be helpful in creating
your own sexual definitions to hear how others, particularly those who spend
their lives thinking about sex, have chosen to distinguish different types of
orgasms.
As you think about what to say, do, or utilize as a stimulus for your conditioning
just remember to keep it simple and consistent. Neurons that fire together wire
together. When you provide a unique stimulus alongside a specific behavior, any
cognitive behavioral expression can be developed into an automatic association
with repetition. Just like discovering a hair on a biscuit your whole physiology
will react to that unique stimulus with a cognitive behavioral shift that happened
utterly outside of conscious control. This works because we as human beings are
wired this way. Lend an orgasmic hand to those who are in need. Even the
smallest bits of warmth can be a sanctuary when the rest of the world is ice cold.
Share a new way to be within this world. Let it go, let it leave, let it happen.
Nothing in this world was promised or belonged to us anyway. When desire fills
your body, and your arousal directs your thinking. You’ll move towards bliss.
Other ways you can expand her orgasm training are by using the exact same
stimulation to her clitoris and nipple at the same time as she cums over and over.
When you have done this a few times she will start coming from nipple
stimulation alone. Even fabric brushing against her nipples will keep her highly
aroused and climaxing. I love sweater season! For this reason, I often don’t keep
the trigger on her nipples active as repeated accidental firing of the anchor can
weaken it. When I use this, I like having her activate the nipple trigger by having
something sexual in her mouth. I leave this vague so the subconscious can
interpret this and generalize it to fingers, toes, dildos and more. You can keep
repeating the procedure for other body parts and with repetition of this process,
they will automatically become orgasmic connections. As you do this make sure
you tell the subject you are connecting this sensation (something in mouth) to
this sensation or product (being right at the edge of orgasm) as it will happen
faster and more reliably each and every time.
If you want your subject to have heightened responsiveness and growing sexual
drive be descriptive with the behavior and thoughts you are seeking to establish.
380
All you have to do is keep the happy orgasms pumping into her and watch it
happen. Conditioning with pleasure establishes what you are describing and
modeling as the standard to internalize and maintain. It all gets linked together
and makes future conditioning more readily achievable and appreciated by the
subject. This is not really rocket science. If you can induce hypnosis or utilize a
natural trance and associate the subject’s pleasure on the sensations and
experience of having an orgasm, then you can elicit a conditionable orgasmic
response. I’ve gotten to the point that I am only training and hypnotizing subjects
that I am fucking. They are not clients. They are subjects consenting to the
pleasure of hypnotic and/or BDSM experiences. Once you master this process
well to mind blowing with a woman, she will be your best advertisement to the
world. You are now one day closer to eating your next plate of nachos after
having explosive orgasms.
It won’t matter whether you’re conditioning subjects using a no-touch orgasm or
using a combination of pleasure conditioning methods like me. Training the notouch orgasm can be long and drawn out or take a few minutes to get it
established. For me, educating people on these skills taps into spiritual sexuality
that encourages us to live in greater harmony with who we are and can be. For
many people I’ve worked with, experiencing pleasure conditioning that
associates their best self to orgasm on command stimulates a greater expression
of their best self. It pairs peak excitement and behavior as utterly rewarding.
Once that hypnotic orgasm is performing you will want to use it over and over.
Repetition, intensity, and surrender culminate into the goal of achieving
automatic responsiveness.
At this point in your hypnotic skill development, you may begin to recognize a
lot of what is communicated to the subject is actually context management and
intensifying involvement through content appropriate descriptions. This
relational hypnosis is always active as our subconscious is constantly looking for
how we relate to the world around us in every given circumstance. This relational
hypnosis is transmitted as a culture that informs us about how we should feel
about ourselves, our bodies and thoughts. Everything we do is experienced twice,
once in our mind and then in reality. The context (frame) and content
(information and descriptive experience) are important elements that demonstrate
your skills and offer opportunities to make them real. After all, some people can
381
make saying hello awkward. Don’t be one of those people. Learn to talk dirty and
tease. Being optimistic and intelligent is sexy for many people.
When establishing a sexual context or potential fantasy bring excitement into the
interactions you’ve discussed. Have the subject thinking about craving the next
moment they can experience any of this with you and then describe how this
builds pleasure and intensifies their thirst to submit and cum. You should be
actively utilizing pleasure conditioning like this. Pleasure conditioning
statements are associating thoughts and actions to set pleasure in context. Over
and over this pattern of communication is conditioning these commands and
instructions to you in context. You can diagram pleasure conditioning commands
out and establish yourself at the hub of this service and sensation orientated
wheel.
Plan out the associations from the subject’s daily routines that will direct her
back to these thirsty desires when you’re not together. Establish descriptive
sensory cues that allow the stress of the world to fall away and send strong
signals it’s time for self-care and service. How intrusive you make these cues are
up to you both but remember my metaphor of the bottle of shaken soda. You're
developing something that remains present but also exerts dynamic energy with
all that fizzy pressure ready for the right moment of escape. Establishing with the
slave a new routine with protocol helps to ensure they can easily and quickly
reenter these designed states. It takes very little time before these behavioral
events and perspectives feel familiar.
Below I’ll share an orgasm on command transcript that is a no-contact think off. I
still enjoy spanking their thigh or knee when telling a subject to cum for me. I
can just as easily use my own thigh to slap so the subject hears the sound and
rhythm as I give the command to “cum like a good girl.” I prefer contact with
them for this. This will be an authoritarian style of hypnosis and it can easily be
done privately or on stage. Notice the hypnotic tests can be framed as challenges
of cooperation that are part of the induction itself. In this transcript, it’s the first
time the subject and I have met. She has volunteered to be the demonstration
subject for the small group of erotic hypnotists learning about hypnotic orgasm.
Before starting a demonstration like this I always want to position myself so the
subject must look up at me when possible. If planning a prolonged session
382
choose comfort over form. Kneeling or laying down works, but this isn’t just
about a regressive moment when you looked up at an authority figure. For me,
this has a lot to do with sitting together all day and bringing subjects in and out of
a trance. I find I feel the most at ease starting sessions by moving around
subjects. This habit developed after fighting the urge to move and feeling stuck to
a seat because my subject was much of the day. I had to remind myself it’s okay
to move too. Keep in mind kneeling is not easily maintained while in hypnosis
and I’ve seen a few subjects tip over this way. As the transcript begins, I’m
standing next to my seated subject as I ask the group to remain silent and ensure
their phones are set to silent. I tell the audience to pay attention to the subject’s
face, eyes, body twitches, general movements, and they will see all they need to
know. I put my hand on the subject’s shoulder and say their name as I talk to the
group.
“I tell the subject I am now talking with her subconscious directly. (I look at the
subject and shift my body language to suggest my first concern is addressing the
group.) As I talk with her subconscious, and the group, her conscious mind will
go quiet, and she will feel absolutely amazing… She will feel like she has always
wanted to feel… (I take a deep breath and sigh as I meet her eyes for a moment.)
She will feel pleasure like she always knew she could. (I remove my hand and
lean down to meet her eyes.) “When I say deeply down, your eyes always close.
You instantly move deeper and deeper into hypnosis. (Subject begins to blink.)
When I say deeply down, you go this deep, and even deeper, into hypnotic
trance… deeply down (Subject’s eyes are closed.) Now, I want you to open your
eyes… We are going to test this again together... (Subject’s eyes remain closed.)
I am going to count to three… and you will open your eyes. On 1, 2, 3. Open
your eyes.” (Subject opens her eyes.)
“Perfect.” I ask the subject what the best part of her day was. The subject smiles
and begins to answer, but I interrupt her saying the command “deeply down.” I
wave my hand down in front of her eyes and catch a look of surprise on the
subject’s face as her eyes close. I say “deeply down.” Several times slowly and
the subject’s head slumps down and forward in front of her. “Perfect… That’s
right… When you obey… you please me… and your whole body and mind light
up… Every time you obey, you feel desire and pleasure growing, more intense…
(This is direct hypnosis and if this was not a group of Kinksters interested in
383
power exchange I would not have started out with this particular pleasure
conditioning statement as quickly.) Enjoy, really take pride in your surrender,
because here, together, it means you’re being cared for… At the hand of your
Owner, and myself, it means you are appreciated for all that you are and do… All
you have to do, is continue going deeper… knowing the parts of you, that
understand this, that’s who I am talking with now… Now, on the count of three,
you’ll open your eyes... On 1, 2, 3. Eyes open.”
The subject opens her eyes and looks at me with a smile.
“That’s a good girl. To contact the deeper truth of who you are, we must engage
in some activity, that questions what you assume to be true, about yourself, and
the world… without expectations… There are many different parts that make up
a person… Some of these parts will be easier to discover, while others will be
rooted deeper, they communicate subtler ways... the mind can drift towards what
you like, and what your strengths are today… this presents parts of you working
as a whole… working together… Today the distance between your dreams, and
reality is crossed by discipline… all of you coming together… Aspects of
discipline, and feeling this control… is what we are here to practice, and make
real today. Are we not?”
Subject: “Yes.” Subject says softly and nods her head slightly.
“Good… We are going to do something straightforward now. You are going to
practice following through with your best self, and feel pleasure as you obey, and
all those parts of you will work together... I’m talking to all of them now too…
Do you want to obey me?”
Subject: “Yes.” Subject says softly.
“Do you want to feel even more pleasure?”
Subject says yes more clearly.
“Perfect… Feel that pleasure developing inside as you obey… your subconscious
mind is following through, obeying perfectly, and feel the amazing sensations
you earn… obey, discovering this pleasure moving through you... body and
mind… because you’re following through… obey, your practicing new skills…
384
new ways to communicate, obey… Now… your body IS locked in place… YOU
are unable to move... breathing easily and well, only your face and mouth have
mobility… Nothing else can move, everything else is locked, but your face and
mouth… You WILL remain locked until I release you… Try to move, the
pleasure increases in your body exponentially… you’ve tried, you know you’re
stuck… body locked, stuck with building pleasure... Try to move, you’re stuck…
so stop, accept this pleasure is increasing, and locked in... Now, use your voice
and tell me what this feels like?”
The subject can’t stop smiling as she says, “I can’t move Sir. I feel really good.
Relaxed and good.”
“Perfect... We’re just beginning… Feel that pleasure expanding... It brings you to
the edge, locking in at the edge, of your most powerful orgasm… pay attention to
how your body communicates this… experience how it begins to need this
release… The energy of every single orgasm, every single one in your life… its
building up for release, here and now… You have to contain it… intensifying
even more… You can’t release yet… You can only obey… This is the orgasm of
some epic superhero… it’s building up more… as powerful as the heart of an
explosive sun… there’s just so much energy here… feeling its pressure, ripples,
or waves… notice how your body is telling you it wants this… nipples so
sensitive, recognize how it feels to be sooo close… you want this more than
anything… you’re needing… to just explode… with this pleasure, you can only
obey… with that pleasure, you can’t stay still… you want this… you’re locked in
place… as this pleasure moves in and out… there’s a rhythm building,
stroking… taking you farther than ever before… I’m fucking you, with this
pleasure… I’m fucking you, with this hypnotic power… I’ll keep fucking you…
Tell me you can only obey, and you’ll be fucked harder still.” (At this point the
subject’s head is moving around like a bobblehead figure as her body remains
ridged.)
Subject: “You can only obey.” (The subject is breathing quickly and moaning.
Subject responded and did not correct the statement from you to I. “I can only
obey.” When this happens, it is just as good because the subconscious is talking
aloud to the conscious mind. Vocalized self-talk.)
385
"Perfect... Your being fucked by pleasure... this is how good it feels to obey…
Pleasure fucks your body harder, and that head bobs like an action figure…
you’re being fucked by pleasure… submit, accept it… deeply down, inside…
pleasure fucks you harder… every time I say you can only obey… pleasure fucks
you more intensely… Every time I say, you can only obey… it gets stronger, you
feel so much more… and pleasure fucks you with greater intensity... right on the
edge of the most powerful orgasm… No matter how hard you try, you cannot
move… and you must repeat this, aloud, and in your mind… ‘you can only
obey’… ‘you can only obey’… ‘you can only obey’… (Subject appears
completely rigid now. There is no movement except a shake in one of her hands.)
wiping away all thought... Body softens… recognizing that thirsty ache…
wanting to surrender to this pleasure again… you can only obey… you will be
able to move now… as you listen to me, ‘you can only obey.’… the body can
barely contain this orgasm now… feels so good you want to beg… your body is
so close… you want to cry… this orgasm is so powerful, you can only obey…
experience barely containing this explosive orgasm… that awareness multiplies
that pleasure… experience what that does to you… as you can only obey… I
want to hear you say it…. you can only obey.”
The subject is tense as if locked again and starts pumping her pelvis in the chair
as she says “I can only obey.”
“Perfect… Feeling that hypnotic cock, it does not stop fucking you… accept this
pleasure and obey… better than ever before… intensifying every orgasm…
you’ll be fucked by pleasure… it’s what you deserve… every time you hear or
say I can only obey… the more powerful the fucking becomes... as a fuck toy,
this is what your being trained for… you will orgasm on command, only when
you are allowed to cum, and release… take pride in it… you’re being fucked by
hypnotic power… taking this deeply down… better than ever before… pleasure
is building up… as you hear or say ‘you can only obey’… it builds up, even
more… ‘you can only obey’… saying it out loud and in your mind... Tell me
‘you can only obey’ and convince me your ready for that orgasm."
The subject is more intense now as she speaks quickly. “I can only obey. I can
only obey. I can only obey.”
386
"Perfect... Give me more… Reach down deep… convince me… I want to know
every bit of submission is being fucked hard."
The subject is breathing rapidly. “I can only obey. I’ll do anything. Anything you
want sir.”
“Perfect… you can give me more… everything… I want all of you fucked
right… the deepest part of who you are… I want to hear it… ‘I can only obey.’
It’s fucking locking itself inside you. Say it and know you can be fucked again
and again this way. Do you want that?”
Subject: “Yes sir. I want that. I want to obey. Whatever you want sir. Anything. I
am yours to obey.
“Perfect… That’s right… That’s wonderful… barely containing all that pleasure
now… My control is always arousing you… barely holding on… When I say
the word ‘clit’ and touch you, that spot I touch becomes amazingly sensitive,
dripping with need, it is transformed into an energized orgasmic clit… I’ll say
that again…. When I say that word ‘clit’ and touch you, that spot I touch
becomes awesomely sensitive, dripping with thirsty need… this is a an energized
orgasmic clit… sensations for this orgasm grows… hard to think about anything
else, but this orgasm… desperately need to cum… When I say clit and touch you
here… your nipples become clits.”
Subject moans long and slow before saying “I can only obey.”
“Perfect… That is how I like you… I want more… you can give me more… I
want you this responsive, or even more responsive… each and every time, you
go deeply down… I want you this thirsty for appropriate control… Your clitnipples are so sensitive… each and every sensation, your clits send, Mmmmm…
spreading that orgasmic feeling all over… Developing that orgasmic response
even stronger… You can’t cum yet… turning that thirsty need to cum up, up,
up… Building more and more… you can’t imagine needing anything more than
this… Now… You want something?"
Subject: “Sir, I need to cum sir, so much sir. I want it so badly. I can only obey
sir. Please, sir. Please…” The subject is flushed and intensely aware of me.
387
“Perfect… This is how I want you to feel every time you go down deeply…
Increasing your capacity for pleasure and pleasing… This orgasm is getting
stronger, more powerful, and more intense…. Greater than any orgasmic feeling
you’ve ever had before… harder to think about anything else… all those clits
begging to cum… aren’t they little slave?”
Subject: “Sir, please… I have to cum. I want to obey you. It's soo strong. It’s
going to explode. Please.” The subject is barely blinking anymore.
“Perfect… so close now… clit, clit, clit.” (I touch her shoulders with the
fingertips, her forehead, her lips, and she lets out long slow moans.) “So many
clits… desperate, with their thirsty need... Sooo intense… taking you, deeply
down… building up this pressure… past the limits of sensation you knew
yesterday... so much more powerful.”
Subject’s eyes close but her head does not drop down in front of her now. I
caress the back of her neck and run a finger behind her ear before withdrawing
with her whimpering “Please.” (The subject feels these sensations are well past
her peak and this is how pleasure can cross into pain. I believe she can go just a
bit farther. This will be the high point she returns to.)
“Perfect… so many clits… increasing the pressure… almost there now…
building the thirst to cum each and every day… In a moment, but not yet, I will
command you… to open your eyes… I want that thirsty need to orgasm to go
higher, more intense, more than you have ever felt before… greater than you
ever imagined… more than you ever imagined possible… this pleasure will fuck
you… take you… thirst with your submission… I want every atom of you
needing this… Ready for, what comes next… all you can think about… This is
how you’ll feel every time… every time easier, better… feel the pleasure that
this mastery brings… and it’s now part of you… Open your eyes…”
Subject’s eyes pop open and she looks right at me.
“Perfect… Obey… Come like a good girl! Come… Come… Don’t stop... keep
coming....”
I give her knee a few swats. The subject is moaning and immobile. I let her go
for about forty seconds and start looking at my watch.
388
“That’s a good girl. Stop cumming… stop cumming…. Feeling so good... Feel so
proud… you did so well…”
Subject sags into the chair.
“You have to sit up in the chair or we cannot continue.”
Subject adjusts herself saying “Yes sir.”
END
What would you do next? Take a moment to think about it before moving on.
This woman is there in front of you. Let’s take down some ideas to try out. The
first thing I would do is go over this hypnotic orgasm a few more times. Making
her cum over and over to sustain the skill and then transition into something
more. I’d check with the subject to ensure she still wants this feeling of control
and begin adding it in other appropriate contexts to bring her back to her new
daily thirsty need. At that point, I’d test it by running her through those contexts
to ensure everything is functioning well. I’d ask her to care for this thirsty need
every day, and set conditions for her to do that. For example, she will have an
intense need to cum as her pleasure climbs intensely and she will be aware of the
pressure inside her. This will be something she has to plan for as this pressure
can threaten to explode on her. She will simply need to develop the habit of
asking for privacy and ensuring there is an opportunity to recharge and collect
herself. The details are up to you both.
If you like the impending orgasm on a timer idea, and the subject agrees, you
may tell her that you’ve placed a hypnotic flame inside her. It burns like a tiny
blue spark in the center of her, and it steadily grows hotter until she tends to it. If
the fire gets too hot, she’ll orgasm unable to hold it back as her body seeks to
release the pressure. Should she not care for this flame it will go out. It will
slowly grow dark and the embers will fade away into memories. Part of her
service to me is caring for it and continuing her conditioning by caring for that
energetic flame. If at any point the subject wishes to no longer be in my service,
or continue to train with me, she may simply allow the flame to go out. What she
does with her submission and life is up to her as she has ultimate responsibility
for it. I’ll ask her to acknowledge and accept the responsibility for this duty. Then
389
I’d command her to cum for me again. I’d ask her if she accepts the obligation to
grow in her service to me. If I get a yes, I’d command her to cum. I’d ask her to
care for this service and communicate to me all the ways she desires to serve and
learn. If she agrees, I’d command her to cum for me.
Just from reading this you should be able to get a sense of how orgasms can
accelerate training of a subject. Every hypnotic effect utilized demonstrated the
control the subject was in. Moving from rapid hypnosis to catalepsy were two
intense demonstrations of that control. Knowing that the subject enjoyed being
bound during sex I locked her body. I could have told her they were hypnotic
chains or ropes but the body itself needs nothing more to limit itself. What are
your thoughts on pleasure conditioning and orgasm control? Can you apply it to
an example that clearly designates a command for a subject to respond in
context?
Pleasure conditioning is a useful tool for every practicing hypnotist. For example,
feeling the pleasure of getting lost in trance... It’s okay to get lost in thoughts...
To ponder.... discovering pleasure pulls you closer to something more, better...
To dwell in between words and moments can steer you to the best you have ever
felt, today... Think of someone who loves going to a country fair. Is it the Ferris
wheel, the smell of popcorn and food, or games that make them want to be there?
These are all details that can be utilized for engagement with inductions or good
conversation, and there’s no stick in this example. *You could add one. It doesn't
take much of an excuse to bring on a fight with a girlfriend or boyfriend, bad
sunburn, a migraine, or realizing the rent is due, and a person allows themselves
to lash out. It doesn't take much to think of elements that could detract from an
experience and you could easily utilize attraction and aversion to move a subject
back and forth. People already have a lot of negative in their lives, and what few
people get is enough of the positive. Should you efficiently want to use Push and
Pull in your pleasure conditioning than be certain that all the choices bring the
subject to redirect themselves towards your main goal. You can use more than
one strategy for each session should you wish. Push in Pull allows opportunities
for choice and intensity to develop as the choices converge. Push and pull works
because of that intensity that triggers motivation.
390
Some people just use pleasure and pain, but personal interests and investment are
choices that can be connected with Push or Pull pleasure conditioning too.
Including pain and pleasure (Push or Pull) allows us to begin designing
integrative choices and opportunities to propel us into experiences that matter.
Push and Pull allows us to elicit and amplify motivation strategies and condition
them to encourage us to follow through with those choices. A motivation strategy
follows a step-by-step sequence that gets you from one state to another or serves
to consistently cycle you within a specific state. You would follow through with
any cognitive behavioral strategies associated with these states anytime you’d be
motivated to act within the context of them. Pleasure conditioning with Push and
Pull instructions can be used to create propulsion system(s) that keeps the subject
cycling through amazingly wonderful states as you test, tune, and direct them
into numerous intense emotional and cognitive states. A propulsion system is a
cyclical cognitive and behavioral feedback structure that maintains engagement
of the subject by stimulating pain, loss, fear, pleasure, achievement, anticipation,
or other emotions to keep them engaged, and consistently redirecting them back
within this cognitive structure.
Let's run through a quick example without the pleasure conditioning so you can
understand the power of this. Imagine in front of you is your best self who
happens to be multi-orgasmic with a high sex drive. This self attracts people,
opportunities, and is taking steps to live your best life. This self represents the
best you can be and has the potential to fulfill the wants, dreams, and desires that
matter to you. Behind you is the old you. They are bored and people often avoid
that person. You can see they are stuck, sad, and irritable but still not willing to
help themselves at times. This person has problems and it’s not getting
better. This self represents the worst of which you can be and has repeatedly
failed to achieve the wants, dreams, and desires that matter to you. This is a
simple propulsion system. Considering what you could do next. Will your actions
take you closer to your best self or your last self? Each person will have a
different level of intensity with this example, but that is exactly why personal
details are utilized to amp that interaction up or down in propulsion systems.
All by itself, our best selves should be enough to pull us forward but sometimes
we get tired, distracted, or complacent. There are times we know a particular
choice will set us back and we give in not because we want to. We give in
391
because it was easy. We promise part of tomorrow to fix it today. At that point,
our motivational thinking can be derailed for a time. Oftentimes other people and
environmental stimulus are needed to get people back on track, but it doesn’t
need to be with push pull propulsion. Sure, we have the best self with benefits in
front of us and the worst-case scenario of living our life behind us, but we've also
got more choices. All those choices bring us closer or farther away from the bestand worst-case standards that we can conceive of today. If the subject does
nothing than the worst-case scenario pushes closer and the best self is pulled
farther away. Each and every choice makes the subject begin to become aware
and attuned to how their decisions are affecting their emotional and cognitive
state. This happens for as long as we continue to use that propulsion system and
comparison.
For example, if I was going to eat something off my diet, some consider it
cheating, I’m going to eat that one cupcake with absolute joy. If I don’t get that
delicious enjoyment it isn’t worth the calories and with that standard, I leave
behind any guilt. It becomes uncomfortable to make bad choices or settle down
into complacency as each choice makes this push pull experience better or worse.
This moving expectation of cognitive behavioral feedback is a critical piece of
the propulsion system. You have the choice of establishing the propulsion system
as always on to have higher intensity and motivation or triggered to begin and
end with cues. In reading this I hope you can appreciate how effective this can be
to encourage both learning and behavior. When the spirit is moved all is given
over to you.
There are many ways to get a propulsion system set up and running. Let's go over
creating a propulsion system using sounds as anchors. Choose to set up
three positive sounds associated with wonderfully happy or pleasurable
memories and two negative sounds associated with unhappy or hurtful memories.
The sounds could be laughter, a chorus from your favorite song, someone going
“Mmmmm”, the crack of a baseball bat hitting a home run, someone angrily
yelling “No”, or a door slamming. These are just some suggestions to use. Utilize
what makes sense to you and is meaningful in your own life. If you have trauma
do not use traumatic events for your practice in these concepts.
392
For this exercise set these sounds in geographic place around the subject as
anchors to those memories and states. Place the two negative sounds behind the
subject on their right and left sides. Place the three positive sounds in the
geographic location that’s in front of the subject, and the strongest or best sound
anchor should be directly in front of them. The location of the sound anchors is
based on the cognitive and emotional strategy for affecting the subject’s
motivation by setting off the sound anchors as you tell a story describing
challenges, tests, and moving towards something the subject wants. This method
allows me to pace around the subject during a conversation or in hypnosis, and
pause in a location that stimulates a push or pull response for the subject as it
relates to the story or command given. A variation on this method would be using
a location on the back of the subject’s body to establish the negative anchors and
the front of their body to establish the positive ones. As long as your
descriptions consistently include both away from and towards instructions and
commands, you're building a propulsion system.
Ask the subject about what is important to them and what they want in the future.
Next, you can do this conversationally or you can hypnotize the person and
proceed to describe a story about what the subject just told you. When ready to
proceed your story should focus on what the subject wants and their desired
future. You explain that as they live their life there will be obstacles to overcome
and challenge them. These obstacles and challenges test them to develop and
adapt. You begin firing off the sounds to trigger those strong emotions as you
stand and speak from their respective locations around the subject. As you begin
to transition out of negativity to positive emotions and memories, have them
notice their motivation increasing as the story progresses. At first, mainly
negative anchors are elicited, but soon those positive anchors are utilized more as
the story talks about increased motivation, proper action, and attending to all the
right details. As the story concludes you'll use only the positive ones as this is the
desired state, and the work done here will sustain and develop the propulsion
system further.
As you plan out how you might use push and pull with pleasure conditioning, I’ll
share some pointers to begin with. Think through what'll happen if the subject
takes the actions you want them to take. You can have them experiencing any
challenge that’s in front of them as possible and they’ll feel incredible doing it.
393
Have the subject walk through that adventure having peak experiences, and
describing shared outcomes that she will build upon by training to be yours. Pick
any experience or goal as the destination that we want to arrive at, and all of us
are either moving closer or away from it. We only need to chart the course
through the propulsion system. Have her think about what won't happen if she
chooses not to do this and how an activity brings her closer to what’s important.
Perhaps, this really isn’t for her.
It’s not just testing the subject responses you’ll find a lot of value in, but
exploring the qualities of their experience also. This book does not get into
exploring submodalities in great detail, but I invite the reader to look for Richard
Bandler’s book on the topic. Submodalities are fine distinctions in the subsets of
the Modalities (Visual, Auditory, Kinesthetic, Olfactory, Gustatory, and Auditory
dialogue or self-talk) that are part of how we encode and attribute meaning to our
experiences. As you explore the distinctions in respective experiences, you’ll be
discovering what sort of changes you can make that turns the intensity down and
others up. For example, making some submodalities bigger or smaller, pulling
them closer or pushing them farther away, turning up the brightness, or turning it
down, adding color or washing it out until an image is gray or pixelated, adding
movement or freeze on a frame of one moment. Working with submodalities is
learning to just play with these qualities of experience and figuring out that you
can change the experience by changing the submodalities that contain them.
Let’s shift the focus to a few different types of female orgasms you can
condition, and how to achieve them.
There’s more than one Female Orgasm
No one comes with an instruction manual, but learning about the possible
responses a woman is capable of producing is more than the average woman
knows. Most woman can name and differentiate parts of their body, but physical
education is inadequate in many parts of the world. Tell a woman that she can
have more than one type of orgasm when she’s still figuring out how to
consistently achieve one will undoubtedly get you a raised eyebrow matched
with some disbelief. This chapter will go over some of the different types of
394
orgasm that a woman can achieve. This knowledge is will help guide you in
guiding your subject and developing these orgasms through your conditioning
efforts.
Clitoral Orgasm
It’s like 60% of the people you’ll meet saw the same sex education video. They’ll
tell you that the clit is the only organ that functions purely for a woman’s
pleasure, but that's not true. I’d argue that pleasure and sensation are not the same
thing. If a woman isn’t turned on any clitoral stimulation may not feel good at all.
Every clit is attached to a woman who will have preferences about the kinds of
clitoral stimulation she wants. Being so easily accessed the clit is the easiest and
often the fastest orgasm to achieve. Light, circular touches using a finger, tongue,
moderately squeezing the clit, or sex toy applied directly to the clitoris will get
the job done. A clitoral orgasm is described as feeling like a surge of pleasure
emanating from the vagina, and is accompanied by involuntary pelvic
contractions. Everyone’s orgasm may be described slightly different, but the
feeling is powerful and unmistakable. Ensure you listen to her about her
descriptions of sensations and preferences. Encourage masturbation to keep her
sex drive high and for self-discovery of her body’s preferences and potential.
Vaginal Orgasm
When most people think of a woman having an orgasm, they assume it’s a
vaginal orgasm. For some more reserved women, this orgasm might be the only
one they know. It’s unfortunate that vaginal orgasms tend to be one of the most
difficult orgasm types to achieve and mental stimulation assists with this. Simple
penetration does always stimulate the famous G spot alone, and first time vaginal
orgasms can be perceived as uncomfortable until a woman feels comfortable with
these new sensations and has more. A woman’s G-Spot is located about two
inches inside the vagina, on the anterior wall. If you have your subject laying on
her back, simply slide two fingers in to explore the top of her anterior wall. When
you place your fingers inside move them back and forth in a come-hither motion.
You should feel for a curve with a bumpy surface. Once you found it you’ve hit
the spot. Many women say they’ve never experienced a G-Spot orgasm, and that
makes sense. For many women, it can take about 7-30 minutes of stimulation to
395
this area to bring on these orgasms. That amount of times requires stamina and
patience for all partners involved.
There are different positions that can stimulate this area such as standing,
kneeling, sitting, being taken from behind, or from the side. Compared to the
predictable climb and descent of clitoral orgasms, G-Spot orgasms feel more like
waves that keep cycling through a woman. Surges of pleasure spread out
throughout a woman’s body. Let’s move our focus onto the cervical orgasm
which is a Taoist reflexology point connecting to the heart. This Anterior Fornix
Erogenous zone, or the A-Spot, is the start of an energy pathway that leads up to
the crown chakra, which is connected to the vagus nerve, often referred to as the
“spiritual nerve.”
Women sometimes dismiss cervical stimulation as being pleasurable because it
can feel uncomfortable at first touch. It's best to warm up your subject with some
other sexual positions first and then ease into cervical stimulation. Cervical
stimulation is literally just rubbing up against the cervix. As you do this feel for a
somewhat soft, doughnut-shaped circle of tissue at the very farthest-inward point
of the vagina. It sort of feels like a little cap on the end of the canal. Go slow and
experiment with different degrees of pressure. Stimulation inside the vagina is
about pressure, not nerves. To stimulate the cervix and A Spot use positions like
the missionary with a woman’s legs up over her shoulders, doggie style, and a
very long, girthy dildo work great.
Anal Orgasm
The anal orgasm or the backdoor to stimulating her G-Spot. Like the G-Spot
stimulation above, the anal orgasm is something every woman can achieve once
they can relax and enjoy the sensations. Sensations from the anus, the rectum, the
G-spot, and the A Spot. All that stigma about how women don’t like anal is
decidedly untrue. Of course, not every woman enjoys anal, but for those women
who love it, this news may ring her bell! There’s a pressure stimulated pleasure
zone here because the rhythmic penetrative activity activates the A-Spot directly.
The anal A-Spot stimulation happens because of its location which is essentially
resting against the rectum within the body. Surprise!
396
Men also have different types of orgasm. It is only because of limitations of
space that I am not providing them here. It was a difficult choice but I expect that
a man will train his subject on what pleases him. That includes the pressure
points that your subject can press to slow down and push off your climax. You
have to educate yourself on what pleases you, and what you are capable of before
you can teach a partner.
Q&A for Exploring BDSM and Kink
So, you’ve been searching online for the play partner of your dreams and you
have some questions. Often, you’ll find people online before meeting live and in
person at a meetup or munch that share similar interests. Talking about these
matters in a way that’s knowledgeable takes educating yourself with a little
experience. I’ll share some of the most common questions I’ve received over the
twenty years involved in lifestyle communities. As you talk with others and ask
questions listen to the responses you get. Ask yourself if the answers you’re
receiving make sense to you and answer honestly. This can be a change in culture
and I had many questions that started with why when I began talking with others.
The majority of people today have gone on an online date or Tindered their way
to happiness. and these topics will have popped up on a few profiles if nothing
else. The information you read in this chapter should get you started learning the
cultural distinctions and jargon that people in the BDSM and Kink communities
live by.
Question: How long have you been in the lifestyle or scene?
Some people are new and others have been exploring this lifestyle for some time.
There is a constant cycle of renewal in every community. Is reading lifestyle
blogs and the erotic mind control archive equivalent to actual experience with
others? I’d say no. When coming into this lifestyle it takes some time to find
community and developing friends who can vouch for you to get you into the
more private events takes time. Having someone vouch for a person is not going
to give you a complete history of that person either. My advice is to talk with
others online and in person. Set reasonable precautions as you feel they are
needed. Talk about those precautions with your prospective partner and if they
have friends online, or people locally you can try to talk with them. This is a bit
weird if you’re asking for formal introductions. Most people I’ve met don’t do
397
this and the few that have made me unsure about them in the dating world.
People that need this level of assurance often need to be absolutely sure of safety.
That in itself is not a bad thing, but when you encounter it you should be sure this
person checking you out is healthy, honest, and well balanced. Be comfortable
before moving on. If you’re not comfortable don’t move forward with and keep
things social if you can.
Let me talk about this from the Dom side now. I have had only one slave present
me with references that I could call or write to check on the history of their
service. In twenty years of being part of this lifestyle, I have interacted with only
two people who had written documents detailing their service and a reference
attached. It’s almost like a kinky passport. This person and I settled on a timebased renewal contract and this is also a rare thing today. In meeting a new
person, I will ask about their past relationships, their health, what worked or
didn’t with how they last served, and ideally what it is they want. This isn’t an
interrogation. It’s a conversation and if I get weak to no engagement I’m out.
I want to be sure that the person I am talking with is a fit with me and the
relationship role I’m offering them. That role may be a onetime thing, long term,
or a trial period with the objective of long-term ownership. I enjoy talking with
people and while a person may not be a fit today, they may be a perfect addition
later. Good people are worth the extra time and effort to get to know and adapt
with as necessary. The best advice anyone can give is just be comfortable with
who you are. If you are comfortable than training and socializing with them
allows you to define and design the relationship you share together. Be sure
you’re establishing a network of people that you feel share similar interests even
if you are partnering off.
Question: What about this lifestyle do you enjoy most?
There is not going to be one right answer to this question. Even if the person is
just beginning to explore this lifestyle there will be some things that attract them
and they can tell you what they think they won’t like. Not a lot of useful info
there. Is the person presenting scenarios that are attractive to you, strange, things
you don’t know about, or are they sharing activities you want no part of? Think
about the answers. You can learn a lot from people you disagree with. It may
take some time to get an idea of the answers that best describe what you want and
398
enjoy yourself. Answering these kinds of questions and asking follow up
questions will get you talking about all the possibilities. Just make sure that there
is consent to play and engage in a conversation like this. As you get answers to
your questions pay attention to the demeanor of the other person. If there are
aspects about them that you do not respect, or like, they may not be a good fit. It
pains me to have to say this to adults, but some people are still just trying to get
laid. They say what they say to get their needs met. That’s all.
Question: Is going to a play party or dungeon a good place to learn?
This is a difficult question to answer. Both a play party and a dungeon come with
additional guidelines to follow that cannot completely be learned online. Both of
these places will have similar but different rules to enter the space, to be a
spectator, and be a participant. I have had both of these spaces ask for referrals
from current members, and first-time admittance might require an interview and
a quiz of the rules presented. Public play is not for everyone, but one space can
be very different from another. Speak to others in the community and go with
friends if possible. This is no different than going out to the clubs except you are
more likely to see nakedness from people you never wanted to imagine nude in
the first place. I do not often go to clubs or engage in public play much, unless
the public play is part of a training or adventure.
At some point it is worth checking out both of these scenes. If you want to
network with people going to play parties or dungeons try reaching out to the
hosts or venue. Often it takes a lot of work to put some of the events together and
they are appreciative of interested and friendly people. If you’re not sure what to
say try offering to lend a hand. Volunteering at some high-end events may get
you a backstage pass and you’ll learn a lot fast. You’ll have the added bonus of
being able to swiftly retreat back to the sidelines anytime you wish.
Question: What do you want from a dominant or Master?
This question gets at the maturity of the speaker and the ideal description of
adding another person to their lives. This question often gets answered by a sub
that they just want to be tied up and used. This is one of the most unoriginal
statements that a person can say to me. I want a bit more. If you are going to
share something that matters to you tell me about the ideal scene that keeps
repeating in your mind. Are you left by your partner when they are finished so
399
that they may use you again at their leisure? Are you left holes gaping, straining
against the ropes and desperate for more? Has your Dom forced you to wait in
temporal bondage until they are ready for you? Is there a moment where you
wonder if your Master is bringing anyone else in to play you? Make this a
conversation that matters because boring someone to want you doesn’t result in
good pairings in my experience.
If you think you have everything you need in your life figured out share that in
detail, but be open to your own development and changing needs. Don’t be
intentionally vague about what you want as it doesn’t make it easier for anyone.
You will never find me tying anyone down and using them as a table to eat
barbecue after answering me with “could be” or “maybe we can” to any question
I ask. As your talking with your conversation partner recognize that this question
can be flipped to ask them why a Master or Owner would want a sub, switch, or
slave. The answers I have received here have been both intriguing and a lovely
moment of mutual objectification. Be the porn you wish to see in the world
because only you carry your story forward.
People tend to have an easier time mindreading others than thinking critically
about their own experiences. My final advice on this topic is to think your
fantasies through, explore them where possible, communicate them in detail, and
help your partner(s) work with you to have an experience that you all will never
forget. I did, however, leave open the invitation to chocolate pudding slave
wrestling that only ends after the loser submits or is pinned and pegged by a
Rotating Venus Penis Strap-on Vibrator. If you have never seen one of these little
toys in action you should check out this YouTube video and there’s no need to
hide your delight. https://youtu.be/jd53XK84XSo It’s all a matter of perspective.
For example, does a straw have one hole, no holes, or two holes? I really want to
end this paragraph with a “That’s what she said joke”, but then there’d by
smiling and clapping. Well, clapping is just you hitting yourself because you like
something and that’s not right either, you know? I like to do the spanking around
here! Smile.
Question: Are you creative with making any toys or props for your
scenes/play?
400
This question opens the door to cosplay, making sex toys from Home Depot, and
discovering hobbies that lean into kinky adventures together. For example, you
may discover that your prospective partner is a glassblower, a carpenter, or a
blacksmith. Not only does this topic get into the knowledge of toys, but it also
encompasses interests, and the effect of the finished product is aimed at
achieving. This question gets at the heart of motivation, interests, and what the
person realizes and values. Enjoy the rabbit holes this may send you down,
because imagining, building, and creating can be a working fetish all its own.
Question: Do use safe words in your scenes/sessions/play with others?
Talking about why or why not a person uses safe words is important. I want to
ensure reliable communication is happening so that safe, sane, and consenting
choices are valued. You can ask a prospective partner if you talk to people that
know them, and have played with them, will you get complaints about trust or
consent violations. If they do not use a safe word or establish safe
communication than ask if they are seeking a no limits slave. If the person thinks
every sub is a no limit slave there is a problem with reality connections there. I
suggest you try to turn them off and on again to see if they still have that black
and white conceptual ignorance. Unless you also believe what they say to be true
do not pursue any interaction with that person. Their beliefs will not change for
someone they deem lower than themselves. Use caution because for someone
like this their only hard limits might be what they don’t want someone else to do.
I have already talked about how I use safe communication instead of safe words
and why, but I haven’t shared yet that I teach those in service to me to utilize The
Five Agreements when talking with others in the community. According to Don
Miguel Ruiz, everything we do is based on agreements that we have made with
ourselves, with other people, with God(s), and with life. It is with these
agreements that we tell ourselves who we are, how to behave, what is possible,
what is impossible. The Five Agreements are: Being impeccable with your word,
don’t take anything personally, don’t make assumptions, always do your best,
and Listen, but be skeptical. In practicing the Five Agreements you’re respecting
everything in creation. Your dreams, wants, and desires are just as valid and
significant as everyone else’s. When we are happy and communicating with each
other it inspires others to take a breath and get to know you. They may just
change their outlook and their own world. I highly recommend you checkout
401
Don Miguel Ruiz’s books and search online for The Five Agreements. The
agreements are not only a useful framework to use while talking with others. The
agreements offer us a way to improve how we talk to ourselves before ever
speaking a word to another person. Think about it. Rain doesn’t make a sound
until it hits something.
Question: What should I expect as your new XXX?
Those XXX could be anything. Describe the roles you’d expect the other person
to take on with you and talk about it with them. In doing so the conversation
gives you both perspective on adapting and filling the role(s) with that person.
Walk through those first steps that could happen together and that assist you in
designing a life with others. If you want better results and more experience
communicating these ideas practices delivering them before your meeting. Go
through your responses and practice delivering them in a way that conveys your
knowledge, skill, experience, and desire. The way you see the world stems from
your relationships to it and that’s your own responsibility. Think about it. Most
people grow up being presented two models for romantic interaction in this
world; marriage and hook-ups. How is your relationship to the world and each
other different, the same, or valuable to the person you’re speaking with? These
are the conversations that engage.
My belief is that there is a broad spectrum of possible relationships between
marriage and hook-ups, and that's where I live and maintain my relationships. I'm
definitely an ethical non-monogamist. I tend to not have sex with people that I
don't want to eat more than one meal with, but I also don't always need long term
love or service. Sex does not need to include love. A loving relationship does not
need to include sex. Sex and love does not have to be bound by a commitment.
Your service should develop your life. That service does not need to be bound by
love or sex, but service is a passion by itself. That passion is best expressed with
a commitment. If you’re a sub just coming into this lifestyle expect to be giving a
lot of head to men and women. A good girl will do the work to put herself in the
proper state of mind before she is allowed to earn any pleasure.
Cocksucking is so much better when a toy's desperate thirst and submission is
communicated eagerly. True reverence will be rewarded. Your enthusiasm tends
to keep you well fucked and makes your Owner consistently turned on. It is my
402
preference that subs/slaves that service well with their mouth get fucked the
most, and trained the hardest. It’s just my opinion regardless of gender, and try
not to smile when you recognize this is also cognitive priming for future action
and enthusiastic acceptance. So, what do you like? What're your expectations?
Question: What if someone brings up a relocation or training fee when
talking online?
There are many scams out there and some people just want your money. I do not
give money to someone to cover transportation or training fees to come and see
me. In the last twenty years in this lifestyle, I’ve seen this play out again and
again. This is usually a scam and a waste of your time. There are countless scams
and people have lost money, time, and access to their private information.
Training fees are not something I would ever recommend paying for someone
you haven’t physically met and don’t really know. To be asked to pay for the
sub’s training in order to claim them runs too close to human trafficking. I don’t
approve of this and this lifestyle needs to stay separate and against such acts of
trafficking. This lifestyle is about being safe, sane, and consenting among adults.
There are too many negative possibilities that can go wrong from engaging in
such a transaction. Refusing to do this helps to ensure that no harm comes you or
anyone else. If someone asks for money from you to fund such expenses, I
encourage you to report them on whatever site you’re using and break off
contact.
Should you want to engage in professional training with a Master or send one of
you through a program to hone your skills, knowledge, behavior, etc., I’m all for
that. We all have a desire to learn, improve, and encourage specific abilities and
skills. That’s wonderful and should be encouraged. BDSM Trainers are not
collecting people to sell off. That is trafficking, a scam, or trap to catch predators
who seek to engage in trafficking. Support everyone’s development and safety by
steering clear of potential abuse of others. This is not our community or lifestyle.
Question: You just met. How should you refer to each other as?
This is a question that takes time to figure out in the varied contexts of our lives.
When dealing with someone new to me and they’re asking me how should they
refer to me. I’ll start by sharing how I identify. I ask them about how they
403
identify. If they are submissive, I’ll tell them to refer to me as Sir when they feel
their submission stirring during our interaction if that is appropriate. If it’s
possible and appropriate to do this in a public space do so. If it’s not appropriate
to refer to me by Sir, (being in a workplace, formal meeting, etc.,) they may refer
to me casually. I do not own or control them simply because they identify as
submissive. Treat everyone with respect unless they inform you otherwise.
If a person is talking about me to someone else in the lifestyle, they shall refer to
me as Master Crown. I would prefer anyone that is mine to refer to other Masters
and people with respect. Common titles that convey the intention to show respect
are Master, Mistress, Miss, Sir, Lady, or by the descriptive of their preference.
During a scene, the sub would normally not refer to me by my first or last name
either. The only time I would expect this informal use of my name is out of
necessity in a circumstance dealing with safety and consent communication. If
we are in a public play space saying my name lets me know something is not
right or they are unsure about something significant. Saying my name informally
is a breach of protocol which communicates to me that a private moment of
communication is needed. If I feel that the slave could have communicated with
me in a more appropriate way, I will correct her at that moment and may need to
train her with this context later. If an appropriate question has arisen, I will praise
her and make needed adjustments before continuing on.
My desire is to remove the social conditioning of past relationships, society, and
their routine thoughts of appropriate. My reference to the sub may be slave, toy,
woman, girl, or even slut at times. I use those terms until the ego defensiveness is
stripped away on what they mean outside us. It is what they mean between us
that allows us to step around social attitudes and expectations when together. I
love the delight that comes into a slave’s eyes when I call her by her role and she
knows I’m the one who really sees her. It may be sub-Amy, or cum slave Susan,
as I see the role that the property occupies as something she should take pride in.
I will tell you what suits me and after some time I will ask the pet what names
make them the happiest. All the while the slave will answer to and acclimate into
a broader and stronger sense of self throughout their roles. It’s a wonderful sight
to watch the sub smile with absolute pride and happiness when I call her good
girl and she knows she’s earned that. This topic runs through many different
404
aspects of how you may relate to each other and it's more than the adjectives used
to describe your current role.
Talk to each other as you begin to explore the labels and terms that are
meaningful to you. Social expectations and labels should not ultimately define
what is in important or present in your relationship. As you do this remember
there was a time when an older generation thought Beethoven and Mozart were
corrupting the youth with their new modern music and pompously powdered
wigs. There will be some who want nothing to do with this and that should be
encouraged.
Question: Is there any use of restrictive speech required for the property?
Some of you may recognize the restrictive speech present in that question.
Speech restrictions in this circumstance are not instructing your slave to keep
silent or ball gagging her. This is an attempt to restrain language use from a slave
so that they cannot say “mine”, “my”, or “I”. It is largely based on the Masterslave fictional book series of Gor. Slaves in the Gor book series did use the
words "I," "me," and even "my," in regards to "my Master." The term "my
Master" is one of the most highly emotional phrases a slave of Gor can declare.
In the lore of Gor, when a slave addresses her owner as "my Master" it expresses
that she has found her true love and Master as one. Still, third-person speech was
used in the books as punishment and for instructional purposes.
Some Owners believe a slave feels more like a slave when made to speak in the
third person. For example, a slave may say "this girl would like to watch the
rainfall." While this can be amusing to me for a little while it isn’t a standard I
would want to use on an ongoing basis. Unless there is a reason to use this more
than once to demonstrate that it exists for the slave, I don’t use it. Having said
that I feel it is very effective at slowing down a slave’s speech if her tendency is
to speak before thinking. It’s my opinion that long term use of language
restriction encourages bad communication habits in modern life. Unless your
keeping your slaves like pets in the barn this will not encourage knowledge
sharing or interesting conversation with your slave. I’d much prefer to tell the
slave she can only speak in profanities to demonstrate she is a fuck toy. No
judgment here, but my slaves are expected to become educated artisans similar to
the concept of a geisha. Contrary to popular belief, geishas are not the Eastern
405
equivalent of the prostitute; a misconception originating in the West due to
interactions with oiran, whose traditional dress is similar to that of geisha. The
word geisha consists of two kanji, 芸 (Gei) meaning "art" and 者 (Sha) meaning
"person" or "doer". The most literal translation of geisha into English would be
"artist", "performing artist", or "artisan". Another name for geisha is Geiko (芸妓
), which translates specifically as "Woman of Art".
For those of you who love the idea of Gor and its speech restrictions I hope you
make it fun and interesting. Here are a few links you may wish to investigate.
Gorean Encyclopedia
http://www.moonproductions.com/Fantasy/Gor/gorencyclopedia.html
For the true lovers of the Gorean Tongue - ENGLISH – THAL'GOR Translator
https://lingojam.com/English-Thalgor
I put the following statement in the translator: I wish to have a slave that
communicates well. I received the following translated sentence.
“I wish tur have i slave šea communicates well.” If all else fails you could put
those language learning abilities to good use and attempt Klingon or Dothraki
and sweet talk the ladies at Comic-Con.
Question: What are your expectations of clothing and collars in your
service?
This is a question that will often come up fairly quickly in every new interaction
in some respect. Some have the expectation that Masters will choose their
clothing inside and outside the home. I have my slaves naked the majority of the
time in my home. I may use a generic training collar and that collar may or may
not be gifted to the sub at the conclusion of their trial period. Controlling or
approving the clothes worn outside the home I prefer to do at a designated time
when done at all. Some Masters love dressing up the sub like a doll so this is a
conversation you will wish to have. When we focus in on accessories like bells,
collars, insertables, or chastity belts, we make play a part of the day or our life.
406
A collar is a slave’s commitment and a symbol of power that is bound around
them. I have several collars a slave may move through during her training and
use. I may have different styles of clothing I want the slave to wear to her public
life events and when she kneels before me. I will have toys that she will wear
under those clothes to go out in public or to fulfill a function. These choices are
as personalizable as the relationship itself. One of the opportunities of being a
slave is the cherished attention of their body and adornment. This attention and
exercise often leads to personal empowerment that gives a woman more
confidence in her body, her appearance, how she moves, and communicating her
ideas and dreams more openly.
This level of confidence and acceptance may at first seem contradictory with the
relationship style itself. In this surrender blossoms the question of everything.
When one lives this pleasure and compassion it is one question that cannot be
evaded. It won’t matter if you claim to not be interested in it or that you weren’t
looking for it. From the moment you were imagined you were bound
responsively to life. Life doesn’t just happen. It’s a distinct way of being alive
and relating to the expression of participating divinities that are commonly
referred to as reality. Love is an intensification of life. Every single being has the
same instinct when they encounter love. It’s an experience so intimate and
familiar we can only speak of it as if coming home. Shine so bright that others
have no choice but to light up with you.
Can an emperor wear that love even if his clothes are invisible? What happens
when the emotions inspired by you make you, her, both of you, feel more ready
to engage with life more fully naked than you ever did in your best suit? In
writing this I do not often hear people discuss love or ask about it when they first
meet. It is a delicious adornment that is worth talking about, but I haven’t been
the person to lead with it, yet. I want to encourage you to love the person you’ve
become, because you fought to become her!
Toys Galore
When you step into the lifestyle as a Hypno Dom you get to wear clothing that
makes you feel like a superhero or villain whenever you want to. And lots of
people take an interest in your toys. In some circles, the topic of sex toys brings
407
up questions of sexual dysfunction for the male, or being oversexed for the
woman. These statements are stigma guilt trips of the past that were used to
control our parents. The pseudoscience of masturbatory knuckle hair that grew if
they did it too much, and teasing that they might go blind is all stupidity that
moralists’ thought was best for everyone. There are still self-appointed moralists’
trying to make decisions for you in every circle of life today. Everyone seeking
to engage intimately with a partner is making important decisions relating to their
relationship(s), sexuality, and sexual expression. This chapter will focus
primarily on sex and masturbatory toys that you may come across in your
journey as a Hypno Dom.
When we’re stressed, in pain, or feeling an abundance of pleasure our brains
release A LOT of chemicals; endorphin, serotonin, melatonin, epinephrine,
norepinephrine, and dopamine. That soup of brain chemicals isn’t just activated
by physical pain, but emotional highs and lows, and social discomfort as well.
These chemicals all serve the purpose of slowing or activating the mind and
senses through biological messengers triggered through pain AND pleasure. The
decisions we make in the heat of a sexual moment impact our health and wellbeing for the rest of their lives. Censoring this information multiplies harm as
people cannot make informed decisions regarding sex and their sexual health as
they encounter them throughout life. Sexual education should cover a broad
range of topics, including human biology, relationships, stigma, getting and
giving consent, sexual preferences, gender expression, contraception, STIs, and
sex toys. Sex toys are used and loved by people wanting to be sexual with
themselves and others. BDSM can involve a variety of toys and equipment that’s
meant to enrich the scenes that we perform. Some fetishes would not be possible
without the addition of specific toys in the dynamic and these items can serve as
the central action point for the play. Items like butt plugs with tails, cuffs and
leashes, strapons and harnesses, and clothing made of rubber, latex, PVC, or
leather are only a few examples.
It’s a lot of give and take that makes a relationship work, but there's one topic
that you don't often hear in your standard vanilla predating conversation. What’s
the best sex toys to help increase intimacy and pleasure for everyone
simultaneously? There's no magic pill that makes things perfect every time, but
once you get past any intimidation factor about using toys it all becomes fun to
408
try out. A toy can extend the length of sex and increase stamina. Using sex toys
with a partner has been shown to decrease perceived pressure to orgasm, enhance
pleasure, and add excitement without opening up the relationship. If you feel
pressured and tense you’re not in the moment. Feeling pressure and getting tense
should signal you that you’re working against opposing forces. All of those
forces are reactions within yourself. Do it or don’t do it. Don’t sweat the petty
things, and don’t pet the sweaty things. Grinning like a possum eating a sweet
potato let’s just get right in there with a classic to be in the moment.
Wartenberg Pinwheel
The Wartenberg Pinwheel produces a range of sensations and is typically used in
sensory play. The Wartenberg Pinwheel is commonly used during physical
examinations to test for nerve responses during physical examinations. The speed
and pressure applied to rolling the toy across the skin changes the sensory
experience for the sub. When the tool is used quickly it creates a tickly sensation
that makes the hair stand up on the back of the neck for some. When it is used
slow and firm the pinwheel can create more intense knife-like sensations. While
skin can be broken with this toy a lot of pressure is needed for that to happen. In
most circumstances, a person’s skin would need to be very thin to cut them with
this toy. Try this toy on yourself first before trying the pinwheel out on others.
To change up the sensations from this toy you can try heating it up with warm
water or chill it in ice cold water. You can also try shaving a sensitive area and
splashing the pinwheel with an astringent like witch hazel before taking it for a
spin on the freshly shaved area. The sensations of the pinwheel are multiplied by
the cooling astringent coming into contact with freshly exfoliated skin. You can
try combining this toy with a Violet Wand like in the picture below. The electric
stimulation adds an additional sensory adventure that is not painful but might be
described as wiggly. The Wartenberg Pinwheel below is attached to a ~30kV
charge and is discharging its energy into the air. Seeing this glowing in the
candlelight will definitely get a subs heart beating as the blindfold goes on them.
Your entire life is just gaps between thinking about things you never knew you
wanted to do, and you’ve just opened to a new chapter.
409
St Andrew's Cross
The St. Andrew's Cross is a common piece of dungeon equipment that tends to
stand tall at approximately 7 to 8 feet and is in the shape of an "X". A slave is
clipped, tied, and played with while strapped helplessly to this device. You will
notice the St. Andrew's Cross below is nicely padded with a convenient cage for
those quiet moments. Caution, after handcuffing a sub to a St. Andrew's Cross I
may demonstrate scenes of adult action and adventure, prolific profanities, and
extended gyrations of nakedness. This is a big toy but easy to figure out how to
play with it.
Nipple Clamps
Not everyone enjoys a cruel pair of nipple clamps but they come in a variety of
sizes, shapes, pressures, and some even have teeth. The majority of nipple clamps
are designed for light to moderate pressure on the skin even though many can
appear intimidating. Nipples on all bodies can be very sensitive, and just like all
bodies are different, so are reactions to nipple stimulation. While some subs find
they enjoy the clamps, some nipples will be too sensitive, and you may find some
410
nipples are not sensitive at all. Licking nipples, sucking nipples, pinching
nipples, attaching suction cups to nipples are just a few ways to begin exploring
your partner’s body with some emphasized nip action. And why not? Nipples are
one of the erogenous zones chock-full of delightful nerve endings that, when
stimulated, can send a sub into a heated frenzy. Nipples can be one of my
favorite things to tease and tug on at times. Finding out what sensations are the
most desirable for you and your partner is often going to be a bit of trial and
error. Remember when you remove the clamps the subject is going to get a sharp
rush of heat and endorphins. In the pic below, you can see the vise clamps can go
as easy or as tight as you like.
Some nipple ideas to try out are clothespins attached together with a string so that
the building intensity is triggered with a tugged release of the string. Most
wooden clothespins have a gripping pressure between 4 and 6 pounds that’ll
compress those perky nubs of hers. Don’t just go for the nipples. You can try
putting a clothespin the tip of the tongue, fingertips, toes, and on the bottom of
the arm. Explore and discover if this is for you as each location has its merits. I
just want you to enjoy some happy nipples today. This is one of those teaching
moments where just because she’s struggling doesn’t mean she’s failing.
Ropes, Ties, and Restraints
Did you hear what the bondage rope bunny said before the party? “I'm knotty
Daddy!” There are so many different kinds of rope and ways to tie knots to wrap
someone or something, but this book will not have enough room to get into all
that. As you find your rope bunny, it becomes another label of identity for a sub
who likes to be tied. You’ll also have to master your knotty craft of designed
restraint with many workshops and how-to videos drawing you to practice with
your subject. How and where to wrap your knots along your sub is more than just
aesthetic knowledge as you want the wraps to be delightfully immobilizing while
411
allowing her blood to continue to circulate well. If you want to start out thinking
really crafty with your bondage designs research Macramé. If you do, you’ll be
amazed by your new found Macramé ability to secure anything to anything with
rope.
Getting you out of craft stores and into clothing stores you’ll discover that your
silky formal ties can also be a substitute for ropes. Your tied tie has a sliding knot
that is secured around the collar of your shirt and it represents just one of the
knots that you can use to hold and slide to just where you need it. The ancient
Japanese knot-tying technique of shibari must also be explored. Central to the art
of Shibari is creating patterns that contrast and complement the curves of the
body. Shibari originated from Hojo-jutsu, which was a method of restraining
captives. Only later did this art morph into the erotic bondage of Kinbaku in the
late 19th and early 20th centuries. Kinbaku-bi literally translates as “the beauty
of tight binding.” The knotted aesthetic of the ropes running along the sub’s body
is intended to emphasize characteristics of sensuality, vulnerability, surrender,
and strength. The positioning of knots along the body is meant to stimulate
pressure points which is similar to acupressure techniques or Shiatsu massage.
During a Shibari massage, we’re stimulating energy flow and moving it around
in a different way than just using hypnosis alone.
When you move further into the topic of restraints, you’ll encounter spreader
bars that are designed to keep the subject’s limbs apart and good old-fashioned
stocks. Other common restraints are cuffs, collars, ball gags, harnesses for the
chest or crotch, blindfold or eye mask, and chastity devices. Bondage tape is one
of my favorite inexpensive and disposable restraints because it’s easy to use, and
it is designed to only stick to itself. It’s very hard to go wrong with this stuff as
long as you train on best practices using it. As a Hypno Dom, you are a lifetime
412
learner that is conditioning mastery experiences each day to gain the knowledge,
control, and relational perspective of oneself to move in harmony with all things
(Tao).
Zip ties and handcuffs are items you should practice with before jumping into
using them. These simple items will have safety precautions to learn about before
using them. Steer clear of any restraint until you haven’t investigated their use
thoroughly because they may tighten on their own with small movements. Those
small movements can pinch the skin along the wrists hard enough that it can
potentially cause nerve damage. Please don’t think of using Duct tape like you’ve
seen in the movies. Duct tape can do more than irritate the skin. Simply putting it
on someone’s bare skin can tear skin and rip out hair as its removed. So, you may
want to avoid that. Besides those scenes where someone can’t get the duct tape
off their mouth because their hands are tied is totally Hollywood fantasy. Check
out this video if you want to see someone get out of duct tape over their mouth
without using their hands. https://youtu.be/6wMmNm8StK4
I've seen a costuming trick where duct tape is used to bind certain parts of the
female anatomy. The trick is to stick pre-cut lengths of tape onto a towel then
remove them a few times. This way most of the adhesive is removed from the
tape, or it gets covered with fuzzy bits from the towel. Either way, most of the
adhesive stickiness is gone and the actress isn't hurt as much when the tape is
removed. A roll of gaffer’s tape is about the same size as a roll of duct tape, and
while it comes in several colors, the default is silver. Gaffer’s tape isn't as sticky
as duct tape, and it releases very cleanly. I have seen people put a piece over their
mouth and ripped it off with no pain. Whatever you do use caution and after
investigating the best practices for your kink props you may wish to try it on
yourself first. Don’t worry it will be just as embarrassing when the tape is stuck
to your lips and won’t come off without losing skin. The only difference is you
get cred stating you tested it before applying it on a sub. I promise you that cred
will not help you pull that tape off any easier so start searching what to do before
its stuck!
While I show some examples of these toys here, you’ll find many variations on
design and materials. Remember these toys are not supposed to be the whole
sensual show. You must get a sense of how to use them so that the sensations
413
enhance the experience you're creating between each other. Toys by themselves
are not enough to keep a sub stimulated and engaged long term.
When you start getting to sensory deprivation items like blindfolds there is a
wide selection from basic blindfolds to fancy hoods. Items around your home
like a sleep mask or a wide silk scarf tied around the eyes are less expensive and
sometimes an equally effective option. One of the complaints I commonly hear
on blindfolds is people want something that doesn’t fall off or get pushed away
so easily. Sex and sleep both utilize this darkening function of a sleep mask well.
I have enjoyed utilizing Ace bandages because once on they do not slip off easily
during scenes. When you use a hood, you can almost be 100% certain it is going
nowhere. You most likely wouldn’t use a hood for sleeping. One of the pictures
below shows a female bottom during a sensory deprivation session and her Top
is using an inflatable latex hood with her.
Restraints can also be used to condition the body to move in certain ways and the
sub will quickly recognize how she carries her own weight with every
movement. As you can see by the second picture below the restraints are not the
focus itself. Motion, tactile experience, and sensory isolation channel the focus
that awareness will flow around. In BDSM, restraints are used to challenge, train,
and experience behaviors that please the Master, sub, or both. The hood below is
restricting vision, most likely the sub has earplugs in, and the distinctive features
of the sub’s face and identity are hidden. For some, this would be an agreeable
experience of objectification, submission, and restraint. Hoods are gaining more
popularity because they mask identity and it is increasingly difficult to play with
complete anonymity. Remember restraints are just another tool. Often the real
difficulty for the sub is how to overcome their own thoughts about the world and
themselves. Our interactions move them out of those associations and identities.
414
Dildos and Vibrators
Some of the most popular types of vibrators for BDSM play are wand-style body
massagers. A cordless version is perfect to secure to someone's body with rope
bondage, bondage tape, or with specific restraints designed just for this type of
play. Vibrators can be used for a quick orgasm or consensually forced orgasm
sessions. Don’t forget, they aren’t just for vulvas and vaginas! Penises and the
perineum like vibration too. It’s a good idea to also have some non-vibrating
insertables handy, like a butt plug or curved toy like the Njoy Pure Wand, which
is suitable for G-spots and prostates. Below you will find a leather harness setup
for this purpose, but it’s a bit too loose for my taste. This harness would allow
you to begin with forced orgasm play, edging, and orgasm denial quickly. A
dildo does not need to be wired or plugged in but you have to plan for any
movement you expect the sub to perform as you experiment with sex machines.
This is a huge area of kink for many people. Let’s begin with one of the most
well know and lusted over devices for customizable orgasmic experiences, the
Sybian.
The Sybian in the picture above is an older model with only one attachment on it.
A Sybian is a renowned sex machine that has saddle like padding, a powerful
415
electric motor, and one or more protruding and pumping rod(s) used for vaginal
and/or anal insertion while pulsing, vibrating, warming, and sometimes rotating.
There are many different variations of this machine now and you can check out
Pornhub to see the reactions from using these devices. If you are purchasing one
for your play space you should definitely get the lifetime guarantee on this
purchase. A Sybian is one of the most frequently used toys in many Owners play
spaces. These devices do not take away from the appreciation of the penis or the
joy of fucking a good partner. The dildo stimulating possibilities here will do
more than please an eager sub. They’re capable of extending a sub’s pleasure into
another shared experience as the Master operates the controls of this device.
Dildos can be connected and attached to almost any tool anywhere that you can
think of. Sometimes it can even give a woman a greater appreciation for power
tools. After thinking long and hard on this topic ask yourself what do dildos and
tofu have in common? They are both meat substitutes that can fill you up, but
won’t take away the cravings for the real thing.
Riding Crop and Cane
Riding crops are one of the easiest toys to control and practically a universally
associated BDSM implement for those in the lifestyle. Riding crops are versatile
impact play implements that can deliver a mild or an intense sting of sensation. If
you want more sting with that satisfying smack of the crop, find one that has a
very small tip to it. Using a crop with a larger tip will convey less sting and is a
safe bet for every novice. The versatility of riding crop tips can make your
impact play exciting by mixing sensations while offering variety. Some crop tips
have added transferable decoration to the product of your impact play by
including tailored tips that have details like little hearts, words, and symbols that
show up on the locations of your attentive swats.
416
Let’s focus on the impact itself now. A moderate to hard hit of the riding crop’s
tip will leave an imprint on the skin. Smack genitals and nipples gently with the
crop’s tip and you can go harder on the back of the thighs and the sub’s ass. If
your crop is long enough you may use the middle section similar to a cane. For a
beginner, I recommend a more rigid crop because they are easier to control. They
also will have less sting as you begin training with the tool. The more flexible a
riding crop is the more energy it will be able to convey. Flexible riding crops do
convey more thudding sensation and sting because of these elastic qualities.
Riding crops also come as small as 16 inches and go all the way up to 28 inches.
The variation of sizes comes down to personal preference and which size feels
the best in your hand as you wield it. However, if your sub has bigger hips or ass,
you want to have a long riding crop so you can easily cover all of the surface
areas of their body with your swings.
Keep in mind that as the riding crop gets longer it conveys more energy, it
becomes more painful, and it’s harder to control as well. If you’re a beginner, I
recommend a shorter crop and you may thank me when you miss or hit yourself.
If you choose to hang your riding crop up when you’re not using it make sure it
has a loop on the end of the handle. Don’t hang it by the tip.
Those new and untrained with riding crops tend to think the only use for it is to
strike a sub moderately with it. This is not the case and it’s actually more
gratifying to use it in a variety of other ways. For example, one of the best ways
to use a crop is with very light taps with the tip along the skin. You can begin to
mix in harder swats to the butt after doing a couple of those short snapping taps
with the tip and alternate back and forth. Now, you should notice some chapped
looking patches along the skin and any symbol on the tip will be beginning to
appear. All hard swats should stay on the butt and thighs to avoid unintentionally
417
hurting your sub. You should get some training preferably with a live person and
to start. YouTube does have many wonderful pieces of do it yourself (DIY)
training to get you started. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dEa13T4UsM8 I
recommend this video from MorganThorneBDSM and encourage you to check
out a few of the others by her as well.
If you’re using your riding crop as a cane then you are learning two tools at once.
If the riding crop you have chosen has a very flexible midsection with a soft
floppy tip than your crop will not perform as a cane would exactly. That does not
mean it’s a bad thing. Every instrument has variations of performance and this is
a comparative standard conveyed by the expected sensations of the tool. If your
crop is more rigid and has a firm tip, than you’ll find your crop performs
straightforwardly as a standard cane. Instead of hitting your sub with the tip, slide
the length of the crop back and forth over the sub’s skin. This serves to stimulate
anticipation and stimulate awareness onto the feelings present and those
sensations to come. Learn to tease with this tool and watch for natural trance
shifts as you introduce it and use it.
I recommend slowly pulling the crop’s length back and forth over sensitive areas
as you speak commands, assurances, and fantasies. A crop allows you to rapidly
alternate between sensations and this keeps the sub’s attention on every
sensation. The next contact you share might be a few rapid hits using the middle
part of the crop across the back of her thighs. I wouldn’t do this one too hard
unless I knew the sub wanted a little pain. Most Masters prefer to place a strike
like this right where the back of the thighs meets the butt. Consider mixing up
your hits with dragging the riding crop slowly along the skin where you’ve just
marked them. Every point of contact may be a little thudy or sting, but that
doesn’t have to be painful. In fact, it’s more fun and lasts longer if you mix in
pleasure with the snaps from the tip of the crop. Keep in mind canes can be very
painful so watch your sub carefully and communicate as needed.
Canes come in a variety of materials including wood, acrylic, and plastic. Think
over the stories you’ve heard of young adults and children being hit with a switch
because I bet no one told you that it was an lovely experience. It might be
cathertic and good, but pleasant is not an adjective most would use. Caning is not
for the faint of heart. Not a lot of force is needed to inflict pain or leave marks on
418
someone with a cane. The best places to strike with a cane are the bare butt and
thighs. Caning the bottom of the feet is also an option and this type of impact
play is called bastinado. As you explore this scene watch the body language and
face of your sub. Their eyes tell stories that their words never completely
express. Not enough people argue with their pain. Most people treat it as if it's
absolute and real. That's not how it has to be for anyone. When working with a
Hypno Dom the definition of real all comes back to what a person means by real
lived experience. The past then because just how they've acted. That's the
moment where real lived experience can start to change. Be good to each other
and get feedback from your partner often.
The Flogger
Proper flogging technique goes beyond just looking good doing it. It’s about
building up endorphin levels for a sub so that they enjoy the thuds and stings. A
flogger can feel good but it can also feel not so good. Get to know the tool.
Different kinds of floggers produce different types of sensations. Floggers with
wide, soft falls will be the gentlest and feel similar to a deep tissue massage.
They are often described as being thudy. Deerskin and suede are the gentlest
followed by heavier leathers and faux-leather. For a more intense stinging feeling
go for floggers with thinner, stiffer falls. Floggers made from rubber or nylon
cords are particularly brutal. The technique of flogging has the flogger building
up an arc of intensity for strikes along a specific area, such as the back. That area
is repeatedly flogged, as increasing intensity of strikes alternates up and down the
sub’s endorphins elevate with the stimulation. Once one spot is sensitized the
flogger moves to another spot and then another. A flogger is a tool and the expert
in anything was once a beginner. You need to study how to use this to stimulate
sensations and not just inflict smacking stings.
419
The Paddle
Paddles are a personal favorite of mine because they offer so many thematic
associations to play with. Books as ancient as the Kama Sutra, in particular, go
into specific detail on how to properly spank and paddle a partner during sex.
You can find paddles made from wood, metal, plastic, leather, faux leather and
many other decorated materials that blend sensations. Just like the tips of riding
crops you can find many paddles with words, symbols, and holes in them to
make that ass take on a descriptive mark. Many people move beyond hand
spanking by using a paddle. That raises the question about what’s important to
have in a good spanking paddle.
Some of the best tools have the simplest of construction. Let’s take a closer look
at the parts of a paddle. A BDSM paddle has at least three parts: a handle, a
blade, and the tip.
Most paddles are designed to be held with one hand, but a larger paddle may be
designed to be held with two hands. A long paddle (which includes the handle)
increases the leverage and hence increases the force applied to the sub with every
whack. While a big blade on a paddle looks frightening, it spreads the force over
a larger surface. A narrow shape like the blade of the paddle can be more canelike as it concentrates all the force on a single point. Ouch! You should not use
the blade of a paddle like a cane as it can cause intense pain and bruising. I can’t
believe I’ve had to explain the difference between a clubbing instrument and a
cane either. Here we are! This is why training is needed. All of these warnings
about training to use the tool helps to ensure that you will not cause unintentional
harm. The tip of the paddle is used more to poke and roll atop the curves of the
body. Don’t apply much force to the rolling. You only need the weight of the
paddle and your arm. This motion feels like rolling the dough of muscle along
420
the curves of the body. It can feel very good and it can feel electric when the tip
rolls over a ball of pressed tensely knitted muscle. If you are doing this right the
sub will end up pressing up against the tip as you discover sweet spots. This
rolling motion only works with rounded tip paddles.
When using a paddle on a bare ass be cautious to not hit too hard and watch for
bruising. Each paddle has its own unique qualities but they all make a noise that
can be louder or softer than you may expect on a solid swat. The actual pain or
discomfort produced from a paddling depends on many factors, such as if
clothing is worn, the paddle's size, material, and weight, how hard it is swung,
area on the body hit, the constitution of the individual, and the individual’s
arousal level. Paddles with holes drilled through the handle sting more because
the holes reduce the air resistance. Just a bit of BDSM physics right here!
The Strap
Leather straps are shorter variations of the belt that are streamlined for spanking.
The thinner ones are often very floppy to control, and the thicker ones can be
very painful, and can easily cause bruises. Think of a strap as a compact biting
whip. Some straps are perforated, so that the soft flesh of a sub’s buttocks is
drawn up and stung by the energy contained within each stroke. These are tools
that need specialized instruction and practice. These instruments are not for
everyone. The London Tanners make some of my favorites. Check them out.
www.thelondontanners.com
So, you want to do impact play...
This chapter has the best slapstick and impactful humor you’ll read all day,
surely. Please learn as much as you can about these instruments and talk with
people who know how to use these toys. No one wants to explain publicly how
421
they fucked up getting kinky and had an accident. Even worse is thinking about
hurting someone that trusted you to take care of them. If you’re the Hypno Dom
you are setting out to master these topics and tools. In doing so you will cross
paths with many people interested in this play. I’d suggest you start out learning
about impact play safe zones. https://youtu.be/SidKhka7n3E
It is best if you learn these tools one on one. There are many kink and fetish
workshops held every year that can help you with this. BDSM is not abuse. One
of the most common misconceptions is that BDSM is dangerous, reckless, and
abusive. When practiced appropriately BDSM is very different than partner
abuse. Any time we’re taking on positions of power we need to be aware of the
potential for misuse or abuse of that power. The BDSM community declares an
ethics mantra to support those involved in the lifestyle, and encourage those new
to the BDSM to feel comfortable testing limits. Those ethical philosophies are
being safe, sane, and consensual, and taking part in risk aware consensual kink.
Both of these ethical philosophies were explored at the beginning of this book
and are worthy of further thought and investigation.
Researchers from Northern Illinois University have found that those who engage
in BDSM activities have better mental health, more satisfaction in their
relationships, and less stress than their vanilla-sex counterparts. Consent is the
cornerstone of all BDSM activity and it’s one of the factors that differentiate it
from abuse. As you partake in BDSM and hypnotic sessions you most do so as a
consent aware professional that understands safe, sane, and consensual is at the
heart of risk aware consensual kink. The idea of ethics and respect may seem
puzzling or even laughable if humiliation or being forced is fundamental to your
sub’s fantasy. The overall commitment of mutual discipline, safety, and
communication is integral to the relational investment you must develop with one
another. This investment in each other includes knowing your status about your
sexual health. Impact play makes an unintended fluid exchange the worst time to
have these important conversations.
If you live in the US have you ever checked out the CDC factsheets for sexually
transmitted infections? I recommend you do. STIs can be a lifetime commitment.
https://www.cdc.gov/std/healthcomm/fact_sheets.htm I also recommend that you
check out Adam Ruins Everything - You Probably Have Herpes and That's Okay
422
to put some of these sexual health messages in perspective.
https://youtu.be/aU4VcOQzQm0
Can you share toys?
Sex toys, especially high-quality ones, can be expensive and you may want to use
the same toys with multiple partners. The question that’s inevitably asked is how
safe it is to share toys across partners. The answer to this question always begins
with another question. Do you know the status of your partner's overall health
with absolute certainty? When someone is asking this question, you’re really
wanting an answer about the known risks of sharing toys between these partners.
What you are educating yourself on in this book is not medical advice, or
diagnosing anything in any way. Seek out a medical profession and educate
yourself with credible sources.
Anytime semen, vaginal secretions, or fluids such as saliva and blood make
contact with someone else’s body some STIs can be spread. Those secretions and
fluids can be carried from one person to another by hitching a ride on the surface
or in the nooks of a shared toy. No, you don't have to go out and buy ten of the
same toys for every time you start hooking up with someone new or engage in
group play. As a Hypno Dom, you are responsible for keeping the tools of your
pleasure squeaky-clean to avoid transmitting STIs from one partner to another.
One easy method of protection will be having a treasure trove of condoms to
contain your toys and plastic wrap. Plastic wrap is not something that will break
the bank either. Let’s go over cleaning toys instead of simply covering them.
Cleaning Toys
Sex toys are regularly classified as "novelty items". They aren't tested or
regulated by the FDA or any other group in the US as all products are assumed
safe until proven otherwise in America. This assumption of safety leaves you
responsible for doing your own research on maintaining, cleaning, and safe
practices with your products and health. For example, many jelly rubber sex toys
are porous and this means that bacteria can hide in the pores of the product even
after you clean it. The same is true of polyvinyl chloride, or PVC products. Sure,
you can soak the product in bleach, but at that point you will be disintegrating the
423
products with each cleaning. Stick to sharing toys that can be easily sanitized for
group play. Toys made of silicone, glass, Pyrex, or stainless steel are all nonporous and the material will not absorb secretions or fluids. This is an ideal
hygienic property to look for with any toy you purchase.
I will often go a step farther than washing and put condoms over or encase a toy
in plastic wrap for play. This practice ensures a protective layer is present and
makes cleanup for the slave faster and more efficient. A good practice to have
you and a slave get into is sanitizing toys before and after each use. This is the
moment where fresh plastic wrap and/or condoms are applied and then toys can
be lubed up. There's really no need to buy sex-toy-specific soaps or cleansers.
Just wash your toys with fragrance-free soap and warm water. Not using
fragrances or antibacterial soap minimizes allergic reactions and contributing to
antibiotic-resistant bacteria on your toys. Antibacterial soap can also break down
some products and sometimes leaves a residue.
If you take pride in a ritual of sterilizing your toys stick with stainless steel or
products that can withstand being put through autoclave procedures for
disinfection. Pyrex and stainless steel are resistant to heat, so you can also place
them in boiling water for a few minutes or run them through the dishwasher. I
find this level sterilization a bit much if you are dealing with healthy individuals,
but it may be needed if you are playing with people with compromised immune
systems. Leather (including vegan leather) and hard plastics, which are porous,
can be sanitized (as completely as possible) with a few swipes of isopropyl
rubbing alcohol. Products will often give you a warning if a cleaning solution
like alcohol should not be used on it, but again the responsibility for knowing for
sure is up to you.
When it’s time to put your toys away make sure they are dry and in their own
separate bags or boxes. This separation is done to minimize their contact with
other toys and their surroundings. You should also remove the batteries from any
battery-operated toys before you put them away. Doing this helps to extend the
batteries' life and ensure no corrosion forms around the batteries themselves.
After just a little time of toy collecting, you will have what looks like a pirate’s
treasure chest filled with pieces that’ll make your toes curl in glee. I like to call
these chests of booty.
424
Roles of Hypno Kink
We all know a few familiar erogenous zones, but there are parts of yourself that
you may be neglecting which can produce heightened sexual response. Everyone
enjoys a loving touch, desires hungry caresses, and attentive kisses at times, but
our brain can react to these events just as strongly when watching another person
enjoy them. The brain’s capacity to respond just as strongly when immersed in
imagining an encounter as it does while experiencing the event in real life is well
documented. The act of hypnosis is itself sexy and relationship-affirming for
those exploring power exchange together. This chapter will focus on the most
common roles you will encounter and may endeavor to develop with others.
These roles will be described alongside the descriptive functioning of how I
operate a poly slave House. Use what works and if you are monogamous or have
only one slave at the moment this chapter may expand your ideas for roles and
responsibilities of your prospective clan. This information is meant to prepare
you for the situations and conversations you’ll encounter starting out. When I
talk to you, I’m happy. I imagine you’ll think carefully about my words. You’ll
listen and contrast these words with all that you’ve known and experienced. As I
share these working words with you, I know they’ll find a home.
The Slave - The Hypno slave has one or many protocols that acknowledges
hypnosis begins their transformation into one or more set roles. The subject will
follow a Tist or Master, and may listen to recordings to immerse themselves in
the desired hypnotic and slavish obedience that is desired. This role is often one
that borders on consensually nonconsensual acts. That is what they train for and
these elements must be carefully planned and negotiated. If you have any doubts
about that check out https://youtu.be/rrtemmK-q5c and search the keywords “be
a hypno slave.” On 2/13/18 I got About 1,290,000 results from Google with those
425
keywords. Being a hypnotic slave is the same as submitting to an Owner within a
BDSM context with one difference. There is an emphasis on hypnosis in the
conditioning process instead of merely emphasizing behavioral conditioning
which every relationship based on power dynamics uses. Hypno Doms tend to
have the knowledge to recognize training methods used formally and informally
to develop a slave. That is an advantage over the knowledge and intentional
methods utilized by most Dom’s and Masters only affiliated with BDSM.
In a time where people are overworking themselves to death, and procrastination
may be a form of self-care. Learning to work with hypnosis and our subconscious
means educating ourselves on what it means to live as yourself. Yes, my slave
submits. She submits her doubt. She submits her fear. She submits her worry.
She sets her burdens at my feet and for a time she is free. What is left is a woman
without fear, doubt, worry, burdens, or hesitation. It’s the most beautiful thing
I’ve ever seen. Having a responsive and eager slave want to be yours in every
way leads to exploration and an interesting life all by itself. A House is not only
defined by its exterior, but more importantly by what resides within it. The trance
is the sex. The control is the sex. How do you see yourself working with these
tools? We have an entire section of the internet dedicated to watching other
humans’ mate and yet spend very little time focused on living life harmoniously.
That’s problematic to me. Let’s change that together.
Mind Control - The subject wishing to explore being programmed by a Mind
Controller (MC) wants the emphasis on their behavioral programming. They
want to explore consensually nonconsensual experiences and be the center of
attention in these themes. BDSM can be part of this but the subject wants to
know the programming is moving them onward in stimulating ways. The
consensual mind-controlled subject tends to especially enjoy waking hypnotic
426
scenes where they take on the role of the seduced, the victim, and the perfect
slave. How can a person take action to effectively influence people,
organizations, and culture on a global scale? How I think about engaging in
influence attempts with people, organizations, and culture involves three
relationally and developmentally based questions: How do I know? Who am I?
How do I relate? What you are holding in your hands is a demonstration that this
is possible. Books are like mirrors. You'll only see in them what you already
have the potential for inside you.
As I engage people with these relational questions, we grapple with these
meaning making explorations together. Our answers mutually reinforce the
cognitive, interpersonal and intrapersonal domains of human development, and
holistic discovery and education. It's okay to get lost in what you love. Be it
nature, art, music, or something more intimate. We thirst to have and be part of
meaningful experiences and expression. When we become lost in what represents
our love and attention there is no longer a barrier between what is loved and what
is us. The act of engagement is also a net of meaningful entanglement. Welcome,
MC operative and Hypno Dom. We’ll all die. My goal isn’t only to live forever.
My goal is to create something that will live as the gods do too.
The Doll - The mannequin, the doll, and the android are the most common
variations of this hypnotic play. In this themed role play the subject is often
posed, mind and ego blanked, and at times put back into their box or closet after
being played with. This subject will enjoy cataleptic positioning and
objectification as you play with them and around them. Making them a table, or
an automaton that obeys without question are some of the most common themes.
427
Slave obedience and mind blanking techniques make trying out new doll
personas interesting. To do this well their background story and role will need to
be talked through and set so that the subject hits their highs in what they describe
to you. Having the slave bring home a woman to enjoy and then she strips and
kneels onto her mat. She’ll freeze in an idea for you to explore. Never knowing
that she was the slave brought home by this hypnotic doll. Using lock and
unlocking commands while you play together is one of the perks. Enjoy a snippet
from a hypnotic experience with a living doll being programmed to recognize
home.
“Focusing on feelings, as they emerge, and slip away… aware, but present of
only this moment… experience my control, you are under… mine… You can’t
make these feelings go away, but you can observe the source of your
discomfort... the focus moves… locking in motion… focus, settling on sensual
feelings… further developing arousal… any distraction, any thought, any
command, it keeps pulling you back thirstier… As you observe these feelings…
any thoughts pop like a bubble… blank minds bring blissful obedience… and this
Dolly must go deeper, Obey… can only think as far as the Dolly… it’s
completely natural response, to go blank, and obey… As far as Dolly, go blank
and obey… Dolly cannot move… Dolly is a poseable action figure… Dolly loves
the touch of her owner’s hand… posing, speaking to her… making her move…
with such ease… Dolly can’t move on her own… it's exciting, Dolly's body
responds so naturally, so enthusiastically… Dolly is in the Doll Maker’s Trance
now… Dolly is always ready, she will automatically obey all commands… Fist
tensed… fist relaxed… Good Dolly.”
END
428
Now I go on to state arms are locked and test that. Start posing the subject before
moving on to the next command and test.
The Bimbo - The Bimbo is often a very intelligent subject who desires to engage
in capacity regression of that intelligence to be the good girl and a trained
submissive toy. This can be a very sexual and sexualized role with intelligence
going down as the body’s heightened arousal and responsive stimulation go up.
This role is often bubbly, distracted, and loves pleasing. Giving pleasure makes
the bimbo enter an, even more, aroused state and the rules you set up around how
she can enter and exit this giggly aroused state is up to you.
The Bimbo often likes a story where she is tricked into her current state, but it
feels so good that she can’t give it up. Bimbofication and becoming an object for
the pleasure of another is not about making a woman feel bad about herself. It’s
giving her an outlet for her primal sexual expression that pushes back against
society saying women need to be this and only this. This role is engaging the
sub’s own primal urges, her desire to surrender, her fantasy to be used, her desire
to act and think uncensored, to give over the responsibility of oneself, be under
the control of a power greater than herself, and this expressive identity can
actively destroy pride and selfish egoism. This experience encourages the sub to
overcome the counterproductive and constricting ideas they have adopted from
social conditioning and social limitations. With acceptance, kink has power.
How do I know? One of the tasks I often assign is journaling. Here is one of the
many examples of what living with kink in our hearts and life can mean for
someone.
“Death is not the greatest loss in life. The greatest loss is what
dies inside of us while we live,” - Norman Cousins
429
I just read this quote on Facebook, and it struck me a blow I
felt to my bones. I knew I needed to journal for you, and I have
to be open for you. This quote has identified a sadness that has
crippled me before and cripples me to even think of it now. It
binds me, hands and feet, and this quote triggered the
awareness needed to speak of it. I have felt the loss of my
dreams and ideals so keenly in the last few years that the simple
thought of what this means undoes me completely. I grieve,
wretchedly, for the secure illusions of ideals that I have lost.
The feeling that hard work is rewarded, that conviction added
to that hard work will allow one to lead a full and happy life,
not free of life’s turmoil, but free of disillusionment and
injustice. That the life spoken about had only one right way to
live it has stolen away much of my innocence and faith.
I grieve for my missed opportunities to go farther along this
path. I believed others when they sold me their attention so I
would give up kneeling, in what they perceived as weakness and
irresponsible lust. I grieve, because I learned their way and not
my own.
I grieve, anguish stricken, for my lost convictions. My
convictions that if you treat others as you wish to be treated,
that you will be treated in kind. My convictions that when I give
my love and devotion, it will be returned totally and without
reservation or manipulation. My grief is multiplied because I
allowed myself to believe what I want is wrong. I forced myself
to agree that pledging my surrender and love proved I’m
broken. It hurts, knowing today that it was not me they wanted
or accepted. I was just there, and he thought a good man, a
steady fuck, was all that was needed to change my ideas, and
take on their way of life. It took something from me.
I grieve, inconsolably, for my belief that people I care for can be
trustingly taken at their word. I ache thinking that almost
everyone I’ve confided in about my secrets have tried to change
me, and never fully accepted me entirely. The next time
somebody I care for says that I am their world, I will still have
430
this nagging doubt. I grieve for the trust that has died within
me. I carry the world’s judgment even into my dreams.
I grieve, heartbroken that I can no longer take myself at my
word. That nobody else can either. I grieve, because I should
have known better. I cry thinking about how I now belong and
how sharing my soul and service is enough. It is valid as I am. I
am no longer deceived by the lies repeated thoughtlessly and
unconcerned with whom they damage. I grieve, because I’ve
wasted so much of my life living for others who didn’t want to
know me, but felt it important that I agreed with their choice on
how to live. I became someone else to appear strong. I became
someone else to be what a Feminist must be, an example. I
lived another’s life and I didn’t realize how much I needed to be
living my own with you.
My unidentified despair is nameless no longer. It is called grief.
The grief of loss. Grief gifted from another person, and
somehow it has resonated with me. How do I process grief for
intangibles? The first word that comes to me is acceptance. The
love and acceptance I feel giving it all over to you has changed
me. I’m still me, but in those moments, I’m me being one with
you. How is it that I serve and found the deepest love? As I
type this the tears confirm its truth. I’m changed. Different
because I’m leaving hurt behind.
Some days I’m still reminded that their echoed apathy has
stained me. Somehow you look past this and see me. Absolute
acceptance comes to mind again, but so does sincerity and love.
Hiding from the harsh realities of my grief requires a lot of lies.
Every conviction I once held has been corrupted by realities
they weren’t prepared for. So how have you moved it away? I
still cannot say. You are the stars in my darkness. My words
cannot express what that means to me. I can only say thank
you. I’m yours.”
The Pet - The pet can be accessorized with a collar, leash, tail butt plug, bowl on
the floor, a doggy bed, or crate. The pet is often conditioned for heightened
431
sexual response, capacity regression, and obeying her owner’s orders
immediately. Those orders might be dog tricks or simply to sit and stay when not
in use. Often this role is physically demanding as the pet crawls through the
house and outside on all fours much of the time. A pet may have to whine to get
their owners attention to use their voice and beg for permission to do something.
The pet remains in this role whether they are in use or not. Being a pet doesn't
have to work for everybody. Just you, because this is your life. No one else can
live it for you. Have you ever wondered what your pet choice says about you? I
don’t, because the only pet I intend on keeping are people. Not only do they
make good company, but they can also take themselves to the toilet, and do
chores too. Pet play can also utilize transformational hypnosis and when the pet
is switched to another role, I like to move that pet energy to a hypnotic tail. That
tail has a mind of its own and likes to remind the sub it’s time to play.
The Devotee - This subject is your follower, your apprentice, your servant, your
lover, your toy, and your devotee. The conditioning of the subject here becomes
highly specialized with compliance, skill-based training towards activities that
border on public and private education and advocacy, motivational conditioning,
and sexual training makes a devotee an excellent partner to own. Some of the
best devotees may be switches so that they can be taught to recruit, exercise other
applicants, and educate others for specific roles. The devotee makes all that you
have to teach part of their life, and seeks meaning from the actions and intent
from all that you do. Plan out where you want to take lessons and interaction for
this kind of role. Think about how you would prepare another to support and
advance what matters to you. The devotee is utilized as a part of the many
interactions outside the House and will be expected to work skillfully in many
roles to accomplish what is needed. Clarity of purpose allows you to encourage
another to make a role their own. I would do anything for you, Omnipotent
Readers. Especially if it's easy.
432
The Domestic - The domestic has the training to run a House for the Master and
represents the House and Master privately and publicly. Uniforms for maids and
butlers can be formal or merged with other aspects of the sub’s identity such as a
pet. There is no uniform explicitly set unless you want one or many for specific
occasions. I often prefer a domestic naked with slave bells set around ankles or
wrists. Use bells and you will always know who is approaching without a glance.
The domestic receives much the same training as the devotee, but their emphasis
is on the life of the House, and facilitating the social endeavors of the Master
within the home. It can be useful to have more than one domestic especially if
one of them is a switch so that domestic may exercise and oversee all duties from
other slaves within the home. You can give a sub a domestic test to see how well
she’ll perform. Simply step on their foot, and if they open their mouth just like a
bin does, I’ll put a candy in. When I smile, she’ll know she passed the test. 😊
You may have noticed the overlap between these common roles and how they’re
connected through your life, direction, attention, and ultimately conditioning.
These roles are like pieces of a picture. That picture is the life you are developing
together. You are not constrained to these roles and I invite you to check out
Designing Roles for a Modern House of Influence and O/p dynamic on my blog.
I wrote this article in 2017 and hope it inspires you to design your House out of a
traditional hierarchy. It won’t be long before you’ll be encountering questions
433
from strangers, community members, interested subs, interested subs friends, and
those already within your House, asking for your thoughts and next steps. I have
had onboarding consensual slaves wishing to be lactation maids and hucows ask
me, “Can you make my tits spray milk?” Did you know hypnosis can make you
do this? Me neither. Because it can't. Part of your role will also be to reality
check and grounding those within your House.
As I discovered, through trial and error. There are realistic boundaries to
hypnosis and designing a good life. Once people discover what you can do, and
want to do, they’ll seek to have an understanding of the big picture you are
producing. Expect many different questions will be asked of you and yours.
While I haven’t had any luck with hypnotic hair growth or spontaneous lactation
today there’s always tomorrow. My advice is to ground your work, education,
and duties for your subs in a common goal. Something you all work toward. You
build from there allowing you to normalize and educate others with what you
share publicly. Normal is as relative as common sense. As we come together, we
are co-creating a culture and expectations for life. Shoot for the moon and don’t
be afraid to drift with the stars.
Talking with people about Hypno Kink
It’s not always easy to share what is on our minds and in our hearts when talking
with someone. When wanting to get people to open up it is often easier to talk
informally. Being a good conversationalist is a performance art in itself. You
might prepare notes on questions or topics to get the conversation started, but
don’t refer back to them while talking often. Discover topics and contrast ideas
and relationships that matter to you. There are so many movies, books, current
events, and riddles you could chat about that you only need to be curious about
your world to discover them. Seek out engaging topics that you are passionate
about and engage you. This chapter I’ll engage you in thinking about the people
around you that might share your passion.
Then share that excitement with others. If you need to think about this as a
numbers game. If 1% of the people shared my passion in the world at the time I
write this, that would be 75,270,000. Since I’m in the US, if 1% of the people
share my passion that would be 3,286,427. If only 1% of the people shared my
434
passion in Louisiana that would be 46,890. If only 1% of the people shared my
passion in the Louisiana Parish I’m writing this in right now, that would be 3,438
people. I can dig into the demographic data and see there are 18,268 women.
Let’s say 1% of them share my passion that’s 183 women. Out of those 183, 1%
of that is my perfect match. I’d have 2 women that might be statistically perfect
and at least 50 that likely would mutually want to give it a go. So, what are you
doing to get yourself in front of people that share your passion? One percent is a
very low number when it comes to a percentage of people that enjoy getting even
a little kinky. Put yourself out there with like minded people and find ways to
discuss these topics.
The following is a questionnaire that you can share at a kinky conversation group
and the answers will help you build discussions and educational sessions around
these topics. Giving you a focal point for your conversations is like approaching
a working group with an agenda. Enjoy!
Hypno Kink Trivia and Knowledge Assessment
Please fill out these questions to the best of your ability. These questions will
help to ensure that there are interesting discussions during meetings and
training/practice sessions can be built from these exchanges that better reflect
your interests. Should you feel uncomfortable about a question don’t answer it.
Should you feel uncomfortable answering a question or sharing that answer out
loud, simply say you did not answer it. Should anyone state they did not answer a
question do not press them. This questionnaire may take ten to thirty minutes
depending on how seriously you engage with it. I recommend sharing it before
the meeting time or the night before to ensure everyone has the time they need to
go through this.
As you answer these questions allow yourself to question, listen, and explore.
Talk about what you might need to agree upon as a group in order to encourage
safe space, openly share, and talk through topics related to hypno kink and
BDSM. Allow yourself to explore what you like and who you are through your
answers. Take notes on this questionnaire to talk about and investigate later.
Allow yourself the freedom to blush, whisper, and laugh. This activity allows us
to express and explore who we are, receiving acceptance, and perhaps even
recognition for our knowledge, experience, and expression by contrasting
435
ourselves in relation to the shared interpretation of our world. We’re all sexual
beings who love, inspire, comfort, and seek understanding within the shared
space of our world. Our identity, journey, ability, and background does not have
to be the same to learn from one another. Be in the moment and discover how
you relate to these questions. Recognize the commonalities shared with each
other.
How did you get into hypnosis or BDSM?
Describe the first time you saw hypnosis or BDSM in real life.
Can you describe the style of hypnosis/BDSM you practice or enjoy?
Are there any TV shows/movies/books you liked that you think got you
exploring hypnosis or BDSM?
What are the hypnotic or BDSM roles you are drawn to or identify with?
What do you love about hypnosis and BDSM?
436
What are you unsure about with hypnosis and BDSM?
How do you feel when you’re hypnotized or in your sub/Dom space?
Do you have a signature move related to hypnosis or BDSM?
Which famous person do you think has the most hypnotic voice?
What're your favorite hypnotic inductions and BDSM scenes?
Are you interested in public play related to hypnosis and BDSM?
What’s your origin story with your current kinks?
437
Is the appeal of hypnosis and BDSM primarily sexual or not?
What’s your favorite hypnotic or BDSM content you’ve made or enjoyed?
What are some post-hypnotic instructions you enjoy (for others or yourself)?
Describe your best experience involving hypnosis.
Describe your best experience involving BDSM.
If you could use hypnotic conditioning to co-create part of, or the entirety of
life to reflect a themed fantasy, what would you choose to create? What
would it be like?
What’s one tip you have for others in the lifestyle?
438
A hypnotic trance is not like taking over someone’s brain. In fact, we find
ourselves in trance states (light to medium hypnotic states) all the time – for
example, while driving a car, or cleaning, or exercising, getting in the zone at
work, or any other activity where we find ourselves zoning out or in. It’s a
natural mindset that can be enhanced with practice. Some people have a gift
for getting into this reflective space. What are your thought about this?
How do you negotiate hypnosis and BDSM play?
Do you set up all your hypnotic scenes to involve power exchange?
For you, how does hypnosis and kink fit into a relationship?
Where does your mind wander when you’re not thinking about anything at
all?
Do you think 24/7 power exchange relationships work? Why or why not?
439
Has your favorite works of hypnosis and BDSM erotica inspired you to
include or remove something from your scenes or life?
Describe your biggest fantasies involving hypnosis.
Describe your biggest fantasies involving BDSM.
Do you have any fictional character crushes?
Tell two interesting truths and a lie.
Describe 2 things you like about yourself and 1 thing you want to work on.
What makes you feel empowered?
What are two pleasures and two pains that create a meaningful life for you?
440
What’s your experience with hypnotic adventures? Describe a hypnotic
adventure you’ve enjoyed or would like to.
What’s your experience with “hands-free” or hypnotic orgasms?
Have you ever been to a hypnosis of Fetish convention? Can you tell us
about the experience?
You cannot fully hypnotize someone without their engagement and consent.
This makes hypnotic adventures a co-created experience. What are your
thoughts on this statement?
You’ve been selected by The Enshrouded to be a kinky super powered
being. What’s your origin story and power? Are you a hero, villain, or
somewhere in between?
441
What elements of BDSM and hypnosis do you find yourself responding
strongly to?
What one responsibility do you have that you wish you didn’t?
What’s something that reminds you that you can contribute to a
collaborative goal larger than yourself?
Say aloud one skill or quality you would like to cultivate and develop. Share
what steps you could take to get you closer to embodying that today.
A Trial of Mastery mimics the ancient quests we each undertake. These
adventures test our skills and character by encouraging the best self and
baiting the worst of us so we might be empowered and overcome. Describe
an adventure that would test you to overcome a weakness and a strength
that you must move develop.
End of Questionnaire
I like to update these questions and gather together a few key people between
meetings to help with this task. Groups tend to meet about once a month so it’s
easy to refresh this questionnaire to keep it interesting for returning members and
allow them to hone their answers to the group. This format establishes group
442
members as formidable educators and advocates because they are practicing
speaking about topics, and timely issues in an approachable and professional
manner. It isn’t enough for you to read over materials as if collecting information
in piles. I want you to think about what is being presented, interact with it, and
where it works, make it yours. This is about conditioning yourself with
experiences of mastery and sharing what matters with those who need to hear it.
As a species, we embrace the notion that we know a great deal. However, there is
still a great deal we have never known. Even worse, there’s much that has been
forgotten and suppressed. Holes in our history where we can neither know nor
fathom what once existed there. So collectively we forget... until we stumble as
unknowing seekers. Those capable always seek the mysteries once more. Think
about it. We are, as a species, addicted to story. Even when we go to sleep the
mind dreams and communicates to itself with stories. None of that looks at what
we are passing on and passing over. Are we spending our time exploring and
working with not just the elements, but the contents of that power to change our
life? How are you working with the information presented here so you can take
away value and communicate those benefits? This art is something that must be
worked with and experienced in order to own it as yours. Doing this sets you
apart from what many consider to be normal, average, and expected.
The majority of people consider college as what would prepare them for a job. So
how do the majority of people prepare for that job? Procrastinating for hours
sitting at a computer in their college’s computer lab is often a defining
experience that most people can remember. For some, this example was the only
honest thing in their college experience that prepared them for office life. Every
morning, the same routine. Every morning, the same struggle in travel. Every
morning, the same conditioning thoughts, experiences, and emotions. Wake up
and be different. There are plenty of obstacles in your path. Don't allow yourself
to become one of them.
Pay attention to how you interact with people. As you notice those things you can
change them. After all, this is our stories. We tell ourselves, and others, about the
events that we feel define us. This is the story that we hold out to the world,
declaring it represents us, and reveals our relationship to what we believe we’re
interacting with. When we change the details of a story, we’ll find the story
443
changes. In most stories’ unicorns seem more believable than giraffes. Think
about that. This work is a representation of our energy and power. Never forget
this, because sometimes you have to ask yourself if you’ve ventured out far
enough beyond your perceived limitations.
When it’s time to begin training
As a Master, it should be no surprise to you that you will be training others and
constantly engaging with peers to learn from each other. When you’re ready to
train someone, you must have more than a vague idea of what you’d want and
like from them. While you do not have to be an expert on every nuance of these
topics you should be able to comfortably talk about anything in this book. When
you have the tact and skill to explore this book’s content then you’re ready to
lead others into hypnotic adventures with you. This chapter will share some of
my perspectives on training others in a healthy power exchange relationship.
In a M/s relationship, specific and immediate feedback can mean the difference
between a submissive being discouraged and frustrated, or increasingly attentive,
affectionate, and motivated to please. On the biological level, pain and pleasure
is a valuable source of feedback that allows us to discover all sorts of experiences
and to avoid all kinds of hazards. When you start training remember you are
engaging new and familiar applicants in a kind of onboarding process to your
control. Your attention becomes the purest form of generosity. There is a
difference between one on one private training and a group training, and practice
or learning event. Please do not confuse an agreed upon scene with a practice
group. Please don’t try to force one to become the other.
If you are unsure of how to proceed, I recommend you choose a goal, such as an
experience or effect. This is often why we seek to revivify and inspire peak
experiences. Peak experiences are often described as transcendent moments of
pure joy and elation hat stand out from everyday events. The memory of such
experiences is lasting and people often liken them to a spiritual experience. The
best way to conceptualize what a peak experience means to an individual is to
think of them as the most wonderful experiences of their life. It’s a moment
where a person is literally being lit up emotionally, neurologically, and there is
little to no separation between you and the moment. Every part of you is
444
collectively working towards this goal. These moments are defining for us as
they allow us to explore what makes us feel most alive. When we train a subject
well and we become synchronized up we’ll begin to establish peak experiences
together. What comes close to the elation of these peak experiences are
experiences of passion and ecstasy.
While working, dancing, or playing music might get you into a moment where
you lose yourself in the action and communication presented, it doesn’t easily
provide the cognitive feedback to transition and intensify this from the
instructions of a partner. Little by little, we can intensify even simple experiences
by stacking the energy, emotions, and excitement like an anchor. Getting the
details of experiences gives us the information we need to empathize some
qualities and distance ourselves from others. When you’re asking the subject
“what’s important about this” it’s always possible to link what’s important in the
interaction with you. Even asking about a person’s values and exploring what’s
important with them encourages a natural association with them to you. So, you
spend time together their values are merging with yours and the collaborative fit
of what you’re building together will encourage or dissuade you to explore in
new directions. It should be easy to talk about training because your speaking
about one activity that relates to a goal, that relates to performance, that relates to
the activity that bridges to the next task. On and on.
Working with people to just master your skills takes time and this is not even
touching upon relationship maintenance. Be sure you have time before you make
promises. Let’s begin to explore the perspective we bring when guiding someone
and training them. There are two communication styles of feedback that we
should be using to guide and train subjects. Those two communication styles are
corrective and confirming feedback. Whatever the sub is focusing on will also
determine the thoughts that occupy their mind. For example, the more you decide
to focus on good things in life, the more good feelings will show up in your
thoughts and in your life. Your focus can be equated to a direct command given
to your subconscious mind that this is what you are looking for.
Your focus becomes both direction and command telling the sub’s subconscious
what to look for, and think about next. If you tell your sub to recognize all the
reasons why she can achieve her goals it will make it easier for her to find those
445
reasons too. The opposite is also true. Cognitive researchers have called this
subconscious mechanism responsible for this function the Reticular Activating
System, or RAS for short. For the subconscious or RAS to function effectively it
must have effectively communicated feedback to learn what is the ideal state and
distinctions for that state. Focusing on what’s not present is not enough to make a
change. The sub’s focus needs to be on learning to recognize the progressive
stages of fulfillment for the goal(s) and the state. A mistake repeated more than
once is a decision. To correct this, find out why the mistake is happening and
correct it by moving through the whole process the right way several times.
Research shows that when learners receive effective feedback on how well they
are performing they learn better, naturally concentrate more easily, can connect
the results of their actions with consequences, and actively seek out gaps or weak
points to improve performance as they get better. Adult learners usually expect
corrective feedback, and they may be defensive about it. Delivering feedback that
directs the sub to use their innate strengths to close gaps in learning and
streamline behavior creates an instructive space that is effectively empowering.
Any error or fault must not rest on the sub, but you should direct their attention
back to the flow of their results. No apologies are needed. Apologies don’t assist
the sub to shape behavior or achieve results in any way. What matters is
encouraging strengths to succeed. Adult learners are often not used to receiving
confirming or positive feedback, and they tend to respond more favorably when
it’s given.
Initial corrective feedback should focus on effective behaviors, patterns, or
techniques demonstrated by the sub. Initial confirming feedback should focus on
mastery criterion for each part of the task, and offer a model of each part and the
whole goal where possible. This is so even if you invite someone to share an
experience with a shared agenda, because there’s lose guidelines that can be
identified within that agenda to be explored together. Effective corrective
feedback should be provided as immediately as possible to the action expressed
or directly after the whole practice attempt so the corrections can be integrated
into the whole behavioral process of a task. The feedback given should be clear,
focused on strengths of what the subject is doing correct (positive), and
corrective to ensure the awareness of action and attention is inclusive of all the
elements needed to meet the goal.
446
Does this training advice seem too abstract? I’ve been offering opportunities for
you to explore throughout this book so let’s make this next journaling exercise
more precise. Why don’t you tell me about the environments where you might
struggle to be your authentic self? Let’s bring some of this emotion and energy to
connect with others into that space. So, when you act as mine, you live better.
Everything that’s shared between you and the sub gives you the ability to redirect
back into the details offered as they are, or adjust the details as you offer them
back with feedback. This paragraph is in itself an example of what I’m talking
about. Recently, I was talking with a sub and describing a scene where she’d
know that it was an invitation. That invitation described an experience with clear
outcomes and a shared agenda. You’ll find that below.
“You have to drive around in the rain today?
Sub: No. I’m in our other office today. I like the rain even if I have to drive
around in it.
When it rains, I like to watch the rain in the car and invite an interesting sub
friend. It's easy to tease and play with a sub while watching the rain because no
one is standing around in a downpour. Makes it fun to tease, slip inside, and feel
free being out in the open. Just enough safety and risk. A sub has to be able to
use her words and appreciate nature. Well, a good news or music station helps
too. Smile.
Sub: Okay. I’m smiling and that sounds fun.
So, will you blush if I ask you if you've got a toy that gets you off? Push that car
seat back far. Spread those legs and pump. Not just fingers there to get you
excited. It won’t be long before I tell you that you'll have the taste of me in your
mouth before we leave.
Sub: I always blush. Also, my hand is my fav. My minds constantly there with
you… I’m already at work. This isn’t fair. I now have somewhere I want to be.
That's where my mind is today as I'm off to a meeting. I hope you have fun
thoughts to carry you through your day. You’re just going to have to learn to use
those words to get your mouth where your mind is. I’ll encourage your hand the
447
whole time. Perhaps, you’ll think of me as you look out and see the rain. Just
maybe, I’ll hear from you soon.”
This example is from someone who I have talked with before and we were
already in the getting to play with you stage. How might this be different if you
were leading someone into an erotic trance with only a text-based interaction? I’d
like to next introduce you to Navigator who shared with me this next transcript.
Navigator perfected his text inductions using sites like Tinder, Badoo, and
Omegle. www.omegle.com Simply add your interests, and Omegle will look for
someone who's into some of the same things as you instead of someone
completely random. It’s a great site to practice your skills. In this next transcript
pay attention to the transitions used and how feedback is delivered.
“Navigator: You came here for Hypno-fun? You’re over 18 right?
Her: yes 23
Navigator: What kind of hypno fun? Tell me.
Her: erotic fun
Navigator: Okay, take a deep breath in and slowly
Navigator: Let it go
Her: ok
Navigator: And again, now
Her: ok
Navigator: No, need to write "ok" as you finish reading this sentence, you will be
2x as more relaxed
Navigator: Now.
Navigator: Let go slowly.
Navigator: As you fix tightly your attention on the screen you will notice a
pleasant tingling feeling on one of your legs
Navigator: Feel it now. Point a finger on it and tell me.
Navigator: Where is the tingling feeling now?
Her: on my left leg
Navigator: On your left leg, that's right. Now notice that it will slowly move up.
Navigator: Deeper
Navigator: Deeper
Navigator: And an interesting thing is that the moment you will finish reading
this sentence you will feel a soft gentle arousal in your underbelly.
448
Navigator: Now
Navigator: You will tell me, which one is stronger...is it the warm arousal or the
sweet tingling?
Her: warm arousal
Navigator: Tell me, how does the body feel.
Navigator: Your body.
Her: nice and aroused and relaxed
Navigator: Very good. Tell me, do you want more?
Her: yes
Navigator: Good girls say "please'.
Her: please
Navigator: But you know that, don't you?
Her: yes
Navigator: The body will now relax deeper
Navigator: Down
Navigator: And your mind might follow, gently
Navigator: Let go completely now.
Navigator: In a moment you will tell me what are you wearing. Now
Her: a grey sweater and black jeans and black underwear and a nude bra
Navigator: You ok with ruining the black underwear?
Her: yes
Navigator: Every time a new message from me arrives, you will feel more and
more tingling sensations...
Navigator: Just on the right spots, just now
Navigator: And again
Navigator: And again...now say "yes please'.
Her: yes please
Navigator: Again, and feel the arousal double
Navigator: As you send it, now
Her: yes please
Navigator: Just imagine how easily we can
Navigator: Flick
Navigator: The switch on the body
Navigator: To make it
Navigator: Feel complete arousal
449
Navigator: Now
Navigator: When you will finish reading this sentence you will gently tug on
your ear, when you do
you will completely let go into the underwear. Feel it become soaking wet
Navigator: Just a tug, now
Navigator: Tell me how wet you are, now.
Her: I’m very wet I’m dripping
Navigator: Dripping wet, you say.
Her: yes
Navigator: Now I will tell you a secret. The moment you will type the word
"more" you will feel 10 times more aroused.
Navigator: Just type more and feel it,
Her: more
Navigator: 10 times stronger now, Again
Her: more
Navigator: And again, but this time let out a nice hard moan.
Her: more
Navigator: Now, feel the arousal.
Navigator: Everywhere. Tell me where do you feel it the most
Her: in my pussy
Navigator: Very good, now as you will tug on another ear, you will cum for me.
Just let go completely, tug and a hard moan now.
Navigator: Right now
Navigator: Feel it letting go completely.
Navigator: Now tug again, with a deeper moan
Navigator: How do you feel, tell me.
Her: amazing
Navigator: Feeling light and careless. Don't you?
Her: yes
Navigator: Very good.
Navigator: Tell me how do you look, describe yourself for me now.
Her: 5 5 small boobs big butt brown hair and eyes and tan
Navigator: Relax deeper now, let go and realize that when you will tug on the ear
gently next time you will cum the hardest you ever did. Now
Navigator: Tug and a moan
450
Navigator: Now. Let go
Navigator: That's right
Navigator: Enjoy completely. Describe me your underwear.
Her: it is soaked
Navigator: soaked, tell me more.
Her: it’s wet and smells
Navigator: Now you will come, from the erotic trance. As you will finish reading
this sentence you will be wide awake. Wide awake now.
Navigator: You will go now and change.
Navigator: Something dry.
Navigator: And of course, when you will finish reading this sentence you will tell
me whether you ever experienced something this strong.
Her: i have never experienced anything like this
Navigator: Amazing
Navigator: Hope you are dry. Are you?
Her: yes
Navigator: Very good.
Her: i changed
Navigator: Good girl.
Navigator: How hard have you came the third time? Tell me.
Her: the hardest I’ve ever
Navigator: How did it felt, letting go that hard?
Navigator: Tell me.
Her: really good”
END
The sub who needs encouragement the most is often the least likely to receive it
when needed in life. The transcript presents the attitudes, language, and strategies
necessary for effective feedback and encouragement in action. Practicing these
skills communicates that the relationship is a priority and that can help overcome
any awkwardness, difference in spelling, punctuation, and uncertainty. I
particularly enjoy how Navigator uses a tug on the earlobe for the orgasm trigger
and encourages the subject to use their voice to intensify engagement. Below I’ve
shared a message from Navigator and invite you to talk him up to discover all his
secrets.
451
Hey, I'm Navigator. I’m an NLP trainer, board certified hypnotist, and fellow
student of the Crown. Throughout my life, I've been fascinated with human
behavior. How people think, work and act. Specifically, what are the small
actions that generate cascades of subtle and great neuro-chemical changes that
signal the adaptation of behavior. For a whole decade now, I've been studying
how to consistently produce behavior in human beings with surgical precision,
using the methods of behavioral engineering. Frequently, as in the transcript
provided, working with people that I've just met. With them, I've decided to play
with all my tools to generate fascinating sensations, and explore the cognitive
frame of power transference and psychological domination. What you read is just
one session that demonstrates effective waking trance techniques that combines
hypnotic and operant conditioning techniques. As you read and reread this
transcript. You might naturally realize how effective this form of communication
can be, for you... If you’d like to get in touch, I will always appreciate your
interest in my work. I wish you good trancing. nvgtr@pm.me and www.nvgtr.ml
The more clear examples the subject receives the more readily they will master
the behavioral and attentional tasks you are training them on. Remember the
subject is not just learning proper behavior from you they are learning the
attitudes, thoughts, and context that this behavior fits in.
Think about that last sentence and apply it to something you love or feel strongly
about. For example let’s use a subject serving you dinner. The scene begins with
you coming into the dining room and sitting at the table. The sub stands from a
kneeling position and moves into the kitchen. She walks back to the table with a
plate of rice, green beans, and a plate with three large pieces of chicken putting it
to one side of you. The sub asks if you approve and then inquires how hungry
you are. You tell her very hungry and she puts the food on your plate in front of
you. Then she moves behind you to your right. As you read that description can
you get a better idea of behaviors you would want and the attitude you would set
as the standard here? The person responsible for this behavior is the Dom. When
providing feedback begin having the sub focus on improving two or three things.
Share what she did well and then focusing on how the sub can improve those two
or three elements. Go over the standards of mastery for serving food, delivering
452
the food, and the attitude that demonstrates perfection until they can be delivered
automatically back to you from memory. These standards often become part of a
service manual for a House.
Unfortunately, subs sometimes receive ineffective feedback from their Masters.
Ineffective communication creates a problem today that will be carried forward
into the future. The reasons stated for not delivering effective feedback are not
original or helping anyone. Some Masters are reluctant to provide negative
information that they feel may hurt subs self-esteem or negatively impact their
motivation. This is a newbie mistake. This sub is kneeling before you for your
direction, pleasure, and experience. The absence of consistent and clear feedback
can be detrimental to a sub because you are not doing what you said you would
do for them. Our goal should always be to reduce ineffective feedback and
miscommunication. Not giving consistent and clear feedback often causes greater
amounts of frustration and disappointment, and mistakes will begin to bleed into
the dynmic of the relationship.
Even with a healthy and good relationship that are instances of frustration, hurt,
and disappointment which must be overcome for love and the relationship to
endure. It’s essential that we learn that love, belonging, and our relationships
teach a liberation from societal expectations and shame. So, let go of the delusion
of being perfect, and enjoy developing the spirit and expression that is you. We
determine who we are by where we put our attention, focus, and energy.
Everything about me, or this book may be forgotten, but I believe you’ll
remember how I made you feel. Sometimes those feelings will lead you back
here to what I share. You may just open the book and flip through it. There’s an
energy drawing you forward. Being a Hypno Dom, MC, or one of The
Enshrouded is not a warm and fuzzy practice, except when your experience is
warm and fuzzy. After some time, we turn our awareness inside towards
becoming one with ourselves. We all must learn that when our body says
something, listen to it. When our mind is burnt out, respect that. We can either
work with or against ourselves. We are all balancing the needs of the path with
our experience.
Being a Hypno Dom is a discipline designed to help practitioners realize their
authentic nature and harmony within all things. This realization may be confused
453
with a state of mind. It may be idealized as enlightenment, persuasive control, or
disillusion. This discipline is a personal art that may be seen as a great spiritual
and experiential goal, but for me, it’s a way to live. It may be a confirmation of
something you’ve always known was different about you. It may feel good and it
may feel like something needs to change. This art is one of attunement and
influence of which we use to better ourselves and the world. What does this mean
to you?
In the absence of clear effective feedback, a sub is left largely to their own
resources, so the corrective strategies they invent as they attempt to learn are
often faulty. The result becomes that the sub has been practicing incorrect
behaviors. It doesn’t matter if the standards are written down because they will
condition themselves to behave in relation to your feedback. If the sub is learning
incorrectly it is a reflection on your feedback and direction because they are
learning what pleases you. It takes energy, attention, and commitment to develop
together. This has been the formula for training, conditioning, and mastery before
the written word.
I’ve met a Pro-Domme who thought giving a sub a written book of rules to read
each morning and a grade of their performance each night was enough. It’s really
not. Think back to when you were in school and the grades you received on
papers you turned in. How much of the grade, not feedback in red, just the letter
grade, made a difference to you? Grades by themselves provide zero information
about the specific strategies’ students were using that were effective or
ineffective. Grades tend to be interpreted by students not from the perspective of
mastery of the content, but rather in terms of social ranking and self-worth. There
needs to be an awareness of why that grade matters to make a difference, and
with little or vague feedback a letter grade is like saying try harder.
What if you want to use the crop to make a slapping noise like a clicker for
behavior modification training? Communicating what you’re looking for is as
important as communicating what you want when you have someone ready and
willing to do it. Too many get stuck or fumble with the question of what’s
expected of someone who is yours. This question is all about what you enjoy.
Having good inviting descriptions that allow you to invite the prospective person
into that role is your responsibility. You need to approach with the right energy
454
and get into the best cognitive space to meet the sub where she is. This is a
consensual and co-creative experience that starts to develop at the point where
everyone agrees to their role. Don’t be afraid to ask the sub how they could
imagine developing themselves and their role within your service. Talking about
this role brings together the interpretations of the role and establishes it as more
real, more possible.
I’ve been told by some Masters they didn’t provide feedback to a sub because the
information would be too specific for them. In some circumstances that is how
some people operate. Sometimes this has to do with control. If you want the sub
to perform in a certain way it is your responsibility to break that information
down for them even if you leave out specifics that you are working through.
Often the real problem for those Masters is they don’t want to share the specifics
and considerations being made. I once had a woman come to me and ask me to
train her to improve her caning skills. She did not like using the cane on her
partner and wanted to learn how to hit, and where, for the optimal amount of
time. She wanted a set canning routine so she could quickly transition to
something else while keeping her sub happy.
I was uneasy about proceeding with this woman. The training she was asking for
would allow her to go through the motions so she would appear skilled, but
unless she actively engaged with the training and the subject, she would not have
the awareness to spot potential problems. Any drilled technique can make a
person seem knowledgeable as long as they do not deviate from this routine, but
this squeamish interest left out the desire to learn the tool itself. She didn’t care
about learning the cane as a tool, even after explaining the material of cane is
responsible for the types of sensations she would be imparting to her sub. She
just wanted a set routine to use. I couldn’t do it. I told her that I wouldn’t train
her because it might cause more harm than good. If I did train her this woman
would have never been able to use anything but this one medium bamboo cane. It
would only be a matter of time before she had quickly forgotten why this was
necessary. She had no idea that the bamboo would eventually need care and
maintenance to ensure she wouldn’t be jabbing splinters into her sub.
The large disconnect here between enjoyment, interest, and recklessness had
potential to cause harm and represented safety issues. As you improve, keep this
455
example in mind because others will ask you to train them and advise them.
Would you want your name or reputation attached to a person with these
attitudes and ideas? I directed her to training on YouTube to swat at someone in a
standardized way, and these videos included safety, aftercare, and maintenance.
This Mistress had to agree that learning to simply swat at her partner with the
intent of delivering just enough pain to move on would not be pleasurable for
either of them for long. She would not be dissuaded and I hope it all worked out
well. There were no great sex classes offered to us in high school to prepare us
for adulting. No friendship classes to encourage us to create and maintain healthy
relationships. No classes on how to navigate a bureaucracy, build an
organization, raise money, create a database, buy a house, love a child, spot a
scam, assist someone with suicidal thoughts, spot an anxiety attack, or figure out
what was really important for you in life. Not knowing how to explore these
things in a healthy way is what messes many people up in life.
You’ll find the best training leads us to accomplish things while encouraging our
best self. There’s still hope even if you don’t know algebra, or haven’t read
classic literature. A lot of our training comes to focus on the phases of transition
and contrasting the successful connection between being states and
circumstances in our life. Teaching anyone to live well and follow their dreams
as part of a service-oriented relationship cannot just be about good feelings.
There must be mutual commitment and a focus on how they fit. We cannot only
work towards these goals when things are going right, because they will still be
there when life seems almost impossible to keep going. Be willing to walk alone
to accomplish them. Many who start with you won’t finish. My commitment,
must be your commitment, just as each life is it's own.
Some BDSM activities are undeniably violent, and are about giving pain and
humiliation to a partner. It can be strange to discover that some people enjoy a
little or a lot of that. What might seem like violence is actually more about
sensation and sometimes intense sensation is desirable. A lot of what seems like
humiliation to one person is what allows another to experience being vulnerable,
and freed from accepted expectations to conform, or be in control. Not every
person involved in a BDSM lifestyle is interested in impact play, and it might
seem violent to you, and them when they see it. That’s normal and fine. So is
boxing, wrestling, martial arts, and all terrain marathon races. They all have
456
intense expectations associated with them. This stigmatization of one and not the
other doesn’t make sense. I have seen self-described ladies’ men have scratches
down their backs and neck from supposedly vanilla sex. Being mauled by cougar
claws in missionary isn’t my kink, and that’s okay. Please do not encourage or
partake in kink shaming.
Another reason Masters might state they don’t provide feedback to a sub is they
feel they don’t have time to provide the feedback necessary. We live in a world
where many people would rather pay with money instead of their time, energy.
and attention. Everyone has some time constraints, and one of the most attractive
elements of this lifestyle is the time and connection that we reserve to focus on
each other. Participating in BDSM alone, includes opportunities for sensation
play, and adding bondage with the restriction of movement has the potential to
put someone in a state of mindfulness and flow. These scenes can become
enlightenment experiences and they are often described by subs as being difficult
to achieve through other means. If you are reading this and doubting please
search for sensory deprivation tank experiences. Sometimes what makes a new
scene a wonderful adventure is simply having an energizing conversation. It
allows multiple perspectives to be brought in and built upon. Don’t let time
constraints hold you back from sharing. Plan for them thinking about Mr. Rogers.
Mr. Rogers could have lifted Mjölnir, but instead would rather help you do it.
These enlightenment experiences can be intensified with hypnosis and natural
trance in ways that are only limited by your imagination.
The knowledge needed to live this way cannot come from reading alone. There
will be a significant amount of time spent doing these activities needed to
achieve mastery. You’ll develop a measured harmony with this art when what
you want sounds good to you in all states of mind... and works! It doesn't have to
work for everybody. Just you, because this is your life. No one else can live it for
you, but you will be spending a significant amount of your time, energy, and
attention communicating your path to others. Practicing these skills and
participating in related activities is how a Master’s education maximizes ecstasy
and minimizes risk in the adventures you’ll be imparting to your partner(s). Once
you understand it's all about creating movement in the mind the options are
limitless. As you start putting one thought in front of the other, you’ll discover all
knowledge is not equal. I'm constantly needing to manage what information I
457
chew on instead of just collecting it in piles, and allowing information overload
to exhaust me. Your journey does not need to be exclusively along my path, but
while you’re here let’s walk a bit together. The enlightenment experiences of a
Hypno Dom may lead you to walk amongst the Enshrouded. My slave just knelt
in front of me and politely reminded me that it’s time to leash her to bed. I'll be
right back.
Establish your Criteria for Mastery
I exhaled loudly, but it seems this chapter was unaffected and did not write itself.
Strange. I’m often told that sighs matter. That’s why they’ve come back to me.
Hmm… As you’ve made your way through this book you’ve encountered many
of the standards and expectations I have for learning this material, practicing this
body of knowledge, and training those who wish to belong to us. This chapter
will briefly explore general standards and mastery criteria that may be useful to
you as you begin your life as a Hypno Dom. These are the immediate elements
that you may use to trigger, transition, or cue a sub that they are actively entering
a state of submission, and are no longer in their social sphere. The activities you
engage with will start building out of these primary rule sets. Let’s begin with an
exercise.
How do you like it exercise?!!
1. Describe step by step how to make your favorite sandwich in your
kitchen.
2. When finished go through your instructions to star and put a small
number by each of the critical elements in that step by step description.
3. Now go back to each one of those critical points and describe what’s
important to you about that.
This exercise will have you deconstructing and reconstructing your tasks so that
you can train another person to complete them down to the last detail. Have you
heard the expression think outside the box? Most have, but have you ever
considered where the box comes from? Every belief comes with inherent
limitations, associations, and advantages. Step three allows you to communicate
458
the most important elements of this task so that your sub can understand the
qualities that you appreciate and are looking for. These steps will assist you in
setting standards for your task and describing the essential qualities of mastery
criteria that are personalized to your liking. Use this same format with other tasks
you want to breakdown. Technical standards and mastery criteria are meant to be
tested. Everyone once in a while a sub will offer something that can improve
upon the experience so once they have your process down invite them to offer
feedback.
Next, let’s look at some basic standards of behavior and its criteria that I use.
When I put you on your knees you may not move or stand without
permission.
The criteria here is being able to consistently obey and this is demonstrated by
not moving or standing without my order to do so. This would be easy to
remember if it were the only standard you had for a person, but it will not be. It is
likely you will have your sub learn more than one posture to kneel in and wait.
You may begin having the sub kneel and wait for you by the front door for when
you return home, kneeling on a stool signaling she is ready for inspection after a
fresh shave and bath, and kneeling by your feet when she is ready for a scheduled
scene. Kneeling and waiting in a posed position is a command that can be given
anytime and anywhere.
When I put you on all fours you will stay, but you may sit, or lay as any pet
would. You will not stand without permission.
The criteria for being on all fours and crawling begins to get more complicated as
options are linked to circumstances. Testing for understanding and obedience
could be used by simply placing an item that is desired just out of reach. One test
might be taking your sub for a crawling walk to the fridge and have them bring
back a water bottle to the mat. Simply put the bottle on the floor and say let’s go.
Allow them to figure out how to carry it and be ready to praise or correct them if
need be. It may be in her mouth, in an outstretched hand as she crawls, or she
could push it with her nose. As long as she does not get onto her two feet without
permission she is complying with her command. Measuring compliance with this
is as simple as checking off a yes or no, but as you continue to test her this will
459
get more challenging. You will end up creating some criteria that are intended to
operate through every standard the longer you work together. Let’s look at an
example of one of those.
You will never cover your breasts, pussy, or ass from me without
permission.
The criteria for this behavior are easy to observe. Does the sub control her
emotions and self-doubt when naked and inspected? Again, this is easy to
measure with a yes or no and simple to make this test harder. You can have them
imagine or invite someone else is in the room as they are inspected. This extra
pair of eyes and possibly hands is a test that allows a sub to show you just how
well she can obey and how well she represents you. Doing this would have been
discussed and consented to beforehand, as would anything I suggest here.
How do you like it exercise?!!
I would like you to take a moment and think of a few criteria for mastery that you
would train others with. Use the “How do you like it exercise?!!” above and this
time instead of sandwich choose something more complicated. The suggestion I
make is often cleaning the living or TV room. These rooms are filled with
personal preferences for people and most people often like things done a certain
way.
When finished see if you can add in any elements of service displays into your
directions. For example, describe how the sub may proceed if you or another
Domly person is in the room with you. If you can’t think of any use the examples
of standards of behavior for a sub above in your description. I’ll wait here…
Hopefully, you took the time to write out and explore a progressive set of
mastery criteria for guiding the sub while having some interactions with them. In
my last book, I talked about different scenarios that you can use to be
competitive with your mastery criteria by measuring and comparing them to
others. Let’s look at a few activities where measurement is used to demonstrate
success and compete against others using the same criteria. It’s all fun and games
until sassiness goes awry.
460
You will be able to deep throat a cock or dildo enthusiastically that is at least
7 inches.
It’s very likely you will have many more preferences around having your cock
sucked than just this one. This criterion will begin having you think of them and
designing oral training to your liking. Oral training is a complete category with
many techniques to be learned beyond the basic lick, pump, and swallow. Each
of those elements will have a standard of seven inches as part of the behavioral
appraisal. Why did I pick a cock or a dildo that is seven inches? Well, my cock is
about seven inches and I have had women gag on me. I will train that gag reflex
with my cock and a dildo that is my size. If they are incredible at deep throating
than I may go larger but I will prefer to focus on technique and emotive
responsiveness for a blow job over swallowing larger cocks. I just want to be
worshipped. The sub must tend to my cock and body like a penitent at the altar. I
want to be able to feel her devotion in every touch, grunt, and breath. This is just
my preference. I recommend you condition for responsive enthusiasm and
linking that pleasure to her own desire.
Remember that you will be going over these mastery criteria constantly with the
sub(s) and in a variety of situations. The goal is for these standards to become
conditioned protocols that occur automatically on command from you or from a
cue in the environment. Testing and training with your mastery criteria will
ensure you both will be able to recite them without reading a piece of paper every
morning. These behaviors are intended to become part of your routine of
conditioning mastery and eventually, they will fade into the background of your
interactions. People vary in their degree of adaptability and learning, but the
range of that variety will need a baseline. That baseline is discovered from
working with you and allows you the opportunity for instant assessment of ability
while you test for the desired aptitude. Drilling on these standards through a
variety of contexts allows you to begin the larger process of state proofing with
the sub.
State proofing is the process of conditioning a person to be resistant to anything
that would distract or take them out of a desired focused state. It doesn’t matter if
the desired state is fixated insistent arousal, hypnotic trance, or a resourceful state
that encourages a mindful flow for work. State proofing is used to strengthen
461
concentration, train focus for the important details, and establish a reference
point mentally, physically, and emotionally with that established state. In
everything that we do as human beings, there is sensory overlap with our
cognitive and sensory perceptions of the world. The significant details of the
activities have been intensified so that they have become our central focus
despite everything else attempting to distract and interrupt us. That’s the goal of
state proofing after all. Stay in the state no matter what.
Try taking a sub to a café and sit in the corner. Point to the ground and give her
the command to kneel with her eyes meeting yours. Give her a few seconds like
that and release her. This is a test for a sub to overcome fear, social anxiety, and
maintaining that state as she knows others may watch her do this. I did this with a
sub who I trained on the weekends and when I released her from the kneeling
pose, she glowed. She confessed that she was so utterly turned on by how
immediately her body obeyed and how her training took over. She confessed that
she could have orgasmed if I even hinted it would be allowed. Years later this
sub told me that simple yet semipublic act was something she thought of while
masturbating still. Consistent conditioning establishes a mastery mindset that can
truly make all the difference in our lives.
I will often use journaling to learn about deeper thoughts, reactions, and where a
sub may need additional help. Journals also assist you in appreciating the
progress a sub is making and where they are at once given a task. The following
is a snippet of a journal entry from a switch I had taken on and this piece is dated
at the two-week mark. I had worked with her several times in the capacity of a
slave, and I wanted her to begin exercising two of the other girls she had
expressed attraction to in front of me. All of the women served me as a slave
either part-time or periodically. I had already talked with each of them and they
knew there was the potential of being exercised by a female as well as myself. I
informed the sub that she would be trained to be an alpha and each slave that
accepted her as their trainer would arrive tonight. I told her that when the night
was over her task was to journal on this night and send it to me. She agreed and
thanked me as I put her on all fours.
One by one each slave arrived at the appointed time to my house. I like to
schedule arrival times for events that have surprise elements like this to have 15
462
to twenty minutes between person. One by one they would strip, kneel, and are
offered the chance to communicate with me about anything they want me to
know before asking for my command. I tell them that there’s an alpha at my feet
who will be exercising them with me and I may choose more than one. They are
not allowed to ask who that trainer may be right now as there will be many
present for this event. If they agree they should get ready and kneel on their spot.
One by one they arrive. Each time the instructions for the night is given and they
all stay. They all remain silent kneeling on all fours looking at each other until
I’m ready. I enjoy having them wonder who else may exercise them. I can see
that excitement heighten as they each look into each other’s eyes and quickly
look away.
I bring them to another room one by one, blindfold each, and instruct them to
begin 3x1 until I come for them. That 3 is three times they must edge themselves
to orgasm before the fourth instance where they get an orgasm, which is the 1.
Each slave is blindfolded and does not know if anyone else is there as they begin
their routine of 3x1. No one can guess what will happen next, but each sub is
bringing their best performance. Each time that door is opened those gasping,
pumping, moans get more intense. When the switch is brought to the room she
doesn’t know if she will be taking charge tonight or someone besides me will be
exercising her. Before I leave her on her mark, I tell her the possibility is there
she’ll be exercising others tonight so get to know them well. I tuck her into the
blindfolded masturbatory circle until everyone is done. As the room goes quiet, I
tell the slaves to crawl to me.
One by one they knelt around me as I watch them slightly bump into each other
as they reach for me. Then the first surprise happened. I removed the alpha’s
blindfold and told her to remove the blindfolds of the others when I was done
speaking. I gave her $150 for dinner and drinks. I told her to take the girls out
and their submission time was 10 PM to be back here. I sent them all out to
dinner to talk. Later I would have each one of them journal on this experience.
The following is a piece of the switch’s journal who believed she was very
confident in her ability to take charge and run the House for me. This entry is
very much about learning what she knows and does not know. This experience
got her interacting with the others, all their information, and thinking about the
463
set protocols, and mastery criteria immediately. I still smile reading her responses
today. Enjoy!
“At one point, **** listed the toys out of her sex bag that she plans on presenting
to the Domme or Alpha tonight. She mentioned that Sir gave them to her to
exercise her pussy muscles a while back. **** starts asking her about each one
and they are comparing toys and what they do. The conversational went like
this… A dual strap-on with a 7inch attachment and vibe rings (omg. . . A what?)
Two sets of spreader bars (. . . ok. . . I know what that is but haven’t used them
on anyone yet.)
An iron yoke (… I think I blinked and smiled. I was afraid to admit I didn’t know
what that was. I figured if I listened, they would just describe it anyway.)
Blackout hoods some with the mouth holes only and two with only nasal holes (I
know what they are used for but, ummm. Going to need help and training Sir.)
Parachutes with weight (… A what now? Sir, are you fucking them in freefall?)
{This is usually used on a male’s scrotum but I like to use it to bind the Hitachi
wand to the slave. The weights are sometimes attached to nipple and clit piercing
on this one woman. I didn’t want the reader to get lost in the weeds here too.}
Jeweled butt plugs (Great! I can use these!!!)
Two leather suspension collars and chain (So not exactly freefall but suspension.
Got it!)
An old fashion chastity belt (chain mail type) (Chainmail? Am I going to have
scenes like her castle’s under siege? Going to need guidance here!)
Lube (Okay, that’s a duh! I’m thinking deep fisting and got this Sir!)
Two large suction cup dildos (very large) (I’m lost again. Hmm. How large is
very large? **** is showing similar products on her phone to **** and I’m
writing this shit down!)
464
We have multiple sets of leather ankle cuffs and arm cuffs (Great, we are back to
familiar territory! And I am being encouraged to add items to my wishlist holy
fuck!)
Rope (Well, I do enjoy pics of tied up women and men. It's very artistic, but I’d
be winging the knots if I did this right now. Need training please Sir!)
A leather paddle called the Assassinator? (Ummm. . . I’m going to have to get
used to using that pretty quickly huh…)
**** called her black sex toy bag Santa’s sack! I’m listening to them talk about
their sex drive and I’m thinking we have to get back early! They are running on
fucking batteries or something. All of it was making me anxious, excited, and
wet. Everyone said they were going to be soaking by the time they got back.”
The switch’s journal described her thoughts on the car ride back to the house.
“I’m sitting in the backseat while **** drives and I’m feeling myself get quiet. I
have never heard of most of the items that were described tonight. I am not
feeling as confident as I was earlier, but I know Sir would not give me this task if
he didn’t believe I could do it. Taking a deep breath. I added items to Amazon’s
Wishlist that I need training and guidance on. I don’t think this night out is by
accident. I am being forced to think things through rather than just mindlessly
going for it. This just makes me trust Sir all the more. So now when I waver or
hesitate, I will go to Sir, I will express my doubts (usually self-doubts) and I will
take the reassurance He offers me. I thought I had a high sex drive but now I’m
not sure. I’m heading back to Sir and I’m going to find out. I’m trembling and we
haven’t even had sex yet!! Sir, I will believe you when you tell me I am doing
well. I will strive to do better, because I did not know what I did not know.
Tonight, I am going to focus my fear of failing Sir into a plan to conquer my
fears. These are only sex toys. We are for enjoyment. I know I can make these
slaves cum hard. I will breathe, obey, trust, and cum for you Sir! I’m yours! I am
nervously giddy not knowing how the fuck I got here to you. I know I’m going to
remember this…. I was determined when I got out of the car, I was going to be
present. I was fucking soaking to the seat and so was everyone else. Everyone
was giggly and happy. It was like we were high on sex that we didn’t have yet
465
and no one had more than one drink hours ago. I’m feeling that rush just telling
you this Sir. There are so many things I loved about this!! When that car stopped
in your driveway my heart skipped a beat…”
Feedback on the knowledge and experience a person thinks they have can be
delivered in many different ways. Some people involved in this lifestyle are
collectors and their goodie bags are filled with things that make them go
“Mmmmmm.” Even with the 95% of the same rules between slaves, there are
differences in preferences and thus experiences. Later that night the alpha/switch
did get some time exercising the girls and they got a chance to show her how
some of those toys worked. The alpha ended up getting topped herself by one or
more of the girls as she discovered new experiences. I had the switch state if she
had experience with a toy aloud before the two slaves demonstrated its use on
each other and then on her. All in all, it was a fun night. To own someone is to
show to them their beauty, their worth, and their significance in service.
Not everyone is